Upcoming
Events
Do you
want to list an event on Onzuka.com?
Contact
Us
(All events on Oahu, unless noted)
2011
November
Aloha State Championship of BJJ
(BJJ & Sub Grappling)
(Kaiser H.S. Gym)
August
State of Hawaii Championship of BJJ
(BJJ & Sub Grappling)
(Kaiser H.S. Gym)
7/1/11
Man Up & Stand Up
(Kickboxing)
Waipahu Filcom Center, Waipahu)
5/28/11
Man Up & Stand Up
(Kickboxing)
Waipahu Filcom Center, Waipahu)
4/23/11
Man Up & Stand Up
(Kickboxing)
Waipahu Filcom Center, Waipahu)
March
Hawaiian Championship of BJJ
(BJJ & Sub Grappling)
(Kaiser H.S. Gym)
3/24-27/11
Pan American Jiu-Jitsu Championships
(BJJ)
University of California Irvine, Irvine, CA)
3/12/11
X-1: Dylan Clay vs Niko Vitale
(MMA)
(Blaisdell Arena)
Mad Skills
(Kickboxing, Triple Threat)
Waipahu Filcom Center, Waipahu)
3/11/11
Chozun 1
(Kickboxing)
(Aloha Tower)
2/20/11
Pan
Kids Jiu-Jitsu Championships
(BJJ)
(California State University, Carson, CA )
2/19/11
Man Up & Stand Up
(Kickboxing)
Waipahu Filcom Center, Waipahu)
2/5/11
Garden Island Cage Match 10: Mayhem at the Mansion 2
(MMA, Kickboxing)
(Kilohana Carriage House, Lihue, Kauai)
1/29/11
Man Up & Stand Up
(Kickboxing)
Waipahu Filcom Center, Waipahu)
1/8/11
Hawaii Toughman
(Kickboxing)
(Hilo Civic Center, Hilo)
2010
12/17/10
Destiny & 808 Battleground
All or Nothing - Champion vs Champion
(MMA)
(Dole Cannery Ballroom)
12/3/10
Mad Skills
(Kickboxing)
(Filcom Center, Waipahu)
11/27/10
Aloha
State BJJ Championships: Final Conflict
(BJJ & Sub Grappling)
(Kaiser H.S. Gym)
11/6/10
X-1 Island Pride
(MMA)
(Blaisdell Arena)
Man Up & Stand Up Kickboxing Championship
(Kickboxing)
(Filcom Center, Waipahu)
10/30/10
6th Annual Clinton A.J. Shelton Memorial Match Event
(Boxing)
(Palolo District Park Gym, Honolulu)
10/29/10
808Battleground
(MMA)
(Dole Cannery Ballroom, Honolulu)
10/23/10
NAGA
Hawaii
(BJJ & Sub Grappling)
(Radford H.S. Gym)
10/15-17/10
ETERNAL SUBMISSIONS: GI/NO-GI tournament
(BJJ & Sub Grappling)
(Kauai Beach Resort, Kauai)
10/16/10
DESTINY: Undisputed
Beyer vs Manners II
(MMA)
(Waipahu Filcom Center, Waipahu)
Just Scrap
(MMA)
(Hilo Civic Auditorium, Hilo)
10/2/10
Mad Skills
(Kickboxing)
(Filcom Center, Waipahu)
9/11/10
X-1: Heroes
(MMA, Kickboxing)
(Blaisdell Arena)
9/10/10
Man Up & Stand Up
(Kickboxing)
(Filcom Center, Waipahu)
9/4/10
DESTINY:New Era
(MMA, Kickboxing)
(Waipahu Filcom Center, Waipahu)
8/28/10
Big
Island Open
(BJJ)
(Hilo Armory, Hilo)
8/14/10
Hawaiian
Open Championships of BJJ
(BJJ & No Gi)
(Kaiser H.S. Gym)
USA Amateur Boxing
(Boxing)
(Lihue Convention Hall, Lihue, Kauai)
8/13/10
Battleground Challenge 2
(MMA)
(Dole Cannery Ballroom)
8/7/10
Just Scrap
(MMA)
(Hilo Civic Auditorium, Hilo)
8/6/10
Mad Skills
(Triple Threat/Kickboxing)
(Waipahu Filcom Center)
7/24/10
The Quest for Champions 2010 Martial Arts Tournament
(Sport-Pankration, Submission Grappling & Continuous Sparring)
(St. Louis High School Gym)
7/17/10
Maui Jiu-Jitsu Open
(BJJ & No Gi)
(Maui War Memorial, Wailuku, Maui)
Mad Skillz
(Kickboxing, Triple Threat)
(99 Market Shopping Center, Mapunapuna)
7/9/10
Man Up & Stand Up
(Kickboxing)
(Filcom Center, Waipahu)
7/3/10
Amateur Boxing
(Boxing)
(Palolo District Park Gym)
6/26/10
Kauai Cage Match 9
(MMA)
(Kilohana, Gaylords Mansion, Kauai)
6/25-26/10
50th
State BJJ Championships
(BJJ)
(50th State Fair,
Aloha Stadium)
6/24/10
Quest for Champions
(Kumite/Grappling)
(St. Louis High School Gym)
6/19/10
Just Scrap
(MMA)
(Hilo Civic Center, Hilo)
6/18-19/10
Select
Combat
(Triple Threat)
(50th State Fair,
Aloha Stadium)
6/12/10
Destiny: Fury
(MMA)
(Blaisdell Center)
6/11-13/10
MMA Hawaii Expo
(Blaisdell Ballroom)
6/11-12/10
3rd
Annual Pacific Submission Championships
(BJJ & Submission Grappling)
(Blaisdell Exhibition Hall)
6/11/10
Legacy Combat MMA
(MMA)
(Blaisdell Exhibition Hall)
6/4/10
X-1:
Nations Collide
(MMA)
(Blaisdell Arena)
6/3-6/10
World
Jiu-Jitsu Championships
(BJJ)
(The Pyramid, University of California at Long Beach, Long Beach,
CA)
5/22/10
Destiny
(MMA)
(Waiphau Filcom Center)
5/15/10
Scrappla Fest 2
Relson Gracie KTI Jiu-Jitsu Tournament
(BJJ & Sub Grappling)
(Island School, Kauai)
X-1 World Events
(MMA)
(Waipahu HS Gym)
Mad Skills
(Kickboxing)
(Waipahu Filcom Center)
Boxing Event
(Boxing)
(Evolution Training Center, Waipio Industrial Court #110)
5/1/10
Galaxy
MMA: Worlds Collide
(MMA)
(Blaisdell Arena)
4/28/10
Chris Smith BJJ Tournament
(BJJ)
(Hilo)
4/23/10
2010 Hawaii State/Regional Junior Olympic Boxing Championships
(Boxing)
(Palolo District Park Gym)
4/17/10
Hawaiian
Championships of BJJ
(BJJ & Sub Grappling)
(Kaiser
H.S. Gym)
Strikeforce:
Shields vs Henderson
(CBS)
4/16/10
808 Battleground
(Waipahu Filcom Center)
4/8-11/10
Pan
Jiu-Jitsu Championships
(BJJ)
(University California Irvine, Irvine, CA)
4/3/10
Man Up & Stand Up
(Kickboxing)
(Waipahu Filcom Center)
Amateur Boxing Smoker
(Boxing)
(Palolo District Park Gym)
3/27/10
DESTINY: No Ka Oi 2: Oahu vs Maui
(MMA)
(Maui War Memorial Gym, Wailuku, Maui)
3/20/10
X-1: Champions 2
(MMA)
(Blaisdell Arena)
3/20/10
Hawaiian Championships of BJJ
(BJJ & Sub Grappling)
(Kaiser H.S. Gym)
3/14/10
Hawaiian Kimono Combat
(BJJ)
(PCHS Gym)
3/10/10
Sera's Kajukenbo Tournament
(Kumite, Katas, Grappling)
(Maui War Memorial Gym, Wailuku, Maui)
3/6/10
Destiny Fast N Furious
(MMA)
(Level 4 RHSC)
2/19/10
808 Battleground
(MMA)
(Filcom, Waipahu)
2/6/10
UpNUp 6: Unstoppable
(MMA)
(Maui War Memorial Gym, Wailuku, Maui)
2/5/10
Man Up & Stand Up
(Kickboxing)
(Waipahu Filcom)
1/30/10
Destiny
(Level 4,
Royal HI Shopping Ctr)
(MMA)
Quest for Champions
(Pankration/Sub Grappling)
(Kalani HS)
1/23/10
Kauai Knockout Championship Total Domination
(MMA & Kickboxing)
(Kauai War Memorial Convention Center, Lihue, Kauai)
1/17/10
X1: Showdown In Waipahu
(Boxing, Kickboxing, MMA)
(Waipahu H.S. Gym)
|
|
January
2011 News Part 3
|
Casca Grossa Jiu-Jitsu
is now the O2 Martial Arts Academy with 7 days a week training!
We are also offering Kali-Escrima (stick fighting) on Monday
nights with Ian Beltran & Erwin Legaspi.
Kickboxing Tuesday, Wednesday and Thursday with Kaleo Kwan, PJ
Dean, & Chris Slavens!
Kids Classes are also
available!
Click
here for info!
Take classes from
the Onzuka brothers in a family-like environment! |
Onzuka.com
Hawaii Underground Forum is Online!
Chris, Mark,
and I wanted to start an official Onzuka.com forum for a while
now. We were searching for the best forum to go with and hit
a gold mine! We have known Kirik, who heads the largest and most
popular forum on the net, The Underground for years.
He
offered us our own forum within the matrix know as MMA.tv. The
three of us will be the moderators with of course FCTV808 being
the lead since he is on there all day anyway!
We
encourage everyone from Hawaii and our many readers around world
to contribute to the Hawaii Underground.
If you
do not have a login, it's simple and fast to get one.
Click here to set up an account.
Don't worry about using Pidgin English in the posting. After
all it is the Hawaii Underground and what is a Hawaii Underground
without some Aloha and some Pidgin?
To
go directly to the Onzuka.com Hawaii Underground Forum
click here!
|
Want
to Advertise on Onzuka.com?
Click here for pricing and more
information!
Short term and long term advertising available.
More than
1 million hits and counting!
|
O2
Martial Arts Academy
Your Complete Martial Arts School!
Click here for pricing and more
information!
O2 Martial Arts features Relson Gracie Jiu-Jitsu taught by Relson
Gracie Black Belts Chris and Mike Onzuka and Shane Agena as well
as a number of brown and purple belts.
We also offer Boxing and Kickboxing classes with a staff that
is unmatched. Boxing, Kickboxing, and MMA champions Kaleo Kwan
and PJ Dean as well as master boxing instructor Chris Slavens
provide incredibly detailed instruction of the sweet science.
To top it off, Ian Beltran & Erwin Legaspi heads our Kali-Escrima
classes (Filipino Knife & Stickfighting) who were directly
trained under the legendary Snookie Sanchez.
Just a beginner with no background? Perfect! We teach you from
the ground up!
Experienced martial artist that wants to fine tune your skill?
Our school is for you!
If you want to learn martial arts by masters of their trade in
a friendly and family environment, O2 Martial Arts Academy is
the place for you!
|
Want to Contact
Us? Shoot us an email by Clicking Here!
Follow O2 Martial Arts news via Twitter at:
http://www.twitter.com/O2MAA
Is
Herschel Walker the Ambassador MMA Has Been Looking For?
Let’s
not lie to ourselves. Herschel Walker is an excellent salesman.
The man’s marketability is off the charts when it comes
to mixed martial arts, not to mention his universal appeal in
other areas of sports.
The
Heisman Trophy winner is scheduled to make his return to the
Strikeforce cage against Scott Carson on Jan. 29, but prior to
this bout, Walker has made his rounds with the media and participated
in a gaggle of interviews. For some fighters, this is a bit of
a task, but who can blame them? The amount of time it takes to
do all the press going into a fight can be a time consuming experience
that leaves one with little energy to focus on other things…
like a fight, perhaps.
For
Walker, however, it’s all part of the business of selling
a sport that he has grown to love since becoming a part of it
just over one year ago.
Herschel
Walker isn’t trying to sell himself as a legitimate contender
to the heavyweight crown. He knows all too well that he’s
still very ‘green’ in mixed martial arts, and he has
a ton of homework to do before he can challenge any of the top
competitors in the sport. But Walker’s continued support
of MMA has an ability to reach out to people who are not so familiar
with it.
The
majority of contact sports fans know who Herschel Walker is.
If you followed football in the eighties and nineties, Walker
is an athlete you heard about and saw highlights of on ESPN’s
SportsCenter when Chris Berman still had some hair. This reaches
back a generation, so when the 48-year-old Walker celebrates
what he feels is the greatness of MMA, people above the sport’s
18-34 age demographic receive it’s exposure.
Walker
is ready, willing, and able to advertise MMA and put the sport’s
marketing machine on his back. Like countries have ambassadors
when visiting other lands, Walker wants to speak on behalf of
MMA and all of it’s participants. While learning the nuances
of the sport, Walker is willing to take on the responsibility
of showing the world beyond MMA fan-hood that what we have here
is something to thoroughly enjoy.
“I
do want to learn the game,” he told MMAWeekly Radio. “I
want to be a good guy for MMA.”
Walker
has been a martial artist most of his life, so he understands
the discipline and respect that goes into training and competing.
The time he has spent at American Kickboxing Academy has simply
reaffirmed his thought process, building on the honor he already
has for the sport’s athletes.
“I
respect these guys,” he said. “I honor these guys a
great deal. I think some of these guys are the best athletes
in the world.”
Walker’s
versatility is more than enough to create a buzz among the mainstream
sports fans. The fact that he has competed in not only the NFL,
but also in the Olympics, gives him an edge when speaking about
MMA and comparing it to other methods of sport. Perhaps seeing
an athlete who has performed at the highest level in other big
picture competitions provides the fans of those sports a chance
to understand MMA and witness what it takes to be a part of it.
Walker feels this to be true and that his resume makes him the
perfect candidate.
“I
think I have the credentials because I competed at almost every
level,” Walker explained. “At the professional level
(in) football, on the Olympic team in track and field, and now,
I’m in MMA.
“I’m
not in here for an ego boost or trying to prove anything to anyone.
That’s one thing that I don’t want to do is make this
sport a joke. This is a legitimate sport and I want to make it
that.”
It’s
the goal of Herschel Walker to bring an understanding of MMA
to the casual sports fan. Some may not understand the purpose
of Walker being a part of what many believe to be a brutal competition,
but he understands that. And perhaps him being a part of it,
then praising it to everyone else that knows who he is, makes
him ideal for the position of ‘MMA spokesperson.’
So
many followers of MMA get frustrated with the fact that many
outside of the sport don’t understand it, then are quick
to judge based on what they hear or see. According to Walker,
getting upset with those people is a waste of energy. Educating
them is a task he is willing to take on.
“You
don’t have to get upset with anyone because they dislike
something,” he said. “I don’t know whether they
dislike it (or) they don’t understand it. And I think that’s
the point.”
The
point, indeed. Getting on a soapbox to lobby for the mainstream
acceptance of mixed martial arts is necessary for the sport’s
continued growth. While MMA has seen it’s share of time
on SportsCenter, a consistent spot on the big stage of exposure
is still a place the sport and all it’s personalities are
working towards. Herschel Walker’s participation has, undoubtedly,
brought that status much closer to becoming a reality.
Through
countless interviews, TV spots, and radio segments, Walker has
used his popularity, charm, and well-spoken character to promote,
not just Strikeforce as a brand, but MMA as a whole. It’s
reasons like this that give the sport a fighting chance at becoming
mainstream.
Maybe,
just maybe, he is the ambassador that mixed martial arts needs.
Source: MMA Weekly
|
UFC
Featherweight Champion Jose Aldo Healthy, Itching to Fight
Like
a wounded animal ready to defend its turf, UFC featherweight
champion Jose Aldo was ready to fight on Jan. 1 regardless of
an injury.
The
highly regarded Brazilian, who most rank among the best pound-for-pound
fighters in the sport, was set to fight at UFC 125 on New Year’s
Day, but a neck injury pushed him off the card.
Aldo
was so ready to fight for the UFC, he was even willing to do
it at well less than 100 percent, but his manager and coaches
stepped in and advised him against it.
“He
wanted to fight injured,” Aldo’s manager, Ed Soares,
said when speaking to MMAWeekly Radio. “Me and his coaches
were like, ‘No, you’re not fighting. You’re not
going to make your UFC debut not being 100-percent.’”
The
hunger to get in the cage and compete is a big part of who Jose
Aldo is. When UFC president Dana White presented him with his
new UFC featherweight title, the smile on Aldo’s face was
ear to ear. He’s proud to be the champion and he’ll
be even prouder when he can defend it.
“He’s
excited to get in there and fight in his first UFC match. That
kid is always ready to fight. He wants to fight all the time.
If he could fight four times a year, he would,” Soares commented.
“He
hasn’t fought since September and he’s just itching
to get in there and fight.”
Aldo’s
first opponent in the UFC was supposed to be Josh Grispi, but
the New England area fighter fell short against Dustin Poirier
on the Jan. 1 card.
Now
Aldo is set to face Canadian striker Mark Hominick at UFC 129
in Hominick’s home country of Canada. He earned the fight
with a shutout performance over George Roop at UFC Fight for
the Troops 2.
With
the health issues solved, Aldo is more ready than ever to defend
his title and do it on UFC turf.
“He’s
back to training and he feels good right now. That little time
off and physical therapy kind of straightened things out,”
Soares said.
“He’ll
be ready.”
The
bout will co-headline the UFC 129 fight card on April 30 at the
Rogers Centre in Toronto.
Source: MMA Weekly
|
Strikeforce:
Diaz vs. Cyborg Quick Results
Strikeforce:
Diaz vs. Cyborg Main Bouts (On Showtime):
-Nick Diaz def. Evangelista “Cyborg” Santos by Submission
(Armbar) at 4:50, R2
-Ronaldo “Jacare” Souza def. Robbie Lawler by Submission
(Rear Naked Choke) at 2:00, R3
-Herschel Walker def. Scott Caron by TKO (Strikes) at 3:13, R1
-Roger Gracie def. Trevor Prangley by Submission (Rear Naked
Choke) at 4:19, R1
Strikeforce:
Diaz vs. Cyborg Preliminary Bouts (Non-Televised):
-Nate Moore def. Nathan Coy by TKO (Strikes) at 0:25, R2
-Isaiah Hill def. Bobby Stack by Submission (Triangle Choke)
at 1:02, R1
-Ron Keslar def. Eric Lawson by Submission (Triangle/Armbar)
at 1:57, R1
-Germaine De Randamie def. Stephanie Webber by KO (Knees) at
4:25, R1
-James Terry def. Lucas Gamaza by TKO (Strikes) at 3:26, R1
-Jenna Castillo def. Charlene Gellner by KO (Knees) at 3:57,
R2
Source: MMA Weekly
|
Rani
Yahya wants “Korean Zombie” after beating Mike Brown
The
Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu black belt Rani Yahya had a great performance
on the last edition of UFC, which happened last Saturday in Texas,
United States. The Brazilian, who was set to fight “Korean
Zombie” Chan Sung Jung, step up to face former WEC champion
Mike Brown and, showing a sick ground game, dominated the bout
and won by points.
While
Rani went to Hawaii to rest along with his family, that watched
closely the fight in Texas, we’ve spoke with the coach Ataíde
Jr., who was more than pleased with his pupil’s performance.
“We have planned to fight the Korean, but the boy did a
pretty good job on that fight. He knew Mike could catch him so
he used his Jiu-Jitsu, which is his origin, and managed to block
him. I thought it was a great fight”, praised.
Holding
a professional record of 22 fights with 26 years old, Rani had
a positive debut on the octagon after being defeated twice in
a row on WEC, and his coach hopes more wins to come. “Rani
is on the right track, he’s a professional. He’s a
UFC fighter, not a Jiu-Jitsu athlete”, said, revealing that
the “Korean Zombie” might be his next opponent. “He
was talking to Joe Silva and I think he’s on the mood for
the Korean”, concluded.
Source: Tatame
|
Reclusive
Lesnar is alive and well
LAS
VEGAS – Brock Lesnar isn’t crazy about spending the
next six weeks in Las Vegas, but on his second day on the job
as a coach on Season 13 of “The Ultimate Fighter,”
he conceded it sure beat being home in Alexandria, Minn., where
temperatures, to be conservative, remained frigid.
“It’s
30 below in Alexandria right now,” Lesnar said Tuesday at
the TUF 13 media day at the UFC Training Center, where it was
a positively balmy 65 degrees. “I’d had enough of it.”
Las
Vegas isn’t Lesnar’s kind of town, and Lesnar isn’t
the type to be away from his family for long stretches, but the
former heavyweight champion said his decision to accept UFC president
Dana White’s offer to coach opposite Junior dos Santos has
a simple explanation.
Asked
how White talked him into accepting the post, Lesnar grinned
wryly and said, “Benjamins.”
When
White first asked, Lesnar’s response was predictable.
“No,”
Lesnar said, pausing for effect before adding, “Like I always
say.”
White,
though, made it worth Lesnar’s while financially and agreed
to rent a house so that Lesnar could bring his wife, Rena, sons
Turk and Duke and stepdaughter Mariah, to Las Vegas with him.
Professionally,
it turned out to be a boon, because he gets to fight dos Santos
in the summer in Vancouver, British Columbia, after the series
airs, for the right to meet heavyweight champion Cain Velasquez
when Velasquez returns to competition after undergoing rotator
cuff surgery.
There
was never any question about Lesnar’s desire to get back
at it, even though the Internet was swirling with rumors saying
he no longer had the heart to fight.
He
dispelled two of the most prevalent rumors on Tuesday. He said
he had no interest in appearing at WrestleMania, a rumor that
was fueled by a staredown with WWE star “The Undertaker,”
only seconds after Lesnar walked out of the cage following his
loss to Velasquez. Lesnar gave Undertaker a dirty look, and Undertaker
said, “Do you want to do this?” That prompted a raft
of speculation that Lesnar was returning to the WWE, where he
had originally become famous.
“That
thing just took on a life of its own,” Lesnar said of the
WrestleMania rumors. “I’m a fighter. There wasn’t
anything there. I never pursued anything, no.”
He
also scoffed at the notion that he was through fighting and didn’t
have the stomach for it any more.
Lesnar
hardly watches any television and is on the Internet even less,
so he wasn’t personally aware of the abundant rumors. But
as he lived his life, he’d hear many stories about what
he was doing from friends, acquaintances and just people who
bumped into him at the gas station.
It
wasn’t much different than what Chicago Bears quarterback
Jay Cutler is going through. The NFC championship game was still
being played when the Internet was filled with speculation that
Cutler had quit on his team.
No
one had bothered so much as to ask Cutler and/or the Bears coaches
about the decision to pull him early in the third quarter of
their 21-14 loss to the Green Bay Packers.
Lesnar
faced similar scrutiny after he was dominated by Velasquez.
“When
I go dark, people have to talk about something,” Lesnar
said. “I don’t have any control over that, nor do I
really care. I’m just glad they’re still talking about
me. It’s a funny thing. I go sit in my deer shack or my
fish house and you guys (in the media) still talk about me and
I don’t even have to say a word.”
Lesnar
is a guy who values accountability and, because of the anonymity
that the Internet provides, posters on various forums and messages
boards were free to speculate about his career and his plans
without ever hearing from him.
A
video that showed a reporter interviewing “The Undertaker”
after UFC 121 led to speculation that he wanted to quit fighting
and return to the WWE as a professional wrestler.
It
turns out, none of it is true. He said he never considered going
to the WWE, pointing out, “I’m a fighter.” But
that didn’t have any impact upon the rampant speculation.
“It’s
just the Internet, and it’s because of those things right
there,” Lesnar said, pointing toward a laptop that was placed
in front of him. “People can say anything they want and
not have any credibility or nothing. It’s just the world
we live in. I don’t (hear the talk). I don’t get caught
up in any of those things.
“I
bought a computer because I’m writing a book and I got on
the Internet because it’s easier than sending 400 pages
of faxes back and forth. … I don’t monkey around with
any of that. If I’m going through my outdoors magazine and
I see a product I’m interested in and I want to learn a
little more about it, I go on and read about it. I don’t
surf the web. I don’t look up my name and who’s talking
about me. I can hear about it from my friends who do do that
stuff.”
Lesnar
is eager to fight dos Santos because he knows it will lead to
a title shot. He said he is happy to be able to give back to
the sport and, hopefully, help it by bringing more viewers to
the show.
At
the end of the day, though, it is about regaining the championship
and coaching against dos Santos on TUF provides the most logical
path for him.
“I
have one thing in my mind for this whole thing, which is to help
these kids and to improve their lives,” Lesnar said. “More
importantly, it’s an opportunity for me to get down here
and train and it’s an opportunity for me to get my title
back sooner rather than later. When I beat dos Santos, then I
get a rematch with Velasquez and I get my (expletive) belt back.
That’s the way I’m looking at this.”
Source: Yahoo Sports
|
Chad
Mendes Expects the Best Omigawa Ever, Excited for Debut at UFC
126
If
one were to create a list of the best featherweight prospects
in the world today, it would be hard pressed not to find the
name Chad Mendes on it. As one of the many fighters who will
debut in the Octagon due to the WEC merger, Mendes prepares for
the next chapter of his young career. The decorated collegiate
wrestler will take on surging Top 10 ranked featherweight Michihiro
Omigawa at UFC 126.
“Everything
is great, this camp is going really smooth. I’m feeling
better than ever,” said Mendes. “Being able to train
with all the guys; everyone is healthy. Just getting in there
and working on my stand up a lot; working with Master Tong.”
In
just two years time, Mendes made his way through regional shows
and into the WEC, while maintaining an undefeated record. The
25-year-old fighter continues to improve with every fight. Mendes
is coming off impressive wins over Cub Swanson and Javier Vazquez.
“It’s
just nuts; coming straight out of college and getting into the
fight game. I expected to do well, but I never thought I would
in this short amount of time I’d be fighting in the UFC.
The whole experience has been awesome. I definitely didn’t
expect to be where I am right now, but I’m thankful for
everything,” humbled the Team Alpha Male fighter.
“I
feel like I’m progressing perfectly for me. We did take
it kind of slow in the beginning. It’s awesome to just get
in there and I’m still undefeated. Everything is going as
planned.”
Considered
as one of the best featherweights in the world, Michihiro Omigawa
will be a big step up in competition for Mendes. This will not
be the first time Omigawa has fought in the Octagon though. The
Judo black belt made two previous appearances in the UFC lightweight
division, losing decisions to Matt Wiman and Thiago Tavares.
Omigawa returned to Japan only to suffer a third consecutive
defeat to the “Korean Zombie,” Chan Sung Jung. His
career was on a downward slope until he moved down a weight class
and signed with Sengoku. Omigawa resurrected himself by winning
eight of his next nine fights that included notable wins over
Nam Phan, Marlon Sandro, Hatsu Hioki, and Hiroyuki Takaya.
“Stepping
up in competition and facing Omigawa, for me it’s the perfect
match-up. His style, my style; I think it’s going to be
great for me. His stand-up to me doesn’t seem like the best
stand-up and he’s not super fast. He’s kind of awkward
with it and somewhat effective,” commented Mendes. “I’m
looking for his tendencies. We’re just setting up our game
plan around that stuff.”
Mark
Hominick is expected to face 145-pound UFC kingpin Jose Aldo
at UFC 129. Should Hominick be unsuccessful at lifting the belt
from Aldo, there could title implications coming from Mendes’
upcoming showdown with Omigawa.
“I’m
definitely not looking past Omigawa; he’s a tough opponent.
I would love to get in there and fight (Aldo). I’m at the
point in my career where I feel confident. I’m training
the way I should be. Basically, it’s wherever the UFC wants
to put me, but I personally feel that I’m ready for it.
“I
want my shot, but I’m not getting greedy. My time will come;
when it’s going to happen, it’s going to happen.”
The
featherweight fight between Mendes and Omigawa is scheduled to
air free on SpikeTV leading into the UFC 126 pay-per-view.
“So
many people are going to see that obviously because it’s
free. There are two good match-ups. For me it’s just awesome,”
said Mendes elatedly. “I never expected to be where I’m
at right now this fast. I’m just soaking all of this up;
this is just a great experience and I’ll look back on this
later in life and just love it.”
Competing
in the UFC is a dream for many fighters. Chad Mendes takes the
pressure in stride and plans on propelling himself to the next
level. A win over Michihiro Omigawa could place him in the forefront
of the UFC’s featherweight division.
“I’m
really excited. There are some nerves, but I think that’s
good; that’s healthy for someone that’s competing.
Those nerves keep you alert and focused. This is a great opportunity
for me so I’m not taking him lightly and I’m training
my butt off. I’m expecting to see the best Omigawa there
ever has been and he better expect to see the best Mendes there
ever has been.
“It’s
been a short road, but I have put in so much work. All the hard
work is starting to pay off in my life. I want to thank all my
fans and everybody giving me support. A lot of this is for you
guys.”
Source: MMA Weekly
|
MMA
Top 10 Rankings: Featherweight Shake-Up
The latest MMAWeekly.com World MMA Rankings were released on
Wednesday, January 26. This system ranks the Top 10 MMA fighters
from all across the world in each of the seven most widely accepted
weight classes.
Taken
into consideration are a fighter’s performance in addition
to his win-loss record, head-to-head and common opponents, difficulty
of opponents, and numerous other factors in what is the most
comprehensive rankings system in the sport.
Fighters
who are currently serving drug-related suspensions are not eligible
for Top 10 consideration until they have fought one time after
the completion of their suspension.
Fighters
must also have competed within the past 12 months in order to
be eligible for Top 10 consideration unless they have a bout
scheduled within a reasonable time frame.
Below
are the current MMAWeekly.com World MMA Rankings, which are up-to-date
as of Wednesday, January 26.
HEAVYWEIGHT
DIVISION (over 205 pounds)
1. Cain Velasquez
2. Fabricio Werdum
3. Fedor Emelianenko
4. Brock Lesnar
5. Junior Dos Santos
6. Alistair Overeem
7. Shane Carwin
8. Frank Mir
9. Antonio Rodrigo Nogueira
10. Antonio Silva
LIGHT
HEAVYWEIGHT DIVISION (205-pound limit)
1. Mauricio “Shogun” Rua
2. Rashad Evans
3. Quinton Jackson
4. Lyoto Machida
5. Forrest Griffin
6. Ryan Bader
7. Jon Jones
8. Thiago Silva
9. Antonio Rogerio Nogueira
10. Randy Couture
MIDDLEWEIGHT
DIVISION (185-pound limit)
1. Anderson Silva
2. Yushin Okami
3. Nathan Marquardt
4. Demian Maia
5. Dan Henderson
6. Robbie Lawler
7. Jorge Santiago
8. Ronaldo “Jacare” Souza
9. Michael Bisping
10. Hector Lombard
WELTERWEIGHT
DIVISION (170-pound limit)
1. Georges St-Pierre
2. Jon Fitch
3. Jake Shields
4. Thiago Alves
5. Josh Koscheck
6. Paul Daley
7. Nick Diaz
8. Martin Kampmann
9. Carlos Condit
10. Chris Lytle
LIGHTWEIGHT
DIVISION (160-pound limit)
1. Frankie Edgar
2. Gilbert Melendez
3. Gray Maynard
4. Shinya Aoki
5. Eddie Alvarez
6. Tatsuya Kawajiri
7. Jim Miller
8. Kenny Florian
9. George Sotiropoulos
10. Anthony Pettis
FEATHERWEIGHT
DIVISION (145 pound-limit)
1. Jose Aldo
2. Manny Gamburyan
3. Diego Nunes
4. Chad Mendes
5. Michihiro Omigawa
6. Hatsu Hioki
7. Dustin Poirier
8. Mark Hominick
9. Josh Grispi
10. Hiroyuki Takaya
BANTAMWEIGHT
DIVISION (135 pounds or less)
1. Dominick Cruz
2. Brian Bowles
3. Joseph Benavidez
4. Scott Jorgensen
5. Miguel Torres
6. Urijah Faber
7. Brad Pickett
8. Demetrious Johnson
9. Eddie Wineland
10. Masakatsu Ueda
Source: MMA Weekly
|
Building
a Legend: Hong Kong MMA Hits U.S. PPV
by Chris
Nelson
Days
before their promotion’s pay-per-view debut, Legend Fighting
Championship co-founders Michael Haskamp and Chris Pollak aren’t
forecasting numbers or stressing over buyrate projections.
In
the first place, it’s nearly impossible to gauge the audience
for something that’s never been done before. Moreover, the
Hong Kong-based promoters tell Sherdog.com, they’re simply
happy for the chance to show their wares.
“There’s
never been a pay-per-view coming out of China,” says Pollak.
“We’ve never operated one before and the operators
haven’t taken one before, so really, nobody has a great
benchmark. At this point, we’re just excited to share what’s
happening out here with the U.S. audience.”
What’s
happening out there is the emergence of a high-quality fighting
organization in one of the world’s most speculated regions
for MMA.
Haskamp
and Pollak, longtime friends who met while attending Columbia
Business School in New York City, conceived of Legend over beers
in the spring of 2009. The pair began researching the potential
for running an MMA show in Hong Kong, where Haskamp was raised
and had since returned to.
“The
vision was to do something different,” says Haskamp. “There’s
a lot of MMA promotions and organizations out there, some angling
to be state-specific or even city area-specific. We think that
this part of the world, the Asia-Pacific in general, has a huge
amount of potential for the sport.”
By
January 2010, Pollak had quit his full-time consulting job and
relocated to Hong Kong, and the company staged its first event.
The show -- a “market test” which wasn’t produced
for television -- drew the attention of Kix, a network backed
by Lions Gate Entertainment that had also broadcast programming
from K-1, Strikeforce and Bellator. Legend’s second and
third cards aired on Kix throughout Southeast Asia; in June,
the company signed a deal with Now TV, Hong Kong’s largest
pay-TV provider.
Almost
exactly one year after their debut event, Legend 4 is set to
be broadcast on pay-per-view across the U.S. and Canada this
Friday. Pro fighter Vaughn Anderson and rugby commentator Mike
Rehu will provide the English-language play-by-play.
Australian
Adrian Pang and South Korean Yui Chul Nam earned “Fight
of the Night” honors for their first meeting, a back-and-forth,
three-round thriller which headlined the inaugural Legend show.
However, the match ended in a majority draw, a decision so dissatisfying
that the two men staged an impromptu arm-wrestling rematch on
the ring’s canvas afterward. Now, the fighters get to do
it again, this time with Pang’s Legend FC lightweight title
-- which he earned by defeating Nam’s training partner,
Woo Sung Yu -- on the line.
The
Pang-Nam main event, along with the rest of the Legend 4 bill,
serves as a mini-mission statement of sorts, a handshake to new
viewers unfamiliar with the promotion. Legend’s matchmaking
includes prospects both heralded and unknown, sourced from all
corners of the Asia-Pacific.
“We
spent several weeks when we first started traveling around the
region and watching a few tournaments, and meeting as many fight
teams as we could,” says Haskamp.
The
scouters have quickly become the scouted, however. As the ever-expanding
Ultimate Fighting Championship seeks to make inroads to the Asian
marketplace, regional promotions with high-caliber fighters serve
as an unofficial farm system. One Chinese lightweight, Tie Quan
Zhang, was signed by Zuffa on the heels of a successful Legend
outing, and others could soon follow.
“They’re
always looking at all of the China guys pretty closely,”
says Pollak, who pegs welterweights Jing Liang Li and Wang Sai
as fighters likely on the UFC radar. “Li is, I think, a
little more well-rounded than Wang Sai and is probably the guy
they’re looking at more seriously. But I’d say a huge
number of guys on the card have the potential to catch the UFC’s
eye.”
Legend
isn’t worried about the big show snatching up all of its
best fighters, though.
“With
the UFC having 200-something guys under contract at any given
time, there’s only so many Korean, Chinese and Australian
fighters that are gonna make the cut and be there,” asserts
Haskamp. “There is the ability for us to basically not be
in direct competition with them, for the relationship to be,
in some ways, symbiotic. Guys with a huge amount of potential
take their competition to the next level with us, and if they
have what it takes, then maybe they can graduate on to the UFC.”
Likewise,
the promoters see no downside to local competition. Although
martial arts have existed in the Asia-Pacific region for thousands
of years, MMA is still in its infancy. Legend has taken up the
task of educating the public, cooperating with local Hong Kong
gyms and promoters to show people the sporting side of MMA.
For
Legend, growing the sport involves making medical oversight a
priority. With no local or regional sanctioning body for MMA,
the promotion looked to the requirements of the California and
Nevada State Athletic Commissions when determining its own medical
standards. Fighters are required to submit blood work, EKG results
and a health profile one month before the event, as well as a
CT or MRI scan if they’ve suffered a knockout in the past
12 months. Once competitors arrive in Hong Kong, they must be
cleared to compete by Legend’s staff doctors.
“You
can look at the development of MMA in Hong Kong and in China
as the U.S. in the early or mid-90s, where there was a very limited
understanding of the sport,” says Haskamp. “I think
there were, or there are -- and this is going away over time
-- but there are still some negative misconceptions about the
sport and the people that compete in it.”
To
help combat those misconceptions, Legend has produced videos
and public relations material highlighting sportsmanship in MMA,
explaining how various submissions work, and particularly profiling
those fighters crossing over from sanshou, or sanda, one of China’s
traditional martial arts.
The
approach seems to be working: Legend has seen its attendance
grow with each event, and Legend 4 -- which takes place Thursday
at the AsiaWorld-Expo Center in Hong Kong -- is on pace to draw
a record crowd. Beyond simply pulling fans in the door, though,
Haskamp and Pollak are keen to get spectators truly excited --
something of which they saw a glimpse during Legend 3 last September.
“The
audience really clicked for the first time that night, sometime
around the second or third fight,” says Haskamp, who cites
that instant as his proudest to date as a promoter. “The
Hong Kong audience is somewhat comparable to the Japanese audience.
Even if they really like and appreciate something, they frequently
just stay silent and applaud at the end. But they really got
into it. They really switched on.”
Pollak,
for his part, says his most memorable moment came immediately
after their first event.
“We
had our little celebration with the athletes in this tiny little
backroom of our first venue,” says Pollak. “We handed
out the ‘Fight of the Night’ bonus, the ‘Submission
of the Night’ bonus. Nam had broken his hand. But, for everyone
in that room, I think there was a sense of real achievement and
the beginning of something.”
Source: Sherdog
|
Dana
White Squashes One-Night Tournament Concept
By Ariel
Helwani
Part of what made the UFC successful when it first launched in
1993 was the one-night tournament format.
But
that doesn't mean UFC president Dana White has ever seriously
thought about bringing that concept back, even for one event.
"My
philosophy on that was, this many people want to see a crazy
freak show, that many people want to see a real sport,"
White said at a question-and-answer session prior to the Fight
for the Troops 2 weigh-ins last week. "We believe that's
why the thing has grown as fast as it has and become as big as
it has, because people want to see a real sport. So, no.
"Plus,
we couldn't do that anymore; you could never do a one-night tournament.
And to be honest with you, the one-night tournament thing never
worked; it didn't make sense."
The
UFC's last one-night tournament was UFC 23: Ultimate Japan 2
in 1999, won by Kenichi Yamamoto. The organization has never
held another in the Zuffa era.
Recently,
Shine Fights and Strikeforce have dabbled with the concept, but
neither have committed to it for more than one event.
White
simply doesn't believe the tournament format proves who the top
fighter really is.
"Imagine
going three rounds, two tough guys, and then you gotta get back
in the tournament and fight again another thirty minutes. It's
not fair. It doesn't really determine who the best guy is."
Source: MMA Fighting
|
Scott
Coker on Strikeforce Grand Prix: “Greatest Heavyweight Tournament
in the History of MMA”
by Damon
Martin
The upcoming Strikeforce Heavyweight Grand Prix may end up being
the promotion’s biggest series of events to date. According
to Strikeforce CEO Scott Coker, it is the greatest heavyweight
collection in MMA history.
A
few weeks back, former linear No. 1 heavyweight Fedor Emelianenko
said he believes the upcoming Strikeforce tournament rivals or
surpasses the Pride Fighting Championships tournament he took
part in some years ago.
With
fighters like Emelianenko, Fabricio Werdum, Josh Barnett and
of course Strikeforce heavyweight champion Alistair Overeem all
involved, it’s hard to argue that point.
“Pride
had some amazing shows and they set the benchmark for tournaments.
I know the UFC originally started back in ’93 with the tournament
format, but that was a different era, a different time,”
Coker said recently on MMAWeekly Radio.
“I’m
not the type of guy to sit here and boasting about it, but when
you look at it on paper, I think this is honestly the greatest
heavyweight tournament in the history of mixed martial arts.
I think there’s a good argument about that. That’s
really my position on it.”
The
tournament is stacked with several heavyweights in the Top 10,
along with a few former Top 10 fighters as well.
One
question many fans have asked about is how stacked one side of
the tournament seems to be with Emelianenko, Overeem, and Werdum
all sitting together. Coker believes that side of the tournament
is set up for a couple of reasons.
First,
the fans are guaranteed to see a fight they’ve been asking
for with Overeem vs. Werdum in the first round, and second, the
Strikeforce heavyweight champion flat out asked to face the Brazilian
as soon as he possibly could.
“He
came to me in Japan and said ‘I want fight Fabricio Werdum
and I want to avenge that fight. I want to knock him out,”
Coker said about Overeem.
Of
course on the other side of the tournament discussion are comments
from everyone including fans and media about the set up of the
Grand Prix. From Overeem not defending his title to the right
side of the bracket seemingly lighter on talent, Strikeforce
has taken its fair share of criticism about the mega-tournament
kicking off in February.
Does
Strikeforce receive harsher criticism than the UFC, the biggest
MMA organization in the world? Coker says he doesn’t want
opinions on his promotion to be judged by anything other than
the quality of the fights they’re putting on.
“This
is what I say: Judge us by what’s inside the cage and we
put on some amazing fights, put on some big fights, and I think
the tournament’s going to be unbelievable,” said Coker.
“Why be a critic? Why don’t you just sit back and enjoy
it? Because it’s going to be unbelievable and you get to
watch it on Showtime for free.”
Coker
even talks to his good friends at the American Kickboxing Academy
as they kick around the idea of who would win in a fight between
Strikeforce champion Alistair Overeem and UFC champion Cain Velasquez.
“I
was sitting here with Javier Mendes and Bob Cook going ‘you
know, if Fedor would take Cain and Alistair would take it to
Cain’ and we had this big debate about AKA vs. Strikeforce,”
Coker commented.
Fans
may not get to see those particular match-ups, but they will
see a lot of other great fights at the Strikeforce Heavyweight
Grand Prix kicks off Feb. 12 in New Jersey.
Source: MMA Weekly
|
Amsterdam
Mayor NOT Looking to Ban Martial Arts Events
by Dave
Walsh
A while back, it was reported that Amsterdam's new mayor, Eberhard
van der Laan had been looking to crack down on organized crime,
with a distinct focus on Martial Arts events. He was even quoted
talking about mobsters being "VIPs" at Ultimate Glory
and It's Showtime events. This, to many, set off alarms as there
was talk of outright banning these events to keep criminals out
of the public eye like that, being paraded around as important
figures.
Thankfully
for us, one of the reporters in the Netherlands who posts on
Mixfight.nl scheduled an interview with Mr. van der Laan to discuss
organized crime and Martial Arts. The picture that he paints
is much different than the original article that ran in de Telegraaf
(which has been known to be a "sensationalist" newspaper
at times). This is very important as Tokyo, Japan goes through
a tough time, all eyes are on Amsterdam to be the capitol of
the kickboxing world.
"I
think that there was a big miscommunication. If we can clearly
communicate mutual understanding, and cooperation. " Van
der Laan continued this by explaining that he used to participate
in a lot of sports. He played a lot, and has learned important
things from sports. Things like health, discipline and social
development through meeting people, few things. The one issue
where he is-strongly opposed, is the connection between upper
and lower world that currently takes place in the martial arts
events, and robust studies with cooperation of the police has
shown that this dynamic of criminals mixing with average citizens
indeed takes place at martial arts events. This is the connection
that he wants to remove, and to do this would mean that the enthusiastic
fighters and government must work together.
I implore you to read the full article, which discusses a meeting
that took place between Alistair Overeem, Marloes Coehen and
van der Laan about organized crime and martial arts events. The
mayor describes Ubereem as a "nice and neat guy."
Source: Low Kick
|
UFC
exec: We won't be affected by things that "tainted"
Japanese MMA
The UFC’s entry into Japan will not be affected by any of
the things that have “tainted” some native promotions,
says the company’s Asia executive.
Mark
Fischer, who heads the UFC office in Beijing, China and has the
Far East as his remit, says that the supposed decline of MMA
in Japan is also something that does not unduly worry the UFC.
“I
think the landscape is very good. I think we all know that it
was maybe tainted a little bit by some of the MMA events and
things surrounding them that may have gone on up until now, but
I think it’s critical that people understand that the UFC
is above all that and stands for excellence in the sport,”
he said today.
The
reference was oblique yet obvious: PRIDE FC and the spectacular
downfall it suffered when its strong ties to the Yakuza (Japanese
organised crime) were revealed. Whilst Yakuza operate openly
in Japan, to be associated with them is taboo and socially unacceptable.
Following
the scandal, PRIDE FC’s advertisers, sponsors and financiers
pulled out and put it into terminal decline. The follow-on has
been a similar decline in Japanese MMA as a whole - DREAM and
Sengoku are not doing well and legendary kickboxing organisation
K-1 is apparently also close to meltdown.
Unperturbed
by any of this, Fischer revealed the UFC could stage an event
there as early as late 2011 or in the opening months of 2012,
Fischer said in the meantime the focus is on increasing UFC presence
on the airwaves and in the Japanese online sphere.
“We
want to expand the number of partners we have here. [TV company]
WOWOW has been great, for example,” he said.
“By
expanding the number of partners in media, consumer products
and potentially sponsorships, it will allow us to have that really
big event here and expand even more. I think it’ll be a
virtuous cycle for us, in taking these steps.”
The
UFC today announced a partnership with TV Bank, a division of
Japanese media giant Softbank, that will allow for UFC content
to be streamed to the millions of mobile internet devices current
active in Japan which, along with South Korea, is among the world’s
heaviest users of such technology.
Source: Fighters Only
|
The
Ultimate Fighter 13 Begins Taping, Won’t Include Elimination
Round
by Kris
Karkoski
The Ultimate Fighter 13 begins taping today in Las Vegas with
former heavyweight champ Brock Lesnar and fellow contender Junior
dos Santos featured as coaches of the welterweight cast.
However,
the season won’t include an elimination round and will begin
with 14 castmembers, MMAjunkie reports.
A
“wild card” bout will still be used to give two opening-round
losers a chance to earn a spot in the quarterfinals.
The
Ultimate Fighter 13 debuts on Spike TV on March 30, four days
after UFC Fight Night 24: Ortiz vs. Nogueira, while The Ultimate
Fighter 13 Finale is set for June 4 featuring lightweight contenders
Anthony Pettis vs. Clay Guida.
For
complete coverage of The Ultimate Fighter 13 and the latest UFC
news and UFC rumors stay tuned to MMAFrenzy.com.
Source: MMA Frenzy
|
Mike
Brown Needs Surgery For UFC Fight For The Troops 2 Injury
Mike Brown has been suffering through a rough patch lately.
He
once sat atop the featherweight division, the WEC 145-pound champion.
He lost the belt to Jose Aldo at WEC 44, which was the beginning
of the rough times.
Brown
has lost four out of his last six bouts, including his most recent,
to Rani Yahya, at UFC Fight For The Troops 2 in Fort Hood, Texas.
Not
only did Brown lose the Yahya bout, however, but he also suffered
an injury that will require surgery on Wednesday.
“Thanks
for the continued support. Wanted to let everyone know that I’m
doing fine, but I tore a radial cruciate ligament in my left
hand in the first round of the fight,” he posted on his
official Facebook page on Tuesday night.
“Surgery
tomorrow, a crazy month for sure.”
Source: MMA Weekly
|
Prangley
Plans to Pressure Gracie, Put Fear Into Him
Trevor
Prangley wants to see what happens when Roger Gracie gets hit.
Prangley
knows his opponent Saturday at Strikeforce “Diaz vs. Cyborg”
is one of the greatest jiu-jitsu practitioners in the world.
He also knows Gracie has limited experience with striking.
“Let’s
be honest: I’m not going to try to grapple the guy,”
Prangley said recently during a “Savage Dog Show” interview
on the Sherdog Radio Network. “I’m a pretty proficient
grappler, but I’m nowhere near his class. That’s just
not my way of fighting. I’m going to try to put a little
bit of fear into him. I’ve watched all his fights; he’s
never really been put under a lot of pressure or hit real hard.
I’m going to try to test him and see how he handles that.
He might handle it just fine, but I’m sure we’re going
to find out on the 29th.”
Gracie
has won numerous Brazilian jiu-jitsu world championships as well
as submission wrestling titles. He doesn’t just outpoint
the opposition either. In the 2005 Abu Dhabi Combat Club Submission
Wrestling World Championships, Gracie submitted all eight of
his opponents.
“When
he gets a good position, with his legs and stuff, he cinches
it up and it’s pretty much just a matter of time,”
Prangley said. “If there’s not 20 seconds left in the
round, you’re probably done.”
Gracie
has also submitted all three of his MMA opponents. However, Prangley
has fought literally 10 times as many fights en route to compiling
a respectable 23-6-1 record. He doesn’t have Gracie’s
pedigree, but he does own the experience edge inside the cage.
“He’s
probably not used to taking any kind of damage there,” Prangley
said. “I’m hoping that can throw him off his game a
little bit.”
Although
Prangley has a basic strategy, he said he’s keeping it flexible
according to how Gracie reacts in the cage.
“Obviously
I don’t want to get in a wrestling match with the guy,”
he explained. “I don’t want to get in any scrambles
and stuff like that. If I’m going to look for a takedown,
I want it to be clean and easy. If he’s going to look for
a takedown, I want to make sure that my wrestling defense is
on point.”
Prangley
has been training his wrestling and other skills at American
Kickboxing Academy. Due to the relatively late notice he was
given for the bout, though, he’s only been at AKA since
after Christmas. The limited prep time is nothing new for Prangley,
who’s known for stepping up and accepting challenges.
“I
think that’s what my role has become,” Prangley said.
“I’m like the fill-in guy. ‘If we can’t get
this guy, we’ll call him.’ But like I said, if that’s
the role I have to assume for now, that’s the way it is.
As long as I keep winning these fights, that role will change.
It has to eventually.”
A
win over Gracie could go a long way in improving Prangley’s
standing with Strikeforce. He liked the matchup as soon as he
heard about it.
“It’s
a good fight for me,” he said. “I think it’s a
little bit risky, but [it’s] just like the [Keith] Jardine
fight, which was a little more risk and a little more reward.
For me the name means nothing. I appreciate what [the Gracies]
have done for the sport, but the name doesn’t make the fighter.
But for me to beat a Gracie, it always looks good on your record
and it always looks good for your next fight. I think the reward
on this one might just outweigh the risk.”
Source: Sherdog
|
Don
King: Boxing Could Learn a Lot from the UFC
By Michael David Smith
The UFC overtaking boxing as the No. 1 pay-per-view draw in sports
over the last few years has led to a number of boxing promoters
taking shots at the UFC. But the most famous promoter in boxing
thinks thinks it's time to learn from the UFC.
In
a live chat with FanHouse readers, Don King said that UFC has
been smart about putting good fights on basic cable to attract
fans who will become pay-per-view customers while boxing has
declined on basic cable and completely disappeared from over-the-air
television.
"Unfortunately
the television networks are not broadcasting the fighters and
that has been a major disappointment," King said. "Dana
White and Lorenzo Fertitta have done a great job with the UFC
and people like what they do."
King
also said the UFC has developed a fan base of people who feel
like they're a part of if it, while too many boxing fans have
become turned off by the perception that the best fights just
won't get made.
"I
think the UFC has done magnificent because they bring people
together," King said. "That's what I am really very
appreciative of. I think they can complement boxing. I have no
problem with them. The more the merrier."
King
also said he doesn't think there's any reason not to enjoy both
boxing and mixed martial arts, and he said he disagrees with
those who think the growth of the UFC is a threat to the future
of boxing.
"Both
sports go together -- no reason not to be a fan of both sports,"
King said. Bringing people together is what it's all about. I'm
a promoter of the people, for the people and by the people. Boxing
will be here yesterday today and tomorrow."
Source: MMA Fighting
|
Where
does Strikeforce fit into Showtime’s plans now?
By Zach
Arnold
Easily
the combat sports article of the year so far (of which I’ve
read), Thomas Hauser at Maxboxing talks about how HBO lost Manny
Pacquiao. What’s interesting about this article, to me anyways,
is that Showtime will now have to put out a significant amount
of money to pay for a new wave of boxing programming. Where does
this put Strikeforce? Given that there doesn’t seem to be
much of a crossover between boxing fans and MMA fans, you can’t
really say that Showtime will be able to draw from each other’s
fan base. (ESPN2 took a lot of heat, as they admitted recently,
with airing “the MMA minute” during Friday Night Fights.
It was part of an experiment where FNF would be a lead-in for
MMA Live on the network.)
I
saw the Showtime-produced Strikeforce 1/29 San Jose Arena show
ads start up yesterday on Comcast in the Bay Area. Interesting
that Nick Diaz is getting all the push on this one. Last time
that happened, the crowd wasn’t so big in the building.
Herschel Walker’s appearance was touted as one of those
“also on the card Herschel Walker” type deals. Interesting
that Walker’s comments about wanting to return to the NFL
got way more media play than his upcoming MMA fight, which hardly
anyone is really discussing on a mainstream media level. Herschel
says that MMA is safer than football.
Everything
else
The
UFC Fight for the Troops 2 show last Saturday from Fort Hood
drew a 1.3 rating on Spike TV. In other words, standard fare.
At least Spike TV will have 12 prelim shows before PPVs this
year. Here’s an Army press release on the show.
All
the talk about the TV deals UFC is doing in Japan is largely
bluster and not significant in the grand scheme of things. They
can target a show in 2011 in the country and that’s fine,
WWE did some shows under the Total Sports Asia banner. I remember
vividly when WWE ran a show in March of 2003 at Yokohama Arena
and the industry there panicked greatly that WWE was going to
invade their home turf. This was when WWE was on Fuji TV, something
UFC could only dream about. In the end, Fuji TV cut ties with
WWE and WWE never was a serious threat to the industry there.
UFC isn’t even at WWE’s level in the country for media
penetration and WWE PPV business is not so hot in Japan. Of course,
it doesn’t help that WWE PPVs air a month after they take
place. The WOWOW deal for UFC is no earth-shaker, either.
If
I had to hazard a guess, I’d say that the audience UFC draws
in Japan will not have a significant cross-over to the traditional
Japanese MMA audience. In other words, separate fan bases (similar
to WWE and the Japanese wrestling groups.)
Source: Fight Opinion
|
‘Joker’
Retires Following ‘Fight for the Troops 2’ Loss
by Mike
Whitman
Michael
Guymon’s career as a professional mixed martial artist is
officially over.
The
welterweight on Tuesday confirmed his retirement from MMA to
Sherdog.com, after initially announcing his decision on MMA Junkie
Radio.
Guymon
lost three of his last four fights, most recently falling to
DaMarques Johnson at Saturday’s UFC “Fight for the
Troops 2.” Competing before roughly 3,200 members of the
U.S. Armed Forces at Fort Hood in Killeen, Texas, Guymon succumbed
to a first-round Johnson body triangle. Flattened out on his
belly, Guymon was forced to submit to Johnson’s crushing
grip around his waist, which caused injuries to Guymon’s
ribs and lower back. Guymon told Sherdog.com that the injuries
are not serious and will heal in approximately four weeks.
Nicknamed
for his devious smile’s resemblance to that of a comic book
villain, “The Joker” competed in the sport for over
a decade. Beginning his career in 1999, Guymon made his mark
fighting mostly for King of the Cage, earning the promotion’s
welterweight title before receiving the call to compete in the
UFC last year.
The
36-year-old Californian fell in his promotional debut to young
gun Rory MacDonald at UFC Fight Night 20, submitting to an armbar.
His sophomore effort proved successful, however, as Guymon earned
a unanimous decision against Yoshiyuki Yoshida at UFC 113. His
last effort of 2010 would result in a loss, as Guymon was caught
in a Daniel Roberts anaconda choke at UFC 121 in October.
Outside
of the cage, Guymon has suffered personal problems, culminating
in an admitted 2009 suicide attempt. Since the incident, the
fighter has found help, as evidenced by his 2010 run with the
UFC. Along with his wife, Guymon owns and operates his own gym,
Joker’s MMA, in Lake Forest, Calif.
Source: Sherdog
|
Man-Up
& Stand-Up Today!
Waipahu Filcom Community Center, Waipahu, Hawaii
January 29, 2011
Awwhhhh yeah! Man –up & Stand-up is back for all you
bangaz that like to stay away from the ground game. 2010’s
end of the year show blew the roof off of the filcom. New champions
were made but overall every fighter that night put on a champion
effort-as always. 2011 will produce new fighters that will probably
be fighting for titles at the end of the year because that’s
how its done here on Man-up & Stand-up.
The
main event for the first show of the year will feature 2010”s
fight of the night (possible fight of the year). Robert Banis
and Justin Dulay will meet again in the ring to see if the first
fight was a fluke. If you didn’t get to see this fight than
you missed out on some major damage. Both these guys were lighting
each other up as if New Year’s came two months earlier.
It was dead even the first round with shots being fired from
both sides. There was intense fire with neither man backing down.
The opening of the second round, both fighters came out swinging
a big roundhouse kick on each other with Robert’s landing
first and sending Justin down to receive a standing 8 count.
Justin got back up and was in attack mode again but Robert wouldn’t
let him return the favor. Both sides punished each other the
second round. The third round bell rang and it was on like mochi
crunch and popcorn (nah). Justin chased Robert down and delivered
unwanted mail to Robert’s face but Robert like a true westsider,
received it and returned it to sender. All of the judges had
Justin winning the third round but it was just a little to late
and Robert Banis walked away with the gold around his waist.
Some say the standing 8 count was what decided this fight. But
this is a new year for new beginnings and Justin is looking to
begin the new year with some redemption. Be there when Man-up
& Stand-up dim the lights low and watch these two guys light
the filcom up. Das Right
Another
fight that will send fans jumping out of their seats is when
Dennis “Da Meanest” Montira meets Julio Moreno. These
two little hammaz will prove to everyone that you should never
take a lightweight lightly. 10 ounces, kicks, knees, heads, etc.,
will be flying when the bell goes ding. Dennis worked his way
up the kickboxing scene with the greatest of ease, taking out
everyone from 110-120. Now he has stepped up to fight for the
129# title against Oahu’s favorite cholo Julio Moreno. Julio
who is well-known in the mma scene will try to secure a spot
in the Man-up & Stand-up world. These two bangaz can give
and take cracks so get the medic, get the cutman, get the smelling
salts, get your tickets cause these guys are gonna battle til
someone falls or til the bell rings. Beleev dat
Another
fight that will showcase two fighters chasing the dream is Jared
Ferreira and Joseph Enaena. Jared started last year at 190 and
will be meeting another relentless fighter by the name of Joseph
at 170#. Both of these guys are an inspiration to the show. They
do not let any obstacle stand in their way of the goal that they
want to achieve. Joseph has the wild, I dont give a f*#k style
of fighting. But his ammo comes all the way from Maui so it may
work to Jared’s tight defense, I’ll throw when you’re
not ready style of fighting. Bombs will be thrown in this match
but lets see if Jared can dismantle the bombs and throw some
of his own. May the best man win. Be there
Man-up
& Stand-up would like to thank all of you who support this
show every year. And whoever couldn’t get on this show.
As it was said, You’ll definitely have a place on the Feb
19th show. Our word is gold and it cant be sold. Das Right
JUSTIN
DULAY
155
ROBERT BANIS
DENNIS DA MEANEST MONTIRA
125
JULIO MORENO
ISRAEL LOVELACE
125
ELIAS THE KIDD VELASCO
KONA
60
STANFORD AQUINO
ISAIAH PASCUA
145
AUSTIN CALDERON
BLAKE MAMALIAS
145
MIKE MORALES
DARRYLL DANO
130
KALEI HIGA
ROB JOSEPH
175
ROB CONNELL
JARED FERREIRA
170
JOSEPH ENAENA
LAWRENCE HINOJOSA
160
WALKER
MAKANA WIGGLESWORTH
150
CHAZ KANAE
CHRISTIAN DAYEDON
205-210
ANDYMAR
RENON
KANOI
250
TYLER LAUIFI
BRYSON AIONA
190
MIRACLE MCKENZIE
CHANTE STAFFORD
125
EUGENE
ANGUAY
JARNARD MATA
75
SHAYSTON REDOBLE
MAHINA MELANEISH
100
JADA PEREIRA
CHARLES COLONA
120
ALIKA KUMUKOA
SHANE BEVIN
135
NEVADA HARRISON
KALVIN BAGOYO
135
KAYLEN STAFFORD
ISAAC SABALA
135
MICAH SHIGETA
MICAH LOVELL GONZALES
95
RADROGER RAZWELL
LAAKEA KAHOOKELE
155-160
ETHAN KERFOOT
DJ CASERIA
125
RYOTO TEZUKA
ANTHONY SALAS
145-150
DARREN
WONG
JOSHUA NAELI
170
CHRISTIAN BAUTISTA
JACOB CARTER
55
KEONA CHAVEZ
PAUL BOTER
145
MIKE UEMOTO
All
matches & participants are subject to change.
Source: Derrick Bright
|
UFC
Featherweight Champion Jose Aldo At Least a Year Away from Testing
the Lightweight Division
by Damon Martin
Jose Aldo could be described as one of the most gifted fighters
in the entire MMA world, and he is universally ranked among the
best pound-for-pound fighters in the sport.
The
current UFC featherweight champion has long talked about a potential
move to 155lbs at some point to solidify his place as one of
the best, but it appears those plans are further off than originally
expected.
Once
upon a time, Aldo was offered a fight at 155lbs against Kenny
Florian in the UFC, but after discussing things with his coaches
and manager he opted to stay at featherweight where he reigns
as the current UFC champion.
Now
with a bout on the horizon against Mark Hominick at UFC 129 in
Toronto, Aldo’s team believes he has more work to do at
145lbs before taking the eventual leap to lightweight.
“I
think that anything is possible. I think right now, he still
has some work to be done at 145 pounds. He’s a few fights
away from being able to say he’s cleaned out the division,”
Aldo’s manager Ed Soares told MMAWeekly Radio. “I think
he’s capable of doing that, and (moving to lightweight)
is a potential thing that could happen.
“We
could see that in a year, year and a half. He would definitely
have to put on a little bit of weight and he would have to put
on the weight gradually. I think it would be at least a year
before we see him fight at 155.”
Soares’
statements are similar to what UFC welterweight champion Georges
St-Pierre said about his potential move to middleweight at some
point down the road. Much like GSP, Aldo wants the chance to
put on the extra weight the right way and adjust to the move,
not just hop up to a different weight class with no real planning.
Always
ready to fight, Aldo would of course accept a bout at lightweight
today if the UFC came calling, but his team is looking out for
his best interests and right now they lie at 145lbs.
“He’ll
take the fight. He’ll do the fight regardless (of weight).
I just think you’re at a level now, and the sport is at
a level now, where you have to take these things seriously. These
guys are professionals,” Soares commented.
“I
think when the time is right and the opportunity presents itself,
we’ll make the decision.”
Aldo
is currently lined up to face fellow striker Mark Hominick at
UFC 129, but if the Brazilian’s last few performances are
any indicator he’s well on his way to being regarded as
one of the top champions in all of MMA.
Aldo
has a lot of goals to achieve, but his career is young and his
management doesn’t want to push him along too fast and ruin
something that is potentially great. Down the road however, Aldo’s
future may very well be as a lightweight.
“If
he keeps performing and keeps putting on the types of performances
that he has put on, I do believe that we will see Jose Aldo at
lightweight,” Soares said in closing.
The
Nova Uniao product will train in Brazil as he readies for his
official UFC debut in April in Toronto.
Source: MMA Weekly
|
Quarry
Focused on Life After Fighting
by Joe Myers
Former
UFC middleweight title contender Nate Quarry has been training
in mixed martial arts for 14 years and made his professional
debut back in September 2001, just three days before the 9/11
attacks. At age 38, with more of his career in the rearview mirror
than in front of him, he has taken a long look at life outside
of MMA.
“Any
pro athlete, regardless of what sport you’re in, is going
to have their career come to an end,” Quarry told Sherdog.com.
“You can kick and scream about it all you want, but it’s
going to happen. Whether you’re 24, 30 or 40 years old,
you need to plan for the future and be able to transition successfully
into the next phase of your life instead of having to transition
reluctantly. I want to be able to transition successfully so
I can do my best for myself and my child.”
Towards
that end, Quarry has stayed busy with several outside ventures
over the past few months. After his second-round knockout loss
at the hands of Jorge Rivera -- suffered at UFC Fight Night 21
in March -- Quarry had to undergo major facial surgery for a
broken septum, as well as a fractured orbital bone and cheekbone.
Recovery time from the surgery was six months, and during that
time, Quarry has traveled around the country speaking to people
on behalf of NuVasive, a spinal technology company responsible
for his back surgery in 2006.
Along
with his duties as a spokesperson for NuVasive, Quarry will serve
as the host of a new television show called “American Cage
Fighter,” which premiered on Comcast SportsNet on Jan. 9.
“I’ve
always wanted to do something like [hosting a TV show],”
said Quarry, a member of “The Ultimate Fighter” Season
1 cast. “But this show is different because I’m going
to be talking to fighters from a fighter’s perspective and
letting people see what fighters are really like just before
they get ready to fight. Also, I’ll be giving people more
of a behind-the-scenes look at fighters and how they prepare,
rather than just looking at people in their locker room.”
Quarry
also has launched his own clothing line, Zombie Cagefighter,
which he hopes to turn into a live action series or movie, as
well as a comic book series.
“MMA
fans and fighters have been loving the shirts,” said Quarry.
“All kinds of people have been asking for the shirts. I’ve
got a lot of things going on with that and will be going around
the country promoting and selling the shirts, as well as getting
the comic book series off the ground.”
As
if all those ventures were not enough to keep Quarry busy, he,
along with fellow “”The Ultimate Fighter” alumnus
Tom Lawlor, is scheduled to go to Asia as part of an Armed Forces
Entertainment tour to visit with troops stationed overseas.
“I
fight for a living, but, really, I’m an entertainer,”
said Quarry, who has nine finishes among his 12 professional
MMA victories. “I can tap out anytime and come back to fight
another day, but these people who are out here serving our country
and are on the front lines, they can’t do that. It’s
their job to be out here and be in harm’s way. If visiting
with them and signing some autographs for them gives them some
comfort, it’s the least I can do.”
With
all the extracurricular activities, it would not be hard to lose
sight of one’s MMA career. That has not happened to Quarry,
at least not yet.
“I’m
still training,” said Quarry. “I’ve been training
for 14 years. It’s a huge part of my life, and it might
always be that way. But there’s still so much to learn,
and I’m still trying to learn it. It’s been a tough
journey for me, but I wouldn’t trade it for the world because
it put me where I am today.”
If
he were to never fight again, Quarry would leave behind a solid
legacy. A former UFC middleweight title contender, he owns victories
over Drew McFedries, Lodune Sincaid, Shonie Carter, Pete Sell
(twice), Kalib Starnes, Jason McDonald and Tim Credeur. When
Quarry does decide to call it quits as a fighter, his decision
will be rooted in family.
“I
ran into [UFC matchmaker] Joe Silva recently, and he told me
to give him a call when I’m ready to fight again,”
said Quarry. “I told him I was looking at my future, and
he said he understood where I was coming from. To be able to
do what I’ve done for as many years as I have makes me a
lucky man. Right now, I have to think about my future, my health
and my [11-year-old] daughter. The last thing I want to do is
make a decision that ends up hurting her, and the way I ended
up looking after [the Rivera fight] hurt her. I don’t want
to do that again if I can help it.”
Source: Sherdog
|
One
Year Later, Herschel Walker Returns to MMA, Then Hints at NFL
Comeback
By Mike
Chiappetta
At 48 years old, Herschel Walker is still looking for ways to
challenge himself. On January 29, he'll be back in the cage for
the first time in one year, facing Scott Carson at Strikeforce:
Diaz vs. Cyborg.
Walker
doesn't have any grand plans on fighting beyond that match, choosing
to see how his learning progresses, but surprisingly, he may
have his eye on another sporting venture. The former football
superstar has designs on a possible NFL comeback.
"I
know I can play," Walker said on a Monday conference call.
"If I continue to stay in the shape I'm in now, I know I
can play when I'm 50. Right now, if you asked if I can play today,
there's absolutely no doubt in my mind I can play football today,
that I can help out a team today."
If
Walker did make it back to the league, he'd be the oldest position
player in NFL player in history, and match George Blanda as the
oldest ever to wear an NFL uniform.
It's
an unlikely scenario, but then again, so is most of Walker's
story.
The
once-in-a-lifetime athlete is considered by many to be among
the greatest in U.S. sports history. Walker has been a football
star, track star, taekwondo black belt, Olympic bobsledder, and
mixed martial artist.
But
before he tries to add an NFL sequel to his already amazing life,
first things first, and for right now, that's his return to MMA.
Walker hasn't competed in nearly a full calendar year. It was
Jan. 30, 2010 when he made his debut with a third-round TKO over
Greg Nagy. Since then, he's continued to train at American Kickboxing
Academy, alongside notables like UFC heavyweight champion Cain
Velasquez, Strikeforce heavyweight Daniel Cormier and UFC welterweight
contender Jon Fitch, among others.
Walker
credits those men with accelerating his learning curve, particularly
Velasquez, who he says "took me under his wing."
"All
the guys in the gym have been very helpful," he said. "That's
why I tell everyone I thank them. These are true fighters in
the gym. They got fights coming up all the time, and yet they
still take time out and say, 'Wait a minute Herschel, you're
doing this wrong, let's do this,' and I really thank them for
that."
He
says he's spent most of his time in the gym working on his wrestling
and jiu-jitsu.
The
one-year layoff between fights is rare for someone so new to
the sport, as most neophytes are anxious to quickly rack up experience
in the fighting arena. Though his return was delayed by an injury,
it still would have been a lengthy period with no fighting.
Walker
insists though, that he was in no rush to get back to competition
and or to follow up on any momentum gained from his first win.
Instead, the pressure-free training environment was a better
outlet for him.
"To
be honest, I hadn't thought about coming back," he said.
"I just thought about training. My thing is, I just train.
You probably know I'm different from your average fighter, different
from your average football player or average athlete. I never
thought about it. All I did was, I went to the gym just to train,
and the fight then came about, and I was happy to do it. I'm
always training. I'm always doing something but I never thought
about coming back early or not."
While
that seems a contradictory statement from his proclamations of
love for competing, Walker says to him it makes perfect sense.
"Competition
is everything," he said. "I compete in everything but
when I was going to the gym, I was not thinking about fighting,
I wasn't thinking about anything but just learning. My thing
is, I never have to prove anything to anybody. Anything I have
to prove is to myself. My first fight I really, really enjoyed
it. I Thank Strikeforce and Showtime for the opportunity, but
I didn't know if they were going to give me another opportunity.
And I'm thrilled and happy that they are giving me another chance."
His
future is just as unclear. Walker says he's not looking into
the distance and when or even if he'd ever fight again.
With
both MMA and the possibility of an NFL comeback attempt -- Walker
reiterated it was no joke -- on the table, the world's youngest
48-year-old clearly still has challenges ahead. But as for Saturday
night, the goals for the novice mixed martial artist are decidedly
modest.
"I
hope the MMA world knows I'm a little bit better than a year-old-fighter,"
he said. "I hope they know that, and this coming Saturday,
they'll see that."
Source: MMA Fighting
|
John
Wayne Parr to Retire in 2011
by Fraser
Coffeen
John Wayne Parr has officially announced his retirement. The
Australian Muay Thai fighter posted the news on his Facebook
page last week:
“Never
thought I would be writing this one, but 2011 will be my last
year fighting. I turn 35 in May so time isn't on my side. Want
to give it everything I can this year and finish on a high. Don’t
want to have 5 fights too many and start drooling when I speak.
One more year before I have to think about what I will do after
I retire, hope it's not washing dishes.”
A
big factor in this decision was his difficulty cutting weight
at this point: “85kg to 72.5kg every 6 weeks hurts way to
much and I don't think my body can go through it much more. Even
dropping to 75kg hurts, any bigger I am just too small a frame
to fight the big guys.”
Parr
has made it clear that he will indeed fight through the end of
2011. He is looking at taking roughly 5-6 fights this year, preferably
in Australia. The first of these fights is set, as Parr revealed
that he will face his longtime rival Mike Zambidis on May 28
(thanks to our old pals at HKL for the info). As for the rest
of the fights - the Gunslinger has multiple opponents who he
has met numerous times, and whose fights help define Parr's career.
Rivalries with Yodsaenklai, Zambidis, and Bruce Macfie are full
of classic fights, and all would be great opponents for Parr's
final year.
For
more details directly from Parr, check out these new interviews
with Muay Thai Is Life, and HeadKickLegend.
While
Parr’s best days are perhaps behind him, he is far from
irrelevant in the Middleweight division. Recent wins over the
likes of Zambidis and Yodsaenklai Fairtex have shown that he
can still compete with the best, and we currently have him ranked
at #20 in the LiverKick.com Middleweight rankings. Like Masato
before him, Parr is choosing to step away before injuries force
him away and while he can remain healthy in retirement.
A
long-time veteran of the sport, Parr started his professional
career 18 years ago at just 17 years of age, famously winning
an Australian title in his first year. Early in his career, Parr
moved to Thailand where he gained valuable experience and quickly
established himself as a young fighter to watch. Over the next
few years, he competed primarily in Thailand (including winning
the 2001 King’s Cup) and his native Australia.
For
many fans, it was the 2004 K-1 MAX Grand Prix that brought Parr
to international stardom. At the GP, Parr gave Buakaw Por. Pramuk
all he could handle, dragging Buakaw to an extension round before
the eventual 2004 champ could score enough damage to earn a close
split decision win.
Parr’s
next big international exposure came in 2007 when he appeared
on The Contender Asia. Already a 15 year veteran of the sport,
Parr was immediately seen as a focal point of the show. He made
his way to the show’s finals before losing to Yodsaenklai.
2009
saw Parr face off with Buakaw once again at the Champion of Champions
2 event in Jamaica. Again, the two went to a razor close decision,
and again Buakaw got the nod, although many felt that Parr should
have taken the win.
Last
year, Parr avenged his 2 previous loses to Yodsaenklai, finally
defeating his long-time foe. He called this win “the greatest
thing I have done in the sport” and said he now has nothing
else he needs to accomplish.
While
his career is exceptional, Parr’s popularity is equally
due to his extremely open attitude towards fans. For years, Parr
has been one of the most accessible fighters, always willing
to talk openly with fans about his experiences. You can often
find him on various message boards, sharing details about his
fights, posting candid stories and pictures, and just taking
part in the conversation. He is, and always has been, a tremendous
ambassador for the sport.
In
recent years, Parr has been focused on training fighters at his
Boonchu Gym in Queensland, and will continue in this role into
retirement. It’s great news that he will still be involved
in the sport, as he not only represents Muay Thai well, but also
has much to offer young fighters. His star pupil at the moment
is Heavyweight Thor Hoopman, who is on the verge of breaking
into the top 25 and made his K-1 debut last year at the Oceania
GP.
While
I certainly understand and respect his decision, there’s
no denying that the kickboxing scene will lose something when
Parr hangs up his gloves. On behalf of everyone at LiverKick.com,
I wish Parr all the best in his final year, and in all his future
plans.
We’ll
have more details on Parr as the year continues, and will be
sure to keep you up to date on the final year of this legend.
Source: Liver Kick
|
Lawler:
I’ll Force ‘Jacare’ to Stand
Robbie
Lawler expects Ronaldo “Jacare” Souza to stand and
trade strikes with him during their Strikeforce middleweight
title fight Saturday in San Jose, Calif.
Not
by choice. Lawler says the Brazilian jiu-jitsu standout will
have to fight on his feet.
“He’ll
have no choice but to stand,” Lawler said recently during
a “Savage Dog Show” interview on the Sherdog Radio
Network. “That’s what I plan on doing. I’m forcing
him to stand and seeing how good his standup is.”
Despite
Jacare’s submission prowess, he has shown improved striking
skills. He’s also coming off three consecutive wins, including
an impressive five-round unanimous decision over Tim Kennedy
that earned him the middleweight gold.
Meanwhile
Lawler has split his last four fights. He will enter the cage
as the underdog.
“It’s
kind of nice actually. I like being the underdog,” Lawler
said. “I like being the guy who people think is going to
lose and I want to prove them wrong.”
Lawler’s
takedown defense will have to be sharp to beat the odds. To ensure
he’ll be able to stay standing against Jacare, he has been
training in Arizona with UFC veterans and touted wrestlers Ryan
Bader, Aaron Simpson and C.B. Dollaway.
“They’re
just big guys, athletic, good wrestlers and guys who are hungry
and who are all bigger than me,” Lawler said. “Just
drilling with guys who were All-American wrestlers, guys who
implement that into their game plan, just working out with those
guys has made me get better by leaps and bounds.”
Of
course, Jacare could be tempted to test his striking progress
against Lawler, though it seems more likely he will want to make
use of his advantage on the ground.
“I
believe if anyone stands, it’s just a matter of time before
I catch them,” Lawler said. “I believe I’m better
on standup. He’s a really good athlete. He’s explosive.
His takedowns are real explosive and he’s got a judo background.
I just have to keep it where I want to and not make any mistakes
and take advantage of it being on the feet.”
Even
standing, though, Lawler is planning on a tough bout.
“I
believe it’s going to be an awesome fight,” he said.
“Two guys, one guy not wanting to give up the belt and one
guy going in there to take the belt. It’s going to be a
battle.”
Source: Sherdog
|
Cheick
Kongo Targeting June Return From Back Surgery
By Mike Chiappetta
UFC heavyweight Cheick Kongo is still recovering from December
back surgery with the hope of returning around June, a source
close to the fighter tells MMA Fighting.
The
35-year-old Kongo (15-6-2) had suffered through back problems
for several months, even canceling a scheduled UFC 116 bout with
Roy Nelson before taking an October UFC 120 fight with Travis
Browne that ended in a draw.
Afterward,
the popular French heavyweight tried rehabilitation in hopes
of avoiding surgery, but he underwent a procedure in early December
and has been working on strengthening his back since.
The
timeline of a June return could work perfectly for the UFC, which
is looking for an opponent for Shane Carwin.
Ironically,
Carwin is also coming off back surgery. He's already accepted
a place on June's UFC 131 event in Vancouver, though his opponent
is to be determined.
A
Carwin-Kongo match has been rumored by some, but as of now, the
UFC has not spoken to either side about a potential matchup,
according to sources.
Source: MMA Fighting
|
For
the Love of It All: Herschel Walker Prepares for Strikeforce
by Erik
Fontanez
Herschel Walker isn’t here to be an MMA champion. He’s
not taking part in any typical pre-fight trash talk that others
in the sport make their routine in the weeks leading up to their
fights.
The
one-time Heisman trophy winner is preparing for his Jan. 29 Strikeforce
bout against Scott Carson with a different approach than you’re
run-of-the-mill, ‘I’ve been training hard’ attitude.
No, he’s coming at this fight with a mindset of a different
caliber. One that exudes a calm, almost school boyish curiosity
you rarely see in a man that turns 48 years old in just over
a month from now.
Regardless of how many years he’s been on this earth, Herschel
Walker is a young buck in the world of MMA – dare I say
‘diaper dandy,’ if Dick Vitale is willing to let us
use his description of freshman competitors.
This
fight on Saturday night will be Walker’s second adventure
in the mixed martial arts cage, a year after he made his professional
MMA debut at Strikeforce: Miami against Greg Nagy. The initial
outing for Walker was one of success, as he collected a TKO victory
over Nagy in the third round of their affair.
Perhaps
the most surprising part of that fight was the fact that Walker,
a middle-aged man by all definitions, had the physique of a young
collegiate athlete right out of school. His frame looked as though
it hadn’t aged a day since leaving the University of Georgia’s
campus way back in 1982. Once the fight started, Walker showed
that he, indeed, still had a great deal of athleticism and agility.
Mind you, it wasn’t the same as when he played in the NFL
or competed in the Olympics, but the physical ability of the
former all-pro was enough to impress many a fan and media member
alike.
Now
it’s 2011 and Walker is back to produce another performance
on the Strikeforce stage. In the time between his last fight
and the present day, Walker feels his all-around arsenal has
improved to a level where he doesn’t have to just depend
on his remarkable athleticism.
In
an interview with Damon Martin on MMAWeekly Radio, Walker said,
“I think the biggest difference you’re going to see
is a very, very well-rounded MMA fighter. Not just a great athlete.”
A
year is a long time to prepare for a fight. In that time, one
can evaluate where they feel they need the most improvement and
determine what they need to do in order to become a better fighter
and all-around improved contender. The typical preparation for
a fighter has an end goal of one day making it to the top of
any given division in hopes of becoming that weight class’
champion.
By
his own admittance, this is not the case for Herschel Walker.
The
former NFL standout looks at his journey through MMA as one of
a learning experience, and not a road to a title. It’s difficult
to claim a linear route to gold when you’re just one fight
deep in your career, and Walker knows this. Even more, it’s
not about gaining popularity for himself as much as it is gaining
popularity for the entire sport of mixed martial arts.
“I
know I’ll never be a champion,” he said. “But
I want to get a chance to get this sport up there.”
When
he says “up there,” Walker means he intends on bringing
a limelight to MMA that shines bright enough to catch the buzz
from mainstream media. Selflessly, a man who played in the National
Football League, who has earned several million dollars over
a lifetime, and attracted attention from all types of media outlets,
is doing this for the love of it all.
In
MMA, there are no paychecks like the ones you see today in the
NFL. While there is some form of payout, there is no ‘NFL-type’
multi-million dollar deal in Strikeforce for Walker. His training
is all part of learning about the sport and appreciating the
respect he has for it and all its participants. Before even being
offered his second professional fight, Walker was hitting the
gym simply because of his affection for it.
“I
was just going to train because I love the sport,” he said.
It’s
his love for it that will help in bringing the sport of mixed
martial arts to more of a mainstream light. Ask anyone who is
passionate about what they do and they will tell you that all
the effort they put into it is the driving factor behind the
exposure their work gets. This can happen for MMA because of
the passion existing in Herschel Walker.
As
many MMA followers know, there are legions of doubters who currently
criticize the sport to no end. Those detractors sometimes go
to the extent of saying that MMA isn’t even a sport. Perhaps
the ‘old school journalist’ doesn’t appreciate
mixed martial arts as much as Herschel Walker, and is too hung
up on holding on to boxing as the world’s elite combat sport.
While boxing is still a wonderful sport in its own right, MMA
has made its mark.
“Most
of them are the old journalists that were in the boxing world,”
said the former Olympian. “I’m not taking anything
away from boxing. Boxing is a great sport. It will always be
a great sport. I think this sport here is a sport that’s
exciting. It’s exciting because it’s a human chess
match. At the same time, you have about five different sports
rolled up into one. So I don’t know who wouldn’t want
to watch this here.”
Simple
and plain, what Walker has seen since beginning his MMA training
has opened up his eyes to what he feels is the world’s elite
gladiator.
“I
think an MMA fighter is the number one athlete when it comes
to stepping into the cage or in the ring,” he said. “I
don’t think there is anyone out there that can match him.”
It’s
that kind of recognition that makes mixed martial arts the sport
it is. Excitement, versatility, and the knowledge that anything
can happen are all components that make MMA an outstanding competition.
For Herschel Walker, his opportunity to advertise all those characteristics
will come on Jan. 29 when he fights Scott Carson for Strikeforce.
Source: MMA Weekly
|
Belfort
denies injury rumours, assures all is well
Eduardo
Cruz
Less than two weeks out from a long-awaited confrontation between
Anderson Silva and Vitor Belfort for the UFC middleweight belt,
the “Phenom” found his name involved in rumours that
pointed to a serious injury in the former champion.
Frightened
by the news, the number one contender used his microblog on Twitter
to calm the fans down and to guarantee he is prepared to face
Silva.
“Folks,
I heard that I am injured, the funny thing is I don’t know
about it. Please, next time you start something up, ask me before.
I am ready and would fight even if I had a broken leg,”
he wrote.
The
fight with Silva headlines UFC 126, which takes place in Las
Vegas, Nevada. Stay tuned for all news related to UFC 126 in
Las Vegas over at Fighters Only magazine official website.
Source: Fighters Only
|
UFC
Fight for the Troops Broadcast Peaks at 2.5 Million Viewers
The
UFC Fight for the Troops show that took place last Saturday night
at Fort Hood in Texas was a ratings success for Spike TV with
a peak of 2.5 million viewers during the broadcast.
Spike
TV officials announced the numbers on Tuesday.
The
broadcast which benefitted the Intrepid Fallen Heroes Fund showcased
several top fighters from the UFC, and ended up pulling in a
1.3 household rating with a 1.6 rating in men 18-49.
“With
our two Fight for the Troops events, we’ve raised over $8.5
million for soldiers dealing with traumatic brain injury, burns
and amputations,” UFC President Dana White said. “We’ve
created worldwide awareness for traumatic brain injury through
our support of the troops.”
The
main event showcased lightweight Melvin Guillard in his biggest
performance yet as he TKO’d Evan Dunham to catapult him
one step closer to the top of the 155lb division.
Source: MMA Weekly
|
Fedor
breaks from training, wears Speedos to take polar bear plunge
By Steve
Cofield
Fedor Emelianenko will always be a mysterious character. The
former PRIDE champ, who had a 10-year unbeaten streak snapped
last year, still operates in old-school fashion. He continues
to train in remote parts of Russia and last week he even took
the polar bear plunge. From Bel.ru:
Even
20-degree frost has not prevented today, Epiphany, the faithful
bathe in Stary Oskol river waters. In one jordan plunged ordinary
citizens, officials and athletes. Multiple world champion in
MMA Fedor Emelianenko on this day specially arrived in Stary
Oskol, to purify themselves and gain strength and health for
the whole year.
The
black tights are a nice touch although Fedor's body type, 6-feet,
230 pounds, is probably better suited for the red trunks worn
by fellow "Russian" pro wrestler Nikolai Volkov or
currently sported by Japanese star Ikuhisa Minowa.
Fedor
is set to kick off the Strikeforce heavyweight Grand Prix with
a fight in New Jersey on Feb. 12 against Antonio Silva.
Source: Yahoo Sports
|
If
He Gets Past Nick Diaz, Cyborg Wants Gegard Mousasi And Melvin
Manhoeff
by Mick
Hammond
Just a few years ago it may have been easy to write off Evangelista
“Cyborg” Santos. Losses in five of seven bouts heading
into late 2009 seemed like the death knell in a long career.
Still, Santos would not give up and instead reinvented himself
by first dominating Daniel Zarate to close out the year and then
by moving down in weight and knocking out one of the world’s
most feared welterweight strikers in Marius Zaromskis in 2010.
Santos
had been reborn, and in return for his efforts, Strikeforce has
given him a headlining 170-pound title shot against Nick Diaz
on Jan. 29 in San Jose, Calif.
During
preparations for his fight with Diaz, Santos took time out his
schedule to speak to MMAWeekly.com about where his career has
come, his title shot, and what lays ahead for a man experiencing
a personal renaissance.
MMAWeekly:
First off, Evangelista, you’ve been through many highs and
lows in your career. How would you compare this past year to
previous ones?
Evangelista
Santos: After 15 years of searching for my ideal weight, I have
finally found a home in the welterweight division. I fought 155
pounds at 18 years old then I ballooned up to 205 pounds. Now
I’ve found a home that is comfortable for the first time
in my career. I spent 42 fights looking for my ideal weight;
all of that experience has made me a better fighter.
MMAWeekly:
How important has it been to you to be able to share success
with your wife, current Strikeforce women’s 145-pound champion
Cris “Cyborg” Santos in the same promotion at the same
time?
Evangelista
Santos: It’s really a coincidence for us to be in the same
promotion. I just focus on being a champion and so does she,
wherever we fight. Different promotion, same promotion, doesn’t
matter. We just train to be champions, every day.
MMAWeekly:
Your next bout is scheduled to be against Nick Diaz for the Strikeforce
welterweight title. What were your first thoughts when you heard
this fight had been signed?
Evangelista
Santos: I train every day hoping for a fight, my opponent never
matters. When I found out I was fighting Nick, I just adopted
the strategy for this style of fight. I didn’t care that
my opponent is Nick Diaz.
MMAWeekly:
How do you intend to keep Diaz standing to capitalize on your
striking and avoid his excellent ground game?
Evangelista
Santos: Nobody has really seen my ground game. I’m solid
in Greco-Roman and I have a black belt in Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu.
I’m not worried about keeping it standing. I want to showcase
my BJJ. If I’m underestimated on the ground, I’m okay
with that. (I’m) very confident if it goes to the ground;
I will be okay.
MMAWeekly:
Having fought for so long, how important is it to you at this
point in your career to win a championship in Strikeforce?
Evangelista
Santos: The championship is the biggest part of any athlete’s
career; this is no different. I want this very bad.
MMAWeekly:
Should you be successful against Diaz, who would you like to
face in 2011?
Evangelista
Santos: Once I take the belt, I want to fight Gegard Mousasi
and Melvin Manhoff in any weight class.
MMAWeekly:
Thank you for your time, Evangelista. Is there anything you would
like to say to the fans in conclusion?
Evangelista
Santos: (I want to say) thank you to my wonderful wife, Cris;
thank God for this opportunity; all of my trainers and sponsors:
Chute box, Hostility Clothing, 5 Star clothing, Lean EFX Supplements,
Full Tilt Poker, and Epic Sports Representation.
Source: MMA Weekly
|
In
Poll of Favorite Sports, MMA Is Overlooked
By Michael David Smith
The polling firm Harris Interactive regularly surveys Americans
to find out their favorite sports, and the results of this year's
poll are in. Check out the results and you'll see about what
you'd expect: Pro football is clearly America's most popular
sport, baseball is next, then college football, auto racing,
basketball and hockey.
What
you won't see anywhere is mixed martial arts.
The
reason? MMA wasn't even one of the choices Harris Interactive
gave to poll respondents.
Samantha
Braverman, Senior Project Researcher at Harris Interactive, told
me that respondents were asked to choose, from a list of 20 sports,
which ones they follow. Then, if they followed at least one sport,
they were asked to choose their favorite. Harris listed plenty
of sports that aren't particularly popular in America -- horse
racing, swimming, women's golf and so on -- but MMA wasn't listed
as one of the 20.
So
there are no numbers available regarding how many people consider
MMA their favorite sport. For all the talk in recent years about
the growth in popularity of MMA, I'm not aware of any hard polling
data that tells us just how many Americans consider MMA their
favorite sport, or the UFC their favorite sports league. For
the people who would have chosen MMA as their favorite sport
(if given the option), that serves as a reminder of how far off
the radar screen MMA still is.
But
Braverman said that while Harris tries to ask about the same
sports every time they take this survey, they'd consider adding
MMA to the poll in the future.
"This
poll is trended for many years (the earliest survey was in the
70's, and then in the 80's I believe it changed once to separate
out professional and college level basketball and football),"
Braverman told me. "Consistency is important, but at some
point we may consider adding to the list as other sports (MMA
and UFC included) continue gaining in popularity."
MMA
wouldn't approach football or baseball, and probably wouldn't
even approach soccer or hockey, but the sport has grown enough
that it's at least worth asking how many Americans consider it
their favorite.
Source: MMA Fighting
|
Man-Up
& Stand-Up
Weigh ins
Waipahu Filcom Community Center, Waipahu, Hawaii
January 29, 2011
MAN UP
& STAND UP WEIGH IN
FRIDAY,
JANUARY 28th at 5:30PM
KAPOLEI
REC CENTER
(next to Kapolei Elementary School)
JUSTIN
DULAY
155
ROBERT BANIS
DENNIS DA MEANEST MONTIRA
125
JULIO MORENO
ISRAEL LOVELACE
125
ELIAS THE KIDD VELASCO
KONA
60
STANFORD AQUINO
ISAIAH PASCUA
145
AUSTIN CALDERON
BLAKE MAMALIAS
145
MIKE MORALES
DARRYLL DANO
130
KALEI HIGA
ROB JOSEPH
175
ROB CONNELL
JARED FERREIRA
170
JOSEPH ENAENA
LAWRENCE HINOJOSA
160
WALKER
MAKANA WIGGLESWORTH
150
CHAZ KANAE
CHRISTIAN DAYEDON
205-210
ANDYMAR
RENON
KANOI
250
TYLER LAUIFI
BRYSON AIONA
190
MIRACLE MCKENZIE
CHANTE STAFFORD
125
EUGENE
ANGUAY
JARNARD MATA
75
SHAYSTON REDOBLE
MAHINA MELANEISH
100
JADA PEREIRA
CHARLES COLONA
120
ALIKA KUMUKOA
SHANE BEVIN
135
NEVADA HARRISON
KALVIN BAGOYO
135
KAYLEN STAFFORD
ISAAC SABALA
135
MICAH SHIGETA
MICAH LOVELL GONZALES
95
RADROGER RAZWELL
LAAKEA KAHOOKELE
155-160
ETHAN KERFOOT
DJ CASERIA
125
RYOTO TEZUKA
ANTHONY SALAS
145-150
DARREN
WONG
JOSHUA NAELI
170
CHRISTIAN BAUTISTA
JACOB CARTER
55
KEONA CHAVEZ
PAUL BOTER
145
MIKE UEMOTO
All
matches & participants are subject to change.
Source: Derrick Bright
|
Paul
Daley Face Yuya Shirai at BAMMA, Risks Strikeforce Title Shot
in the Process
by Lee
Whitehead
After a long period of negotiations and opponent courting, MMAWeekly
can confirm through sources close to negotiations that Paul Daley
has agreed to fight Yuya Shirai as the headline bout for the
upcoming BAMMA 5 card, to be held at the MEN Arena in Manchester,
England on February 26 2011.
Fighter’s
Only initially reported the bout between Daley and Shirai.
Speculation
has run rife over the last week as to who Daley’s intended
opponent could be with the incumbent Welterweight DEEP champion
Yuya Shirai and former UFC veteran Karo Parysian being in the
frame.
Paul
Daley is a contracted Strikeforce fighter and in pole position
to face the winner of the upcoming encounter between Evangelista
“Cyborg” Santos and Nick Diaz – the current Strikeforce
170lbs kingpin. Independent sources have indicated that Daley
had to pursue opponent endorsement before being given the all
clear to make his BAMMA debut and open his 2011 campaign of terror.
Although
on the surface the bout will be an exciting affair, there are
underlying risks for the British bomber. Scott Coker first broke
the news on MMAWeekly Radio about Daley getting a shot against
the winner of the Nick Diaz and Evangelista “Cyborg”
Santos, but now there is more risk because if he loses all bets
are off.
“The
deck gets reshuffled,” Coker said about Daley’s title
shot if he loses in BAMMA.
The
true winners in this bout are the English fans who will no doubt
welcome back the controversial fighter with a raucous applause,
celebrating a return to competition on home shores following
a two year international absence.
Source: MMA Weekly
|
UFC
‘Fight for the Troops 2’ Analysis: The Main Card
by Tim
Leidecker
On
Saturday, the UFC put on its second “Fight for the Troops”
show to support severely wounded military personnel. While the
first event in December of 2008 had many former U.S. Armed Forces
members on the fight card itself, that theme was dropped this
time around. Instead, “FFTT2” mostly featured the lighter
weight classes, with plenty of 135-, 145-, and 155-pound action
alongside a pair of heavyweight bouts.
Below,
an in-depth look at Saturday’s five main card matches and
which fights are likely to be made in the near future for the
10 participants.
Matt
Wiman def. Cole Miller -- Decision (Unanimous)
What
happened: Long known only as a very confident -- perhaps overconfident
-- contestant from “The Ultimate Fighter” Season 5,
Wiman effectively emancipated himself from his “Handsome”
moniker by turning in a career-defining performance over fellow
“TUF 5” alum Cole Miller. From the opening bell, both
men fought in the way one would want two fighters in the UFC’s
ultra-competitive 155-pound division to engage. Midway through
the opening round, Miller lost interest in standing and trading
with Wiman, who was getting the better of their exchanges. Miller
instead tried to pull guard, but was slammed to the mat for his
efforts.
Over
the next two rounds, Wiman continued to use his strength advantage
and tenaciously came after Miller, putting tons of pressure on
the American Top Team fighter with vicious ground-and-pound.
Wiman’s assault featured a natural usage of the double Mongolian
chop, as popularized by the great Kazushi Sakuraba. Entering
the third round, as Miller was fighting to survive, Wiman was
fighting to finish. The 27-year-old came closest to ending the
fight with the same mounted guillotine choke he used to submit
Mac Danzig last June. In the end, all three judges rightfully
saw Wiman as the winner.
Forecast
for Wiman: With his third win in a row and his seventh in the
UFC overall, Wiman is zooming in on the upper third of the lightweight
division. Now would be a good time to try to book the rematch
against Danzig which was originally supposed to go down last
September, and which is still an important fight to make after
their controversial first meeting. Wiman could also face Rafael
dos Anjos, whom he was originally scheduled to meet at UFC 103
before withdrawing with a knee injury. The third option could
be a clash with another former “TUF” contestant in
Joe Lauzon.
Forecast
for Miller: With “Magrinho,” you never know what you
are getting. There are times when Miller looks ready to face
Top 10-caliber competition, like in his fights against Jorge
Gurgel and Ross Pearson. However, Miller can sometimes turn in
absolutely forgettable performances, as he did against Efrain
Escudero and now Wiman. While he definitely has the skills, Miller
is still lacking in consistency -- something that is excusable
at a young age, but not for somebody who turns 27 years old in
April. To bounce back, he will have to beat a quality fighter
such as Terry Etim, Kyle Watson or Donald Cerrone.
Patrick
Barry def. Joey Beltran -- Decision (Unanimous)
What
happened: In a battle between a boxer and a brawler, an irregularity
may have tipped the scale in favor of the winning Barry. The
former K-1 fighter was the more precise striker throughout the
fight, but could not get off as many punches and kicks as he
would have liked to. Beltran worked the Randy Couture tactic,
smartly pressing Barry up against the cage and employing dirty
boxing, knees to the legs and foot stomps.
With
the scorecards close, the “Mexicutioner” got off to
a better start in the critical the final stanza, continuing his
superb job of working on Barry on the fence and giving “HD”
a bloody nose in the process. After referee Mario Yamasaki separated
them, Barry inadvertently poked Beltran with a Chuck Liddell-style
forefinger in the eye. The resulting injury break and the final
90 seconds of the match were very unfortunate for Beltran, who
was en route to winning the round and the fight, but wound up
getting chopped down with leg kicks and being mounted.
Forecast
for Barry: The fight everybody would like to see is Barry against
fellow former K-1 ace Mark Hunt. Let’s hope the “Super
Samoan” can stick around in the UFC long enough to make
that fight happen. Other interesting scraps could come against
the winners of the Sean McCorkle-Christian Morecraft and Jon
Madsen-Mike Russow fights.
Forecast
for Beltran: The “Mexicutioner” deserves another chance
in the Octagon after the spirited performance he gave against
Barry. He could fight Rob Broughton, or the loser of McCorkle-Morecraft
or Madsen-Russow.
Mark
Hominick def. George Roop -- TKO (Punches) 1:28 R1
Roop
got torched by Hominick.What happened: After improving by leaps
and bounds in 2010, the Canadian Hominick destroyed former training
partner Roop in less than 90 seconds with three knockdowns. Referee
Don Turnage must have thought he was in a K-1 match when he pulled
Hominick off Roop, despite the latter still defending himself.
Forecast
for Hominick: The Team Tompkins standout will now face champion
Jose Aldo on April 30 at UFC 129 in Toronto, a two-hour drive
from his hometown of London, Ontario. The “Machine”
will have to get his grappling game on the highest level if he
wants to stand a chance against the 145-pound juggernaut that
is Aldo.
Forecast
for Roop: The future is not looking too bright for one of the
tallest featherweights in the game. With only two wins in his
seven fights under the Zuffa banner, Roop may have to earn his
shot at another fight in the Octagon in a smaller organization
first. If Sean Shelby shows mercy, fights against Pablo Garza
or Josh Grispi, or a rematch with Leonard Garcia, could be possible.
Matt
Mitrione def. Tim Hague -- TKO (Punches) 2:59 R1
What
happened: Former New York Giants defensive tackle Mitrione used
his best weapon, the straight left hand, to drop the Canadian
Hague twice, before finishing with some explosive ground-and-pound
midway through the first round. It was “Meathead’s”
third knockout win in four professional fights.
Forecast
for Mitrione: The “Ultimate Fighter” Season 10 alumnus
is suddenly becoming a fan favorite. Even though Mitrione is
showing a lot of promise, his lack of experience makes him difficult
to match up. With most UFC heavyweights already signed for upcoming
fights or sidelined with injuries, Mitrione could be looking
at a match with Rob Broughton at a rumored May show in Glasgow,
Scotland. If he does not want to sit out that long, Mitrione
may have to take on a debutante.
Forecast
for Hague: Having started his second UFC stint with a loss, Hague’s
critics will be prompted to claim that the “Thrashing Machine”
is too light for the UFC from a sporting perspective. With talented
heavyweights being few and far between, it seems likely that
he will get another chance to prove his detractors wrong. It
may take a short-notice fight where Hague fills in for an injured
colleague to do so, though.
Melvin
Guillard def. Evan Dunham -- TKO (Knees) 2:58 R1
What
happened: The “Young Assassin” turned in the performance
that everyone expected of him against Jeremy Stevens one fight
later. Despite a three-fight win streak, Guillard entered his
bout with the world-ranked Dunham as the underdog. He left as
the first fighter ever to stop the Xtreme Couture prospect.
Dunham
did what he said he would and took Guillard down 35 seconds into
the fight, but the Oregonian couldn’t keep him on the mat.
Guillard eventually knocked him down with a left-right combo
and finished him with a barrage of knees against the fence, the
last of which was illegal.
Forecast
for Guillard: It is time to face former champions or title contenders
now. Give him Sean Sherk, Kenny Florian or Takanori Gomi.
Forecast
for Dunham: The 28-year-old submission specialist is probably
one of the top five fighters in all of MMA currently riding a
two-fight losing streak. A third loss would effectively destroy
his reputation as a potential top contender and possibly even
send him out of the UFC, so the promotion has to be very careful
in how they deal with him. Maybe a tune-up fight against Danny
Castillo, Waylon Lowe or Cody McKenzie would be the right thing
to do now.
Source: Sherdog
|
Absolute
monster Rodolfo comments on win in “his backyard”
by Carlos
Eduardo Ozório
After
injuring his knee in early 2010, Rodolfo Vieira stayed out of
the main events but came roaring back onto the scene during the
second half of the year and had a solid run at the Rio International
Open, winning at weight and absolute. At the start of this season
the prodigy from GFTeam repeated the feat, but at this past Saturday’s
qualifiers for the World Pro in Rio de Janeiro. It’s also
worth mentioning that Rodolfo has been doing well in the open
weight division ever since he was a blue belt. He won the Brazilian
Nationals at blue and purple and the Worlds at brown.
Qualified
for the Abu Dhabi, the black belt now hopes to carry on winning
in both his divisions; and bring on the Pan!
How was your performance at the event?
At
weight things weren’t easy at all. I beat João Gabriel
by 6 to 2 in the first match; in the second, against Alexandre
de Souza, I got the takedown twice and passed guard; in the semifinal,
against Português, I had two advantage points; and in the
final, against Moreno (Diogo Sampaio, watch the match below)
I scored 20 to 0 and finished with a choke from the mount. I
only got the finish in the final of the division. There were
four more matches in the absolute.
You
are from Campo Grande, where the event took place. What was it
like literally being able to compete at home?
This
time I fought in my own backyard and was super nervous. My first
Jiu-Jitsu championship was here, in 2005, and it was my first
contact with competitions. Since then this is the first big event
to take place here. Thank God everything went well and I am now
champion. The crowd was on fire and I didn’t let anybody
down!
What’s
the next big event now?
I’m
going to try and win weight and absolute at the Pan, then I’ll
head straight to the World Pro.
Will
this hunt for weight and absolute continue in Abu Dhabi? In 2009
you opted only to compete at weight?
I’ll
keep up the pace in training. If I don’t get injured, I’ll
show up there in good shape. In 2009, I don’t even know
how I managed to win. I had a hurt rib, I was just there for
the ride and ended up winning, but I was unable to compete in
the absolute. Last year I got hurt again and couldn’t compete
in anything. This year is promising and, with God’s help,
I’ll train a lot só I can become champion at weight
and open weight too.
Source: Gracie Magazine
|
Igor
Gracie to Compete at Strikeforce: Fedor vs. Silva
By Ray
Hui
Igor Gracie, the brother of one-time UFC competitor Rolles Gracie
Jr. and cousin of MMA pioneer Renzo Gracie, will make his return
to MMA on the undercard of Strikeforce: Fedor vs. Silva on Feb.
12 at the IZOD Center in East Rutherford N.J.
Gracie
(2-2) last competed in December 2009, submitting Chris Vorano
with a first-round rear-naked choke. Gracie will meet John Salgado
(3-4-1), a Ring of Combat veteran coming off a loss in November
to one-time UFC fighter Chris Liguori. The matchup was first
reported by MMAWeekly.
Also,
while not yet officially announced by Strikeforce, MMAFighting.com
can also confirm with sources close to the fights Kevin Roddy
vs. Jay Maclean, Sam Oropeza vs. Don Carlo-Clauss, Marc Stevens
vs. John Cholish and Josh LaBerge vs. Anthony Leone as preliminary
bouts slated for the Strikeforce event.
The
current Strikeforce: Fedor vs. Silva lineup is below.
Main
Card
Quarterfinals: Fedor Emelianenko vs. Antonio Silva
Quarterfinals: Andrei Arlovski vs. Sergei Kharitonov
Shane Del Rosario vs. Lavar Johnson
Chad Griggs vs. Gian Villante
Valentijn Overeem vs. Ray Sefo
Undercard
Igor Gracie vs. John Salgado
Kevin Roddy vs. Jay Maclean
Sam Oropeza vs. Don Carlo-Clauss
Marc Stevens vs. John Cholish
Josh LaBerge vs. Anthony Leone
Source: MMA Fighting
|
UFC
signs new distribution deal, aims for Japan event in 2011
By Joey
Santosus UFC News
After
more than a decade, the UFC aims to make a return trip to Japan
as soon as later this year or early 2012.
Mark
Fischer, the Executive Vice President and Managing Director of
Zuffa's Asian Operations Division, made the revelation on Monday
during a small press conference held in Tokyo, explaining that
though there is no date currently set, the promotion plans to
visit the land of the Rising Sun as soon as possible.
“I
would say that we’re not ready to announce anything yet
but that we’re hoping to have an event later this year or
early next year in Japan," Fischer explained. “It’s
a step-by-step process. It doesn’t happen overnight. We
want to build up a good fan base, grow our media exposure, and
we want fighters from different nationalities in the UFC before
marketing to that nation and bringing in the big event."
With
this news came the official announcement of a new content distribution
deal with TV Bank, and NTT Plata that will see the UFC brand
expand throughout Asia. The local distributors will offer increased
content through cell phones, video options, and On Demand services.
“Today
is a very important step in both expanding the number of Japanese
fighters in the UFC as well as expanding our media platforms
to bring the UFC to more fans than ever before. We want to make
sure that any fan who wants to watch the UFC has the best access
they can and, at the same time, reach new fans,” explained
Fischer.
While
the UFC has hosted four prior events in Japan, none have taken
place under the promotion's current ownership. The last event
on Asian soil was UFC 29: Defense of the Belts, held on December
16, 2000 at Differ Ariake Arena in Tokyo. Tito Ortiz successfully
defended his title, submitting Yuki Kondo, while Chuck Liddell
defeated Jeff Monson via Unanimous Decision. Pat Miletich, Matt
Hughes, Evan Tanner, and others also held spots on the card.
Source: Low Kick
|
Ex-UFC
welterweight Rory Markham scores big with "Setup"
by Steven
Marrocco
Rory Markham is buzzing with excitement about his latest booking.
This
gig is a lot different than his usual job strapping on four-ounce
gloves and stepping inside a cage. But it's a good different.
He doesn't have to cut weight or take any punches to the head.
He doesn't have to worry about being humiliated in the most visceral
way possible.
Instead,
he gets to emote. Pretend he is someone else (or bring out another
part of himself). There is hair and makeup. There is violence,
but it's make believe.
There's
craft services.
Such
is the life of a film actor, and Markham can see why guys like
Randy Couture and Quinton "Rampage" Jackson put MMA
on hold to step in front of the camera.
"It
gives us a chance to explore," he told MMAjunkie.com (www.mmajunkie.com).
"You don't really get to explore when you're an MMA fighter.
You do your work, and then you get to explore one night in a
fight."
Acting
is an adventure Markham has been pursuing since 18 when he took
lessons in suburban Chicago while boxing at the amateur level.
Now 28, he's just completed filming a major role in "Setup"
alongside Bruce Willis, 50 Cent, Ryan Phillipe and none other
than "Captain America" himself, Couture.
This
past August, he had a role in the psychological thriller "The
Experiment" starring Adrien Brody and Forrest Whitaker.
He's
gotten to hang out and work with movie stars. He's been pampered.
They put his name five spots above Couture's on the call sheet
during his time on "Setup."
He
hasn't fought in 10 months.
"It's
just an opportunity you have to take when it comes up because
it will pay off for you for the rest of your life," Markham
said.
Thirty
minutes after arriving on set of the heist movie in Grand Rapids,
Mich., he found himself in a hallway with Phillipe getting ready
to shoot. The star wanted him to improvise a bit from the script
where the brothers rap about getting a chicken salad. Surreal.
He
was told not to tell anybody he was a professional fighter when
he auditioned for the role. Later, though, Phillipe asked him
what else he'd done acting-wise, and he let the cat out of the
bag. After some searching, Phillipe remembered him.
"I
know that I'm a fighter first," Markham said. "But
I know that my career and my destiny is definitely going to end
up in that realm."
He's
trying to book a fight in late March or early April and is already
in training. His future is in the hands of managers and promotions
on that front.
His
acting career, on the other hand, appears to be taking off.
"One
thing I can say about acting that I can't say about MMA at the
moment is that it pays you when you're not working," Markham
said. "If you were to do one stunt on X-Men, you're first
residual check would be around $100,000 for the first X-Men they
did 10 years ago. My friend who did X-Men 10 years ago is still
receiving roughly $20,000 quarterly from movies."
Fighting
in the cage also goes a long way in avoiding cold feet on set.
"I
knew I wasn't walking out in front of 20,000 people in my underwear
getting ready to fight," Markham said. "You're never
more exposed than at that moment."
And
as it turns out, all the training and game planning done in preparation
for a fight bears a few similarities with those of acting. You
make a rough sketch of what you're going to do. You rehearse
that. You prepare for an intense moment in the spotlight. Then,
it's time to shine.
One
is real, and one is fake. One pays you for a night, and the other
a possible lifetime. Markham likes his current adventure.
"I've
found new solutions to problems in a fight, but maybe my fights
last nine minutes," he said. "At least I get to find
solutions for new problems for six weeks on a set. I think that
part of it for me, and I could probably say that for Quinton
and Randy, that would attract them to the movie industry. It's
challenging."
Source: MMA Junkie
|
Don't
'Axe' me: Wanderlei Silva doesn't want to fight Brian Stann
by Geno
Mrosko
At least that's what Dana White claimed at a recent Q&A session
(via Cage Potato):
"We
were actually trying to hook [Silva] up with Brian Stann. He
doesn't want to fight Brian Stann. He's like, 'F*ck that; everybody
is going to hate me if I fight Brian Stann. Everybody loves Brian
Stann.' But that's the fight we're trying to make right now."
It's
almost hard to believe that it's been nearly an entire calendar
year since the last time Wanderlei Silva has competed in the
Octagon, a unanimous decision win over Michael Bisping in his
middleweight debut. That win served as a sort of rebirth for
the fading legend and immediately catapulted him back into the
limelight with fans begging for interesting match-ups and salivating
at all the possibilities for the Brazilian at 185-pounds. A bout
against Chris Leben that would have pleased both parties, not
to mention fight fans the world over, was derailed when Brian
Stann knocked out "The Crippler" at UFC 125. "All
American" has been calling out Silva since that victory
but according to Mr. White, he's a bit tentative about accepting
the challenge. Are you surprised to hear this? Does this sound
like "The Axe Murderer" we all know and love?
Source: MMA Mania
|
Strikeforce:
Herschel Walker vs. Scott Carson Prediction
Strikeforce
Heavyweight bout: Herschel Walker vs. Scott Carson
Odds:
( Walker / Carson )
Betting
Pick: Walker
Bet
on this fight at Sportsbook.com
In
the opening bout of the evening, Pro Football Hall of Famer Herschel
Walker makes his second appearance in mixed martial arts as he
will look to move to 2-0 against journeyman Scott Carson. Walker
is one of Strikeforce’s biggest attractions, while Carson
has fought only once in the last 10 years, a first round knockout
loss. Carson does have some skills, but you have to believe Strikeforce
is trying to give Walker someone beatable.
Carson
first debuted as a mixed martial artist all the way back in 1999,
putting together an undefeated 4-0 record by 2001. He then took
over 9 years off from the sport, returning in 2010 only to be
knocked out in the first round by relative unknown Lorenz Larkin.
Clearly a 9 year layoff means that Carson is not the dangerous
ground fighter he appeared to be in 2000, but it’s a safe
bet that he does still have some submission skills and that he
will not be a total pushover.
Walker,
who is clearly more famous for his football glory than for his
fighting prowess, nevertheless looked fairly formidable in his
debut fight, albeit against an unknown and unheralded opponent.
Walker put his old man strength to good use, bullying his opponent
and holding him down while working him over with ground and pound
for a T/KO victory.
It
seems clear that Walker is being put in a position to win here,
since he is one of Strikeforce’s biggest box office attractions.
His opponent is a guy who hasn’t won a fight in 9 years
and was destroyed in his only fight in a decade. Walker is going
to have to avoid sticking his neck directly in a choke or anything
like that, but short of a terrible mistake on the ground he will
pummel Carson for a one-sided T/KO victory.
Prediction:
Herschel Walker via second round T/KO.
Source: MMA Betting
|
Bellator
Announces Featherweight Tournament for Season 4, Eric Larkin
First Participant
Bellator Fighting Championships announced on Monday that they
will hold a featherweight tournament in their new season kicking
off in 2011, and former NCAA champion Eric Larkin is the first
confirmed participant.
The
tournament will air on MTV2 starting later this year, and the
featherweights are the latest addition to season 4 of the competition.
Larkin
returns to Bellator after fighting for them once before, but
now enters their tournament looking for a shot at current 145lb
champion Joe Warren later this year.
Larkin
brings with him a wealth of wrestling experience including a
2003 National Championship while competing at Arizona State University.
“I’m
definitely looking forward to this upcoming tournament,”
Larkin said in a press release. “I know there are going
to be some really tough guys in there. I’m not taking anyone
lightly. I’m going to do my thing and get after it. I like
fighting back-to-back so it’s going to be fun.”
Larkin
has been training alongside fellow Arizona State alums Ryan Bader,
Aaron Simpson and others at the new Power MMA and Fitness gym
in Arizona, where he will train to get ready for the season 4
featherweight tournament.
Bellator
will announce more participants for the tournament in the upcoming
weeks.
Source: MMA Weekly
|
Man-Up
& Stand-Up
Weigh ins
Waipahu Filcom Community Center, Waipahu, Hawaii
January 29, 2011
MAN UP
& STAND UP WEIGH IN
FRIDAY,
JANUARY 28th at 5:30PM
KAPOLEI
REC CENTER
(next to Kapolei Elementary School)
JUSTIN
DULAY
155
ROBERT BANIS
DENNIS DA MEANEST MONTIRA
125
JULIO MORENO
ISRAEL LOVELACE
125
ELIAS THE KIDD VELASCO
KONA
60
STANFORD AQUINO
ISAIAH PASCUA
145
AUSTIN CALDERON
BLAKE MAMALIAS
145
MIKE MORALES
DARRYLL DANO
130
KALEI HIGA
ROB JOSEPH
175
ROB CONNELL
JARED FERREIRA
170
JOSEPH ENAENA
LAWRENCE HINOJOSA
160
WALKER
MAKANA WIGGLESWORTH
150
CHAZ KANAE
CHRISTIAN DAYEDON
205-210
ANDYMAR
RENON
KANOI
250
TYLER LAUIFI
BRYSON AIONA
190
MIRACLE MCKENZIE
CHANTE STAFFORD
125
EUGENE
ANGUAY
JARNARD MATA
75
SHAYSTON REDOBLE
MAHINA MELANEISH
100
JADA PEREIRA
CHARLES COLONA
120
ALIKA KUMUKOA
SHANE BEVIN
135
NEVADA HARRISON
KALVIN BAGOYO
135
KAYLEN STAFFORD
ISAAC SABALA
135
MICAH SHIGETA
MICAH LOVELL GONZALES
95
RADROGER RAZWELL
LAAKEA KAHOOKELE
155-160
ETHAN KERFOOT
DJ CASERIA
125
RYOTO TEZUKA
ANTHONY SALAS
145-150
DARREN
WONG
JOSHUA NAELI
170
CHRISTIAN BAUTISTA
JACOB CARTER
55
KEONA CHAVEZ
PAUL BOTER
145
MIKE UEMOTO
All
matches & participants are subject to change.
Source: Derrick Bright
|
Strikeforce
Champ Jacare Plans To Ride 2010 Success Into 2011
by Mick
Hammond
Few fighters had a breakthrough year like Ronaldo “Jacare”
Souza did in 2010. Both inside and outside the cage, Souza ended
the year on high notes.
“2010
was a great year. I won the Strikeforce middleweight championship,
I had great fights, I got married to my beautiful wife Larisa,
and my son Enzo was born,” he told MMAWeekly.com.
“Definitely
2010 was a special year in my life.”
Not
only was Souza having a great year personally, his inclusion
in the award-winning EA Sports: MMA game made things even sweeter.
“That
was pretty cool,” admitted Souza. “I really enjoy playing
games and really like the way the EA Sports: MMA game came out.
(It is) very realistic and I really enjoy playing it; especially
the takedown and ground games.”
As
for the key to Souza’s success that saw him defeat three
of the top middleweights in the world in Matt Lindland, Joey
Villasenor, and Tim Kennedy, Jacare credits one of the most basic
aspects of fighting.
“Training,
training, and (more) training,” he said. “I am very
lucky to have such a great team. My life is all (about) balance,
and all I do is training and improving my game.
“At
the X-Gym, beside my coaches and teammates, we keep getting high-level
fighters that are coming by our gym to help us on our daily training.”
When
it comes to the improvement of his game, Souza’s stand-up
is the area he would most like work on in 2011.
“I
always try to keep all the aspects of the game sharp, but I am
working a lot on my striking, especially because of the level
of my coaches and training partners,” he stated. “They
are really pushing me and making sure my hands are improving.”
This
work will come in key against Souza’s next opponent, Robbie
Lawler, as the two meet in San Jose, Calif., on Jan. 29 for Strikeforce’s
185-pound title.
“I
think that it will be (the classic) grappler against the striker
match-up,” said Souza. “Robbie is a very tough opponent
with a heavy hands and I have to be very well prepared for this
fight, so I am training my jiu-jitsu, working hard on my stand-up,
and getting ready for Jan. 29.”
Should
things go well against Lawler, Souza’s goal is to remain
at the top of his division and prove he’s one of the best
middleweights in the world.
“I
want to keep my Strikeforce middleweight belt, have great fights,
improve my game and be always prepared for to fight the best,”
stated Souza. “I will fight anyone that weights 185-pounds,
and it is up to Strikeforce to decide who my next opponent will
be.
“There
are a lot of good guys on my division, and there are other guys
that can drop to my weight as well. So there are greats match-ups
to be made. We will see what Strikeforce will put in him front
of me in the future.. For me it is about being prepared and taking
one fight at a time.”
Having
achieved a great deal this past year, Souza is not content to
sit and bask in his glory, but instead he intends to take things
to an even higher level in the year to come.
“2010
was a very special year for me and that just pumps me up to do
better in 2011,” closed out Souza. “I am looking forward
to always entertaining my fans and bringing my best in my training
and to my fights.
“Being
a MMA fighter is my profession and that is what I live for. Good
bless you all and Happy New Year!”
Source: MMA Weekly
|
Matches
to Make After ‘Fight for the Troops 2’
by Jason
Probst
With
an upset in the main event and a pair of quality heavyweight
bouts, UFC “Fight for the Troops 2” reinforced the
unpredictability that ensues whenever fighters square off. Below,
a look at five matches we’d like to see made in the wake
of Saturday’s results.
Melvin
Guillard vs. Nik Lentz
Tonight was big-time redemption for Guillard, whose pursuit has
been defined by flashes of potential followed by tough breaks
and underwhelming performances. In his first-round knockout of
the favored Evan Dunham, Guillard showed impressive skills, delivering
a concussive assault en route to the biggest win of his career.
Melvin’s
takedown defense is a splendid thing to watch, as he performs
feats of uncanny agility while punishing opponents who try to
plant him on the mat. His standup is also top-notch; on Saturday,
the “Young Assassin” mixed in punches, knees and the
kitchen sink from virtually every angle. Chalk up another career
reborn through Greg Jackson’s magic touch -- Guillard should
now be considered a Top-15 fighter in the UFC’s packed 155-pound
division, and maybe even Top 10.
Lentz
would be an ideal next opponent for Guillard. The “Carnie”
possesses solid wrestling and a high-pressure style, the type
of fighter who would gun for Guillard from the jump. The problem
with attacking Guillard is that his takedown defense makes his
striking all the more problematic to deal with. As the talented
Dunham learned, Guillard is a very effective sprawl-and-brawl
artist.
Lentz
has progressed nicely since entering the UFC, going 4-0-1, and
this would be the kind of elimination match to move one guy solidly
into the UFC’s Top 10, which is where the ladder gets insanely
tough to ascend.
Mark
Hominick vs. Jose Aldo
Long-rumored, this is a no-brainer and is virtually guaranteed
after Hominick’s blowout of George Roop. Featherweight champ
Aldo is flirting with Georges St. Pierre-like status: he’s
probably, at least, a 5-1 favorite over any potential challenger
at this point. Hominick’s standup represents the toughest
test available for the young Brazilian, however.
Given
the status of the 145-pound division, Hominick is also the best
available challenger, as well. Contenders Chad Mendes and Diego
Nunes still need more seasoning and exposure, and Aldo himself
could use some proper build-up so fans can appreciate him as
he transitions into the UFC. Hominick has never shied away from
a standup fight, and who knows? Maybe he’d actually force
Aldo to go for a takedown. Either way, it’s a great first
defense for Aldo to make in the big show.
Yves
Edwards vs. Danny Castillo
While Guillard showed the promise of a reborn fighter living
up to his potential, Edwards showcased the kind of veteran guile
and experience one loves to see as a fight fan. It reminds you
that the old dog can still bite, and the American Top Team product
was his characteristically unflappable self in his second-round
submission of the scrappy Cody McKenzie. Edwards -- who found
himself in a bit of trouble in the second before taking McKenzie’s
back for a fight-ending rear-naked choke -- is always tough when
he has time to think, and especially when he can counter on the
feet.
Edwards
clearly dialed in on McKenzie’s spotty standup game -- which
has improved somewhat from its virtual non-existence on “The
Ultimate Fighter” Season 12 -- picking spots, varying his
right hands and kicks, and picking the Alaskan apart. That’s
why Castillo is the perfect next foe for Edwards.
Ever-aggressive,
Castillo is coming off a one-round blowout of Will Kerr in WEC.
He’s a solid wrestler and probably would be able to take
Edwards down, forcing him to defend a hostile ground-and-pound
assault. Castillo isn’t afraid to let his heavy hands loose
on the feet, either, and is naturally bigger than Yves.
At
this point, neither Edwards nor Castillo is among the elite of
the crowded lightweight division. With most of the top fighters
booked for the upcoming months, this is a fan-friendly matchup
that would ask questions of both. Can Yves hang with the new
breed and powerful wrestler types? Can Castillo solve a veteran
puzzle like Edwards? If either guy wants to move up in the division,
they’ll have to answer “yes,” and this fight is
a great way to find out.
Mitrione
was impressive on Saturday.
Matt Mitrione vs. Patrick Barry
Both were impressive on Saturday, and since virtually every other
UFC heavyweight seems to have his dance card booked, Mitrione-Barry
makes sense on every level. Mitrone continued to show progress,
as he displayed sharp striking and patience in dispatching of
Tim Hague. Barry, meanwhile, showed off his trademark big kicks
and explosive standup in a decision win against the uber-tough
Joey Beltran.
At
this point in their careers, Mitrione and Barry -- each an emerging
commodity with upside -- will be vulnerable to overpowering wrestlers
and more experienced fighters.
Mitrione-Barry
would be the kind of standup gala that guarantees placement on
the televised portion of the card. Both are articulate and somewhat
comedic, so the trash talk would be entertaining as well. It’s
a can’t-miss matchup that would be a test of both men’s
chins and hearts.
Matt
Wiman vs. Waylon Lowe
These two lightweights are in similar spots: both picked up solid
wins on Saturday night, and both are likely one win away from
cracking the Top 20 in the UFC 155-pound division. That’s
no small feat, since there are approximately 60 lightweights
currently on the roster.
Wiman
never looked better than he did in his dominating decision win
over Cole Miller. “Handsome Matt” used wrestling and
ground-and-pound to keep the tricky Miller constantly on the
defensive. Lowe is an exceptionally good wrestler and would test
Wiman in that regard.
Lowe
has rebounded from a tough UFC debut, in which he was knocked
out by Guillard with a brutal knee to the body. Since then, he’s
put together a pair of decision wins, including his win against
former Shooto champion Willamy “Chiquerim” Freire on
Saturday’s undercard.
Wiman’s
wrestling has improved considerably; Lowe’s power and takedown
prowess would answer whether or not the rest of Wiman’s
game has improved as much.
Source: Sherdog
|
Exclusive:
Luis Sapo signs 4-fight deal with Bellator
By Guilherme
Cruz
One
of the best MMA fighters in Brazil, Luis Sapo will return to
the international stages in 2011. With six victories in a row,
the fighter signed a four-fight deal with Bellator FC and will
debut in March. In ten years of career, Sapo, a one-time WEC
veteran, won 67 out of 75 fights, with seven losses and one draw,
fighting in events in Brazil, United States and Japan.
Source: Tatame
|
MacDonald
on Montreal, Possibility of Fighting Nate Diaz
By Kelsey
Mowatt
For
several years now, mentioning the city of Kelowna to long time
Canadian MMA observers would often prompt a discussion about
Rory MacDonald and the renowned Team Toshido. After MacDonald
began fighting throughout Western Canada in 2005, word spread
quickly about a 16 year-old-fighter who would go on to win ten
straight bouts, lay claim to the King of the Cage lightweight
championship, and sign with the UFC at the young age of 20. Kelowna
was the proud home to one of the sport’s fastest rising
prospects.
But
as often is the case in life sometimes a change of scenery becomes
a necessity, and after traveling across the country for several
training stints with world class competitors in Montreal, Quebec,
MacDonald knew it was time to move.
“Yeah
I live here now,” MacDonald told FCF. “It’s been
really good for me; I feel like I’ve grown substantially
since I moved here in August. It was the best thing for me to
do.”
“Fighting
is everything in my life; if I was perfectly set up in Kelowna
as far as training I wouldn’t have left,” MacDonald
added. “Things just weren’t working out as far as training
partners and stuff. There was no one to train with. I’d
go and show up by myself and you just can’t do that at this
level when you’re trying to beat top ten guys. So I made
the move and things are great. I always have someone to spar
with, I’m learning new things and there’s going to
be a big difference for my next fight.”
For
most, moving away from home, from your friends and family, is
an extremely hard transition to make, and in MacDonald’s
case it was no different.
“It
was really tough,” said the 21 year-old MacDonald, who became
the KOTC Canadian and World Champion through the tutelage of
Toshido’s head instructor David Lea. “It was really
tough leaving Dave; that was probably the hardest thing I’ve
ever had to do. I’m still really young, and since I was
14 Dave was the guy looking out for me, teaching me things and
showing me how MMA works...I’ll always value that; I’ll
always have Dave by my side.”
Not
only is Montreal home to several notable Canadian fighters like
Denis Kang, Patrick Cote, and UFC welterweight champ Georges
St. Pierre, the historic city’s extensive MMA resources
continue to attract other top ranked fighters.
“I
have like five gyms I go to,” said MacDonald, when asked
about a training regiment which includes time at the famous Tri
Star Gym. “Every place, every day, every morning and every
night, it’s a new place. It’s really cool; I get to
learn from a lot of really good people and it keeps me excited.”
The
move to Montreal also came at an important time in MacDonald’s
career. After submitting Mike Guymon in the first round at MacDonald’s
UFC debut last January, the rising fighter tasted defeat for
the first time in June, when he was stopped by former WEC champ
Carlos Condit. It was a loss which no doubt contributed to MacDonald’s
recent relocation.
Now,
reports have been circulating that the Canadian could face another
accomplished fighter in Nate Diaz, when the UFC heads to Toronto’s
Rogers Centre on April 30th.
“I’ve
always wanted to fight Nate since I got in the UFC,” said
MacDonald when asked if would be interested in fighting Diaz.
“So it’s going to be interesting if it works out.”
After
moving up from the lightweight division to compete at 170lbs.,
Diaz (13-6) earned stoppage wins over Rory Markham and Marcus
Davis, before losing by unanimous decision to Dong Hyun Kim on
New Year’s Day.
“I
think he’s going to be weaker than a lot of the guys at
170,” said MacDonald when asked to assess Diaz’s move
to welterweight. “He’s just smaller; that’s just
the way it is. He’s definitely got the technical ability
to hang, and although he loses a lot of his edge on the strength
side of things, that doesn’t mean he can’t win fights
with his skills.”
Source: Full Contact Fighter
|
A
demolition man amid destruction
by Marcelo Dunlop
José Aldo was voted MMA fighter of 2010 both by GRACIEMAG
readers and team. But there’s no changing him: it looks
like the success of being UFC featherweight champion will never
go to his head. Rather than taking some well-deserved down time
in some holiday paradise, José Aldo took off for an aid
mission in Haiti, a Caribbean nation ravaged by an earthquake
in January of last year and still baring more damage than the
opponents of the little fighter from the Amazon.
Via
Twitter, @josealdojunior stated he will return home to Brazil
tomorrow. He also commented on what he saw during the Hatian
journey for “Esporte pela Paz” (“Sports for Peace”),
along with other Brazilian stars.
“I’d
never seen anything like it. I’m shocked, it’s all
so sad. We complain about everything while our bellies are full,”
the champion reflected, even crying during a lecture by volleyball
player Nalbert in the nation’s capital, Port au Prince.
“I was struck by emotion like never before. Luiz Lima (swimmer)
paid tribute to a soldier who sang to kids at an orphanage. I
wept a lot.”
Aldo also touched the hearts of some fans, especially the soldier
Vanute Patreve, as captured on a video clip on Globoesporte.com.
Another
of Aldo’s admirers was journalist André “Fran”
Pires, who took a photo with his “guns cocked” facing
his idol. “We spoke about the mission and the scenes will
surely make the program,” said André, producer of
the TV show “Não conta lá em casa,” airing
Wednesday nights on Multishow television channel.
Source: Gracie Magazine
|
Jens
Pulver Out to 'Rebuild' After Ending Six-Fight Losing Streak
By Ray
Hui
There's still some fight left in "Lil' Evil."
Former
UFC lightweight champ Jens Pulver (23-14-1) this past Saturday
submitted Mike Lindquist with a first-round rear-naked choke
at an XFO event in Woodstock, Ill., snapping a six-fight losing
streak.
It
was Pulver's first win in over three years and would have retired
had he fallen short against the unheralded fighter (6-20), Pulver
said Monday on MMAFighting.com's The MMA Hour.
"Not
ripping on Mike or anything," Pulver told host Ariel Helwani.
"But it's time to start over and if I'm getting caught in
the same things, hey, well, 'You got to go.' Done."
For
fighters accustomed to competing in the major organizations,
it's humbling having to return to the small shows, and it's probably
more so considering Pulver's credentials, but Pulver believes
it was the right step for him at this point of his career.
"I
love it. I know what I'm doing," Pulver said. "I'm
know I'm trying to rebuild. Am I trying to rebuild for a world
title? No. I'm not trying to win no title ... I need to be rebuilding.
I want to earn my way back if I ever get back. If I don't, hey,
at least I tried. I fought, I did everything I could."
His
goals as a fighter are much different than it's been in the past.
Pulver continues to compete because he wants to put a smile on
his face and to make all his coaches past and present proud.
And most importantly, Pulver wants to go out on a high note.
"My
goal is to put 'Lil' Evil' to bed in a proper, right way,"
Pulver said. "That's it for me. That is my goal, and act
like the person I was, a former world champion, the guy who started
the weight class, the godfather of the 155-pound division."
Pulver
already has a fight scheduled for March 5, but a cut suffered
at Saturday's fight could potentially prevent him from participating
on that Chicago Cagefighting Championship card. According to
Pulver, the cut he received Saturday was the first time he's
seen his own plasma in a fight.
"That's
the first time I've ever seen it dripping down my face. That
was pretty wild," Pulver said.
Despite
not knowing if he'll compete in March, Pulver plans on returning
Wednesday to the Curran Martial Arts gym in Crystal Lake where
he had the "greatest" two-and-a-half month training
camp leading into the Lindquist bout.
Pulver,
who said his mind and spirit were broken the past few years,
will be looking forward to his next camp just glad to have "this
monkey off my back," having finally stepped back on the
winning track and remembering how it feels to have his hand raised.
"I'm
going back to the gym, staying in shape," Pulver said. "I'm
just having the time of my life right now."
Source: MMA Fighting
|
UFC
NEWS: Featherweight Champion Jose Aldo's future in the lightweight
division, though manager says move at least a year away
By: Jamie Penick, MMATorch Editor-in-Chief
When UFC Featherweight Champion Jose Aldo was blasting through
opponents in the UFC's sister promotion World Extreme Cagefighting,
many fans and writers wanted to see him make a move up to lightweight
for super-fights inside the Octagon. Now that the WEC has been
folded into the UFC, however, that call has been softened, and
Aldo himself isn't quite ready for that move.
According
to his manager Ed Soares, in comments made to MMAWeekly.com,
Aldo is at least a year away from considering any move up in
weight.
"I
think that anything is possible. I think right now, he still
has some work to be done at 145 pounds. He's a few fights away
from being able to say he's cleaned out the division,” Soares
said. "I think he's capable of doing that, and (moving to
lightweight) is a potential thing that could happen."
"We
could see that in a year, year and a half. He would definitely
have to put on a little bit of weight and he would have to put
on the weight gradually. I think it would be at least a year
before we see him fight at 155 lbs."
Though
they are looking to continue on at featherweight, Soares said
Aldo would be willing to take a fight at lightweight anytime
if offered. But regardless of when it happens, Soares believes
that Aldo's future will be in the 155 lb. division.
Said
Soares, "If he keeps performing and keeps putting on the
types of performances that he has put on, I do believe that we
will see Jose Aldo at lightweight."
Link
to Original Source Article
Penick's
Analysis: It's not just Aldo that will likely find his future
in a heavier weight class. With how young so many of the fighters
are in the featherweight division, many of them are still growing
into their frames and will continue to put on weight as they
continue in their careers. It's the opposite situation of a lot
of the lightweights in the UFC right now, who may begin cutting
more weight to reinvent their career at a lower weight class.
But with Aldo's dynamic overall game, provided he continues winning
the way he has, fans will continue to want to see him fight no
matter what division he's in.
Source: MMA Torch
|
Kenny
Florian: 'If Melvin Guillard thinks he deserves a title shot
over me, he should fight me and beat me'
by Fernando Quiles Jr.
"It
doesn't make sense. There's a lot of guys working hard. It's
who the best fighter is. If Melvin thinks he deserves a shot
over me, he should fight me and beat me. It's always about who
the best fighter is. Who has he beaten? What has he done? That's
great he's finally considered a top contender. Losing to Joe
Stevenson in the first round isn't gonna get you that shot. You
have to be consistent. He has to separate himself from the pack.
I would take that fight."
So
Melvin Guillard wants to be a contender, eh? Well, two-time number
one lightweight contender Kenny Florian has volunteered to be
his stepping stone, saying that the "Young Assassin"
doesn't have the resume or the consistency to challenge for a
world title ... yet. Legacy be damned! Guillard is fresh off
an impressive first round technical knockout victory over Evan
Dunham this past Saturday night (Jan. 22) in Fort Hood, Texas.
But he's going to have to do better than that if he wants to
even sniff division champion Frank Edgar's jock anytime soon,
let alone fight him for five rounds. Florian's last bout was
a disappointing unanimous decision loss to Gray Maynard, which
vaulted the "Bully" to number one contender status.
Now Florian's willing to give Guillard that same opportunity,
knowing full well that he'd look to exploit his mat skills (or
lack thereof) if the match up was ever made. Sound like a good
idea, Maniacs?
Source: MMA Mania
|
Storylines
That Emerged From ‘Fight for the Troops 2’ by Jason Probst
On
the heels of UFC “Fight for the Troops 2,” we sort
through the fallout, pick up the pieces, and bring you the storylines
that developed at Fort Hood in Killeen, Texas.
The
“Young Assassin” Finally Arrives
In
the fight game, athletes who forever chase their potential make
for great stories. When they capitalize on it, that’s the
sweetest victory of all. Melvin Guillard’s clinical destruction
of Evan Dunham was the personification of that. Guillard’s
always shown flashes of rare ability, from his numbing striking
to spry takedown defense, but never seemed able to put it together
against top competition.
He
changed all that Saturday night. Hitting his marks perfectly,
“The Young Assassin” stunned the talented Dunham from
the opening moments, and exploited every opening en route to
a dynamite stoppage.
Fighters
notice this. The Melvin Guillard in the Octagon that night was
probably the nastiest combination of standup and takedown defense
any lightweight will bring today. The jury’s still out on
how he’ll hold up when he has to make tactical adjustments
in a fight that demands it, but there’s few guys that compete
with him on a purely physical level. If Guillard’s mental
game progresses as much as the rest of it, he’ll be a title
contender soon enough.
Anderson
Silva Speaks?
Hey,
was it just me, or was that middleweight champ Anderson Silva
speaking English on the interview segment hyping his Feb. 5 defense
against Vitor Belfort at UFC 126?
While
Silva answered some questions in English, and others with an
overdubbed translator, that was a great crossover moment for
“The Spider.” Even a little perfunctory English was
fantastic -- it is really the final barrier for any fighter,
fair or not, as it allows him to make the leap from being a highlight-reel
mystery to a guy that literally speaks your language.
I’ve
long wondered why Silva isn’t as lauded -- or at least as
recognized and appreciated by casual fans -- and the language
barrier was the only explanation. It’s a credit to Silva
that he’s willing to make the jump.
Some
champions can linger on the other side of the barrier and transcend
it through sheer weight of their aura and performances; Robert
Duran was an ironic example, as he could speak English but refused
to do so, as he didn’t want to do anything poorly. Silva
has executed the most impressive run in the history of the UFC,
going 12-0. If he keeps this up, maybe we’ll see soccer
moms wearing Black House t-shirts. You never know.
Also,
never underestimate the endearing quality of a fighter trying
out his new language skills. When Georges St. Pierre was noticeably
more green just a few years ago, GSP’s remark of “He
beat me fairly squarely” about his first loss to Matt Hughes
probably won him more fans than any meaningless cliché
a fighter has ever uttered.
Have
fun with it, Spider. And keep it going.
A
Reminder
Yahya
(pictured) shocked Brown.Seeing Mike Thomas Brown lose via decision
to Rani Yahya was eminently baffling, especially when just a
year ago Brown was considered the best featherweight in the world.
Since losing his crown to Jose Aldo, the man that bested Urijah
Faber twice has struggled, going 2-3.
Taking
the Yahya bout on a few weeks’ notice after dropping a decision
to Diego Nunes at UFC 125, Brown may have been a little flat,
and that’s too bad, because stylistically he seemed ideal
to defeat Yahya, who has little standup, limited wrestling, and
basically is a one-dimensional fighter -- although it’s
a helluva dimension.
To
his credit, Yahya executed a perfect game plan, circling in herky-jerky
fashion to defuse Brown’s big right hand, and executing
great transitions in tieups and clinches to get the better of
his opponent on the mat, who seemed to tire late in the bout.
Brown was a true gamer taking the fight to fill in, but he seemed
terribly flat.
We
often criticize fighters for not taking bouts for various reasons,
but Brown’s performance was a reminder of why fighters have
managers, because in a million years it was hard to imagine how
Yahya would ever beat him.
Let
the Exodus Begin
One
of the best assignments covering this sport are the “Five
Matchups to Make” following major events. And in comparing
the UFC’s rosters at 155 and 145 pounds, the math suggests
that an exodus to 145 is inevitable in the coming year or two.
After
the fights are over, your humble columnist scrolls the list of
upcoming cards, makes note of available and appropriate/compelling
matches and goes from there. What’s interesting are the
different landscapes of a given division. In the UFC, the heavyweight
roster is thick with elite-level talent, with everyone else seemingly
a few notches below, at least in what odds they’d get fighting
the top dogs.
Lightweights,
meanwhile, resembling the Indy 500, with every lane packed and
six-deep with guys jockeying for position. To be blunt: there
are simply too many of them to keep, with 70 listed on the active
roster. Featherweight, meanwhile, has 29 guys under contract,
but only 16 with more than one win. Compared to lightweight,
it’s a virtual ghost town.
And
the 135-pound division has 22 fighters, which invites further
opportunity for feathers at a crossroads once the influx of lightweights
begins.
While
the Monday-morning cuts from that roster supply a final jolt
of post-event newsiness, at lightweight, the competition is simply
ruthless. It’s a product of marketability, name value, and
size. A heavyweight slugger like Patrick Barry, with proven bonafides,
can lose his next two or maybe three fights and probably wouldn’t
be let go. Lightweights get no such assurances.
When
it could take a solid hour to assemble your list of the UFC’s
top twenty 155ers, given how crowded the pool is, the bottom
half will no doubt be taking a long look at the scales and the
steam room to stay relevant. And when that happens, the domino
effect will trickle down to 135.
Source: Sherdog
|
Spike
TV Announces 12 UFC Prelim Shows to Air in 2011 Starting with
UFC 126
Spike
TV has announced the plans for the UFC prelim shows on their
network, with 12 total broadcasts set to air in 2011 beginning
with UFC 126 on Feb 5.
To
date the network has aired 13 prelim shows that started back
with UFC 103 in 2009, averaging 1.5 million viewers per broadcast.
The
latest installment of the UFC prelims on Spike will feature a
key match-up in the UFC’s newly minted featherweight division,
as well as a tough match-up in the 155lb weight class.
Chad
Mendes takes on Japanese fighter Michihiro Omigawa in a featherweight
bout with contender implications. Mendes has gone undefeated
in his young MMA career, and he’s looking for a title shot
in 2011. Meanwhile since dropping down to 145lbs, Michihiro Omigawa
has become one of the top featherweights in the sport.
The
other bout on the Spike TV prelim card will feature former WEC
fighter Donald “Cowboy” Cerrone in his UFC debut against
British product Paul Kelly.
Both
fighters are known for exciting fights, and their bout at UFC
126 promises to be no different.
The
prelims will air on Spike TV starting at 9pm ET on Saturday night,
Feb 5 from Las Vegas, leading into the pay-per-view broadcast
kicking off at 10pm ET.
Source: MMA Weekly
|
Understanding
Conditioning for MMA
by Joel
Jamieson
A
great deal of time and energy in MMA is spent on training to
improve conditioning, but few take the time to understand exactly
what conditioning really is in the first place. Far too often,
fighters and coaches use the words “conditioning” or
“cardio” without really having a solid understanding
of what these terms mean or how they actually work. It’s
common to hear people say that fighters are some of the best
conditioned athletes out there but is this really the case? What
is conditioning really?
While
I don’t disagree that MMA requires a great deal of cardiovascular
development and muscular endurance, among other things, the reality
is that conditioning is a measure of how well an athlete is able
to meet the energy production demands of their sport. A football
player who is able to generate tremendous power for 10-12 seconds
each play, over the course of an entire game, is just as well
conditioned as a fighter who can last all five rounds of championship
fight.
The reality is that each sport requires a different combination
of power (the ability to produce energy rapidly) and endurance
(the ability to produce energy for a long period of time). Some
sports require a great deal of power and low to moderate endurance,
while others require the exact opposite. Most sports, however,
tend to fall somewhere in between.
MMA is a brutal and mentally challenging sport in many ways because
it demands a combination of high power and relatively high endurance
at the same time. As I said in the introduction, there may be
many sports that require more power and many that demand greater
endurance, but very few that simultaneously require both in such
an unpredictable and unforgiving fashion.
Fundamentals of Conditioning
If you look above at the graph in Fig. 1, a graph of Rich Franklin’s
heart rate over 2 three minute rounds of sparring, it’s
easy to get a visual representation of what conditioning really
is. On the vertical axis you have heart rate, and on the horizontal
axis you have time in seconds. The higher the heart rate, the
greater the energy expenditure and of course the lower the heart
rate, the less energy is being expended.
(Fig 1) Rich Franklin Heart Rate Profile for 2x3 minute MMA Rounds
In order to use all your MMA skills through a 2-5 round fight,
your body has to produce the energy your muscles need to do their
work. At certain periods in the fight, you need higher power
output, and thus your muscles require greater amounts of energy,
as you throw a brutal combination of strikes, go for or defend
takedowns and submissions, etc. At other times, however, your
power output is lower and don’t need as much energy because
you’re just circling or using footwork, waiting to improve
position, throwing jabs for range, etc.
What this means is that throughout the course of a fight, sparring,
training, etc, your body must be able to produce a certain amount
of energy for your muscles to be able to do their job of producing
the movements required for your skills. Conditioning is a measure
of how well the systems of your body are able to create the energy
your muscles need to perform these skills. If the systems involved
in energy production can generate ATP (the fuel your muscles
run on) fast enough and for long enough for you to use your skills
effectively, then you have good conditioning. If they can’t….well
then you gas out.
Components of Conditioning
You can see in the chart above that there are six primary components
that determine your conditioning level and how well your body
can produce and utilize the energy necessary throughout a fight.
These are the components that make up the two sides of the conditioning
equation: energy production and energy utilization.
How much energy you are capable of producing, how fast you are
capable of producing it, and how effectively you can utilize
it is what determines the difference between gassing out quick
and being able to outlast your opponent from bell to bell.
Understanding this fundamental principle and how all of these
pieces fit together in the grand scheme of things is very important
and will give you a whole new perspective on how to develop your
conditioning from the inside out.
The Most Important Piece of the Conditioning Puzzle
Without question, the biggest area of confusion in conditioning
is the delicate energy system balancing act that takes place
in all of human performance. You see, the human body was designed
to be able to produce massive power for very short periods of
time, low to moderate power for very long periods of time, or
moderate power for moderate periods of time. This is just how
our bodies are biologically wired. There is no getting around
it no matter how hard you train.
What I mean by this is that you’ll never see someone run
a mile at the same speed they can run 100m sprint. You’ll
also never see the same person hold a world record in a strength
sports like Powerlifting and an endurance sports like Triathlons,
it’s just not physiologically possible.
The general and unbreakable rule of energy production is the
greater the power output, the shorter the duration. For example,
Usain Bolt averaged barely less than 24mph in his WR 100m sprint
time of 9.58 seconds, while the average velocity of the world
record for the mile is barely over 15mph. In other words, greater
power you produce, the less time you can produce it for.
In MMA, this principle is incredibly important to understand
because it means there will always be an ultimate trade-off between
power and endurance. This is the simple reason that heavyweights
will never have the endurance that the lightweight fighters have
and the lightweights will never have the strength and power of
the heavyweights, plain and simple.
In terms of your strength and conditioning program, this principle
means that you must find the delicate balance between aerobic
and anaerobic energy production. The aerobic system can produce
energy for much longer, i.e. has greater endurance, while the
two anaerobic systems can produce energy at a much higher rate,
but their endurance is very limited.
The balance between the development of your aerobic and anaerobic
energy systems ultimately dictates your level of explosive power
and your endurance. Going too far in the anaerobic direction
will lead to conditioning problems and likewise, too much in
the aerobic direction and you’ll lack explosive strength
and power. It’s simply not possible to develop both to the
highest levels so this trade-off must be realized and taken into
account.
The real key to a successful strength and conditioning program
is developing the delicate balance between power and endurance
necessary to be able to outpace and outwork your opponent from
bell to bell while being explosive enough to capitalize on their
mistakes and get the win at any point. Finding this balance takes
hard work, accurate testing and assessment, effective programming,
and a basic understanding of what conditioning for MMA is all
about.
Source: Sherdog
|
Ryan
Ford Signs with Aggression MMA, MFC Fires Back with Possible
Court Proceedings to Follow
by Damon
Martin
Jay Cutler and Josh McDaniels.
Albert
Haynesworth and Mike Shanahan.
Terrell
Owens and any team he’s ever played for.
Some
relationships in sports were just not meant to be, and that seems
to be the case between Canadian welterweight Ryan Ford and Mark
Pavelich, owner of Maximum Fighting Championships.
The
pair have now teamed up on two separate occasions to work together,
and it seems to have soured once again as Ford has exited the
MFC and signed on with another Canadian based promotion, Aggression
MMA.
Ford
first worked with the MFC in 2007 and went on to fight for them
for a total of 8 bouts before a falling out between the fighter
and the promotion saw him exit. He re-signed with MFC and buried
the hatchet with Pavelich and came back for two more fights,
but now he’s gone once again and this time the proceedings
may end up in court.
Aggression
MMA held a press conference on Friday to announce Ford’s
signing with the promotion and that he would headline their March
11 card in Edmonton. Beyond anything else, Ford sounded happy
that the dark cloud hanging over his head has seemingly been
lifted, at least for the time being.
“My
agent Steve Gavin was talking with them and set something up,
and now Aggression is the future for Ryan Ford,” Ford told
MMAWeekly.com
“They’re
good guys, straight up and straight forward with you, and they
want to take care of their fighters. Steve was dealing with my
contract and stuff and things weren’t going right, and that’s
why I’ve got an agent with me because before I was doing
everything for myself and I was kind of getting messed around,
so that’s what I pay him now to do.”
While
Ford sounds confident in his fight future, it appears MFC isn’t
giving up that easily. The promotion sent out a press release
on Friday with Mark Pavelich talking about the relationship that
had gone south with Ford, and how they anticipated court proceedings
to solve the issues if need be.
“Over
the past several weeks, it came to my attention that Ryan Ford,
a fighter under contract to the Maximum Fighting Championship
and Pavelich Sports Inc., was dissatisfied with his contract
and wished to leave my organization,” Pavelich wrote in
the release.
“Through
repeated conversations between myself, his agent Steve Gavin,
and our respective lawyers, Mr. Ford was left with three options:
Complete his contract which has two fights remaining, do not
compete and let his contract run out at the end of September
2011, (or) buy out his contract or have another organization
buy it out for him.”
MFC
also stated in the release that they had received no further
communication from Ford’s agent Steve Gavin or Ford himself
to reach resolution on the matter.
MMAWeekly.com
was able to obtain several pieces of literature exchanged between
the parties, and it appears a contract dispute was happening
for several months between Ford and the MFC, and to this date
no resolution has been reached.
Ford
maintains no ill will towards Pavelich or the MFC, and says he
just wants to move on with his career and concentrate on fighting.
“After
my second fight, I guess Steve had been talking with Mark Pavelich
and I know things weren’t going right with the contract.
I guess it just wasn’t working out so, I’ve got to
feed my family and I’ve got to fight, so we decided to get
on board with Aggression,” said Ford.
“I
don’t want to talk bad about the guy or anything. He does
what he does, and I’m going to do what I do and just being
there, there’s too many distractions heading up into a fight.
I’m just there to fight. I’m not there to be your No.
1 ticket seller, and all this stuff. My job is to fight, not
to push tickets.”
Ticket
sales apparently were at the heart of the matter between Ford
and the MFC, while the organization maintains that he simply
wanted out of his deal and they are willing to go to arbitration
to make sure everything is handled legally.
“As
part of his contract, there is an arbitration clause that can
be utilized, so if Mr. Ford wants to go in that direction to
find a buy-out price we will oblige. However, he will not be
allowed to just walk away from his contract for free,” Pavelich
wrote.
Pavelich
goes on to say that he notified the Edmonton Combative Sports
Commission to try and prevent Ford from fighting on any other
shows in the province. Ford’s agent, Steve Gavin, had a
very simple message for Pavelich regarding the press release,
which also stated Ford had claimed racism from the promotion
during this ordeal.
“Mark
in general should be much more careful about what he says to
people,” Gavin said.
For
the time being, Ford will train to fight in Aggression MMA on
March 11, but it appears the real battle might take place in
the courtroom between Ford’s representation and Mark Pavelich
and company at the MFC.
Source: MMA Weekly
|
Minotauro:
“I will cheer for Anderson” against Vitor Belfort
By Guilherme
Cruz
Anderson Silva and Vitor Belfort will battle for the UFC middleweight
belt on February 5th, and the Brazilian fans are split. Former
Pride and UFC heavyweight champion, Rodrigo “Minotauro”
Nogueira trained with Belfort in the past, but is Anderson’s
training partner nowadays, and analyzed the fight of the century
on a chat with TATAME.
“Vitor
is very good in striking, he’s good on the ground, has a
good Wrestling, he’s complete. Anderson is a genius of the
sport, has heart, he’s a showman. He can do a little bit
more than the regular fighters, he always has a new trick to
bring when he needs it”, analyzes Minotauro, revealing who
is his favorite on this bout. “The fans will like this fight
a lot and I’ll be there on the front seats. I already was
training partner of both fighters, but now I’m Anderson’s
and I cheer for him. I came to Brazil to find a way to help him
on his trainings”, concluded Rodrigo.
Source: Tatame
|
Jens
Pulver Ends Losing Streak at XFO 38
By FCF
Staff
Jens "Little Evil" Pulver likely put an end to further
retirement talk today, as the former UFC lightweight champ finally
put an end to his six fight losing streak in Woodstock, Illinois
last night, by tapping out Mike Lindquist in the first round.
The bout took place at Xtreme Fighting Organization 38 and leaves
Pulver's record at 23-14-1.
Source: Full Contact Fighter
|
Vitor
Belfort: five trainers versus Anderson
by Marcelo
Dunlop
Besides the article on Anderson Silva in the Sunday issue of
Brazil’s O Globo newspaper, Veja magazine also addressed
the bout between under-185-lb champion of the UFC and also-Brazilian
Vitor Belfort.
In
an article on the magazine’s website, Davi Correia did a
telephone interview with the black belt from Rio de Janeiro training
in Las Vegas for his fight at UFC 126 on the coming 5th.
The
article reminds us that Vitor, now thirty-three years old, won
his first UFC title at just nineteen years of age, as a heavyweight.
Check out some snippets from the interview:
How
is your training going?
My
preparation is going great, I’ve been training hard for
some time now with Randy Couture. I’m ready, in tip-top
shape. I train full time every day twice a day. I have a coach
just from punches, another for strategy, another just for Jiu-Jitsu,
and two for karate. You have to stay focused the whole time for
this job.
What
are Anderson Silva’s strengths?
He’s
a well-rounded athlete, a champion. He’s a fighter who has
all the skills a champion needs, but he’s a human being.
I define him as a winner. His life wasn’t easy, but now
MMA has provided a very good life for him. It’s a tremendous
pleasure to be able to fight an athlete like him, one so highly
prized. I respect him a lot.
What’s
your strategy for facing the current champion?
My
strategy is to fight. I’m a complete fighter who seeks the
knockout during standup exchanges and the submission or immobilization
on the ground. But when the time comes, that’s when we’ll
know the path the fight will take.
So
there’s nothing left to do between now and the fight?
I
just need to focus, every day, on what I have to do.
Have
you already planned what you’re going to do after the 5th?
If
the world were to end tomorrow, nothing would change in my life;
it doesn’t come down to just one result. If my life were
to change just because of one thing happening, it would mean
I’m not living my life properly. I’m not perfect, I
can’t manage to please everybody, that was never my objective.
I want to improve as a person with every passing day. My job
is to fight regardless of the result. What happens afterward
is in destiny’s hands, it’s beyond my control.
Does
fighting teach you anything in particular?
MMA
is a sport about overcoming limits. There’s intense physical
contact, but we have a lot of respect for our opponents. A lot
of people see it as a job, but to me it’s a school. You
learn to win, lose, and respect. It has taught me a lot of important
things: values, knowledge, overcoming adversity.
Do
your kids talk about fighting?
Davi,
who is 5 (Vitória is 3 and Kayra, 18 months), told my
wife, Joana Prado, the other day that he wants to be an actor.
I told him that everyone should pursue their own dreams, do their
best. The important thing to do is to study, be a good citizen,
be respectful.
Have
you ever thought of pursuing any other profession?
I’d
love to work in human resources or sports marketing. I have a
desire to study marketing after I finish fighting.
Source: Gracie Magazine
|
Joe
Warren to wrestle in Hungarian Grand Prix
Richard Mann
Bellator featherweight champion Joe Warren has agreed to represent
the U.S. at the Hungarian Grand Prix in Szobethely, Hungary on
March 5 and 6.
USA
Wrestling announced his participation in the Greco-Roman wrestling
tournament, when they released the U.S. international tour team
lineups on Monday. The Hungarian Grand Prix is considered one
of the most difficult wrestling tournaments in the world. Last
year, the U.S. sent 14 wrestlers and returned with zero medals.
Before
ever fighting MMA, Warren was a decorated international competitor
in wrestling. He has captured gold medals at three prestigious
international competitions, the 2006 Pan American Championships,
the 2007 World Cup and most importantly the 2006 World Championship.
Warren
last competed in Greco-Roman wrestling at the 2010 Kit Carson
Cup. There, he dropped matches to Jiang Sheng of China and Ryutaro
Matsumoto of Japan.
In
2010, Warren went 4-0. His first three wins over Eric Marriott,
Georgi Karakhanyan and Patricio Freire earned him Bellator’s
season two featherweight tournament championship. He then faced
off with the Joe Soto for the title. Warren exploded early in
the second round and won by knockout.
Source: Pro MMA Now
|
Falling
Action: Best and Worst of UFC's Fight for the Troops 2
By Ben
Fowlkes
On Saturday night the troops at Ft. Hood got a show worthy of
getting dressed up in camouflage for, and the UFC raised a considerable
chunk of change for brain trauma survivors -- a good night for
all outside of the cage.
Inside
the cage, however, we saw some stars rise while others went plummeting
down. Won't you join me below for a look at the biggest winners,
losers, and everything in between after the UFC's Fight for the
Troops 2 event?
Biggest
Winner: Melvin Guillard
His explosive striking put Dunham in desperation mode early on,
and he turned up the heat at just the right time. Guillard was
simply too fast and too powerful on Saturday night. Combine that
with his vastly improved takedown defense, and what you have
is a fighter who is suddenly a legitimate threat in the UFC's
155-pound division. We still don't know if he's good enough to
stay off his back against some of the top wrestlers in the weight
class, but at least the win over Dunham showed that he still
knows how to finish. We should be able to tell a lot about where
he is in the title contender picture by who the UFC gives him
next.
Biggest
Loser: Evan Dunham
From next big thing to the back of the pack with two straight
losses. The split decision loss to Sherk may have been questionable,
but this time Dunham looked extremely vulnerable on the feet
and couldn't get a takedown when he needed it most. Is it possible
he took Guillard too lightly, or just wasn't adequately prepared
for his speed? Maybe. If so, I'm guessing it's a mistake he won't
make again any time soon. Back to the drawing board.
Cecil
Peoples' Worst Nightmare: Pat Barry
The honorable judge Peoples once declared that leg kicks shouldn't
be scored as significantly as blows to the head, since leg kicks
don't end fights. Of course, leg kicks have ended fights before,
but that's not even the point. As Barry's shellacking of Joey
Beltran showed, even if chopping away at your opponent's thigh
doesn't put him away, it reduces him to a shadow of the fighter
he was when he started the bout. Somehow Beltran toughed it out
and managed to limp his way to a decision loss, which was impressive
in itself. Barry may not have been able to finish him, but when
a guy can take a kick to the head without suffering from anything
more severe than mild annoyance as a result, a decision win is
an outcome you may just have to live with.
Most
Compelling Case for a Title Shot: Mark Hominick
All he had to do to get a shot at UFC featherweight champ Jose
Aldo was win on Saturday night. Apparently not content to play
it safe and eek his way through, Hominick instead utterly destroyed
George Roop. Does a TKO victory over someone like Roop mean he's
necessarily in the same class as Aldo? Not at all, but at least
it helps to sell the idea that the UFC might have a credible
contender to give Aldo a test in his first bout inside the Octagon.
Whether that idea turns out to be more illusion than reality,
we'll have to wait and see.
Most
Impressive in Defeat: Cody McKenzie
Facing one of the most experienced fighters in the UFC, the 23-year-old
McKenzie did a surprisingly good job of holding his own early
on. He looked a bit awkward and somewhat wild at times, and he
ended the night with a refreshing little power nap thanks to
a rear naked choke from Edwards, but at least he showed that
he has more in his bag of tricks than just that guillotine. Obviously,
he's still a work in progress, but if he can close up some of
the holes in his game he'll be worth keeping an eye on.
Least
Impressive in Victory: Waylon Lowe
He did just enough to win the decision over Willamy Freire, though
he got so exhausted he looked as if he were just happy to make
it to the end of the fight. Lowe's style is effective, at least
against fighters who don't have a strong wrestling base, but
it's probably not making him many friends in the UFC's front
office. Maybe that doesn't matter to Lowe as long as he's able
to wrestle his way to a win. However, the cautionary tale of
Gerald Harris should serve as a reminder that if the UFC isn't
happy with what it sees from you in victory, it won't hesitate
to cut you right after a defeat.
Most
in Need of a Tougher Challenge: Matt Mitrione
The question of what to do with Meathead is a tricky one for
the UFC brass. He's got only four official pro fights to his
credit, which makes throwing him in against big name heavyweights
seem almost sadistic, at least on paper. Then again, this is
a former NFL player with uncommon athleticism, so maybe he could
stand to be put on a faster track. His demolition of Tim Hague
– much like his wins over Kimbo Slice and Marcus Jones –
only proved that when matched against fighters who aren't quite
good enough for the UFC, he can expose them as such. Now it's
time to put him against some tougher opponents and find out what
he can really do.
Most
Surprising: Matt Wiman
Of all the guys to come off season five of "The Ultimate
Fighter," Wiman has to be one of the most shocking success
stories. He bullied and battered Cole Miller on Saturday to bring
his current win streak to three, and then ingratiated himself
to fans by declaring afterwards that he'd left his TV on at home
so his pets could watch him fight. While I suspect that it might
be animal abuse to force any living creature to watch episode
upon episode of '1,000 Ways to Die,' it makes it almost impossible
not to like Wiman. It should be interesting to see just how far
he can go in the UFC on aggression and charisma alone.
Source: MMA Fighting
|
Trevor
Prangley: "Roger (Gracie)’s Never Really Been Hit"
by Nick
Thomas
15
comments Email Print."(Roger Gracie) has been on the world
stage in jiu-jitsu so many times that I don’t think (my
fighting experience) will be as big of an advantage as people
might think.But Roger’s never really been hit, and I’m
going to put it on him."
"I
just intend to not give him the opportunity to get a submission.
I’m going to win this fight, and I have to win it because
it’s a "do or die" situation for me. Roger’s
really early in his career, so a loss for him won’t be that
devastating, but for me it’s devastating. And so I’m
not going to allow it to happen. So the fans can expect a win
from me."
-- Check out the full interview with Trevor Prangley at Strikeforce.com.
Trevor Prangley (23-6-1)
Win Keith Jardine - Decision (Split) Shark Fights
Loss Tim Kennedy - Submission (Rear-Naked Choke) Strikeforce
Draw Karl Amoussou - Technical Draw (Accidental Thumb to Amoussou's
Eye) Strikeforce
Roger Gracie (3-0)
Win Kevin Randleman - Submission (Rear-Naked Choke) Strikeforce
Win Yuki Kondo - Submission (Rear-Naked Choke) Sengoku
Win Ron Waterman - Submission (Armbar) Bodog Fight
Source: Bloody Elbow
|
Will
Ribeiro, a Life Lesson
by Marcelo Alonso
Will
Ribeiro has always lived amidst drama. Now, he lives in a wheelchair
and financial turmoil stemming from the December 2008 motorcycle
accident that nearly took his life.
Born
Feb. 17, 1983, Ribeiro grew up struggling in Campo Grande, Brazil,
a suburb of Rio de Janeiro known for its fruit and livestock.
Ribeiro and his three siblings were raised by his grandfather
and mother, never having known their father. That tight-knit
family was fractured seven years ago, when Ribeiro’s mother,
who was HIV positive, passed away.
It
was a devastating blow but only strengthened the resolve of Ribeiro
and his siblings. Living with his brother, Wladimir, and sister,
Natalia, the trio shared household bills to stay afloat. The
hope was that the 20-year-old Ribeiro would go on to become a
successful prizefighter and deliver the family from insolvency.
It
was a difficult road, but it seemed to pay off. Ribeiro made
the Brazilian national boxing team, emerged as a top bantamweight
prospect in Brazil and eventually signed with World Extreme Cagefighting
just as the 135-pound division was taking off.
Ribeiro
carried a 9-1 record into WEC and had stopped seven of his opponents.
In his WEC debut in June 2008, he won a split decision over former
champion Chase Beebe. In his second bout six months later, he
fell short against Brian Bowles, as he was submitted in the third
round. Seven months later, Bowles was WEC champion himself.
Ribeiro
did not come back from U.S. with a victory, but he did return
with a gift for his friend and training partner, Marcio Marreta:
the gloves he wore when he fought Bowles just nights before.
However, it was on the way to see Marreta that Ribeiro’s
life took a shocking turn.
“Since
Marcio lives near, I just took my helmet on my arm,” recalls
Ribeiro. “That’s when two taxis came racing at the
exit of the Noel Rosa tunnel and I crashed. I ran into the back
of one, and was projected about three feet to the edge of the
sidewalk, suffering head trauma.”
“The
doctors said he was lucky that the rescue was quick and that
the medical team was available at the Andarai Hospital when he
arrived,” says older brother Wladimir. “Being a top
athlete, he was in good health; it was a fusion of situations
that, thanks to God, worked out in his favor.”
From
that moment on, both Ribeiro and Wladimir were fighters.
The
trauma from the accident was significant. Surgeons had to remove
part of Ribeiro’s brain, as well as 30 percent of his skull
on the right side. He continues to wear baseball caps to mask
the damage. So crushed was that portion of his skull that a bone
fragment dug into his right eye, leaving Ribeiro nearly blind
on that side. Most of the right side of his body remains numb
and partially paralyzed.
A
silicon prosthesis has been produced specially for Ribeiro and
will be inserted during a forthcoming cranioplasty. There is
also some hope that doctors will be able to help Ribeiro recover
some vision in his right eye.
As
Ribeiro, now confined to a wheelchair, suffers through the long,
arduous hours of rehabilitation, Wladimir has dedicated his life
to his brother’s recovery. Neither of them has any kind
of medical insurance.
Andre
"Dede" Pederneiras“I make $300 U.S. a month at
my job, and my sister, Natalia, just has a part-time job, which
gives her $230,” says Wladimir.
Another
vital player in the recovery of Will Ribeiro is Andre Pederneiras.
The Nova União leader promotes Shooto Brazil, saw Ribeiro
rise through the ranks of Brazil in his shows and has continued
to donate the proceeds of Shooto Brazil events to his recovery.
“Andre
Pederneiras has helped us a lot. Without him, really, our lives
would be a thousand times worse. Thanks to him, we are able to
survive,” says Ribeiro.
Two
years after the accident, Ribeiro still struggles to talk. However,
the emotion when he speaks of Pederneiras is clear.
“Today,
thanks to Andre Pederneiras, I have dignity and respect. He always
helped me from the start, always did everything for me, was always
by my side, never left me,” he adds. “I am eternally
grateful for everything he does for me. He became a father that
I never had.”
“Will
was brought to my academy by the master, Luiz Alves, to train
MMA about three years ago. He is such a nice guy that soon, he
became friends with everybody,” remembers Pederneiras.
The
Nova União head is quick to downplay his charitable deeds.
“About
how much and why I helped him, I’d rather not comment about
that. I just did what I think I could do for him,” Pederneiras
adds.
However,
Pederneiras does share a thought which is difficult to appreciate
without understanding the poverty in which many Brazilian MMA
fighters are mired. It is common for local fighters to travel
by motorbike, especially as many of them make modest incomes
as “motoboys” -- motorcycle delivery men -- to supplement
their meager fight purses.
“An
athlete can’t ride a motorcycle,” Pederneiras explains.
“I know it’s hard, because most of them don’t
make enough money to buy a car, but I really think it’s
better to take the bus.”
Nobody
close to Ribeiro has any belief he will ever fight again; his
condition simply would not allow for it. However, they remain
hopeful he can return to the fight world.
“The
doctors have said he will never fight again; he can’t take
more blows to his head and also lost a bit of brain matter, hampering
his movements. Half his body is partially paralyzed,” says
Wladimir. “Our daily battle today is in physiotherapy, where
my brother tries to move his leg to at least be able to walk
again, to have his everyday life and be able to return to give
boxing lessons.”
That
small dream is slowly being realized. When Wladimir ran into
Ivan Blaz at a Shooto Brazil event, Blaz, a captain in Rio’s
special operations battalion BOPE, was moved by the story of
the Ribeiro family’s plight. Blaz saw Will’s physiotherapy
and thought the former bantamweight standout could still offer
something as an instructor.
“Blaz
has a social project inside the police headquarters, especially
for poorer children. Will goes there twice a week with two other
instructors to give boxing classes,” says Wladimir. “Will
is a great example to all the people with a prejudice against
people in wheelchairs. We are winning one battle each day, step
by step.”
Given
the growth of MMA, Wladimir hopes his brother’s story will
prevent future misfortune for athletes in similar situations.
“With
the level that MMA is at today, I believe that the events should
have a way to monitor and create a type of union of MMA fighters,
or something that allows athletes a health plan, or something
to give them a decent quality of life when they retire,”
says Wladimir. “After all, those guys are the stars of the
event. Thanks to them, MMA is so successful today.”
“What
will be the lives of those athletes who have dedicated their
life to this sport but can’t earn enough money for a decent
future?” he asks.
Ribeiro’s
tragedy will undoubtedly force many to reflect on this sport
and the athletes who get left behind amidst the celebration of
its unceasing growth.
Alan
Oliveira contributed to this report.
Source: Sherdog
|
Is
Matt Mitrione Destined To Become UFC’s Heavyweight Version
Of Dominick Cruz?
by Ken
Pishna
“I started off a little slower than I wanted to, but I’m
pretty damn athletic man, second-most athletic heavyweight around,”
said Matt Mitrione after his win over Tim Hague at UFC Fight
For The Troops 2, shooting a sly sideways grin at training partner
Pat Barry. “As a result, I need to make people fight in
my game.”
That he did on Saturday night, stuffing Hague’s takedown
attempts and working him with a solid jab. Mitrione dropped the
Canadian midway through the first round of their fight with a
straight left hand then finished him off with strikes for the
TKO stoppage.
Can
you really call a 2:39 stoppage a slow start?
Mitrione
does, but that’s because has lofty expectations for himself.
“For
this fight, I wanted to emulate Dominick Cruz,” he said
after the fight. “I wanted to be the 265-pound Dominick
Cruz. I love the way you fight brother, you’re elusive,
and I wanted to be just like that.”
Cruz
is the UFC’s first 135-pound champion, known for his unorthodox
and perpetual movement in the Octagon, attacking from all angles.
“He’s
so elusive man. He uses his athleticism to make everybody else
change their game. Scotty Jorgensen is a tough, tough little
fellow and Dominick made him look like a child, took him down
at will, head strikes coming from every angle, finished with
beautiful leg kicks,” said Mitrione, recounting Cruz’s
recent title defense.
“And
the way that Dominick’s game plan is and the way that he
makes everybody so uncomfortable with his movement because it’s
so herky-jerky and so unpredictable. I love the way he fights.
I respect it. I told him before hand, I’m going to try and
fight like you.”
Much
of Mitrione’s athleticism comes from his time as a professional
football player, having played for the New York Giants and Minnesota
Vikings in the NFL. He’s only four fights into his mixed
martial arts career, but that athleticism, while not quite up
to par with Cruz’s yet, has allowed Mitrione to find success
in the UFC when most fighters of his experience would be trying
to fight their way up on regional promotions.
Mitrione
is still in a highly exploratory phase of his growth, not quite
sure where he stands in the overall scheme of the sport.
“This
fight was the same as my last fight with Joey Beltran, so I can’t
say where this really puts me as far as my progression as a martial
artist. As a martial artist, I don’t really know where the
hell I am because I haven’t really had the chance to capitalize
or really see where my ground game is,” he assessed. “I
don’t really know where my progression is. I know as a stand-up
guy I can really let ‘em fly.”
Not
that Mitrione is looking to get into a wrestling match anytime
soon.
“I’m
not asking for a wrestler, I’m just saying I don’t
exactly know where (my ground game) is. I prefer to trade leather,
I’d prefer to let my shins and my hands fly.”
Source: MMA Weekly
|
Knowing
He Can’t Please Everybody, Pat Barry Gets Cranky Fight Out
Of His System
by Ken
Pishna
A win is a win is a win… right?
Not
to some people it’s not. And that’s something Pat Barry
knows all too well.
Case
in point, his win over Joey Beltran at Saturday night’s
UFC Fight For The Troops 2 at Fort Hood in Texas. He started
hearing the criticisms almost as soon as the fight was over.
“I’ve
already gotten bad things said to me as soon as I got out. ‘Hey
man, good fight, but what happened in round one?’ I’m
getting bad text messages already, but that’s just gonna
happen,” Barry said at Saturday’s post-fight press
conference.
“I’m
still hearing about kickboxing matches I lost 10 years ago. It’s
never gonna go away.”
Barry
appeared to have a chip on his shoulder coming into the fight
with Beltran, not because of Beltran, but because he received
a heavy dose of criticism after his UFC 115 bout with Mirko “Cro
Cop” Filipovic.
Barry
made no secret of the fact that he was a huge fan of Cro Cop’s
leading up to their fight. Many people saying his starry eyes
blinded his performance against his Croatian idol.
“It’s
just life in general. It wasn’t just the last fight,”
explained Barry, deflecting the idea that the Cro Cop fight set
him in a bad mood for Beltran. “Everybody has to have a
bad day eventually. It’s just certain things, just builds
up, builds up, builds up. I haven’t had a cranky fight in
a long time.”
The
criticism on Saturday night was primarily over the first-round
action, or lack thereof. Most people expected Barry and Beltran
to come out blasting each other from the opening bell… but
remember folks, this is a fight, not a round of Rock ‘Em
Sock ‘Em Robots.
“Statistically,
on paper, I’m the better stand-up guy. He’s the better
wrestler, jiu-jitus, maybe all-around guy, but I’m the better
stand-up guy. So when the bell rang, he walked backwards. That’s
a trap. So I stood on this blue circle in the middle of the Octagon
and you’re gonna have to come to me. But for the first part
of the fight, he didn’t come to me,” Barry recounted.
“I
could have either gone to him, breaking my game plan, or he could
have walked straight at me, breaking his. It’s kind of a
toss-up, so I’m sorry it kind of turned out to be a slow
start, but we both had a strategy and neither one of us wanted
to falter.”
Barry,
as the fight progressed, began chopping Beltran down with bone
crushing leg kicks. The effect was visible, Beltran’s movement
slowing and a limp exaggerating as the fight wore on. But Beltran
kept pressing on, never succumbing to his damaged leg.
“Joey
Beltran is a zombie. I kicked him in the face 300 times. I think
I beat his legs to death and he was going to keep coming no matter
what,” Barry commented. ”If we had two more rounds,
that dude would be hopping around on one leg. That dude is a
monster.”
It
takes two to tango, and Beltran wasn’t willing to give Barry
the flashy finish that many so desperately wanted.
“No
matter what, some people are just gonna hate your guts. It’s
impossible to make everyone happy,” stated Barry.
“Am
I past that? I’m fine with it. Am I still gonna hear about?
Of course, but that’s just how it goes.”
Source: MMA Weekly
|
Trainer:
Guillard ‘Like a Video Game’ in Win Over Dunham
by Mike
Whitman
The
right hand that Melvin Guillard used to fold up Evan Dunham in
the main event of UFC “Fight for the Troops 2” was
no accident.
In
fact, the shot was planned and executed precisely, says Guillard’s
striking coach Mike Winkeljohn.
“Melvin
and I constantly worked on coming from the outside and getting
that slight angle on him, and hitting him with that right hand,”
Winkeljohn told Sherdog.com on Saturday night. “Melvin has
always had that [speed]. That’s his God-given ability. That
was the plan, to knock the guy out, and we’re real happy.”
Guillard
defied the bookmakers on Saturday night, earning a first-round
knockout over the favored Dunham with laser-like hand speed.
Mere seconds into the contest, Guillard staggered his opponent
with a straight right hand that would spell the beginning of
the end for Dunham. Though the native Oregonian attempted valiantly
to close the distance and use his potent jiu-jitsu game, Guillard
fended off the takedown attempts before unleashing another perfect
right hand that floored Dunham. Guillard followed up with a hard
combination and finished the fight with knees from the Thai plum.
“[Guillard]
was just like a video game tonight. He basically did everything
he was told,” said Winkeljohn. “He’s actually
a very intelligent fighter, and he’s coming into his own
instead of letting his emotions take hold.”
Winkeljohn
agreed when asked if Guillard’s recent string of success,
including three-straight victories, could be attributed to the
scientific approach and mental preparation for which Winkeljohn
and partner Greg Jackson are famous.
“I
think so. We’re fine tuning those gifts that he has so that
he can be in the right place in the right time. But definitely,
mentally, [it’s about] not bailing on [the game plan] if
he gets in the wrong position,” said Winkeljohn.
Though
Winkeljohn asserted that the technique would not be named after
“The Young Assassin,” as Guillard joked it would in
the cage following his win, the vaunted striking coach claims
that the process behind the technique comes down to more than
simply throwing the punch.
“Melvin
has the confidence now that, if he gets in a bad spot, he can
get back up. And now he’s letting his hands go,” said
Winkeljohn. “It’s a combination of being in the right
place at the right time and understanding [your opponent’s]
footwork. Melvin picked up on it right away. We've been talking
about it. We’ve seen it on tape. So he knew that when Evan
stepped a certain direction, that it was time to let [his hands]
go.”
As
for what comes next, Winkeljohn agrees with Guillard’s assessment
that the 27-year-old has gold in his future.
“I’m
good with Melvin fighting anybody right now. His confidence is
at an all-time high. There are some great fighters in the division,
but I think that Melvin can be in there with anybody. I think
he’s ready for a title shot.”
Source: Sherdog
|
UFC
'Fight for the Troops' report cardEmail Print Comments5 By Josh
Gross
ESPN.com
Josh
Hedges/Zuffa LLC/Getty Images
Pat Barry scored high marks for his kickboxing -- but not much
else.
Before
we get to grading fighters, let's first offer perfect marks to
the following groups and people for a cause that, the more I
learn about it, the more pressing it feels. So, an A+ goes to
the folks at Zuffa, Spike TV, the Intrepid Fallen Heroes Fund,
Iraq and Afghanistan Veterans of America, the troops, of course,
and to anyone who took time to donate their hard-earned money
to a noble cause.
Tweet,
tweet
Don't miss a moment of the latest MMA coverage from around the
world. Follow us on Twitter and stay informed.
As
many mixed martial artists participating on the event said prior
to fight night, the opportunity to compete in and of itself was
an honor. For that reason, F's were verboten for Saturday's "Fight
for the Troops" at Fort Hood.
Simply
for the effort of competing in front of a military-only audience
in hopes of raising awareness and money in the name of traumatic
brain injury, I didn't have the heart.
From
A+ to a D, the evening's report card:
UFC
"Fight for the Troops" report card
Mark Hominick
Mark Hominick's night could not have gone better. The featherweight
overwhelmed George Roop at just 1 minute, 28 seconds of Round
1 to not only notch an impressive win but, more importantly,
secure No. 1 contender status against UFC 145-pound champion
Jose Aldo at UFC 129 in Toronto. The 28-year-old Hominick (20-8),
an efficient striker whose punching is as clean as anyone's in
MMA, will need to be as sharp against Aldo as he was against
Roop to have any shot against the top featherweight in MMA.
Melvin Guillard
The turnaround continues. Melvin Guillard (27-8-2) blasted through
highly regarded lightweight Evan Dunham to cap the successful
event at 2 minutes, 58 seconds of Round 1. There's no debating
the positive strides Guillard, 27, has taken since moving his
training camp to Greg Jackson's camp in New Mexico. He fights
with patience now and is dangerous for more than physical attributes
like speed and athleticism -- which he has in deep reserves.
Up the ladder goes Guillard.
Matt Wiman
Fighting with a tenaciousness that can be tough to match when
it's coupled with momentum, Matt Wiman simply dominated the technically
dangerous yet physically dim Cole Miller. Wiman had his opportunities
to find a stoppage, yet couldn't do enough to put Miller away.
For that he loses out on higher marks, but overall it was an
outstanding effort from the 27-year-old Oklahoman on Saturday.
It would be right of the UFC to match Wiman (13-5) against Mac
Danzig again after their unfortunate result in June.
Matt Mitrione
"Meathead" Matt Mitrione lifted his MMA record to 4-0
with a first-round pummeling of Tim Hague. A product of "The
Ultimate Fighter" Season 10, Mitrione is still making the
shift from football player to fighter, and that inexperience
shows when he's in the cage. He's athletic enough to be an intriguing
prospect for some, but I've yet to see anything that indicates
here's a fighter who could, at the age of 32, work his way to
the top of the heavyweight division.
Rani Yayha
It's difficult to know if Rani Yayha's impressive decision over
Mike Thomas Brown is an indication he's turned a corner in his
career -- if he's fighting with more physicality and is ready
to meet the challenge of top contenders again, or if Brown, a
former champion, is on his last legs. Either way, Yayha (16-6),
one of the most technically advanced grapplers in MMA, was solid
as he ended a two-fight skid.
Yves Edwards
Veteran Yves Edwards showed the value of experience as he choked
Cody McKenzie cold in the second round for the 40th victory of
his 14-year career. Edwards, 34, looks fresh, but does that mean
he has enough to make a run at lightweight, where the top end
of the division is younger, faster and stronger? Probably not.
But it's still nice to see one of the first good lightweights
in MMA continue to make an impression.
Pat Barry
Pat Barry gets credit for battling it out with a warrior like
Joey Beltran. No doubt about it, Barry doesn't mind a scrap.
But he remains so limited as a mixed martial artist, it's tough
to take wins like his three-round decision over Beltran as any
indication of things to come. Barry (6-2) will continue to struggle
when matched against grapplers -- which the UFC has done a good
job of helping him avoid -- and has shown an inconsistency of
effort and effectiveness during fights. Still, a win is a win.
Joey Beltran
Tough guy. Limited skills. There's not much to say about the
"Mexicutioner" Joey Beltran when evaluating a future
in the heavyweight division. He doesn't have one. But Beltran
(12-5) could continue to get fights in the UFC because of his
effort. Just don't pretend that his presence in the Octagon lends
any support to the notion that only the best fight there.
George Roop
From the penthouse to the outhouse. Cliché all the way,
but that's gotta be how George Roop (11-7-1) felt after going
from knocking out Chan Sung Jung with a head kick to being buzzed
by Hominick's punches. A long fighter for the featherweight division,
Roop is an adequate striker -- more of a kicker and clinch fighter
than a puncher -- but not much else.
Cody McKenzie
Cody KcKenzie took a major step up in the caliber of his opposition
and lost for the first time in his career. Still, McKenzie (12-1)
showed determination during almost two full rounds in the cage
against Yves Edwards. McKenzie offers limited striking, but he's
crafty on the floor, and with his personality he's the kind of
fighter who could stick around the UFC alternating wins and losses
and, perhaps, one day improving to the point where he'd be considered
a threat against better opposition. Long way to go, though.
Evan Dunham
An utterly disappointing effort from a fighter many tabbed to
make a run at the UFC lightweight title. Evan Dunham (11-2) showed
a stout chin early, yet in the end it couldn't hold up to Melvin
Guillard's striking and he was put away in less than three minutes.
Prospects remain high for a talented grappler, but it appears
the 29-year-old has trouble against a better breed of athlete
-- which does not bode well for the rest of his career.
Tim Hague
Like Beltran, Tim Hague (12-5) is a heavyweight without a real
future in the UFC. He simply looked lost against Mitrione, which
says a lot about him as a fighter. I wouldn't be surprised if
this was the last opportunity Hague earned in the Octagon, though
heavyweight is thin and Zuffa will always need bodies.
Cole Miller
The most disappointing effort of the night came from someone
who rarely disappoints, even in defeat. Cole Miller (17-5) had
no answer for Wiman's aggression, and, really, looked like a
kid in there against an adult. Always a danger to find some submission
from a unique position, Miller, 26, has room for improvement
as he fills out and gains strength. But on this night, coming
off an impressive win over prospect Ross Pearson and with a chance
to establish momentum at 155, Miller fell flat.
Mike Brown
Fighting for the second time in three weeks couldn't have helped.
But Brown committed to fighting and paid the price with a fight
that had many fans questioning what the former WEC featherweight
champion has left to offer. At the age of 35, with more than
30 bouts on his record, it's perfectly reasonable to wonder whether
Brown (24-8) is capable of establishing himself again. In the
midst of a 2-4 streak since losing the title to Jose Aldo, odds
are against any kind of comeback.
Source: ESPN
|
“Brock
Lesnar’s weak point is Cigano’s strong point”
By Guilherme
Cruz
Boxing
coach of former boxing world champion Arcelino “Popó”
Freitas and MMA heavyweight sensation Junior “Cigano“
dos Santos, Luis Carlos Dórea was chosen by the athlete
to be part of his coaching team on the reality show The Ultimate
Fighter, and he’s excited for his new “job”. On
an exclusive chat with TATAME, Dórea commented the change
of opponent Cigano had, with Brock Lesnar replacing the heavyweight
champion Cain Velasquez, and pointed Cigano’s advantages
for their bout, besides commenting the final trainings of Anderson
Silva for his title fight with Vitor Belfort.
How
did you get Cigano’s news about TUF? What are your expectations?
It’ll
be pretty nice. We have done an entire work for a title fight,
but Cain Velasquez got hurt. These things happen on a sport,
it just happens. I agree with this only-fight-if-you’re-100%
thing, you can’t enter the octagon if you’re not 100%.
I’m on the fight’s world for 31 years and I know it
happens. Cigano was a little upset, his last fight was in August
and he wanted to fight, but I happened God knows what he does,
and a great thing has come to us: joining the reality show’s
cast, to be able to teach what we know, and then fight Brock
Lesnar, a really respected former champion. He’ll always
be trained, but he’ll always want to learn more. The expectations
are the greatest. He went for the United States today, but I’m
here to help Anderson Silva, and after his fight with Vitor,
I’ll go there.
Did
you participate of TUF when Minotauro was the head coach?
No,
I think Cigano was about to fight and I couldn’t help him.
I went to the house, trained Rodrigo for his bout with Frank
Mir, but I didn’t help the guys from the house out .
And
how do you see this bout between Cigano and Lesnar?
It’ll
be a great fight. Brock Lesnar is strong, but we know where he
hides his weakness. Cigano has always faced the bests, since
he debuted against Werdum, he has only confronted top athletes.
I trust he’ll keep trying to get the KO. Brock is very strong,
a wrestler, but we know his weakness. His weak point is exactly
CIgano’s strong point: striking. We know it’ll be a
great show, Cigano will go for the knockout and he has all weapons
to get there with a win and keep his journey to the belt.
Are
you helping Anderson for his bout with Belfort? How the champion
is doing for this next fight?
Anderson
is doing just fine, he’s dedicating himself fulltime. He’s
much disciplined, he’s doing each step of the trainings
at a time. He’s trained for it, and that’s why he’s
the best currently. It’ll be a great fight. The whole team
is to be congratulates, everybody is working hard for it. He’ll
get there very fast and strong.
As
a Boxing expert, how do you analyze Vitor’s game against
Anderson?
I’ve
trained Vitor, I like him, he has a privileged technical condition,
but Anderson is on a better moment. He has fought five-round-fights
many times and he’s technically pretty good too, he has
the power on his hands. It’ll be the fight of the century,
and the good thing is that both athletes are Brazilians. Vitor
has a great technique, but Anderson’s a phenomenon. He can
punch you walking forwards of backwards, when he’s defending
himself or counter attacking. Vitor is talented on Boxing, but
Anderson is better conditioned than him.
Source: Tatame
|
Moks
Relinquishes M-1 MW Title to Compete at Welterweight
By FCF
Staff
Only
weeks removed from Rafal Moks' 17 second submission victory over
Magomed Sultanakhmedov, which handed the Polish fighter the M-1
Global middleweight belt, the promotion has announced that he
is relinquishing the title to compete at 170lbs. Moks will begin
his 2011 campaign against welterweight Rashid Magomedov, at the
upcoming, March 5th, M-1 Challenge XXIII card in Moscow, Russia.
“With
the success that Moks had in the face of much larger opponents,
making the decision to return to his natural weight class had
to be extremely tough,” Evgeni Kogan, Director of Operations
for M-1 Global was quoted saying in the announcement. “Moks
has volunteered to vacate the middleweight title which will be
fought for later this year. This was a decision that Moks and
his camp believe directs his career down the proper path. M-1
supports it and we wish him continued success.”
Moks
went undefeated in 2010 by winning four straight bouts, three
of which came via first round submission. The former champion
hasn’t lost since November, 2008, when he was stopped by
Ismail Cetinkaya while competing for Fight Club Berlin.
M-1
Challenge XXIII will be broadcast live on the official M-1 Global
site and will be hosted by Moscow’s Crocus City Arena.
Here
is the line-up to date:
Under
Card Bouts:
Rashid Magomedov (7-1) vs. Rafal Moks (6-2) Welterweight
Magomed Sultanakhmedov (28-5) vs. Plinio Cruz (5-3) Middleweight
Daniel Weichel (25-7) vs. Magomedrasul Khasbulaev (16-4) Lightweight
Kenny ‘Deuce’ Garner (5-3) vs. Alexander Volkov (9-2-1)
Heavyweight
Championship
Bout
Heavyweight
Division:
Guram Gugenishvili, M-1 Challenge Champion (10-0) vs.
Maxim Grishin, M-1 Selection Eastern Europe 2010 champion (7-4)·
Additional
bouts to be announced shortly
Source: Full Contact Fighter
|
Anderson:
“I’m no psychic who can foresee the result of the fight”
by Marcelo
Dunlop
Anderson Silva is still training hard to not leave his fans frustrated
in his fight against Vitor Belfort the coming 5th in Las Vegas,
at UFC 126. That doesn’t mean there aren’t a lot of
people left frustrated after training with him, as Brazil’s
O Globo newspaper revealed this Sunday.
Reporter
and MMA enthusiast Ary Cunha covered a training session with
the UFC middleweight champion at the Nogueira brothers’
training center and witnessed the effort (in vain) of Jungle
Fight champion Erick Silva in trying to land a punch to the face
of the fighter who hasn’t lost in his twelve appearances
in the octagon.
Meanwhile,
Vitor Belfort has also been hard at training, in Las Vegas, and
Anderson knows it. Asked by Ary Cunha how he imagines the fight
will be, Anderson fires back with an excuse response: “If
I were Mother Dinah (a psychic), I’d be able to foresee
that. Since I’m not, I’m getting ready for any situation,
whether on the ground or standing,” said the thirty-five-year-old
black belt. “I’m like find wine: the older, the better.”
Source: Gracie Magazine
|
No
Need to Hide Game Plan for Strikeforce Champ Jacare Souza
By Mike
Chiappetta
Ask most fighters about their plans or strategies for an upcoming
fight and you'll usually get a vague response or no response
at all, but don't count Strikeforce middleweight champion Ronaldo
"Jacare" Souza among that group.
When
Souza was asked this week about his planned method of attack
against upcoming challenger Robbie Lawler, he had no qualms about
tipping his hand.
"The
plan is to use my jiu-jitsu to bring to the fight," he said
through an interpreter. "I don't know how or when I'll bring
it to the game but I'm well-prepared, my cardio's up and I'm
ready to go there and show that I'm 100 percent ready to go in
and fight. But the plan is when I see the right time, bring jiu-jitsu
to the table and use it."
Of
course, that shouldn't come as too big a surprise to Lawler or
anyone else who is going to step into the cage with Souza, who
is considered by many to be one of the best jiu-jitsu practitioners
in the world, and has 10 career wins via tapout.
Souza
(13-2, 1 no contest) has won several major jiu-jitsu and submission
grappling championships, including the prestigious Abu Dhabi
Combat Club championship in 2005.
As
a result, for a time, he was thought to be a one-dimensional
fighter reliant on his slick jiu-jitsu, but over the last few
years, improvements in striking and wrestling (he calls his takedowns
"Jacare takedowns") have added new dimensions to his
game, making him a matchup nightmare for many opponents.
His
upcoming foe Lawler represents the best pure striker he's faced
since suffering his last loss, against Gegard Mousasi, and on
a rare upkick knockout, no less.
Since
that time, perhaps the biggest improvements have come with his
striking. In recent wins over Tim Kennedy and Joey Villasenor,
he's more than held his own in the standup. It's an element that
will no doubt be tested even further against Lawler, a powerful
southpaw who's made a living with his thunderous left hand, and
boasts 17 of his 20 career wins by knockout.
"I
have a great team behind me," said Souza, whose fight will
serve as the co-main event of Saturday's Strikeforce: Diaz vs.
Cyborg. "We take it very serious. I train a lot my cardio,
my explosiveness. I've been training a lot of boxing, how to
walk around the cage and the ring. I know he's a good boxer but
I'm prepared to go there and fight. So pretty much I'm doing
everything necessary to go there and hopefully end the fight
before the fifth round."
In
Lawler's last fight, he knocked Matt Lindland unconscious in
just 50 seconds. In the past though, Lawler (20-6, 1 no contest)
has been vulnerable in the ground game. He's been tapped out
by Jake Shields, Jason "Mayhem" Miller and Evan Tanner,
and the general consensus is that Souza's jiu-jitsu is a level
above those men.
Souza
admits that Lawler ranks among the toughest opponents he's faced,
but with his well-rounded game and improved conditioning, he's
confident of victory.
"Every
fight is a challenge for me," he said. "He's a very
tough guy. I know it's going to be a good battle, but I'm getting
ready to fight. I'm just looking one fight at a time. I'll be
ready to go there and show what I'm going to have and come out
as a champion."
Source: MMA Fighting
|
Strikeforce
is outsourcing it's contender fights
by agentsmith
Until
a few days ago, Paul Daley was said to be fighting on the "Strikeforce:
Columbus" card on March 5th, and it was presumed that a
win there would earn him a shot at the winner of the Diaz vs
Cyborg fight this Saturday (hint: it'll be Diaz). Well it looks
like Scott Coker couldn't find an opponent for Daley or Daley's
being difficult as usual, because Fighters Only reports that
he'll instead headline a "BAMMA" event in England on
February 26th against Deep champion Yuya Shirai (20-8).
As
if postponing Paul's Strikeforce return isn't bad enough, Coker
announced in a conference call on Monday that Daley's title shot
now depends on him winning the Shirai fight. That's right, a
Strikeforce title shot will be determined by a fight outside
of Strikeforce. Not that Shirai isn't necessarily as good as
whoever Coker would have dug up, but still... since when do promoters
use other promoters to build their title challengers for them?
And why couldn't this fight happen in Strikeforce anyway?
Coker
says if Daley loses, "the deck’s gonna get reshuffled,"
which begs the question: to what? What else are they gonna do,
bring up Tyron Woodley from the Challengers shows and give him
a shot? Pretend 2010 didn't exist for Marius Zaromskis? It'd
be better to let Daley sit on the shelf than to risk throwing
away your #1 contender like this.
Source: Fight Linker
|
4
Bouts Added to February Strikeforce Cards
by Mike
Whitman
Strikeforce
has added two bouts to each of its upcoming February events.
At
“Fedor vs. Silva” on Feb. 12, Josh LaBerge will take
on Anthony Leone and Jason McLean will square off against Kevin
Roddy in two preliminary featherweight duels. Meanwhile, at Strikeforce
Challengers 14 on Feb. 18, Erik Apple will go toe-to-toe with
Ryan Larson at welterweight, while Bryan Travers will meet Carlo
Prater in a 155-pound affair.
Sherdog.com
on Friday confirmed the Feb. 12 bouts with sources close to the
fighters. The Feb. 18 contests were confirmed by Strikeforce
representative Mike Afromowitz on Saturday. The matchups were
first reported by MMAJunkie.com and MMA.tv, respectively.
Set
to go down at the Izod Center in East Rutherford, N.J., “Fedor
vs. Silva” will feature the first bouts of Strikeforce’s
heavyweight grand prix, including the titular confrontation between
onetime Pride Fighting Championships titleholder Fedor Emelianenko
and former EliteXC champion Antonio “Bigfoot” Silva.
Also scheduled for the event is a matchup between former UFC
champ Andrei Arlovski and sambo specialist Sergei Kharitonov.
Strikeforce
Challengers 14 will be headlined by a lightweight scrap between
the unbeaten Lyle “Fancy Pants” Beerbohm and Pat Healy,
and will emanate from the Cedar Park Center in the Austin suburb
of Cedar Park, Texas. Also scheduled for the Showtime broadcast
is a 155-pound affair between Ryan Couture and Lee Higgins.
Source: Sherdog
|
Mark
Hominick on UFC Champion Jose Aldo: He’s Never Faced Anybody
Like Me
by Damon
Martin
Mike
Brown. Urijah Faber. Manny Gamburyan.
The
list of Jose Aldo’s victims is well documented, but one
fighter he hasn’t faced yet with a whole different skill
set will challenge the champion at UFC 129 with the featherweight
title on the line.
Mark
Hominick proved at Saturday night’s UFC Fight For The Troops
2 that not only is he the real deal, but he could be the first
striker that Aldo has faced with equally dangerous hands and
feet.
Match-up
wise, Hominick respects all of the work that Aldo has done to
become one of the top pound-for-pound fighters in the sport,
but he believes it’s all been against a different level
of striker than he will be in Toronto on April 30.
“He’s
been making wrestlers look like poor strikers, and a lot of times
that’s not too hard, but he’s not going to do that
to me,” Hominick said about Aldo’s run of late. “I
know he’s the best in the world, but he’s never faced
anybody like me.”
The
confidence that Hominick shows is a big part of his swagger leading
into the title fight. Everyone has approached Aldo with a certain
level of awe of what he’s able to do in the cage. Hominick
respects him, but will not back down from him.
“One
thing against Jose Aldo, I think he’s the best pound-for-pound
fighter, fantastic striker, but he’s never faced anyone
with my striking capability. We’ll see how he does against
that,” Hominick stated with confidence.
Throughout
his career, Hominick has been known as one of the most dangerous
strikers in the world. A phenomenal kickboxing background built
up on a daily basis by famed coach Shawn Tompkins, and Hominick
has become a well oiled machine over his last several fights.
The
win Hominick picked up over George Roop was the 20th of his career,
and as far as experience goes, he’s got the edge over Aldo
in that department.
On
April 30 at the Rogers Centre in Toronto, Hominick is looking
to pick up No. 21.
“This
is huge, but the thing with me I’ve been fighting professionally
for 10 years and I’ve went through the bottom and I’m
finally getting the chance to go against the top, the best of
the best. Those are the guys I’ve always wanted to face,”
Hominick said.
The
Aldo vs. Hominick match-up is expected to co-headline the UFC
129 fight card in Canada, alongside welterweight champion Georges
St-Pierre against Jake Shields in the main event.
Source: MMA Weekly
|
Guillard
Upsets Dunham at ‘Fight for the Troops’
by Brian
Knapp
Everything seems to be falling into place for Melvin Guillard.
An
injury replacement for two-time lightweight title contender Kenny
Florian, Guillard upset the world-ranked Evan Dunham in the UFC
“Fight for the Troops 2” headliner on Saturday at Fort
Hood in Killeen, Texas. The Jackson’s Mixed Martial Arts
representative wiped out Dunham with punches and knees 2:58 into
round one, as he extended his winning streak to four fights and
announced himself as a contender at 155 pounds.
“I
want my title shot,” said Guillard, who improved to 9-4
inside the Octagon. “I’m the dark horse in this game
at 155 pounds. No disrespect to anybody in my weight class, but
I am the best 155-pound fighter in the UFC.”
Guillard
set the tone at the start with his blinding hand speed, as he
lit up his foe with a straight right hand. Dunham secured a takedown
a little more than 30 seconds into the bout but could not corral
Guillard on the mat, and his failure to keep him there cost him
dearly. Once the two lightweights returned to their feet, the
odds shifted dramatically in Guillard’s favor.
A
two-punch combination, punctuated by another blistering right,
dropped Dunham where he stood. He never recovered. Diving for
an attempted single-leg takedown, Dunham was blitzed with an
uppercut and pair of knees that resulted in a violent and decisive
conclusion to the brief encounter.
“You
keep lining them up, and I’ll keep knocking them down,”
said Guillard, who was originally scheduled to meet Yves Edwards
on the undercard. “I will go undefeated in 2011, and I will
get a title shot no later than 2012.”
Hominick
Steamrolls Roop, Clinches Shot at Aldo
Hominick
secured a title shot.Mark Hominick was in top form, as he stopped
longtime training partner George Roop on first-round strikes
and secured his shot at reigning UFC featherweight champion Jose
Aldo. Roop met his demise 88 seconds into round one.
“I’m
thrilled,” Hominick said. “If you’re next in line
for a title shot, you’ve got to go out there and prove it.
I believe I did that with my fists tonight. I believe my stand-up
is far superior to everybody’s. You just have to go out
and show it in the cage.”
Roop
tried to keep Hominick at bay with a sizeable reach advantage,
but the seasoned Canadian proved relentless in his pursuit of
victory. Hominick dropped his opponent with a straight right
hand less than a minute into their encounter, softened him with
subsequent blows and closed for the finish. A left hook from
“The Machine” had a dazed Roop in a seated position
at the base of the cage, and another clean left hook brought
about referee Don Turnage’s intervention. Roop, who had
never before been knocked out, briefly protested the stoppage.
Hominick
has rattled off five consecutive victories and remains unbeaten
in three career appearances in the UFC. He expects to face Aldo
at UFC 129 on April 30 at the Rogers Centre in Toronto, roughly
90 miles from his hometown.
“Jose
is next,” Hominick said. “I believe he’s the best
pound-for-pound [fighter], but he’s never faced anyone like
me, and I’m going to go out there and prove it.”
Mitrione
Stops Hague, Stays Unbeaten
“The
Ultimate Fighter” Season 10 alum Matt Mitrione smashed through
Tim Hague in a heavyweight showcase, as he blew away the former
King of the Cage Canada champion with punches 2:59 into the first
round.
Mitrione,
a former NFL lineman, dropped Hague twice with straight left
hands. The second did serious damage and led to the finish, as
Mitrione swarmed with a series of unanswered blows and left the
referee no choice but to intervene on Hague’s behalf. The
knockout came with a price for Mitrione, who believes he injured
himself the first time he floored the Canadian.
“I
think I broke my left hand,” said Mitrione, who trains under
former world kickboxing champion Duke Roufus. “There was
a time when I punched him and he fell down the first time. As
soon as I did it, [I thought it was broken].”
Undefeated
in four professional appearances, the vastly improved Mitrione
called for stiffer competition in the future. At 32, he has emerged
as one of the UFC’s more intriguing heavyweight prospects.
“I
think Tim is a good fighter, but I want to get tested,”
Mitrione said. “I’m not going to try to bite off more
than I can chew, but I want to fight. I’m here to get a
piece of gold.”
Barry
Leg Kicks Carry Decision
Barry
won all three rounds.Patrick Barry put on a leg kick exhibition
at the expense of Joey Beltran.
Barry
slammed more than 20 kicks into Beltran’s lead leg -- 18
of them over the final two rounds -- and took a hard-earned unanimous
decision in a featured heavyweight bout. All three of the cage-side
judges sided with Barry, rendering scores of 30-27, 29-28 and
29-28.
Only
Beltran’s fortitude kept him upright for three rounds. He
sucked Barry into the clinch and dirty boxed when the opportunity
presented itself, bloodying his lip with punches in close quarters.
However, when Barry had breathing room, the Roufusport representative
attacked the leg with savage power and precision. Later, he supplemented
those kicks with others to the body and head.
Barry,
a 31-year-old New Orleans native, closed the bout with three
thunderous kicks to Beltran’s left thigh, his foe collapsing
immediately after the final horn.
“That
guy is a zombie,” Barry said. “I kicked him in his
face 300 times. I think I beat his leg to death, and he was going
to keep coming no matter what. If we had two more rounds, he’d
be hopping around on one leg. That dude is a monster.”
Wiman
Dominates Miller
In
a featured lightweight bout, Matt Wiman neutralized Cole Miller’s
considerable grappling skills, kept the American Top Team representative
on his back and swarmed him with heavy ground-and-pound en route
to a surprisingly one-sided unanimous decision. All three judges
scored it for Wiman: 29-28, 30-27 and 30-27.
Outside
of a few knees to the body from the clinch and the occasional
submission attempt off his back, Miller was never in the fight.
Wiman grounded the Augusta, Ga., native in all three rounds and
battered him with punches, elbows, standing-to-ground strikes
and double hammerfists. The gap between the two lightweights
grew wider as the match deepened, with Wiman smashing away at
his foe with relentless aggression.
A
quarter-finalist on Season 5 of “The Ultimate Fighter”
reality series, the 27-year-old Wiman has rattled off three consecutive
victories.
“I
was going through lot of nerves before this fight, like [when
I fought Thiago] Tavares [at UFC 85],” said Wiman, who improved
to 7-3 inside the Octagon. “I was the most nervous [I’ve
ever been] besides that night. That process of growing and getting
there mentally, spiritually and physically is crazy difficult.”
Source: Sherdog |
UFC
‘Fight for the Troops 2’ Prelims: Edwards Chokes McKenzie
by Mike
Whitman
In
battle of old lion versus young lion, Yves Edwards used his experience
to submit “The Ultimate Fighter 12” quarter-finalist
Cody McKenzie with a rear-naked choke in the second round at
UFC “Fight for the Troops 2” on Saturday at Fort Hood
in Killeen, Texas. The choke rendered McKenzie unconscious 4:33
into round two.
The
first frame saw McKenzie shoot immediately for a takedown, but
Edwards’ defense held strong. From there, the veteran peppered
the Alaskan with superior stand-up, forcing McKenzie to shoot
for takedowns. Though McKenzie managed to take the fight to the
floor, little was accomplished, and Edwards regained his vertical
base.
In
round two, McKenzie was far more effective with his ground attack,
securing the mount and eventually locking up a body triangle.
After a scare, the wily Edwards reversed the position, taking
McKenzie’s back and choking the 23-year-old unconscious.
“I
didn’t want to let position go. He was strong when he got
my back, so I wanted to be strong when I got [that] position,
too,” said Edwards. “I’m happy to be back in the
UFC, and I’m happier to fight for the troops. You guys put
it all on the line.”
Johnson
Body Triangle Submits Guymon
In
a welterweight affair that was likely crucial to the immediate
futures of both competitors, “The Ultimate Fighter”
Season 9 finalist DaMarques Johnson finished Michael Guymon with
one of the least common submissions in the game: a body triangle.
After
stuffing an early Guymon takedown, Johnson threw his opponent
to the mat, passing to side control and eventually to mount.
From there, Guymon rolled over, giving up his back. Johnson locked
up a body triangle and fished for a rear-naked choke, but the
“Joker” continued to roll. However, Guymon ended up
on his stomach, and Johnson cinched his body triangle even tighter,
forcing the verbal submission at 3:22.
Though
Johnson ended Guymon’s outing in the first round, the welterweight
was unsatisfied with his performance. According to Johnson, he
was hoping to inflict more damage before the stoppage occurred.
“Yeah,
I’m disappointed. It’s like foreplay with no orgasm.
I didn’t finish,” Johnson said. “I was just looking
to get pressure and a good angle. He’s a big strong guy.
I was just trying to get up and drop some dum-dums on him. My
bad, guys.”
Yahya
Extends Brown’s Fall
Yahya
(above) outpointed ATT's Brown.Mike Thomas Brown’s troubles
continued, as submission ace Rani Yahya defeated the one-time
WEC featherweight champion by unanimous decision on the undercard.
Scores were 30-27, 29-28 and 29-28, all in Yahya’s favor.
Round
one belonged to the Brazilian, as he took the fight to the floor
with a slick takedown after a brief feeling-out process. Once
on the ground, Yahya attacked like a boa constrictor, wrapping
up the wrestler’s legs and attempting several guillotines.
Though Brown attempted to escape, the Brazilian’s attack
was suffocating. Yahya briefly secured the former champion’s
back as the round expired.
In
the second frame, Yahya employed more of his erratic but frustrating
stand-up to lure Brown into a grappling contest. As Brown engaged
the Brazilian, he attempted a slam, but Yahya countered with
another guillotine attempt. Though Brown eventually scored the
takedown, Yahya again threatened with a guillotine before standing.
On
the feet, the American Top Team representative pursued Yahya
impatiently, looking for a power shot to end the fight. Brown
attempted a front choke late in the round, but Yahya defended
well.
Yahya
rushed ahead aggressively in round three, digging hard for a
single-leg takedown. The Brazilian then secured a body lock and
executed a leg trip that put the former champ on his back. Using
his discipline of choice masterfully, the Brazilian secured Brown’s
back, locked up a body triangle and dropped blows on the American’s
head. Referee Mario Yamasaki stood up the men to warn Yahya for
blows to the back of the head, but the round and the fight were
his.
Brown
has lost three of his last four fights.
Lowe
Provides Rude Welcome for ‘Chiquerim’
Powerful
wrestler Waylon Lowe outpointed Brazilian jiu-jitsu black belt
Willamy “Chiquerim” Freire in a lightweight tilt, earning
29-28 scores across the board.
Lowe
bull-rushed quickly to start the fight and scored a forceful
double-leg takedown. The Brazilian was active from his back,
however, landing nice elbows to the top of Lowe’s skull
before securing a double wristlock and attempting to pop out
Lowe’s arm for a kimura. Despite Friere working for his
submission, referee Dan Miragliotta stood up the pair. Once standing,
Lowe staggered the Brazilian and pounced. Friere stayed composed
and again worked from his back as the round expired.
Round
two brought more of the same, with the wrestler scoring takedowns
and Friere attempting submissions from his back. The third frame
belonged to the jiu-jitsu player, as “Chiquerim” took
advantage of Lowe’s fatigue and secured top position on
a failed takedown attempt from the Bellator Fighting Championships
veteran. Lowe eventually escaped and took the fight to the floor,
where he avoided danger and left the cage victorious.
The
defeat snapped an 11-fight winning streak for the 23-year-old
Freire.
Brenneman
Outwrestles, Outpoints Alves
Charlie
Brenneman used superior wrestling to best Nova Uniao’s Amilcar
Alves in a preliminary welterweight contest, riding out a unanimous
decision. All three of the cage-side judges sided with Brenneman
by matching 30-27 counts.
All
three rounds were similar, as “The Spaniard” scored
repeated takedowns and worked to pass his opponent’s guard.
The first round saw the AMA Fight Club product slam Alves to
the mat and even secure the mount before time expired. Rounds
two and three were carbon copies of the first, and although the
Brazilian attempted to make a difference off his back, it proved
too little to overcome the American.
Cariaso
Edges Campuzano
In
the “Fight for the Troops 2” opener, Chris Cariaso
bested Will Campuzano in a close unanimous decision. All three
judges scored the contest 29-28 for Cariaso, a San Francisco-based
muay Thai practitioner who has won five of his last six fights.
The
first round saw considerable action in the stand-up realm, with
both men landing shots on their feet. After more blows were exchanged
in round two, Cariaso’s attempted takedown was stuffed by
Campuzano. With the two bantamweights still upright, Campuzano
appeared to get the best of the exchanges until the horn sounded.
They
let it all hang out in the third round. Cariaso finally succeeded
in executing a takedown, which may have provided the margin of
victory. Campuzano was back on his feet quickly, however, and
the duo traded blows as the fight came to a close.
Source: Sherdog
|
UFC
‘Fight for the Troops 2’ Bonuses: $120K Awarded by Brian Knapp
American
Top Team’s Yves Edwards enjoyed a profitable night inside
the Octagon.
Edwards
pocketed a pair of $30,000 bonuses -- one for “Submission
of the Night,” the other for “Fight of the Night”
-- following his second-round submission against “The Ultimate
Fighter” Season 12 alum Cody McKenzie in a preliminary lightweight
matchup at UFC “Fight for the Troops 2” on Saturday
at Fort Hood in Killeen, Texas. The previously unbeaten McKenzie
banked a $30,000 “Fight of the Night” bonus for his
efforts.
Still,
the story was Edwards. The Bahamian-born lightweight weathered
a tenacious attack from his underdog opponent, who threatened
Edwards with submissions of his own throughout the fight. Ultimately,
Edwards secured back control on McKenzie, locked him in a rear-naked
choke and left him unconscious 4:33 into round two. The 34-year-old
has won six of his last seven fights, including three in a row.
Meanwhile,
headliner Melvin Guillard earned a $30,000 “Knockout of
the Night” bonus after he laid waste to the world-ranked
Evan Dunham in the first round of their lightweight scrap. Anchored
at Jackson’s Mixed Martial Arts in Albuquerque, N.M., the
rejuvenated Guillard finished the Brazilian jiu-jitsu black belt
with a series of searing knees 2:58 into the match. Dunham, who
trains out of the Xtreme Couture Mixed Martial Arts camp, had
never before been finished.
Source: Sherdog
|
UFC
Fight for the Troops 2: Guillard Blasts Dunham for First Round
TKO, Wants Title Shot in 2011
by Damon
Martin
If Melvin Guillard was looking to make a statement in the lightweight
division, he just put an exclamation point on things by absolutely
blasting through Evan Dunham on his way to a first round TKO
at the UFC Fight for the Troops show Saturday night.
No
one has ever questioned the raw talent that Melvin Guillard brought
to the table, even in his early UFC days as a member of the “Ultimate
Fighter” season 2. What Guillard has managed to do over
the last couple of years is add onto his maturity and preparation,
which has led to the current run he’s on.
He
showed that off once again, taking out a top ten level fighter
in Evan Dunham.
In
the early going, Guillard showed off his striking prowess and
quickness, tagging Dunham with a straight right that floored
the Oregon native. Knowing that a stand-up battle was probably
the worst idea in a fight with a guy like Guillard, Dunham quickly
scrambled and managed to get the fight to the ground.
Without
a moment of panic in his eyes, Guillard calmly worked his way
back to his feet and then started to pummel away at Dunham with
peppering shots that forced him to back out and back into Guillard’s
world.
It
was the beginning of the end at that point.
Guillard
again attacked with controlled aggression, before landing a devastating
knee strike from within the clinch that ended with Dunham rattled
and leaning against the cage for support. The New Orleans native
followed up with another big knee as Dunham slumped to the side.
“Hey
I think that should be named after me now, huh Coach Wink?”
Guillard said to his coach Mike Winkeljohn about his combination
to end the fight. “It’s a secret I can’t tell
y’all, y’all just gotta watch for it.”
Guillard
stayed on the attack and actually threw a knee while Dunham was
already down, but upon further review he didn’t actually
connect, and the referee rushed in for the stoppage.
While
Guillard has been impressive lately, the win over Dunham puts
him in serious contention in the lightweight division. He said
before the fight that he was done asking for a title shot, and
now Melvin Guillard just backed that up.
“I
want my title shot. I’m the dark horse in this game at 55,”
Guillard said following his win. “No disrespect to anybody
at my weight class, but I am the best 155lber in the UFC. You
know what, I don’t want to wait till a rematch, so you keep
lining them up, I’ll keep knocking them down.
“I
will go undefeated in 2011, and I will get a title shot before
the end of this year or no later than 2012, I promise you that.”
Source: MMA Weekly
|
It’s
Showtime cancels Amsterdam Arena show due to K-1 business complications
By Zach
Arnold
From
the company’s office
Usually
we start our presale for our Amsterdam Arena event every year
on December 1. This year we had postponed our presale to February
1 because we had a business agreement with K-1. This business
agreement meant that the 2011 Amsterdam Arena event would be
a joint event between IT’S SHOWTIME and K-1, just like in
2006, 2007 and 2008. The organization of this event would be
completely in our hands again, but the fight card was supposed
to be arranged by K-1. However, after months of asking questions
by email, text messages, personally and by telephone we never
got an answer from K-1 regarding the fight card. We had set a
deadline for the fight card for January 11, because otherwise
there would be too little time for us to organize everything
before May 21.
It
was January 18 when K-1 finally told me that it isn’t able
to put the fight card together, because many fighters who have
fought for K-1 still have to get their money, and K-1 can’t
negotiate with fighters whom K-1 still owes money to. For a long
time it’s not a secret anymore that K-1 is in bad financial
problems and that it’s still the question whether they will
survive this crisis. FEG (K-1) tries to do everything in its
power to get out of this crisis but the negotiations with potential
investors are stagnating for a year already.
We
from IT’S SHOWTIME have tried to help K-1 in every area
the last couple of years and we have been very merciful regarding
the payments of our fighters. The debts keep increasing in a
very fast pace, though. According to FEG, everything will be
alright but everything takes more time than they had expected
and FEG asks us for more time regarding the payments of our fighters
and the final fight card for the Amsterdam Arena.
We
from IT’S SHOWTIME really hope that K-1 will stay alive
and that they will survive these difficult times. However, we
don’t believe this will happen anytime soon and therefore
we don’t see the Amsterdam Arena event happen in May.
Also
we will not succeed in organizing the Amsterdam Arena event 100%
ourselves because only making and arranging the fight card will
take several months. K-1 claims it’s still convinced that
it can solve its problems in a short amount of time and still
keeps the option for May open. Even if K-1 can solve its problems
soon, it will be more realistic for a joint event to take place
in September or early October. We from IT’S SHOWTIME keep
all options in mind and even the fact that there will be no IT’S
SHOWTIME event at all in the Amsterdam ArenA this year. We know
we really disappoint a lot of people with this news and we really
regret that.
Despite
of the bad news regarding the Arena, IT’S SHOWTIME is doing
very well. In 2008 we organized 4 events, last year we organized
7 events and this year we will be organizing 10 IT’S SHOWTIME
events in the world for sure.
IT’S
SHOWTIME events are already broadcast in 89 countries worldwide.
The
IT’S SHOWTIME calendar for this year so far:
¦March
6: Sporthallen Zuid in Amsterdam, The Netherlands
¦March 26: Brussels, Belgium
¦June 11: Warsaw, Poland
¦July 23: Sochi, Russia
¦September 18: Sporthallen Zuid, Amsterdam
¦October 8: Geneva, Switzerland
Further this year, IT’S SHOWTIME events will be organized
in England, Spain, Germany and probably Greece. The successful
IT’S SHOWTIME Christmas Edition will also get a sequel in
The Sand in Amsterdam. For the latest news regarding IT’S
SHOWTIME events and the fight cards, visit www.fight.nl and/or
www.facebook.com/itsshowtimenl.
Source: Fight Opinion
|
TUF
13’s coach reveals trainers for Team Dos Santos
By Guilherme
Cruz
Chosen
to be the head coach of the 13th season of the reality show The
Ultimate Fighter, Junior “Cigano” dos Santos has already
pointed out his trainers. On a chat with TATAME, the heavyweight
revealed that Luis Carlos Dórea will be responsible for
the Boxing part, multiple time BJJ champion Antônio Peinado
will take care of the Jiu-Jitsu trainings and Billy Scheibe will
sharpen the Muay Thai of his pupils.
“Our
team is very good. In a short period of time on MMA we have dedicated
ourselves a lot. I’m sure I have much to teach and that
I’ll help the team a lot on the house”, guarantees
Cigano, excited to confront the rival coach, Brock Lesnar, at
the end of the shooting season. “Fighting Brock Lesnar will
prove, if God helps me, that I’m the number one against
Cain (Velasquez) on the title fight”, concluded.
UPDATE:
Alejarra joins Junior’s team
Most
known as Wanderlei Silva’s former conditioning coach, Rafael
Alejarra is another addiction to Dos Santos’ TUF team, as
he confirmed to TATAME. “I have no word to say how grateful
I am to Cigano for inviting me to come back to the TUF house…
I admire him a lot”, said Rafael, who worked for Frank Mir
at TUF 8.
Source: Tatame
|
Diaz
Talks “Cyborg”, “Mayhem”, Souza Ready for
Lawler
By FCF
Staff
While
much of the Strikeforce discussion has centered on the promotion’s
upcoming heavyweight grand-prix lately, two of the organization’s
more highly touted fighters in Nick Diaz (pictured) and Ronaldo
“Jacare” Souza, will return to action, January 29th,
in San Jose. Diaz (23-7) will look to defend his welterweight
crown against Evangelista “Cyborg” Santos (18-13),
while the Strikeforce Middleweight Champion Souza (13-2) will
take on challenger Robbie Lawler (18-6).
The
two champions participated in a conference call yesterday to
discuss next Saturday’s event, which will be hosted by San
Jose’s HP Pavilion. The card will be broadcast on Showtime.
Here
are some of the highlights from the call.
Nick
Diaz
How
would you describe Cyborg’s style?
“I
think he’s a brawler and he kicks well. He’s a kick-boxer
brawler. He’s a good fighter. He has knockout power and
he hits hard. He can hurt you with one punch. If you hit anyone
right with a good punch they’ll go down.”
“I
think (Cyborg) is the best opponent for me right now. I want
to fight George St. Pierre. I think (Jake Shields) is going to
take him out (when they fight April 30) to be honest.”
Do you think the welterweight division is where you’ll stay?
“I
don’t know. I wouldn’t mind moving up. I’d just
like to get paid for it, you know? I don’t like when I hear
people say I didn’t accept the fight with (Mayhem) Miller
because I was too small. I never said anything about that. I
said if I’m going to go off-track and screw with my whole
season and it’s going to screw with my whole year and screw
with my capabilities fighting at 170 then I’m going to have
to get paid in full. I’d like to have a reason for doing
that. I’d like to get paid double or triple to do something
that crazy. To f--k with my weight like that? I’d rather
move down than move up if you’re not going to pay me for
it. I might as well move down than up. Am I going to get paid
for it? I’ll fight at 155 pounds unless they offer me a
big money fight at 185 pounds. If they do then I’ll make
it happen but I’m not going to do it for free; for the same
as I would make at my normal 170 pounds. Why would I? It’s
more work. That’s why I never wanted to sign for that fight
with Miller, because they were talking about me moving weight.
I was like tell these guys to f-----g get in shape and make weight
like I do. It’s f-----g hard enough for me to make 170 pounds.
You know what I mean? He acts like he wouldn’t be able to
do it. He doesn’t want to work hard like me. That’s
the problem. So he can work his ass off and make 170 pounds or
175 pounds or someone can f-----g pay me a couple f-----g million
dollars to move up to 185 pounds to fight him. I know someone’s
got that shit on videotape. That motherf----r doesn’t want
to fight me. Talking about how he wants to fight me every chance
he gets. I’ll fight him anyway. I just want to get paid.
Pacquaio’s making 40 f-----g million dollars. He’s
making a couple million dollars. I’m over here f------ driving
a Honda because my shit’s breaking down. F--- all you motherf------.”
So
what you’re saying is money is the key factor to fighting
Miller. Bad blood doesn’t factor into it as much?
“That’s
what it sounds like.”
How
do you think you match up against some of the UFC’s top
guys?
“I
think I got here first and I was fighting before most of them,
including George St. Pierre in the UFC. I was at it first. I
was mad that they were getting fights and getting all this recognition
when I was at it first. I thought it was first-come, first-serve.
Like Josh Koscheck. I cornered a guy at a bar who probably had
two fights in his life. They worked it like he was set up to
fight Josh Koscheck. Then he gets an ass-whuppin. That’s
what I’m saying. They’ve made easy fights for those
guys. These guys have got like six or seven fights. Like all
easy fights. I’ve never got to fight a guy like the one
they brought into fight Josh Koscheck. So when you bring up fighters
like that and tell me they are the best fighters in the world
it’s a fucking joke. Those guys are all ranked now but I
was here first. So let’s fight then. Let’s make it
happen, you know?
Souza Hitting Tim Kennedy
“Jacare”
Souza:
“I
want to show everyone that I’ve improved my cardio, my strength
and my Jiu Jitsu technique. I want to show I have all those elements
in my game.”
What
is your game plan against Robbie Lawler?
“My
plan is to bring Jiu Jitsu to the fight. I don’t know how
or when but I’m well prepared. My guard is up and I will
be 100 percent ready to go and fight. The plan for the fight
is to bring Jiu Jitsu to the table when the time is right.”
What
have you done to work on your standup game?
“I
have a great gym behind me. We’ve been training a lot in
cardio and boxing and learning how to walk around the cage and
the ring. I know he’s a good boxer so I’m doing everything
necessary to prepare for that. I’ve been training everything:
boxing, wrestling, Jiu Jitsu, so I’m prepared to go in there
and show everything.
“I’ve
fought a lot of tough guys and I’ll put Robbie Lawler right
there in the mix of the toughest I’ve faced.”
Is
there a dream fight out there for you?
“I
like to fight the best and the best changes every year so I pretty
much want to fight anyone who can make my weight. The guy I want
to fight right now is Robbie Lawler. He’s the guy that’s
up next for me so that’s who I want to fight next.”
Source: Full Contact Fighter
|
Peinado
anxious to enter UFC house
by Carlos
Eduardo Ozório
Antonio Peinado had his first experience as an MMA coach with
Demian Maia, who was successful in his December outing against
Kendall Grove. And the effort bore fruit, with Junior Cigano
picking him as one of the coaches for the The Ultimate Fighter
reality show about to start shooting next week.
The
Alliance black belt addressed the subject to GRACIEMAG.com:
How
do you feel about this chance to be on TUF, helping Cigano’s
team against Brock Lesnar’s?
I’m
so glad Cigano picked me. I feel I did a good job with Demian,
when we were in Bahia. I feel I lived up to expectations and
Cigano realized it. We became good friends up there and now this
invitation came about. I’m really anxious, I’ll give
it my all and, if it’s up to me, Cigano and his team will
kick butt.
Do
you feel this may get in the way of the Jiu-Jitsu events going
on at the start of the year?
To
tell you the truth, I don’t feel it will get in the way.
It’s a really great opportunity. I was confirmed for the
European Open and I had some seminars scheduled around Europe,
but all this happened really quickly. I don’ think it will
get in the way, because I’m going to keep on doing my preparations
and training the crew. I’m going to try and train in the
gi over there and then I’ll compete at the Pan and World
Pro. I’ll go full force to the Worlds to win, too.
Now
what positives do you feel this opportunity will bring?
To
tell you the truth, I couldn’t believe it when Cigano invited
me. I spent three days without sleep, every athlete dreams of
being there and experiencing some of what goes on there. I’ll
keep down to earth, do the job just right like Fabio (Gurgel)
taught me to. I’ll try and convey that. It’s something
the whole world will see and being there gets your name out there.
I’m really thankful to Cigano for the invitation and I’m
going to dedicate myself 110% so we’ll come out victorious.
Has
Fabio shared some of his experience in MMA with you since you
started working in the field?
Fabio
always shared that type of stuff with us, not just when we’re
involved in MMA. He always teaches everyone and shares his experience
from back when he fought MMA. Of course, I’m going to forge
ahead with that information.
Source: Gracie Magazine
|
Upcoming
mixed martial arts schedule
By Josh
Gross
ESPN.com
January
28
At Kansas City, Kansas (Titan Fighting Championships, HDNet):
Tim Sylvia vs. Abe Wagner, 3 rounds, heavyweights; Jason High
vs. Rudy Bears, 3 rounds, welterweights; Drew McFedries vs. Gary
Tapasu, 3 rounds, middleweights; Aaron Derrow vs. Rich Clementi,
3 rounds, lightweights
January
29
At San Jose, Calif. (Strikeforce, Showtime): Nick Diaz vs. Evangelista
Santos, 5 rounds, welterweights; Ronaldo Souza vs. Robbie Lawler,
5 rounds, middleweights; Roger Gracie vs. Trevor Prangley, 3
rounds, light heavyweights; Herschel Walker vs. Scott Carson,
3 rounds, heavyweights, Nate Moore vs. Nathan Coy, 3 rounds,
welterweights; Bobby Stack vs. Isaiah Hill, 3 rounds, lightweights;
Ron Keslar vs. Eric Lawson, 3 rounds, 180-pound fighters; Germaine
de Randamie vs. Stephanie Webber, 3 rounds, welterweights; James
Terry vs. Lucas Gamaza, 3 rounds, welterweights; Jenna Castillo
vs. Charlene Gellner, 3 rounds, 120-pound fighters.
At
Chandler, Ariz. (Rage in the Cage): Efrain Escudero vs. Jeremy
Larson, 3 rounds, 165-pound fighters; Danny Martinez vs. Aldo
Escudero, 3 rounds, featherweights; Jade Porter vs. Ruben Gonzales,
3 rounds, lightweights
January
30
At Charleroi, Wallonia, Belgium (United Glory): Siyar Bahadurzada
vs. John Alessio, 3 rounds, welterweights; Roan Carneiro vs.
Tommy Depret, 3 rounds, welterweights
February
5
At Las Vegas (UFC 126, Spike TV; Pay-Per-View): Anderson Silva
vs. Vitor Belfort, 5 rounds, middleweights; Forrest Griffin vs.
Rich Franklin, 3 rounds, light heavyweights, Ryan Bader vs. Jon
Jones, 3 rounds, light heavyweights; Jake Ellenberger vs. Carlos
Eduardo Rocha, 3 rounds, welterweights, Miguel Torres vs. Antonio
Banuelos, 3 rounds, bantamweights; Chad Mendes vs. Michihiro
Omigawa, 3 rounds, featherweights; Norifumi Yamamoto vs. Demetrious
Johnson, 3 rounds, bantamweights; Donald Cerrone vs. Paul Kelly,
3 rounds, lightweights; Mike Pierce vs. Kenny Robertson, 3 rounds,
welterweights; Paul Taylor vs. Gabe Ruediger, 3 rounds, lightweights;
Kyle Kingsbury vs. Ricardo Romero, 3 rounds, light heavyweights
February
12
At East Rutherford, N.J. (Strikeforce, Showtime): Fedor Emelianenko
vs. Antonio Silva, 3 rounds, heavyweights; Andrei Arlovski vs.
Sergei Kharitonov, 3 rounds, heavyweights; Shane del Rosario
vs. Lavar Johnson, 3 rounds, heavyweights; Valentijn Overeem
vs. Ray Sefo, 3 rounds, heavyweights; Gian Villante vs. Chad
Griggs, 3 rounds, heavyweights
February
18
At Austin (Strikeforce: Challengers, Showtime): Lyle Beerbohm
vs. Pat Healy, 3 rounds, lightweights; Ryan Couture vs. Lee Higgins,
3 rounds, lightweights; Erik Apple vs. Ryan Larson, 3 rounds,
welterweights
At
Lemoore, Calif. (Tachi Palace Fights): Leopoldo Serao vs. David
Loiseau, 5 rounds, middleweights; Ulysses Gomez vs. Darrel Montague,
5 rounds, flyweights; Jussier da Silva vs. Ian McCall, 3 rounds,
flyweights; Jesse Forbes vs. Mike Moreno, 3 rounds, middleweights;
Dominique Robinson vs. John Gunderson, 3 rounds, lightweights;
C.J. Keith vs. Fabricio Camoes, 3 rounds, lightweights; Andrew
Martinez vs. Doug Hunt, 3 rounds, lightweights; David Bollea
vs. David Sierra, 3 rounds, lightweights; Collin Hart vs. Marty
Hawley, 3 rounds, middleweights;
February
25
At Edmonton, Alberta, Canada (Maximum Fighting Championship,
HDNet): Antonio McKee vs. Drew Fickett, 5 rounds, lightweights;
Ryan Jimmo vs. Dwayne Lewis, 3 rounds, light heavyweights; Kajan
Johnson vs. Richie Whitson, 3 rounds, lightweights; Razak Al-Hassan
vs. Rodney Wallace, 3 rounds, light heavyweights; Thomas Denny
vs. Sheldon Westcott, 3 rounds, welterweights; Robert Washington
vs. Tyrone Glover, 3 rounds, lightweights
At
Tulsa, Okla. (Xtreme Fight Night): Gerald Harris vs. James Head,
3 rounds, middleweights
February
26
At Manchester (British Association of Mixed Martial Arts): Paul
Daley vs. Yuya Shirai, 3 rounds, welterweights
At
Kentish Town, North London, England (Cage Warriors Fighting Championship):
Rosi Sexton vs. Roxanne Modafferi, lightweights
February
27
At Sydney (UFC 127, Pay-Per-View): B.J. Penn vs. Jon Fitch, 3
rounds, welterweights; Michael Bisping vs. Jorge Rivera, 3 rounds,
middleweights; George Sotiropoulos vs. Dennis Silver, 3 rounds,
lightweights; Carlos Condit vs. Chris Lytle, 3 rounds, welterweights;
Kyle Noke vs. Chris Camozzi, 3 rounds, middleweights; Ross Pearson
vs. Spencer Fisher, 3 rounds, lightweights; Nick Ring vs. Riki
Fukuda, 3 rounds, middleweights; Curt Warburton vs. Maciej Jewtuszko,
3 rounds, lightweights; Tie Quan Zhang vs. Jason Reinhardt, 3
rounds, lightweights; Alexander Gustafsson vs. James Te Huna,
3 rounds, light heavyweights; Mark Hunt vs. Chris Tuchscherer,
3 rounds, heavyweights; Anthony Perosh vs. Tom Blackledge, 3
rounds, heavyweights
March
3
At Louisville (UFC Live 3, Versus): Diego Sanchez vs. Martin
Kampmann, 3 rounds, welterweights; Johny Hendricks vs. Paulo
Thiago, 3 rounds, welterweights; C.B. Dollaway vs. Mark Munoz,
3 rounds, middleweights; Alessio Sakara vs. Rafael Natal, 3 rounds,
middleweights; Brian Bowles vs. Damacio Page, 3 rounds, bantamweights;
Takeya Mizugaki vs. Francisco Rivera, 3 rounds, bantamweights;
Shane Roller vs. Thiago Tavares, 3 rounds, lightweights; Erik
Koch vs. Cub Swanson, 3 rounds, featherweights; Steve Cantwell
vs. Cyrille Diabate, 3 rounds, middleweights; Rob Kimmons vs.
Dongi Yang, 3 rounds, middleweights; Igor Pokrajac vs. Todd Brown,
light heavyweights; Dave Branch vs. Rousimar Palhares, 3 rounds,
middleweights
March
5
At Moscow (M-1 Global, M-1Global.com): Guram Gugenishvili vs.
Maxim Grishin, 5 rounds, heavyweights; Shamil Zavurov vs. Tom
Gallicchio, 5 rounds, welterweights; Kenny Garner vs. Alexander
Volkov, 3 rounds, heavyweights; Daniel Weichel vs. Magomedrasul
Khasbulaev, 3 rounds, lightweights; Magomed Sultanakhmedov vs.
Plinio Cruz, 3 rounds, middleweights
March
12
At Tokyo (Shooto): Rambaa Somdet vs. Junji Ito, 5 rounds, super
flyweights
March
19
At Newark (UFC 128, Pay-Per-View): Mauricio Rua vs. Rashad Evans,
5 rounds, light heavyweights; Urijah Faber vs. Eddie Wineland,
3 rounds, bantamweights; Joseph Benavidez vs. Ian Loveland, 3
rounds, bantamweights; Mirko Filipovic vs. Brendan Schaub, 3
rounds, heavyweights; Jim Miller vs. Kamal Shalorus, 3 rounds,
lightweights; Nate Marquardt vs. Yoshihiro Akiyama, 3 rounds,
middleweights; Raphael Assuncao vs. Manny Gamburyan, 3 rounds,
featherweights; Ricardo Almeida vs. Mike Pyle, 3 rounds, welterweights;
Kurt Pellegrino vs. Gleison Tigau, 3 rounds, lightweights; Anthony
Njokuani vs. Edson Barboza Jr., 3 rounds, lightweights; Dan Miller
vs. Nick Catone, 3 rounds, middleweights; Luis Arthur Cane Jr.
vs. Karlos Vemola, 3 rounds, light heavyweights
March
25
At Kansas City, Kansas (Titan Fighting Championships, HDNet):
Phil Baroni vs. TBD, 3 rounds, middleweights
March
26
At Seattle (UFC Fight Night 24, Spike TV): Tito Ortiz vs. Antonio
Rogerio Nogueira, 3 rounds, light heavyweights; Dan Hardy vs.
Anthony Johnson, 3 rounds, welterweights; Amir Sadollah vs. Duane
Ludwig, 3 rounds, welterweights; Aaron Simpson vs. Mario Miranda,
3 rounds, middleweights; John Hathaway vs. Kris McCray, 3 rounds,
welterweights; Leonard Garcia vs. Nam Phan, 3 rounds, featherweights;
Alex Caceres vs. Mackens Semerzier, 3 rounds, featherweights;
Sean McCorkle vs. Christian Morecraft, 3 rounds, heavyweights;
Mike Russow vs. Jon Madsen, 3 rounds, heavyweights; Michael McDonald
vs. Nick Pace, 3 rounds, bantamweights; Dennis Hallman vs. Anthony
Waldburger, 3 rounds, welterweights
April
9
At Montreal (Ringside MMA): Patrick Cote vs. Kalib Starnes, 3
rounds, middleweights; Roger Hollett vs. Steve Bosse, 3 rounds,
light heavyweights
April
30
At Toronto (UFC 129, Pay-Per-View): Georges St. Pierre vs. Jake
Shields, 5 rounds, welterweights; Jose Aldo vs. Mark Hominick,
5 rounds, featherweights; Randy Couture vs. Lyoto Machida, 3
rounds, light heavyweights; Benson Henderson vs. Mark Bocek,
3 rounds, lightweights; Phil Davis vs. Matt Hamill, 3 rounds,
light heavyweights; Rory MacDonald vs. Nate Diaz, 3 rounds, welterweights;
Kyle Watson vs. John Makdessi, 3 rounds, lightweights; Brian
Foster vs. Sean Pierson, 3 rounds, welterweights; Pablo Garza
vs. Yves Jabouin, 3 rounds, featherweights; Ivan Menjivar vs.
Charlie Valencia, 3 rounds, bantamweights; Claude Patrick vs.
Daniel Roberts, 3 rounds, welterweights; Jason MacDonald vs.
Ryan Jensen, 3 rounds, middleweights
May
5
At Lemoore, Calif. (Tachi Palace Fights): Isaac DeJesus vs. Russ
Miura, 5 rounds, featherweights; Phil Collins vs. Waachim Spiritwolf,
3 rounds, welterweights; John Dodson vs. Alexis Vila, 3 rounds,
flyweights; Gerald Harris vs. Anthony Ruiz, 3 rounds, middleweights
June
4
At Las Vegas (The Ultimate Fighter 13 finale, Spike TV): Anthony
Pettis vs. Clay Guida, 3 rounds, lightweights
Source: ESPN
|
UFC
Fight for the Troops Fundraiser an Early Success
By Matt
Erickson
But
the UFC's second "Fight for the Troops" show on Saturday
meant a night away from the stresses of military service –
stresses most will never understand. About 3,200 troops attended
the show, which was set up in a temporary arena inside a hangar
on an air strip – tanks and helicopters just a couple hundred
feet away from the Octagon.
The
troops posed for pictures with Chuck Liddell and Bruce Buffer
and Dana White and the Octagon Girls and Stitch and every fighter
walking past – and most stopped to shake hands, sign autographs
and get a snapshot, win or lose. They ate burritos at a tailgate
outside the hangar. They cheered and booed the same as they would
if they were in any other arena.
But
this was more than just another UFC event. While part of the
purpose of putting on a show exclusively for enlisted military
is to bring some entertainment to the men and women serving America,
the UFC and Spike partnered once again with the Intrepid Fallen
Heroes Fund to raise money for troops suffering from brain trauma,
as well as their families.
Martin
Edelman, a board member with the IFHF and one of its founding
leaders, said more than $600,000 was raised during the Spike
broadcast of of the show – from phone donations alone. And
he praised the UFC for being involved. Both Frank and Lorenzo
Fertitta, majority owners of Zuffa, LLC, are on the IFHF's Board
of Trustees.
"Traumatic
brain injury is the signature wound of this war," Edelman
said. "So we raised $65 million and built the Traumatic
Brain Injury Center, and the UFC has been our partners in this
venture from the beginning. They're devoted to America's troops,
they come to these events, they help us create them – and
we wouldn't be doing it without them today."
Edelman
said the total raised from the UFC's Fight for the Troops event
in Fayetteville, N.C., in December 2008 was in excess of $4 million.
"Last
(event's) number was close to $5 million, and I must say that
Dana, Lorenzo and Frank contributed a lot to that," Edelman
said. "They've been just absolutely spectacular."
Edelman
said the IFHF doesn't set fundraising goals. Rather, it just
continues working to raise funds until the current need is met,
then moves on to the next goal.
"We
determine the need, and we've so far never failed in raising
the money we need. We just keep doing it until we have enough,"
Edelman said. "Right now, we have about $13-14 million for
research. We'd like to get to $20 (million) and we'll do whatever
it takes to get there."
White
has said the most meaningful events he has put on as a promoter
have been events giving back to U.S. troops. And while there
is no official word of the next troops show, there is almost
no doubt that one will come, Edelman said.
"Our
relationship with Dana White and Lorenzo and Frank Fertitta has
been both personal and professional and philanthropic for years
now," Edelman said. "Each UFC fight has a number. This
is Fight for the Troops No. 2, we'll probably do No. 3 next year
and we'll just keep going until all the needs of our young wonderful
warriors and their families have been taken care of."
And
while Edelman was excited about the event being a success, and
about the early numbers trickling in from the phone donations,
there was still gravity to the reality of why the event was taking
place to begin with.
"You
come to these events and you see that even with all the fun and
happiness that we're having, we send these kids to places that
are really challenging," Edelman said. "And when they
come home, we owe them at a minimum the comfort of knowing that
we're going to take care of them. That's the absolute duty of
every American."
To
learn more about the Intrepid Fallen Heroes Fund or make a donation,
visit the organization online at fallenheroesfund.org.
Source: MMA Fighting
|
UFC
Fight for the Troops 2: Mark Hominick TKOs Roop; Earns Shot at
Aldo At UFC 129
by Erik
Fontanez
Mark
Hominick’s stand-up was sharp and precise at UFC Fight for
the Troops 2, as he knocked out George Roop in the very first
round of their fight, and earned a shot at Jose Aldo for the
UFC featherweight title at UFC 129 in Toronto.
Roop
looked dazed after dealing with Hominick’s strikes on the
feet, failing to answer anything the the Canadian fighter had
for him. The ref stepped in just in time, calling the end of
the bout at 1:28 of the opening round.
Roop
started out the fight by utilzing his reach with both kicks and
punches, but a right hand by Hominick changed the pace for good.
The shot knocked Roop to the ground and Hominick smelled blood.
After letting Roop back up on his feet, Hominick worked to pressure
him and it ended up paying off in the end.
A
looping left by Hominick landed square on Roop’s chin, putting
the fighter down on the canvas for the last time. From there,
a quick shot to the chin by Hominick was enough for the referee
to step in and signal the stop to the fight. Roop argued the
call a bit, but it was clear he was out, as he stumbled on his
feet and had to be carried by the man who just beat him.
The
stand-up was the key for Hominick at Fort Hood. He talked about
it with Joe Rogan after the big win.
“I
beleive my stand-up is far superior [to] anyone, and [you] just
have to…prove it in the cage,” he said.
The
win for Hominick solidified a shot at Jose Aldo’s UFC featherweight
title. The champion seems unbeatable in the 145-pound weight
class, but Hominick feels he has the edge against the Brazilian
title holder.
“He’s
never faced anyone like me and I’m going to prove it,”
he said.
With
Hominick being an excellent striker, a war with Jose Aldo will
surely provide an entertaining night of fireworks for fight fans.
Source: MMA Weekly
|
Ryan
Olivares a Black Belt?
Ryan is
on the left, not the handsome guy on the right.
Yes, you have heard right, Onzuka.com correspondent and Kyle's
dad, Ryan "Scoops" Olivares has just earned his black
belt in Judo. He has been quietly working hard and training and
recently passed his black belt test. He has always been a huge
supporter of the O2 Martial Arts Academy and the Onzuka brothers,
but this time it is we who are supporting him.
Congratulations
Ryan!
|
UFC
126 fight card (2/5 in Las Vegas at Mandalay Bay Events Center)
By Zach
Arnold
Dark
matches/preliminaries
¦Welterweights:
Mike Pierce vs. Kenny Robertson
¦Light Heavyweights: Kyle Kingsbury vs. Ricardo Romero
¦Bantamweights: Kid Yamamoto vs. Demetrious Johnson
¦Lightweights: Paul Taylor vs. Gabe Ruediger
¦Featherweights: Chad Mendes vs. Michihiro Omigawa
¦Lightweights: Donald Cerrone vs. Paul Kelly
Main card
¦Bantamweights:
Miguel Torres vs. Antonio Banuelos
¦Light Heavyweights: Jon “Bones” Jones vs. Ryan
Bader
¦Welterweights: Jake Ellenberger vs. Carlos Eduardo Rocha
¦Light Heavyweights: Forrest Griffin vs. Rich Franklin
¦UFC Middleweight title match: Anderson Silva vs. Vitor
Belfort
Rich Franklin’s thoughts about upcoming fight with Forrest
Griffin and retirement
From
an interview yesterday on Sherdog radio. First, on his upcoming
fight:
GREG
SAVAGE: “He’s a lot bigger than you. What kind of problems
does he present for you when you guys step in the Octagon?”
RICH
FRANKLIN: “Well, I mean, that’s a, you know, Forrest
is a couple inches taller than me and he’s just broad-shouldered
and his arms are really long and … I just remember seeing
him, you know, he assisted coached, he was the assistant coach
when I came in and filled in for Tito (Ortiz) when I went out
there (Las Vegas) and helped me finish that week-and-a-half before
when I fought Chuck (Liddell) and I just remember seeing him
out there and thinking, my God, he is just a big, big man. So,
I’m sure that’s probably going to be look even that
much worse to me when I show up to the fight at the weigh-ins
and all that kind of stuff. But, yeah, you know, I would imagine
that the kind of problems he’s going to pose is that, you
know, I mean he’s just big and he’s going to be strong
and, you know, possibly trying to push me against the fence and
of course I’m going to worry about his reach with his jab
and all that kind of stuff and working the inside and all that,
all those things are going to be problematic and he’s funny
so he actually might tell some jokes when we’re in the ring
or something like that as well. But, you know, I think it’s
going to be a good fight and we’ve taken a good approach
to getting ready for all this and we’ll see what happens.”
GREG
SAVAGE: “What kind of strategy are you guys talking about
putting together for him?”
RICH
FRANKLIN: “You know, um… Aside from slightly little
specific things that I wouldn’t talk about, my strategy’s
always the same. You’re going to see me walk out to the
center of the Octagon, touch gloves, and we’re going to
start firing away at each other and that’s pretty much what
I do every fight. You know, the thing is when people watch me
fight or fighters prep for me, I don’t think they come out
and say, hmmm, I wonder what Rich is going to do. They pretty
much know what I’m going to do, it’s just a matter
of being able to stop it.”
As
to his thoughts about when he might retire from active MMA competition:
JEFF
SHERWOOD: “You talk about your training partners. You telling
them ahead of time, hey, if I’m getting a little slower.
Do you think they really will and when it does come to that point
because we’ve seen athletes, you know, nobody really ever
wants to say I’m too old to move on, I mean when it comes
to that point you think you’ll be able to, you’ll just
say, okay, I’m going to wrap it up?”
RICH
FRANKLIN: “Uh… I would have the ability to do that.
I think, I mean honestly if, you know, if my… If my coaches
had come to me before this Forrest fight and said, look, you
know you’ve lost a step, you’re not competing at a
top level any more and this is not a smart fight for you to take
and you should seriously reconsider fighting, I would have to,
you know, I would have to sit down and really think about that
and… and, yeah, you know, and I’ll be real honest with
you, Jorge Gurgel, you know, he’s one guy in my life that
would just be brutally honest with me and he doesn’t pull
any punches or anything like that. He’s one guy that would
be like, he’d look at me and be like, Frank, you’re
old and slow, so let’s just stop. Seriously, it’s time
for you to call it quits.
“We’re
definitely, you know that’s the mark of true friendship
is, you know, somebody can really just tell your friend like
pretty much whatever and (they’re) not going to get mad
at you. If Jorge told me like, hey, you’re old and slow
and you’ve lost a step and it’s time for you to hang
it up, then I know he’s really not, he wouldn’t be
saying something like that to hurt my feelings. He would be saying
something like that to me specifically because he was looking
out for my best interests.”
It
was an interesting interview. Rich was asked whether or not he
noticed Chuck Liddell slowing down when they fought last June
in Vancouver and he said no, that Chuck was in great shape, but
that he got caught in the chin like he did in recent fights and
that was that.
When
he does enter into the retirement stage from fighting, Rich says
he wants to do UFC commentating work and work with ESPN on their
MMA programming platforms (along with getting involved in some
movie work).
Source: Fight Opinion
|
Nick
Diaz Explodes Over Feud With Mayhem Miller; Goes Off On GSP And
Manny Pacquiao Paydays
by Damon
Martin
Nick Diaz wants to make one thing very clear when it comes to
his grudge match with Jason “Mayhem” Miller. If he’s
taking the fight and moving up in weight class to do it, he wants
to get paid.
An
enraged Diaz lashed out at the allegations that he turned down
a fight against Miller due to him being the smaller fighter.
The Stockton, Calif.-based welterweight says that he’s willing
to go up to 185 pounds to face Miller… if the money is right.
“I’d
be happy to move up. I’d like to get paid for it you know?”
Diaz said on Thursday. “I don’t like how people try
to say that I didn’t accept the fight with Miller because
I was too small. I never said anything about that. I said if
I’m going to go off track and screw with my whole season,
it’s going to screw with my whole year, it’s going
to screw with my capabilities of fighting at 170 pounds. If I’m
going to do that, I’d like to get paid in full. I would
like to have a reason for doing that. Not just do it at everybody
else’s convenience.”
Diaz
has gone up in weight previously for fights against Scott Smith
and Frank Shamrock, but he believes that if he’s going to
do it again, Strikeforce needs to pony up some more cash if he’s
going to fight at 185 pounds against Miller.
“I’d
like to get paid something extra. Double, triple, something crazy
for me to do something extra that would screw up my weight to
fight at that weight,” Diaz stated.
“I’m
not just doing it for free when I’d make the same money
to fight at 170 pounds. It’s twice as much work.”
The
fight between Diaz and Miller has been brewing since April 2010
when the two were involved in the infamous post-fight brawl in
Nashville. Miller entered the cage to challenge then middleweight
champion Jake Shields just after his win over Dan Henderson,
and a moment later chaos ensued with Mayhem battling Diaz among
others in the melee.
Diaz
makes it clear that he’s willing to take the fight, but
if making weight is the issue, he says Miller should be just
as open to cutting down to welterweight if he’s supposed
to go up to middleweight.
“I
never didn’t want to sign for that fight with Miller. They
were talking about making me move weights. I said tell his ass
to get in (expletive) shape and make weight like I do. It’s
(expletive) hard enough for me to make 170 pounds. He acts like
he wouldn’t be able to do it, he doesn’t want to work
hard like me, that’s the problem,” Diaz shouted.
“He
can work his ass off and make 170 pounds or 175 pounds or somebody
can pay me a (expletive) couple million dollars and I’ll
move up to 185 pounds and fight him. Or he can quit getting (expletive)
slapped in public. I know somebody’s got that (expletive)
on video tape. That mother (expletive) doesn’t want to fight
me. Talking about he wants to fight me every chance he gets,
he (expletive) told the media.”
It’s
unclear what video Diaz was speaking about regarding Miller being
in a fight out in public, but it’s very evident that the
current Strikeforce welterweight champion has some serious venom
stored up for the man they call Mayhem.
Diaz’s
biggest issue all came down to money. Pointing at the boxing
world as a model, Diaz wants to get a big payday if he’s
going to go up in weight class to challenge Miller. Without that,
it doesn’t sound like the fight is ever likely to happen.
“(Manny)
Pacquaio’s making 40 (expletive) million dollars; GSP’s
making a couple million dollars. I’m over here (expletive)
driving a Honda and my (expletive) breaking down? (Expletive)
all you mother (expletive),” Diaz exclaimed.
“I’ll
fight at 185 pounds; I’d like to get paid.”
Strikeforce
CEO Scott Coker told MMAWeekly Radio on Wednesday night that
the promotion definitely had interest in booking a fight between
Diaz and Miller, but after Thursday’s eruption by the welterweight
champion, it’s unclear what it will take to make it happen.
Source: MMA Weekly
|
Roger
Gracie: “I never, ever look ahead to the next fight. “
by Graciemag
Newsroom
A 1.95-meter (6’4”) light heavyweight in MMA, the lanky
Roger Gracie gave an interview on the official Strikeforce website
regarding his impending January 29 fight against South Africa’s
Trevor Prangley. Check out some excerpts:
Johnny
Preston: You are one of the world’s foremost BJJ experts.
What is your absolute favorite submission hold?
Roger
Gracie: I have many submissions I like. For MMA, taking the back
is probably the safest and most effective way to finish.
You
beat Kevin Randleman last year, a man considered a pioneer by
many MMA fans. He was a bridge from the early days of MMA to
the cross-training that became prevalent in the early 2000’s,
in that he could do more than one thing well (wrestle and strike
with power). Do you feel that, in the same vein, you are the
bridge that will take the Gracie family into the next generation
of fighting?
Kevin
is a great athlete and genuinely one of the nicest gentlemen
I have met. He was one of the shining lights in the developing
period of MMA, and definitely a pioneer with the training. I
am obviously going through all the various training techniques
but everybody knows it takes time to master so many different
skills. If I can keep fit and keep learning, then slowly I will
improve…and who knows after that. The previous generations
of Gracie fighters are a tough group to live up to.
Until
now, you have only fought every other year. Are you now committed
to the MMA game full-time as a career?
I
have only fought every other year due to one serious injury which
took me nearly a year to recover from. After that logistics and
matchmaking have delayed one or two fights but I would like to
fight three times a year from here on out. I am ready.
On
January 29th, you will face your toughest test to date in the
extremely experienced Trevor Prangley. While not known for his
striking, he is quite competent. Have you been working on your
striking?
It
sounds cliché but there are no easy fights with any of
these guys. One mistake and the referee will quickly stop the
fight. Fighting somebody like Trevor with much more experience
than myself will keep me focused on trying to force the fight
my way.
Is
there somebody in the Strikeforce light heavyweight division
that you have your eyes on beyond Prangley?
I
never, ever look ahead to the next fight. I think that is the
most basic mistake anybody can make. You have an opponent you
study, [figure out] what you are going to do, and you try and
focus on arriving there for fight night with top fitness and
a strong mind.
How
do you feel that you match up with fellow Brazilian and the Strikeforce
Light Heavyweight Champion “Fejiao?”
Again
these things are for other people to talk about. I concentrate
on myself. I enjoy watching these guys fight. He fought great,
he earned the title, and he is a champion.
What
should the fans in attendance and those watching on Showtime
expect from Roger Gracie on January 29th?
I
will always look to finish the fight before the end of the 3
rounds. It’s my nature.
Source: Gracie Magazine
|
The
Truth About Trading Tomorrow for Today
By Ben
Fowlkes
For 15 years, Frank Shamrock suffered through the bumps, bruises,
and breaks that come along with being a pro fighter, and he never
had to wonder whether it was worth it.
Not
until one afternoon when he was on his living room floor, trying
to help his baby daughter learn to walk. A sudden back spasm
struck him – one of many in a career plagued with lower
back problems – and briefly paralyzed him on the floor.
"My
daughter was around one [year old] at the time, so she didn't
know what was going on," Shamrock said. "But I was
like, I can't even get up to help her, so I'm not sure how much
more of this I should be doing. That's about when I decided to
stop."
Now
the 38-year-old Shamrock is retired from MMA competition, so
he doesn't have to worry about putting his body through any more
abuse. But much like other MMA legends who have called it quits
recently, Shamrock has no way of knowing what cost he may be
forced to pay later in life for the abuse he put his body through
in pursuit of athletic glory.
The young man never wants to pay for the old man that he will
inevitably become.
-- Dr. Johnny Benjamin
Not that it should come as a surprise to anyone, but the injuries
fighters push through -- the ligament tears, the broken hands
and noses, the concussions -- come with a price. But since MMA
is still a relatively young sport, there aren't many case studies
in physical longevity to tell us exactly what that price might
be.
Orthopedic
surgeon Dr. Johnny Benjamin, who's treated several MMA fighters
over the years, said the difficulty often lies in convincing
banged up fighters to consider their futures at all.
"That's
the problem: the young man never wants to pay for the old man
that he will inevitably become," said Benjamin. "At
20 years old, I mean, how many 20-year-olds are saving for their
retirement?"
For
fighters, health issues like post-traumatic arthritis in the
hands and joints they've damaged over the years are likely to
run rampant as the current generation of fighters grows older,
said Dr. Benjamin. For those entering their forties and fifties,
they could be looking at the type of total joint replacements
that we normally see in people in their seventies, he added.
That's
simply what happens when you put your body through daily punishment
in order to make a living, said Dr. Benjamin, but it's not his
main concern for MMA fighters.
"The
thing that worries me most for MMA fighters is more general,
and that's their lack of health care coverage going into their
later years. They have adequate coverage while they're fighting
for a major organization, like the UFC, but what about all the
fighters who never make it to that level? Even the fighters who
make it to the pinnacle, where are they going to be down the
road?"
Think
of it this way: if you break your arm or injure your neck while
under contract to the UFC, the organization won't hesitate to
get you some of the best medical treatment money can buy. But
what happens when that same injury starts giving you trouble
ten years later, when you're no longer on the UFC roster?
Take
Jeff Curran, for instance. Once a featherweight in the WEC, the
MMA veteran with more than 45 pro fights to his credit now finds
himself back on the small circuit, where the health care options
aren't nearly so rosy. Curran recently paid $4,000 out of his
own pocket for a surgery that he needed following a fight at
a small event where he made a total of $330, he said, and it's
not as if there aren't other health problems for him on the horizon.
"I've
had a total of seven broken ribs, from three different times,"
said Curran. "Four of those seven were broken more than
once. I've had three surgeries to one knee. I've had a plate
put in my forearm and then, eight years later, removed from my
forearm. I've had fractures in my orbital. I've got no feeling
on the left side of my face. I've got a completely deviated septum
from being punched in the nose so much. Both feet have been broken
and both hands have been broken a number of times. I have arthritis
in my knees. In both shoulders I've had torn labrums and now
they're developing cysts inside the joint. And that doesn't even
count all the little things."
As
fighters like Curran enter their forties and fifties, said Benjamin,
it's hard not to wonder how they'll manage to pay for their mounting
health costs.
"It's
not just the injuries they'll suffer at a higher rate than they
otherwise would have, but they don't have programs in place like
the NFL or Major League Baseball...to protect these guys down
the road," said Dr. Benjamin. "There's no health care
for them. There's no pension plan for them. There's none of the
safety-net features that the other major organizations have,
so what are they going to do?
"Think
about it, when you're 40 or 45 years old and you start having
all these health problems from years and years of competition,
it's kind of hard to then go out and find health insurance. Nobody
wants to insure that."
It's
not just the joint injuries either. While MMA may not involve
the constant head trauma of boxing or football, there's no denying
that taking blows to the cranium is and always will be a part
of the sport.
We
can come up with comfortable euphemisms for it – just imagine
if instead of shouting 'He's rocked!' as a fighter staggers around
from a potentially concussive blow, UFC announcer Joe Rogan said,
'He's suffered minor head trauma!' – but it doesn't change
the reality of the situation.
Even somebody with one eye and half a brain recognizes the risks.
But what are you willing to do for fame and fortune?
-- Pat Miletich
The question is, do fighters fully appreciate the risks they're
facing, and are they making an informed decision to accept them?
If
you ask Strikeforce middleweight and MTV star Jason "Mayhem"
Miller, the answer is, absolutely.
"Athletes
know this stuff. We do," said Miller. "We're not dumb.
It's like that new research that links head injuries and Lou
Gehrig's disease. Well, duh, science. Thanks for telling us what
athletes already know. We know what we're doing to ourselves.
It's the elephant in the room. We're giving our bodies for the
entertainment of the masses. I'm okay with that. I've had plenty
of surgeries. I know there's a chance that I could be retarded.
I know that."
According
to Miller, fighters realize that some day the bill will come
due for all they've done to their bodies. The only real surprise,
he said, is how quickly it arrives.
"It's
one of those things where, when you start out in this as a kid
you look at the older guys and think, man, he's f---ed up. That's
going to be me. I remember the day I got my cauliflower ear I
was like, well, here I am. Then my nose got smashed and it's
like, here we go. I knew this would happen. I just didn't know
it would happen this quick."
MMA
legend and former UFC champion Pat Miletich, who once suffered
a neck injury in training that nearly severed his spine, echoed
that sentiment.
"Everybody
knows the risks," said Miletich. "Even somebody with
one eye and half a brain recognizes the risks. But what are you
willing to do for fame and fortune?"
The
question is, how far do we collectively allow a fighter to go
in that pursuit? At what point are organizations or regulatory
bodies justified in stepping in and making decisions for him
in order to protect his health?
It's
something state athletic commissions do on a smaller scale with
medical suspensions, but is it enough? According to Dr. Benjamin,
not when it comes to head injuries and concussions, many of which
may go unreported or undiagnosed in training.
"The
thing that I've always said, and it's been extremely unpopular,
is to limit the number of concussions they can take before they
are mandated to take a break from the sport. I mean, you look
at Wanderlei Silva or at Chuck Liddell recently, and you don't
have to look too hard before you think that maybe they shouldn't
have been fighting so long. Or a guy like Todd Duffee, who everyone
thought the world of, and now he's had his lights shut off a
couple of times. Maybe he needs a mandated year off from the
sport to allow his brain time to heal."
And
yet, to a young fighter who knows he only has so many profitable
years to make enough money to see him through to old age, a year
is an awful long time.
Fortunately
for Shamrock, he had the financial stability to walk away from
MMA once he began to feel that it was no longer worth the physical
costs. Even though he might sometimes feel like a 38-year-old
in a 60-year-old's body when he gets out of bed in the morning,
he said, he would "100 percent do it the same" if he
had to do it all over again.
It's
the same for Curran, who at 33 years old now sports a litany
of injuries that reads like the results of a multi-car pileup
on the highway. It's not that he's never considered what price
he might be paying for his MMA career, he said. It's just that
he never seriously considered any other way to live.
"I
remember my wife, I was just dating her at the time and I was
about 20 years old and she'd say, 'I can't believe you're putting
yourself through this. Do you know what you're going to be like
when you're 30?' Now I'm in my thirties, and it's like, what
am I going to be like when I'm 40 or 50? ...Hey, sometimes I
wonder what it's going to feel like tomorrow."
'The
Truth About...' is a recurring feature on MMAFighting.com that
takes an in-depth look at various aspects of the sport. Check
out past installments, such as 'The Truth About Losing' and 'The
Truth About Choosing Your Fights.'
Source: MMA Fighting
|
“Werdum
will shock you once again”
By Guilherme
Cruz
Fabrício Werdum’s coach on the United States, Rafael
Cordeiro is more than confident on his student’s success
on Strikeforce GP, especially because the black belt already
has beaten three participants of the tournament. On a chat with
TATAME, Rafael commented what makes this GP so special, which
might point out the new number one of the division. “Werdum
will shock you once again… The level of difficulty they’ll
have to face in each fight will show us who the best in the world
is”, said the coacher, who also commented the duel with
Overeem and the possible bout with Fedor Emelianenko and Antônio
Bigfoot Silva on the semifinals.
How
is Werdum’s preparation to fight Overeem?
We’ve
started his preparation as soon as he got better from his surgery.
He’s super motivated for this fight, we have great training
partners. Werdum will shock you once again.
You
have much experience on GPs, since Pride… What’s the
difference of doing a matched fight and fighting on a tournament?
We’re
working hard on it. All group is used to disputing GPs, we know
that each win is a big step on the championship, we’re moving
ahead on the ranking. Winning a tournament like this people start
knowing you better within the martial arts’ world and you
become the number one of the world.
Do
you believe that the winning of this GP should be considered
the best of the world?
I
believe so. The level of difficulty they’ll have to face
in each fight will show us who the best in the world is. We’ll
give our best to make Werdum proves he’s the best of this
championship.
If
Werdum beats Overeem, he’ll fight the winner of Fedor vs
Silva, two guys he has beaten on Strikeforce… What do you
expect of this fight?
I
think Bigfoot must feel the room… We cheer for him, Bigfoot
is our kid. It’s a hard fight, on this GP there won’t
be any easy fight for anyone. Doing the right game, he can get
the win.
Then
he’d have a rematch with Werdum…
There
we’re all professionals, there’s no rivalry. We’d
do this fight with no problems. It’s better actually, because
that way we’d guarantee a Brazilian on the grand finale.
Source: Tatame
|
Should
10-10 and 10-7 rounds be used by judges in scoring MMA fights?
By Zach
Arnold
On
Tuesday, a caller on Jordan Breen’s radio show called in
to discuss his experience last week in going through a licensing
course in the state of North Carolina for MMA. In short, the
caller claimed that he was instructed and taught to not embrace
10-10 or 10-7 rounds for scoring and that on the written tests
applicants took, it was clear what answer was supposedly wanted
to pass or fail the test. According to the caller, the instructor
in question said that scoring 10-10 rounds is unfair to the fighters
who train hard and that you should be able to tell who won a
round. The same person also allegedly said that you shouldn’t
score 10-7 rounds because that would indicate gross negligence
on the part of a referee to not stop a fight and that if such
an occurrence took place that the referee should be arrested.
(If
you’re thinking of a 10-7 round in MMA, think of Cris Cyborg
vs. Jan Finney.)
“The
unfortunate part and the really chilling part is that the explanations
you were given are no different than what are given at the highest
levels,” Mr. Breen said in response to the caller.
“That,
to me, that could have been Marc Ratner talking. I mean, that
is Marc Ratner’s explanation of things.
‘You
shouldn’t score 10-10 rounds because you’re supposed
to be a professional judge and if you’re a real judge you
can tell the difference between who is more effective.’
“And
the fact of the matter is, it’s backwards thinking because
to say that, you know, ‘oh, well these rounds never happen’
or ‘this isn’t the right way to score things.’
Well, what if, like there are so many things that can happen
in a round and, OK, if a 10-7 round happens and, you know, it’s
unconscionable that the referee let it go, OK, arrest the referee
after. You still have to score the round. What, you scored a
10-8 and then… what? The referee just gets arrested after
and no mentions that it was a worse than 10-8? This doesn’t
even make sense. Whether or not the referee did a good job doesn’t
make you exempt from scoring the round properly, like it’s
not even a sensical thing. Like, to say, ‘oh, well, 10-7
is the worst thing because if it happens the ref didn’t
do his job.’ Oh, is that to say that referees always do
their job in MMA? Because I would beg to differ.”
Reacting
to the assertion that the instructor wanted specific answers
to pass/fail a written test, the Sherdog host said do what you
have to do to get your foot in the door.
“The
best thing you can do is pass whatever stupid hoops they want
you to jump through and then when you’re a man with a score
card in front of you, score 10-10s as often as you think are
appropriate. I mean, the thing is, the people who are in charge
of the system feel that way for a reason. The thing that needs
to be said, though, I mean it’s a particular viewpoint which
is softening in general, think of it like any kind of social
change. Now, obviously 10-10 rounds are less important than other,
you know, wide-spanning social changes but these things take
time to be decayed and broken down in people’s minds. The
fact that we’ve come as far with 10-10s, like the fact that
for me, you know, I see someone like Josh Gross who, when, we
worked together here at Sherdog, always steadfastly argued with
me, like 10-10 rounds, ‘leave those in Shooto, that’s
stupid.’ And now when I see him score 10-10 rounds himself
and, you know, when I see like major MMA web sites score 10-10
rounds quite liberally, I mean clearly the climate of MMA is
changing. It’s something that people didn’t even really
discuss until, you know, two or three years ago. So I think we’re
moving the right direction but the unfortunate reality is if
you’re looking to get licensed, looking to take scoring
courses and the like and whatever, you’re going to encounter
people who are pretty old-guard and have this idea that, yeah,
you never score 10-10 rounds, they never happen, and that, yeah,
a 10-7 round, perish the thought because if that happens then
the referee didn’t do their job as though that makes any
sense whatsoever.”
Recently
in Canada, Big John McCarthy held a COMMAND officiating seminar
and laid out the way to judge effectiveness of holds/moves during
a fight (as opposed to simply scoring a round for a fighter who
has top position but does nothing with it.) Mr. Breen told listeners
that these types of seminars are great for those who go into
them with an open mind to learn but that the bad judges currently
in MMA are those who are least likely to take away anything from
the seminars.
“Most
MMA judges that people who have score cards put in front of them
don’t have that level of familiarity. That’s the unfortunate
part. For a lot of people, that doesn’t exist. I mean, it
says a lot that when judges go astray most people agree on who
won a fight. There are always going to be some fights that strongly
divide people. Take a fight like the Rampage (Jackson) &
(Lyoto) Machida fight. That’s a good example of a fight
that some people will feel one way, some people will feel another
but it comes down to a fundamental apples vs. oranges kind of
argument. It’s not so much about someone blowing it and
fundamentally misunderstanding the sport, so much as what’s
personal valued. And when get down to that atomic, subjective
level, it’s understandable. But most bad decisions in MMA
are still decisions that most people, 60%, 70%, 75%, 80% of people
feel one person won. Why is that? The people who are responding,
the people who are in love with MMA and understand the sport
have a much, much more savvy insight than unfortunately the people
who are being asked to score these fights. So, the fact that
a course for someone who already gets this stuff would help turn
their mind onto these things, sure. I mean, think of it like
any kind of teaching curriculum. Put someone who’s an absolute
blathering idiot in a graduate school scenario. I mean, the hope
when you give people higher education is that they are already
of a sufficient intellect that they can be turned onto new ideas
and respond to them critically. If someone has no ability to
do that all, what are the odds that they’re going to get
anything out of it? What are the odds that Glenn Trowbridge is
going to be able to really appreciate John McCarthy’s thesis
on effectiveness? What are the odds of that? Not very great.
If people who are really concerned about the well-being of MMA
and really love this sport were getting into judging on the whole,
it wouldn’t be an issue and that’s why I encourage
listeners and readers to do it and take up the cause en masse.
And I think it’s, as I’ve said, extremely encouraging
to see so many people who e-mail in are like, hey, you know,
I took COMMAND this weekend or, hey, I just got a response from
my local athletic commission and really, really get involved.
That’s a huge, huge step forward because that’s not
something that MMA has in any significant number at this point
in time. At all.”
Despite
the current frustration that many MMA fans have with the crop
of judges in the sport, he encouraged everyone to get involved
and be pro-active by getting involved in the officiating process.
“Going
back to June of last year and talking about the Vancouver athletic
commission, Lance Gibson, fought in the UFC, now trains guys
in the UFC. He was a judge for UFC 115 where Rich Franklin knocked
out Chuck Liddell and on that night he scored two 10-10 rounds.
Now, Lance Gibson fought in Japan, fought in pro Shooto, kind
of influences his understanding of how 10-10 rounds work. Marc
Ratner was reportedly very upset that he did that. It seems ridiculous.
Seems ridiculous on a night where you had a guy like Tony Weeks
who scored the fight with Tyson Griffin and Evan Dunham for Tyson
Griffin. It seems ridiculous that the guy you would be singling
out is the guy who scored 10-10 rounds and actually has a clue
about MMA. But that’s the state of regulation.
“The
only way it’s going to change is if more people continue
to bang the drum about 10-10 rounds, 10-7 rounds, and continue
to challenge these very archaic and stone-ladened, chiseled-out,
prescribed, idiotic principles that have guided judging in Mixed
Martial Arts since 2001 and longer. I think we’ll get there,
eventually. We’re never going to get to a point where all
decisions please everybody but we’ve already moved in a
fairly, fairly positive direction. It’s going to change
if more people continue to take up arms against the treachery
of horrible decisions and get licensed themselves. It’s
noble, it’s fantastic, and any one who goes out and does
it I think its a fantastic, fantastic contributor and asset to
Mixed Martial Arts.”
Source: Fight Opinion
|
Strikeforce’s
Nick Diaz: “People Think GSP’s Better Than Me and It’s
BS”
by Damon
Martin
There are a lot of fighters who will take exception to many of
the rankings in the world of MMA. One person who is more than
happy to let his feelings be known is Strikeforce welterweight
champion Nick Diaz, who keeps calling out Georges St-Pierre because
everyone tries to tell him that St-Pierre is the best fighter
at 170 pounds.
Well
if that’s what everyone is saying, he is tired of listening
to it.
Diaz,
who spent several years with the UFC early in his career, has
spent the last few working for different organizations including
EliteXC and Strikeforce. During that time he’s established
himself as one of the toughest competitors at 170 pounds, and
thinks it’s high time people recognized his work.
“I
think I got here and started fighting before most of them, including
Georges St-Pierre in the UFC. I was really mad because they were
getting fights and recognition when I was here first. I thought
it was first come, first serve. I was working harder and I was
here first,” Diaz commented on Thursday.
Diaz
also brought up St-Pierre’s last opponent, Josh Koscheck,
who he believes deserves no place among the top fighters in the
welterweight division.
“Josh
Koscheck, I cornered a guy to fight Josh Koscheck, he probably
had two fights in his life, and this fight he was set up to fight
Josh Koscheck. They made easy fights for those guys. This guy’s
got like six or seven fights, all easy guys. I never fought anybody
like that guy that’s fought against Josh Koscheck,”
Diaz explained.
“We’ve
got some guy who doesn’t even fight, he drinks at a bar,
and we took him to fight Josh Koscheck one day. He didn’t
even know who he was fighting. I’ve never had fights like
that. So when you bring up guys like that to me and tell me they’re
the best fighters in the world, it’s a (expletive) joke.”
While
it’s true that Diaz is in a different promotion than St-Pierre
or Koscheck, he believes that the organizations could work together
to make the fights happen that the fans and critics want to see.
“Straight
up, people think this guy’s better than me and it’s
(expletive),” Diaz said about St-Pierre. “He just fought
Josh Koscheck for (expletive) five rounds, I just told you about
Josh Koscheck. Why are you saying he’s the best? What is
that (expletive)? Because we fight for different companies?
“I
think it’s big enough to where they can get enough money
involved where they can organize that show.”
It’s
obvious Diaz is more than willing to face anybody that steps
in to fight him, but if there is a consolation prize it’s
the fact that he believes his teammate will take the crown off
of St-Pierre’s head come April 30 at UFC 129 in Toronto.
“Right
now, what do you want? You guys rank that guy above me. I want
to fight GSP, but I think my partner (Jake Shields) will take
him out regardless,” said Diaz.
He
also named UFC middleweight champion Anderson Silva among his
dream fights, but ultimately he wants to prove he’s the
best whether it’s against St-Pierre or someone in Strikeforce.
He’s ready for the test.
“It’s
a joke to me. This guy may be a good fighter now, but these guys
that are ranked up there, I was here first and that’s fine,”
Diaz shouted. “Let’s fight then and make it happen.”
Source: MMA Weekly
|
An
historic day with Rickson, Royler, and Canto
by Carlos
Eduardo Ozório
Three great representatives of the martial arts in Brazil, Jiu-Jitsu
and MMA champions Rickson and Royler Gracie and Olympic judo
medalist and Jiu-Jitsu black belt Flávio Canto held a
seminar to benefit the victims of catastrophic mudslides in the
mountain region of Rio de Janeiro, thisWednesday at São
João Fort in the Urca neighborhood of the city of Rio
de Janeiro, Brazil.
The
event – put together within a few days by the folks at Monk
Sports with the help of black belts Marcelo Tetel and Rodrigo
Antunes – brought in nearly six metric tons of food donated
by a little over 800 participants. The effort was also backed
by the Brazilian Army; the CBJJ, which lent mats and donated
food; and Vulkan, which donated a number of gis to be auctioned
off; among others.
Practitioners
from white to black belt packed the venue. Among them were well
known personalities, lovers of the sport, and established names
in Jiu-Jitsu like Ricardo De La Riva, Kyra Gracie, and Letícia
Ribeiro, among others.
Source: Gracie Magazine
|
Nick
Diaz Rips Mayhem Miller Rumors, Welterweight Rankings
By Mike
Chiappetta
Nick Diaz has apparently had all he can take when it comes to
questions about the bout that never was against Jason "Mayhem"
Miller. Nine months after a post-fight melee in Nashville ignited
a bitter and ongoing rivalry between the pair, the sides are
no closer to getting into a cage and settling it the old-fashioned
way.
And
during a conference call to hype up his upcoming Jan. 29 title
defense against Evangelista "Cyborg" Santos, Diaz made
his feelings very clear on the matter, saying that given the
weight disparity, it's not a fight he'll agree to unless the
cash is right.
The
conference call followed the pattern of a typical Diaz fight:
jab, jab, feel out the spacing, and then, when he was properly
warmed up, he let it rip.
"I'd
be happy to move up," he said. "I'd just like to be
paid for it, you now. I don't like how people try to say that
I didn't accept the fight with Miller because I was too small.
I never said anything about that. I said, If I'm going to go
off-track, it's going to screw with my season, screw with my
whole year, screw with my capabilities fighting at 170 pounds.
So If I'm going to do that, I would like to get paid in full.
I'd like to have a reason for doing that. It's not just doing
it at everyone else's convenience. I would like to get paid something
extra. Double, triple, something crazy for me to do that, to
move up in weight and fight at that weight.
Pacquiao's making $40 f---ing million, GSP's making a couple
million dollars. And I'm over here driving a Honda because my
s---'s breaking down?
-- Nick Diaz
"Moving up or moving down, I'd rather move down before I
moved up," he continued. "If you want me to move to
a different class, let me move down if you're not going to pay
me more money for it. I might as well be moving down. That's
probably better. I'll move up, but can I get paid for it? People
see something great. Offer me a fight at 185, offer me a big
money fight and I'll make it happen. But I'm not just doing it
for free when I make the same money at 170 pounds. It's more
work. Twice as much work. I never would've signed for that fight
with Miller. They were talking about making me move weight. I
said, 'Tell his ass to get in f---ing shape and make weight like
I do.' It's f---ing hard enough for me to make 170 pounds. He
acts like he wouldn't be able to do it. He doesn't want to work
hard like me. That's the problem. So he could work his ass off
and make 170 pounds, 175 pounds. Or somebody can pay me a couple
f---ing million dollars and I'll move up to 185 pounds and I'll
fight him."
The
Strikeforce welterweight champion made it clear it's an issue
of money over bad blood, despite the fact that he recently signed
a contract extension with the San Jose, California-based promotion.
"That
motherf---r doesn't want to fight me," he said. "Talking
about, 'he wants to fight me' every chance he gets. He's got
control of the media. I'll fight at any weight. I'll fight at
185 pounds. I'd like to get paid. Pacquiao's making $40 f---ing
million, GSP's making a couple millions dollars. And I'm over
here driving a Honda because my s---'s breaking down?"
Diaz
also took issue with world fighter rankings, telling the story
of when he cornered a fighter who had only fought twice before
as he took on the UFC welterweight Josh Koscheck.
The
fighter, likely former Team Cesar Gracie member Chris Sanford,
who was actually 4-0 at the time, was knocked out in the first
round by Koscheck (who was 2-0 and making his UFC debut after
appearing on the Ultimate Fighter). Diaz, though, sees that as
an example of selective matchmaking that helped several UFC stars
build up strong records, and helps hoodwink the media and public
into believing they are better than they actually are.
"I
never had fights like that," he said. "So when you
bring up guys like that to me and tell me they're the best fighters
in the world, it's a f---ing joke. It's a joke to me. He may
be a good fighter now, but these guys that are ranked up there,
I was here first. That's fine, but lets fight then, you know?
Make it happen."
Diaz,
who said his dream fights would be against Anderson Silva or
Georges St. Pierre, was asked why he continues to call out fighters
that it's unlikely he'll ever face while he's under contract
to a rival promotion.
"Why
wouldn't I get this fight?" he said. "Why are you saying
it's unavailable? Because we fight for different companies? I
think there's enough money involved that they can organize that
sort of thing."
In
the meantime, he'll have to settle for Santos, an 18-13 brawler
who won his divisional debut by TKO over Marius Zaromskis in
December.
"I
think this is the best opponent for right now that I'd agree
to," he said. "I want to fight GSP. But I think my
partner [teammate Jake Shields] will take him out regardless."
Source: MMA Fighting
|
MMA
trainer Shawn Tompkins on Vitor Belfort: “Vitor isn’t
loyal to anybody”
By Zach
Arnold
“I’m always motivated to improve and be a better fighter.
I believe that people put a big focus on things like having the
belt. I don’t believe that having the belt really determines
the type of fighter and type of person that you are. I try to
set an example for the young fighters that are coming up and
leave a legacy of what I’ve been able to do in this sport.
“I’m
not concerned about who my next opponent is. He’s a dangerous
opponent just like the rest.
“It’s
every athlete’s dream to end his career as a champion, just
like it is mine. However, in this sport, it is very difficult.
After the Chael (Sonnen) fight, people think I’m human again
and that anything can happen. I could be knocked out. I could
be submitted. For me, every time I go out there, it’s about
more than just winning the fight. It’s about sending a positive
message and leaving a message behind of what I was able to do
in there.
I
figured we’d start out with some comments from Anderson
Silva. Now, onto what Shawn Tompkins said to Mauro Ranallo on
The Fight Show (January 18th edition):
MAURO
RANALLO: “What about Vitor Belfort? I know that you were
helping him prepare for his fight against Anderson Silva. Now,
he’s at Xtreme Couture, your former home base, talk of him
recruiting Mike Tyson to help him prepare for Anderson Silva.
What is your relationship with Belfort and why won’t you
be in his corner?”
SHAWN
TOMPKINS: “Well, you know, Vitor has done this before. Vitor
sometimes, he gets a little clouded in his head. It’s not
that he brought in Mike Tyson or anything like that. Vitor just
wanders, you know, and he goes where, you know, what’s happening,
what’s famous, what’s popular and he’ll go over
there and Mike Tyson isn’t teaching him anything. Neither
is the other eight gyms that he’s training at. Just because
he’s over at Couture’s and not with me doesn’t
mean he’s with Couture’s. Vitor isn’t loyal to
anybody. We’ve seen it before.”
MAURO
RANALLO: “I do sense some acrimony. Are you then not on
good terms with Vitor right now?”
SHAWN
TOMPKINS: “I hope for the best for him, but you know for
a guy who told me about respect, loyalty, and God and all this
stuff for so many years, he sure did prove the opposite. So,
we’ll see. Best of luck to him. Best of luck to Anderson,
as well.”
Source: Fight Opinion
|
Frankie
Edgar Looking for Closure Against Gray Maynard at UFC 130
by Damon
Martin
UFC lightweight champion Frankie Edgar is excited to face Gray
Maynard again for a number of reasons, but one thing looming
overhead is larger than anything else. He wants closure.
Like
watching a movie and the ending is a cliffhanger to get you to
come back and watch part two, Edgar isn’t happy that his
UFC 125 fight with Maynard ended in a tie, because while he feels
like he won, it was still scored a draw.
All
signs are currently pointing towards a May 30 showdown to settle
things between Edgar and Maynard. The champion still hasn’t
signed a contract for the bout, but he’s happy to get back
into training and finish the fight with Maynard.
“There’s
definitely been talks about it. I’m not sure that’s
100 percent. I haven’t signed anything, but I guess Dana
talked about it, so it’s probably set in stone,” Edgar
said about the May 30 fight date at UFC 130. “I’m super
excited, I can’t wait to get back in there to be honest
with you.
“Just
to get some closure. You get to have a fight like that and no
one ends up the winner, it kind of sucks, but I’m glad I
get another crack at it.”
While
back-to-back fights against the same opponent are not the normal
modus operandi in MMA, Edgar is a rare case of a fighter who
has done it before and with successful results.
After
defeating B.J. Penn to win the UFC lightweight title last April,
he turned around and fought him again this past August. The result?
Edgar
dominated Penn en route to a unanimous decision victory to close
the book on his fights with the Hawaiian, and solidify himself
as the lightweight champion.
So
how does Edgar feel about going after Maynard for the second
straight fight?
“I
plan on turning it up even more from here,” he said. “As
far as improving as a fighter, it’s my main objective. I’m
not only looking at Gray as the main thing, I just want to get
better. So after Gray, whoever it may be, I’m prepared for
that guy. I’ve got a tough challenge ahead of me, but the
last fight with B.J., I was able to step it up, and hopefully
I’ll be able to do it again.”
Edgar
will continue to work with his normal team in New Jersey as well
as trips to New York City to work at the Renzo Gracie Academy.
The trilogy with Maynard looks to go down at the Memorial Day
weekend show in Las Vegas as a part of UFC 130.
Source: MMA Weekly
|
Cigano
all set for Brock and TUF: “Whatever happens in the house
will be settled in the octagon”
by Carlos
Eduardo Ozório
Called on to challenge UFC heavyweight champion Cain Velasquez,
Junior “Cigano” dos Santos saw his hopes dashed when
his opponent pulled out injured. UFC president Dana White had
a good solution for the problem, though. Cigano is now the coach
of the next season of the The Ultimate Fighter reality show,
putting him up against former champion Brock Lesnar.
And
the challenge has become all the greater, seeing as the Brazilian
admits his English is not exactly up to par – although he
does guarantee he will be able to handle his own on the show.
“I’m
nervous! My manager called me, said he wanted to put me in the
UFC house, and I told him about the language problem. He replied:
‘If they’re not worried about it, why would you be?’
That made me more confident and I agreed to it,” Cigano
told GRACIEMAG.com.
One who provided all the support he could was Rodrigo Minotauro,
who has already had the experience.
“Rodrigo
did the show with Frank Mir and told me it’s a good thing
to do, that there my life will be divided into pre-TUF and pro-TUF,
that that will be clear in my life. I was really stoked!”
Out
Velasquez, in Brock Lesnar, an opponent of extraordinary strength.
“It’s
the fight that came about to prove, once and for all, that I
deserve a shot at the belt. I have to be calm, prudent, and fight
him intelligently. I have to keep on my toes not to let myself
fall into his game,” he assays.
As
is the rule on the reality show, there should be plenty of provocation.
Cigano is ready.
“I
feel that’s part of it and I’ll even like it. If I
understand what he says, I may even have a comeback for him!
Truth is, whatever happens in the house will be settled in the
octagon, that’s for sure!” he says in closing.
Source: Gracie Magazine
|
Dana
White Will Change His Mind About Women 'Never' in the UFC
By Michael
David Smith
One of those camera-toting TMZ reporters who follows celebrities
around and questions them as they're getting into their limos
recently caught up with UFC President Dana White for a 19-second
interview that you can watch here.
White
briefly confirmed that heavyweight champion Cain Velasquez is
doing well in his recovery from surgery, then was asked, "When
are we going to see women in the UFC?"
White
replied, "never."
Fortunately
for those of us who want to see women in the Octagon, White has
shown in the past that "never" does not mean what he
thinks it means.
White
himself has acknowledged that his "nevers" often don't
last. Before James Toney stepped into the Octagon, White said,
"I said I would never put on a freak show. I'm putting on
a freak show."
Other
examples of White going back on his "never in the UFC"
words: When Karo Parisyan pulled out of his UFC 106 fight, White
declared he would never fight in the UFC again. When B.J. Penn
spurned the UFC to go fight in Japan in 2004, White told him
he'd never fight in the UFC again. When Chuck Liddell was knocked
out by Shogun Rua, White said Liddell would never fight in the
UFC again.
So
what makes me think women in the UFC will some day be added to
the list of Dana White "nevers" that weren't really
nevers?
The
primary reason is financial. Right now, there's not a female
actively fighting who could make a big enough difference to the
UFC's bottom line for the UFC to sign her. But there was a time,
just a couple of years ago, when Gina Carano was becoming popular
enough that White and Lorenzo Fertitta contacted her about possibly
entering the Octagon. That didn't work out, and right now there's
no female draw comparable to Carano in 2009, but there's no reason
another female fighter couldn't gain enough popularity outside
the UFC to make White want to see her in the UFC.
But
there's another reason I think White will change his mind: Giving
women a shot in the UFC is simply the right thing to do.
You
could say White was motivated solely by the bottom line when
he booked fights for Toney, Liddell and Penn, but when White
decided to give Parisyan another chance in the UFC, he wasn't
doing it for financial reasons: Parisyan wasn't a big draw, and
his UFC 123 fight was scheduled for the un-aired preliminary
card. White gave Parisyan another chance not because Parisyan
mattered to the UFC's bottom line, but simply because he thought
Parisyan deserved another chance.
Eventually,
I think White will come to feel the same way about women's MMA.
He'll see that the best female fighters train as hard as the
best male fighters and that they're as dedicated to the sport
as male fighters, and he'll figure that the best of the best
deserve a shot on the biggest stage.
I
don't think it's going to happen this year, probably not next
year and maybe not even in five years. But women will fight in
the UFC some day.
Source: MMA Fighting
|
UFC
Fight for the Troops 2 card
By Zach
Arnold
¦Bantamweights:
Will Campuzano vs. Chris Cariaso
¦Welterweights: Charlie Brenneman vs. Amilcar Alves
¦Lightweights: Waylon Lowe vs. Willamy Freire
¦Featherweights: Mike Brown vs. Rani Yahya
¦Welterweights: Damarques Johnson vs. Mike Guymon
¦Lightweights: Cody McKenzie vs. Yves Edwards
¦Lightweights: Cole Miller vs. Matt Wiman
¦Heavyweights: Pat Barry vs. Joey Beltran
¦Featherweights: Mark Hominick vs. George Roop
¦Heavyweights: Matt Mitrione vs. Tim Hague
¦Lightweights: Evan Dunham vs. Melvin Guillard
The show will air live on both coasts (9 PM EST/6 PM PST) instead
of a delayed broadcast on the West Coast. They are raising money
for the Intreprid Fallen Heroes Fund.
Source: Fight Opinion
|
Man-Up
& Stand-Up
Waipahu Filcom Community Center, Waipahu, Hawaii
January 29, 2011
Awwhhhh yeah! Man –up & Stand-up is back for all you
bangaz that like to stay away from the ground game. 2010’s
end of the year show blew the roof off of the filcom. New champions
were made but overall every fighter that night put on a champion
effort-as always. 2011 will produce new fighters that will probably
be fighting for titles at the end of the year because that’s
how its done here on Man-up & Stand-up.
The
main event for the first show of the year will feature 2010”s
fight of the night (possible fight of the year). Robert Banis
and Justin Dulay will meet again in the ring to see if the first
fight was a fluke. If you didn’t get to see this fight than
you missed out on some major damage. Both these guys were lighting
each other up as if New Year’s came two months earlier.
It was dead even the first round with shots being fired from
both sides. There was intense fire with neither man backing down.
The opening of the second round, both fighters came out swinging
a big roundhouse kick on each other with Robert’s landing
first and sending Justin down to receive a standing 8 count.
Justin got back up and was in attack mode again but Robert wouldn’t
let him return the favor. Both sides punished each other the
second round. The third round bell rang and it was on like mochi
crunch and popcorn (nah). Justin chased Robert down and delivered
unwanted mail to Robert’s face but Robert like a true westsider,
received it and returned it to sender. All of the judges had
Justin winning the third round but it was just a little to late
and Robert Banis walked away with the gold around his waist.
Some say the standing 8 count was what decided this fight. But
this is a new year for new beginnings and Justin is looking to
begin the new year with some redemption. Be there when Man-up
& Stand-up dim the lights low and watch these two guys light
the filcom up. Das Right
Another
fight that will send fans jumping out of their seats is when
Dennis “Da Meanest” Montira meets Julio Moreno. These
two little hammaz will prove to everyone that you should never
take a lightweight lightly. 10 ounces, kicks, knees, heads, etc.,
will be flying when the bell goes ding. Dennis worked his way
up the kickboxing scene with the greatest of ease, taking out
everyone from 110-120. Now he has stepped up to fight for the
129# title against Oahu’s favorite cholo Julio Moreno. Julio
who is well-known in the mma scene will try to secure a spot
in the Man-up & Stand-up world. These two bangaz can give
and take cracks so get the medic, get the cutman, get the smelling
salts, get your tickets cause these guys are gonna battle til
someone falls or til the bell rings. Beleev dat
Another
fight that will showcase two fighters chasing the dream is Jared
Ferreira and Joseph Enaena. Jared started last year at 190 and
will be meeting another relentless fighter by the name of Joseph
at 170#. Both of these guys are an inspiration to the show. They
do not let any obstacle stand in their way of the goal that they
want to achieve. Joseph has the wild, I dont give a f*#k style
of fighting. But his ammo comes all the way from Maui so it may
work to Jared’s tight defense, I’ll throw when you’re
not ready style of fighting. Bombs will be thrown in this match
but lets see if Jared can dismantle the bombs and throw some
of his own. May the best man win. Be there
Man-up
& Stand-up would like to thank all of you who support this
show every year. And whoever couldn’t get on this show.
As it was said, You’ll definitely have a place on the Feb
19th show. Our word is gold and it cant be sold. Das Right
JUSTIN
DULAY
155
ROBERT BANIS
DENNIS DA MEANEST MONTIRA
125
JULIO MORENO
ISRAEL LOVELACE
125
ELIAS THE KIDD VELASCO
KONA
60
STANFORD AQUINO
ISAIAH PASCUA
145
AUSTIN CALDERON
BLAKE MAMALIAS
145
MIKE MORALES
DARRYLL DANO
130
KALEI HIGA
ROB JOSEPH
175
ROB CONNELL
JARED FERREIRA
170
JOSEPH ENAENA
LAWRENCE HINOJOSA
160
WALKER
MAKANA WIGGLESWORTH
150
CHAZ KANAE
CHRISTIAN DAYEDON
205-210
ANDYMAR
RENON
KANOI
250
TYLER LAUIFI
BRYSON AIONA
190
MIRACLE MCKENZIE
CHANTE STAFFORD
125
EUGENE
ANGUAY
JARNARD MATA
75
SHAYSTON REDOBLE
MAHINA MELANEISH
100
JADA PEREIRA
CHARLES COLONA
120
ALIKA KUMUKOA
SHANE BEVIN
135
NEVADA HARRISON
KALVIN BAGOYO
135
KAYLEN STAFFORD
ISAAC SABALA
135
MICAH SHIGETA
MICAH LOVELL GONZALES
95
RADROGER RAZWELL
LAAKEA KAHOOKELE
155-160
ETHAN KERFOOT
DJ CASERIA
125
RYOTO TEZUKA
ANTHONY SALAS
145-150
DARREN
WONG
JOSHUA NAELI
170
CHRISTIAN BAUTISTA
JACOB CARTER
55
KEONA CHAVEZ
PAUL BOTER
145
MIKE UEMOTO
All
matches & participants are subject to change.
Source: Derrick Bright
|
UFC
‘Fight for the Troops 2’ Preview: The Main Card
by Jason
Probst
Fresh
off a head-scratching decision loss to former lightweight champion
Sean Sherk, the world-ranked Evan Dunham returns to the cage
against dangerous Melvin Guillard in the UFC “Fight for
the Troops 2” headliner on Saturday at Fort Hood in Killeen,
Texas.
The
event also showcases a pair of heavyweight bouts of interest
-- Matt Mitrione vs. Tim Hague and Patrick Barry vs. Joey Beltran
-- and assorted matchups from the lighter weight classes.
A
closer look at the main card follows:
Lightweights
Evan Dunham (No. 10 LW) vs. Melvin Guillard
The
Matchup: As usual, Guillard brings a lot of on-paper advantages
into a match, but how he will apply them is the lingering wild
card. He’s a powerful striker and exceptionally strong.
Dunham enjoyed a great 2010, scoring significant wins over “The
Ultimate Fighter” Season 8 winner Efrain Escudero (submission)
and Xtreme Couture Mixed Martial Arts representative Tyson Griffin
(decision). After a disputed decision defeat to Sherk in September,
Dunham’s first career loss means very little. He remains
a lightweight to watch.
Dunham
will be tasked with controlling the range against Guillard, who
excels at shuffling in and out of striking distance and letting
big bombs go. Guillard does not want to get into a battle on
the mat, where Dunham excels at transitions, threatening with
submissions and constantly putting foes on the defensive. As
such, Guillard will have to work his range appropriately, utilizing
his strikes before getting away clean. Dunham is strong in the
clinch, using his height and tie-ups to bang away and score points.
On
paper, as was the case in his fight with Nate Diaz at UFC Fight
Night 19, this looks like one Guillard can win. However, he made
a key error against Diaz and was submitted by the Stockton, Calif.,
battler, showing again how a single mistake can cost one dearly
inside the Octagon, especially against talented lightweights.
The
Pick: Dunham is exactly that kind of guy, and he will survive
a tough moment or two before finding an opening and exploiting
it, winning by submission in the second. This will serve as a
major chin test for Dunham, but it is also the kind of bout in
which he can show his mettle and prove whether he deserves to
move up another notch in the rankings.
Heavyweights
Matt Mitrione vs. Tim Hague
The
Matchup: When other weight classes go crashing to the mat after
a takedown, they do not make the cage shake, which is just one
reason heavyweights will always be the red meat on the MMA menu.
They also produce violent knockouts with a commonality rarely
evidenced amidst the little guys. That makes Mitrione-Hague compelling.
Mitrione
continues to improve after his hot-and-cold performances on Season
10 of “The Ultimate Fighter,” as the former NFL player
has shown stout hands and a sense of the timing, space management
and tactics he needs to succeed in MMA.
Despite
a limited background in the sport, Mitrione seems to be at home
standing, letting his hands go with nice, comfortable combinations.
At times, he seems a little too relaxed, but he does not come
off like a ship lost at sea when pinned against the cage or on
his back.
Hague,
meanwhile, is one of those huge guys that present problems for
anyone not at the elite level. At 6-foot-4, 265 pounds, he’s
a handful if he presses you against the cage or gets you on the
ground. He will likely have the takedown advantage, and while
he has proven willing to throw hard standing, Mitrione is the
better technical striker. That advantage means less between heavyweights,
simply because they generate more knockout power, pound-for-pound.
For
Hague to win, he has to execute in a series of well-timed attacks,
pinning Mitrione against the cage, taking him down and punishing
him from top while running him out of gas and keeping him on
the defensive. For Mitrione to emerge victorious, he will need
to land effectively when avoiding tie-ups and pop up when taken
down without taking too much damage from the powerful Hague.
The
Pick: The guess here is that a back-and-forth fight ensues through
the first two rounds, before Hague eventually pulls ahead en
route to a third-round ground-and-pound stoppage or a hard-earned
decision win.
Featherweights
Mark Hominick vs. George Roop
The
Matchup: There are fights that seem designed to produce a desired
result, largely to fill in existing promotional needs. This is
one of them. The UFC’s newly minted 145-pound division is
in desperate need of recognizable contenders for uber-champion
Jose Aldo, and Hominick would be an easy sell in that role.
The
6-foot-1 Roop scored the most significant win of his career with
a knockout of Chan Sung Jung at WEC 51 in September, turning
around a string of disappointing performances at the big-show
level. He will fight till he’s turned into hamburger, and
Hominick will oblige him, as the Canadian does not have to worry
about takedowns and has a long target on which to unload.
While
the division has some decent talent, the moderately stocked cupboard
took two major hits at UFC 125, with two of the top 145-pounders
losing via upset. With Mike Thomas Brown and Josh Grispi dropping
decisions to Diego Nunes and Dustin Poirier, and the talented
Chad Mendes still perhaps a win or more away from getting Aldo,
this represents a monumental opportunity for Hominick. If he
wins impressively here, he figures to get the next shot at Aldo,
allowing the UFC to keep the champion busy while lining up another
viable contender.
The
Pick: Look for Hominick to showcase his far superior technique,
mixing in kicks with combinations and putting some real hurt
on a game but limited opponent. Roop’s options are pretty
limited here. He’s a true plugger who will soldier forth
even if he gets hammered. Hominick will answer en route to a
second-round KO.
Heavyweights
Patrick Barry vs. Joey Beltran
The
Matchup: Barry was impressive in defeat against 2006 Pride Fighting
Championships open weight grand prix winner Mirko “Cro Cop”
Filipovic, as the Milwaukee-based dynamo put on a helluva show
before finally succumbing to a third-round choke at UFC 115.
Barry has surfaced as the face of UFC heavyweight striking, at
least in terms of performing it from a pure kickboxing standpoint.
He stands in contrast to the 260-pound guys who simply throw
bombs and crush people on size and strength alone. Barry’s
blend of athleticism and striking prowess are forever followed
by questions about his ground game, but those doubts make for
yet more reasons to watch him. He’s going to get you, or
he’s going to get got. Either way, it’s eminently watchable.
Beltran,
for his part, is a stylistic opposite. The wrestling-based grinder
does not have a lot of excitement in his fights, but he is effective.
In stopping the hyped Rolles Gracie at UFC 109 and then outpointing
Tim Hague at UFC 113, Beltran emerged from the bottom tier of
the UFC’s heavyweight pack.
Beltran
will hold a decided wrestling advantage against Barry, but he
will be tasked with closing the gap to apply it -- a pretty dangerous
venture. Barry can deliver a fight-changing blow in multiple
ways, and it can become frustrating to try and catch a versatile
striker when you do not have the confidence to let your hands
go to help close the gap.
Beltran
and Barry both have their work cut out for them here. Barry still
has a lot of upside in terms of developing better takedown defense
and positional wrestling. Beltran should be able to give Barry
fits if he gets him down, even in a three-round fight with restarts.
The
Pick: We will go with Barry by second-round knockout, in a bout
in which he takes some lumps but shows improvement in his all-around
game.
Lightweights
Cole Miller vs. Matt Wiman
The
Matchup: If the lightweights from Season 5 of “The Ultimate
Fighter” have a lasting legacy as a cast, it is that most
of them would be even-money to defeat their castmates on a given
night. Miller and Wiman are both in the thick of that cohort,
competing as mid-level lightweights, a notch below contender
status but forever competitive and viable tests for any up-and-comer.
Wiman
has proven durable. Outside of his flying-knee knockout loss
to Spencer Fisher in which he was drilled after a poorly timed
celebration during the bout, his other four defeats are all via
decision -- and to some tough guys, including Jim Miller and
Roger Huerta. Miller, meanwhile, has an excellent submission
game and has grown noticeably more comfortable with stand-up,
often opening fights aggressively to create opportunities.
If
it were not for a quick-trigger stoppage loss against “The
Ultimate Fighter” Season 8 winner Efrain Escudero at UFC
103, Miller would be much higher ranked amidst the UFC cadre.
Since then, he has put together workmanlike like submissions
over Dan Lauzon and “The Ultimate Fighter” Season 9
winner Ross Pearson, and he continues to improve. He will have
a challenge trying to outwrestle the physically stronger Wiman,
but Miller usually is not the stronger guy to begin with. He
works to get the fight where he wants it. Wiman has to put him
on the defensive early, as Miller tends to build momentum, pressing
opponents until they break.
The
Pick: Given Wiman’s durability and toughness, this one is
likely to go the distance. Look for some good back-and-forth
action, with Miller pressing a fast pace and pulling out a close
decision win in an exciting fight."
Source: Sherdog
|
UFC
‘Fight for the Troops 2’ Preview: The Prelims
by Jason
Probst
The
UFC “Fight for the Troops 2” undercard on Saturday
at Fort Hood in Killeen, Texas, features my favorite kind of
match: the compelling young prospect against the hard-nosed,
seen-it-all veteran. I could probably watch fights like Cody
McKenzie-Yves Edwards all day, as they seem to carry their own
inimitable blend of drama, with the prospect trying to prove
he can hang at the next level and the “old” guy battling
to prove he is still relevant.
All
that and more follows. Press on for the breakdowns and picks.
Lightweights
Yves Edwards vs. Cody McKenzie
The
Matchup: Fresh off yet another impressive guillotine submission
win at “The Ultimate Fighter 12” Finale on Dec. 4,
McKenzie gets a major opportunity here. Edwards has probably
forgotten more of his fights than the average lightweight has
had. A staple of the UFC’s early 2000s era, Edwards is one
of those old-school martial artists that can do everything well.
While
officially unbeaten, McKenzie’s elimination against Nam
Phan on Season 12 of “The Ultimate Fighter” exposed
holes in his game that he will have to close in order to compete
at the next level. While contestants on the Spike TV reality
show tend to improve dramatically after their appearances, McKenzie
has a lot to work on outside of his amazing penchant for the
guillotine. His striking appears rudimentary at best, and he
seemed to come apart against Phan, who peeled him like an onion.
Edwards
may not be a wrestling-based fighter, but he should be able to
stave off McKenzie’s initial takedown attempts. At 34, he
has solid striking and mixes up his blows well, picking angles
and playing the correct percentages. McKenzie’s upside and
Edwards’ mileage make for an interesting dynamic. However,
at this point, Edwards has shown no real signs of deterioration.
He has fought some tough guys in recent years and has, for the
most part, remained competitive.
The
key factor here is whether or not McKenzie can get enough respect
standing if he cannot secure a takedown. That’s a ton of
improvement to expect against a sharp strike like Edwards, who
is doubly tough to beat when he has only one element about which
to worry. Plus, Edwards is an outstanding submission guy himself
and difficult to tap out. In fact, he has not been submitted
in nearly five years.
The
Pick: Look for Edwards to play the role of spoiler veteran, lighting
up McKenzie with strikes and scoring a knockout in the third
round.
Welterweights
DaMarques Johnson vs. Michael Guymon
The
Matchup: You can call this one a “Pink Slipper,” because
whoever loses probably gets cut. Both are in serious need of
a win here.
Guymon
is physically stronger and might have an edge on the mat, but
Johnson is a superior striker. A finalist on Season 9 of “The
Ultimate Fighter” reality series, Johnson shows talent in
flashes, especially with his kicks, though he has a tendency
to come up flat when you least expect it. Guymon, meanwhile,
sports a 1-2 record in the UFC, losing to Canadian prospect Rory
MacDonald and Daniel Roberts in quick submissions. Guymon’s
window of opportunity against Johnson figures to revolve around
chipping away at the Jeremy Horn protégé and making
him fade late.
The
Pick: Look for Guymon to grind out a win here, using takedowns,
top control and wrestling.
Featherweights
Mike Thomas Brown vs. Rani Yahya
The
matchup: Yahya still approaches MMA circa 1996, banking on one
outstanding discipline -- Brazilian jiu-jitsu. Brown, meanwhile,
has fallen on tough times, losing three of his last five since
Jose Aldo bested him for the WEC featherweight belt in November
2009.
Yahya
may be one-dimensional, but the one dimension he brings to the
dance is quite dangerous. The grappling wunderkind is so effective
on the mat that he’s perfectly content to pull guard to
get the fight on the ground. This is not a sound strategy against
Brown, however, as the American Top Team representative excels
from top position. There, he uses his compact frame to punish
opponents while improving position and exerting crushing pressure.
Brown’s
stand-up is far better than Yahya’s, and, as a guy who can
choose where the fight goes, he has a huge strategic advantage.
Yahya can get takedowns against opponents who allow him to dart
in and out and chase them all over the cage. He did so in his
bout with Mark Hominick, an excellent striker against whom Yahya
tried a dozen takedowns and guard pulls before finally succeeding
and submitting him. Against Brown, such pursuits could result
in his being knocked out or turtled in a bad position, where
the ex-champion will feast on openings.
Yahya’s
stand-up game is all but non-existent, meaning this one could
end up looking more like an early no holds barred bout than modern
MMA. However, Yayha has few peers when it comes to transitions,
chained submission attempts and the ability to keep opponents
on the defensive when the fight goes horizontal, even if he’s
looking up at the lights while doing so.
Unless
Brown makes an egregious mistake and gets caught in a submission,
Yahya looks like an ideal opponent against whom to start his
campaign back toward title contention. He hit speed bumps in
recent losses to “The Ultimate Fighter” Season 5 finalist
Manny Gamburyan and the world-ranked Diego Nunes.
The
Pick: Expect Brown to get comfortable on the feet, work over
Yayha there and then drop him in the second round, delivering
ground-and-pound to a stoppage.
Lightweights
Waylon Lowe vs. Willamy “Chiquerim” Freire
The
Matchup: This prelim features a wrestler versus a surging Brazilian
-- always a fun theme to watch unfold.
Lowe
should be able to get this match to the ground, as he wields
a quick shoot and Freire, while willing to strike, tends to get
hit when pulling straight back. Expect Lowe to dictate position,
and if he can avoid submissions -- Freire has some ability in
that department -- he can pound out a decision or a late stoppage.
Freire,
a former Shooto champion, owns the better record and enters on
an 11-fight winning streak, but he has not fought against the
same level of competition. His most meaningful bouts have come
against modest competition under the Shooto banner. Freire will
need to catch something significant to win this one. Otherwise,
Lowe may prove too strong, aggressive and “wrassler”-tough
to lose.
The
Pick: Lowe by decision.
Amilcar
AlvesWelterweights
Amilcar Alves vs. Charlie Brenneman
The
Matchup: Brenneman -- who holds a wrestling advantage -- has
faced stouter competition, put together better UFC performances
and seems to have the edge. However, Alves’ third-round
loss to the underrated Mike Pierce in his promotional debut might
not mean as much as you would think. Debuting fighters often
simply do not adapt as well as veterans, with the adrenaline
dump and adjustments required to fight on the big stage.
Alves’
stand-up is clearly superior, and his camp, Nova Uniao, has emerged
as one of the best in the game. Working alongside UFC featherweight
champion Jose Aldo and former Sengoku Raiden Championship titleholder
Marlon Sandro, he figures to keep improving. And Alves needs
to get a win here to prove he can put it together when it counts.
Brenneman’s
obviously going to look for takedowns and attempt to put the
fight on the mat. However, Alves’ striking and athleticism
will create opportunities here. He will need to use movement
to stifle Brenneman’s wrestling, prevent an extended ground
battle and keep the fight standing as much as possible.
The
Pick: Alves by third-round stoppage.
Bantamweights
Will Campuzano vs. Chris Cariaso
The
Matchup: Campuzano is comfortable on his feet, but Caraiso is
compact, stronger on the ground and carries with him a noted
muay Thai pedigree. Both bantamweights need a win to stay relevant
and, most likely, signed to the organization.
Watch
for Cariaso to weather some shots early before getting it to
the ground. There, he will be stymied by Campuzano’s length
in spots, as he works to pass to superior position and unleash
strikes.
The
Pick: Capuzano should do enough to pile up points and close the
show hard en route to a third-round TKO.
Source: Sherdog
|
Second
Hip Surgery Near, Rodrigo Nogueira Hoping for UFC Rio Return
by Ken
Pishna
Antonio Rodrigo Nogueira hasn’t set foot in the Octagon
since losing by first-round knockout to current heavyweight champion
Cain Velasquez at UFC 110. That was February of 2010.
It
appears that he’s still a ways off from a return.
Despite two successful surgeries so far, Nogueira has another
to go, and more rehab, before he can resume fighting.
He
was scheduled to rematch Frank Mir last year at UFC 119 in Indianapolis,
but that’s when things started to head south. Nogueira tore
his ACL in training. The injury required surgery.
His
hips have also been a recurring problem in training, so Nogueira
is getting them repaired while he’s at it. At 34 years of
age, he feels he’s still got a few good years left and wants
to give himself the opportunity to compete at a high level.
“He
first had his knee surgery and then he had his hip surgery. He’s
still rehabbing his knee and he’s rehabbing his hip at the
same time,” Nogueira’s manager, Ed Soares, told MMAWeekly
Radio on Tuesday.
“He’s
probably going to go in and have his other hip surgery in mid-February.”
Shortly
after suffering the knee injury last year, the hope was for Nogueira
to return by late spring or early summer this year, but they’ve
pushed those expectations back a bit.
It
will take several months to rehab the second hip, and having
been away from the Octagon for so long, Nogueira will need a
little time to ramp his training back up to fighting level. There
is, however, a definite target in mind.
“His
ultimate goal, he’d really like to fight on the Brazil card.
He thinks he’d be ready to fight on that Rio card,”
said Soares. “If he could fight there, I think he’d
be a big draw down there. He’s a huge legend down there.
In a perfect world, he would love to fight in Rio.”
The
Brazilian fight card Soares is referring to is UFC Rio, which
Ultimate Fighting Championship officials announced in mid-December.
UFC Rio will take place on Aug. 27 at the HSBC Arena in Rio de
Janeiro.
The
UFC has upwards of 40 Brazilian fighters under contract. If healthy,
Nogueira likely has an edge over most of those fighters in claiming
a spot on the UFC Rio fight card. In more than a decade of fighting,
he became the first Pride heavyweight champion, is a former UFC
interim heavyweight champion, and has fought against most of
the top heavyweight fighters in the world, amassing a 32-6-1
record.
Source: MMA Weekly
|
Hominick:
This Is My Title Run
UFC President Dana White has said that if Mark Hominick (Pictured)
beats George Roop on Saturday at UFC “Fight for the Troops
2,” he will get a shot at featherweight champion Jose Aldo.
Hominick
welcomes the added pressure.
“I
like that kind of pressure,” he said recently on the Sherdog
Radio Network’s “Beatdown” show. “I think
if you’re there, if you’re deserving of a title shot,
you have to be able to handle that kind of pressure.”
Josh
Grispi had been scheduled to get the next crack at Aldo. However,
after Aldo withdrew from their bout with an injury, Grispi fought
Dustin Poirier instead and dropped both a unanimous decision
and his shot at the title. His loss could be Hominick’s
gain.
“This
is my title run,” said Hominick, who has won four straight.
“Whenever the title shot comes, it’s when it’s
supposed to happen. Things in life happen for a reason; I believe
that. Things are falling in place, and I’ve got to go out
there on January 22 and prove why I deserve it.”
In
Roop, Hominick is facing an opponent he has trained with, though
they’ve been at separate camps for this fight. Most recently
Roop delivered a highlight-reel knockout when he kicked Chan
Sung Jung in the head at WEC 51.
“He
presents a lot of problems to a lot of guys [because] he’s
6-foot-1 at 145,” Hominick said. “That’s a huge,
huge frame for the weight class. So that presents its problems
on its own. He’s very awkward in his style and his standup,
those long limbs, and he’s very durable. He’ll step
in there with anybody. He’s very tough, but I’m ready
for those things.”
Of
course, just because the UFC is currently inclined to give Hominick
a title shot if he wins, that does not guarantee he’ll get
one. An entertaining performance could be a determining factor.
With that said, though, victory is a must.
“My
plan is to win by any means necessary,” Hominick said. “If
I win by knockout, by submission, by decision -- it doesn’t
matter, the way I win. I definitely want to go out there and
show why I’m the number one contender, though. … I’m
going to go in there to take him out.”
Source: Sherdog
|
Cacareco’s
ordeal: fighter loses family members, job, and won’t be
facing Toquinho
by Carlos
Eduardo Ozório
Cacareco
is a force on the ground. Photo: Carlos Ozório.
Known for his prowess on the ground, Alexandre Cacareco has reached
a crossroads. Unable to make contact with the athlete for some
time now, Chute Boxe head coach Rudimar Fedrigo announced the
athlete was fired over the internet.
However,
according to FightersOnly.com, Cacareco lost a number of people
close to him – family members and friends – in the
tragedy caused by mudslides in Rio de Janeiro state. Thus his
March 3 fight with Rousimar “Toquinho” Palhares has
been canceled.
Source: Gracie Magazine
|
Georges
St-Pierre, Manager Shari L. Spencer Part Ways
By Ariel
Helwani
Georges St-Pierre and his manager Shari L. Spencer have decided
to amicably split up.
According
to a press release, "They felt they had a different vision
for the future of Georges' career and it was best to remain close
personally but dissolve their business relationship."
St-Pierre
signed with Spencer in 2007 and has since become one of the most
recognizable MMA athletes in the world, signing endorsement deals
with blue-chip sponsors Gatorade Canada and Under Armour.
"Shari
has been very valuable to me and my career over the last several
years. We broke through a lot of barriers together and so I will
always be grateful to her and call her my friend," St-Pierre
stated.
Spencer,
who also represents UFC lightweight champion Frankie Edgar, is
one of the few female managers in MMA. She runs her own boutique
management group, The Spencer Firm.
"I
am extremely proud of the representation I provided to Georges
and the incredible opportunity to have partnered with an athlete
of his caliber. I am thankful for the trust that he displayed
in me in managing his career since mid 2007 and I wish him the
best going forward," she stated.
St-Pierre
will remain a part of the Creative Arts Agency Sports team, who
he signed with in 2008, but will also hire a new manager shortly.
No word just yet on who that person will be.
The
UFC welterweight champion will defend his title next against
Jake Shields at UFC 129 on April 30 in Toronto.
Source: MMA Fighting
|
Rizzo
expects “a hell of a show” on Anderson vs. Belfort
Glaucia
Arakaki
On
a recent statement given to UFC’s official website, Vitor
Belfort said that he was 100% of his physical conditions and
that it was good for Anderson to get there prepared to defend
the middleweight belt. Anderson Silva’s training partner
and a legend of the sport, Pedro Rizzo commented what people
can hope for this bout.
“I
think it’ll be a tough fight. Just like Vitor told he’s
100%, Anderson will also be, and I think that everyone that steps
on that ring should be 100%. I think it’s great that Vitor
is on his best conditioning because Anderson also is, so they’ll
do a great fight for the main event. I’m watching Anderson
training every day, he’s also doing pretty good, so we can
only hope for a hell of a great show”, said The Rock.
Source: Tatame
|
MMA
DIet: The Importance of Meals
by Cameron
Conaway
Supplemental
bars and shakes have their place in the fighter’s diet.
Grabbing a bar in between a training session can help replenish
sugars, electrolytes and vitamins while providing the protein
necessary to help repair the body from the grueling demands of
training. However, while bars and supplements are great for providing
what we think of as the staples of nutrition (protein, fat and
carbohydrate) they aren’t food in their natural states and
this often means many of the smaller chemicals (one example:
the healthy bacteria that help maintain everything from a healthy
intestinal tract to a strong immune system) are either severely
lacking or not present in nearly the same quantity as they would
be if the foods that made up the bar were eaten in their natural,
unprocessed state.
Of
course, the cooking process can cause foods to become denatured
as well, but usually not nearly to the same extent as a heavily
manufactured product like juice. Also, because the preparation
process puts the fighter in control of the food, they are more
cognizant of the entire process and can learn what they like,
what their body responds best to and how to prepare the meal
quicker. Think of a young, aspiring fighter entering a boxing
club for the first time. He may accidentally unravel his boxing
hand wraps and watch as they roll across the floor. Then he gathers
them up, puts his thumb through the hook and begins wrapping
only to find out that the Velcro closure is on the wrong side
and that he has to redo it. As weeks pass, he becomes more efficient.
As years pass he doesn’t even have to think about it. With
practice, meal preparation, like fighting, will reap the benefits
of repetition and become more efficient.
Meals are also not in such high supply of fillers – these
are the substances added to bars and shakes to get them to be
the correct shape, color, smell, feel and to add shelf-longevity.
Many times, these fillers either have no nutritional value or
are still being studied for their long-term effects on humans.
Here are steps that can be easily and immediately put to use:
1. Skip the Juice.
Even if it’s USDA organic, juice sitting on the shelf is
basically fruits and vegetables broken down into little more
than the water and sugar contained within them. Fruits and vegetables
are great sources of food because of their whole, not because
of their parts – the seeds, skin, meat, etc. The process
of heating the juices to high temperatures in an attempt pasteurize
them and of exposing them to air and light and the shipping process
eliminates many of the great nutritional benefits and often leaves
the juice in a state more similar to sugar water than of their
original source. Be wary of the juices with labels that read,
“Contains _____ servings of fruit and vegetables. It may
have been made with ______ servings, but as it currently sits
in the bottle and on the shelf, it certainly is not anywhere
close to containing the quantity or quality of chemical properties
contained inside a single apple.
2. Pre-make meals and store them in the refrigerator.
Rather than grilling a single chicken breast and boiling a handful
of broccoli, grill six or seven breasts and boil a bag or two
of broccoli. Because research suggests that eating six or seven
smaller meals spread throughout the day is healthier than eating
two or three larger meals, the pre-made meals will go quickly
but will be just as handy and possibly less time-consuming than
running into the gas station after the gym for a quick-fix protein
drink. Also, pre-making meals can help save time because it allows
the fighter to get into a rhythm. Many fighters like to make
the same breakfast shake each morning to start their days. This
is fine so long as it varies from time to time and the other
meals of the day vary from day-to-day as well. Having routine
allows us to be functionally fixed and this saves time. For example,
we often use the exact same pattern (and always the same hand)
when brushing our teeth each morning. If we had to think about
this act (or use our non-dominant hand) it would take longer
to perform the act.
3. Mix it up.
Wind down from a hard day of training by spending some time playing
around in the kitchen. Try new foods. Boil some bulgur or quinoa,
mix it with cumin and thyme and balsamic vinegar and throw it
on top of ground turkey. Have a side of canned pumpkin and add
to it cinnamon, flax seed meal, almonds, blackberries and cultured
coconut milk to make a sweet but healthy dessert. It’s important
that the fighter learn about food and how best to prepare it.
The fighter who knows why they are eating what they are eating
will be more apt to eat healthier in the long run than the fighter
who, like some machine, simply eats what he’s told.
4. Keep a journal.
Keep a journal, or if the fighter already has a journal regarding
training and work schedules, add to it meal times. A structured
and written-down daily schedule can show the fighter how much
more time they actually have. When the panic kicks in about what
to eat – sometimes panic coming more from a lack of knowledge
than a lack of time – the fighter who is:
(A) confident about what he needs nutritionally and (B) what
his schedule is, will be better prepared to choose foods and
prepare meals. Often, the fighter will think he is in a hurry
and will grab a quick shake on the way to the gym, but will not
realize that while they spent an hour watching ESPN the night
before they could have been listening to it on the radio while
prepping the following day’s meal. Martial artists are renowned
for their discipline and focus on efficiency, and when made aware
of the various ways they can make their days more efficient,
most will jump on the opportunity.
5. Make meal making social.
Ask if family members, friends or training partners can pitch
in to help prepare dinner or try a new recipe. The social aspect
of cooking and eating has been helping families develop better
relationships for years, the competitive fighter can use this
science to their advantage as well. It can improve fight team
dynamics and a cooking partner can serve almost like a training
partner in that it can provide the individual with additional
motivation to stick with healthy eating.
Source: Sherdog
|
Jose
Aldo Confirmed For UFC 129 In Toronto; Several Bouts Announced
The Ultimate Fighting Championship on Thursday, via its Ultimate
Insider web series, announced several bouts for its April 30
Toronto debut.
Aside
from the highly publicized UFC welterweight championship between
Georges St-Pierre and Jake Shields, UFC 129: St-Pierre vs. Shields
will also feature the debut of former WEC featherweight champion
Jose Aldo.
An
opponent has not yet been locked in, but UFC president Dana White
last week declared, “If Mark Hominick wins (his fight at
Saturday’s UFC Fight for the Troops 2), he gets a shot at
the title with Aldo.”
The
Ultimate Insider announcement firms up Aldo’s participation.
Now it’s a matter of Hominick getting past George Roop on
Saturday, or leaving it up to the UFC to move to “Plan B,”
which White said included a trip “back to the drawing board.”
Other
UFC 129 bouts confirmed on Thursday include a middleweight showdown
between undefeated Phil Davis and “Ultimate Fighter”
alum Matt Hamill, former WEC lightweight champion Ben Henderson
vs. Canadian Mark Bocek, Jason MacDonald vs. Ryan Jensen, and
Brian Foster vs. Sean Pierson.
Absent
from the announcement was another high profile bout that has
already been confirmed by both fight camps, UFC Hall of Famer
Randy Couture against former light heavyweight champion Lyoto
Machida.
Source: MMA Weekly
|
2010
Ground and Pound MMA awards
By Zach
Arnold
The
vote for the sixth annual Groundandpound Awards is over. Once
again we are glad to have improved readership participation from
previous years, registering a total of 59,957 votes from 39 different
countries on all five continents.
American
Kickboxing Academy’s Cain Velasquez convinced 35% of our
readers with his performances to vote for him as “Fighter
of the Year”. The 28-year-old Mexican-American, who will
unfortunately miss most of 2011 with a severe shoulder injury,
knocked out former PRIDE superstar (Antonio Rodrigo Nogueira)
and previous title-holder Brock Lesnar en route to the UFC heavyweight
championship. Fellow UFC champions Georges St. Pierre (30%) and
Jose Aldo (18%) came in second and third respectively.
Velasquez’s
heroics were also the cornerstone that propelled his team American
Kickboxing Academy to “Fight Team of the Year” honors.
The San Jose based gym also had the likes of Jon Fitch, Josh
Koscheck and Josh Thomson in marquee bouts this year. AKA is
also one of the few gyms to have fighters in the UFC, Strikeforce
and DREAM. The vote had been a close three horse race between
AKA, Jackson’s MMA and American Top Team.
Speaking
of the premier promotions, the UFC has won “Best Promotion”
for the fourth year in a row. The Zuffa flagship also managed
to stop a marginal slide in popularity. The organization had
its all-time high in 2007 with 66.8% of all votes, which decreased
to 64.9% in 2008 and 60.8% in 2009. This time they clocked in
at 62.0%. Interestingly, it’s sister organization WEC, came
in second with 22.1%. Japanese organizations DREAM, Sengoku and
Shooto only received 5.6% of the votes combined.
The
biggest of all margins was to be found in the “Kickboxer
of the Year” category. Dutch behemoth Alistair Overeem dwarfed
the competition, amassing a whopping 80.2% of all votes. K-1
MAX champion Giorgio Petrosyan came in a distant second at 8.6%.
The
closest race took place between two fighters who could not be
much more different: Chael Sonnen and Jason “Mayhem”
Miller went neck and neck in their quest to become the “Cult
Fighter of the Year” which recognizes the most entertaining/notorious
personality in the fight game. In the end, professional realtor
Chael Sonnen took home the award on the back of his fantastic
performances hyping up his title fight against Anderson Silva.
Sonnen edged Miller by 2.8%.
Complete
results:
FIGHTER
OF THE YEAR
¦1.
Cain Velasquez (Mexico) 34.9%
¦2. Georges St. Pierre (Canada) 29.5%
¦3. Jose Aldo (Brazil) 17.5%
¦4. Frankie Edgar (USA) 9.7%
¦5. Anderson Silva (Brazil) 6.4%
¦6. Hatsu Hioki (Japan) 2.0%
FEMALE FIGHTER OF THE YEAR
¦1.
Zoila Frausto (USA) 70.6%
¦2. Cristiane Cyborg (Brazil) 10.8%
¦3. Megumi Fujii (Japan) 9.8%
¦4. Miesha Tate (USA) 5.4%
¦5. Shayna Baszler (USA) 2.1%
¦6. Hiroko Yamanaka (Japan) 1.3%
FIGHT TEAM OF THE YEAR
¦1.
American Kickboxing Academy (USA) 28.9%
¦2. Jackson’s MMA (USA) 27.5%
¦3. American Top Team (USA) 22.4%
¦4. Team Nogueira (Brazil) 11.7%
¦5. Nova União (Brazil) 8.1%
¦6. Wajutsu Keishukai (Japan) 1.4%
ROOKIE OF THE YEAR
¦1.
Phil Davis (USA) 77.2%
¦2. Maciej Jewtuszko (Poland) 13.5%
¦3. Charles Oliveira (Brazil) 3.4%
¦4. Rory MacDonald (Canada) 2.4%
¦5. Yasubey Enomoto (Switzerland) 2.3%
¦6. Tie Quan Zhang (China) 1.2%
MOST IMPROVED FIGHTER
¦1.
Maximo Blanco (Venezuela) 79.1%
¦2. Alistair Overeem (Netherlands) 9,0%
¦3. Chris Leben (USA) 6.3%
¦4. Rafael Feijão (Brazil) 2.7%
¦5. Hiroyuki Takaya (Japan) 1.6%
¦6. Mark Hominick (Canada) 1.3%
BEST YOUNG FIGHTER
¦1.
Jon Jones (USA) 68.9%
¦2. Pascal Krauss (Germany) 9.2%
¦3. Alexander Gustafsson (Sweden) 7.9%
¦4. Joe Soto (Mexico) 5.1%
¦5. Josh Grispi (USA) 5.0%
¦6. John Hathaway (England) 3.9%
CULT FIGHTER OF THE YEAR
¦1.
Chael Sonnen (USA) 33.7%
¦2. Jason Miller (USA) 30.9%
¦3. Dan Hardy (England) 17.4%
¦4. Evangelista Cyborg (Brazil) 9.7%
¦5. Yuichiro Nagashima (Japan) 4.2%
¦6. Tom Lawlor (USA) 4.1%
KICKBOXER OF THE YEAR
¦1.
Alistair Overeem (Netherlands) 80.2%
¦2. Giorgio Petrosyan (Armenia) 8.6%
¦3. Buakaw Por. Pramuk (Thailand) 6.8%
¦4. Yodsanklai Fairtex (Thailand) 2.6%
¦5. Artem Levin (Russia) 1.0%
¦6. Nathan Corbett (Australia) 0.8%
GRAPPLER OF THE YEAR
¦1.
Bernardo Faria (Brazil) 32.9%
¦2. Rodrigo Cavaca (Brazil) 24.3%
¦3. Caio Terra (Brazil) 11.4%
¦4. Rafael Lovato Jr. (USA) 11.2%
¦5. Lucas Lepri (Brazil) 10.8%
¦6. Bruno Malfacine (Brazil) 9.4%
FIGHT OF THE YEAR
¦1.
Jorge Santiago vs. Kazuo Misaki 40.3%
¦2. Anderson Silva vs. Chael Sonnen 29.0%
¦3. Anthony Pettis vs. Benson Henderson 17.8%
¦4. Nick Diaz vs. KJ Noons 9.2%
¦5. Alex Reid vs. Tom Watson 2.0%
¦6. Takeshi Inoue vs. Hatsu Hioki 1.7%
KNOCKOUT OF THE YEAR
¦1.
Joe Warren vs. Joe Soto 65.8%
¦2. Mauricio Shogun vs. Lyoto Machida 19.9%
¦3. Robbie Lawler vs. Melvin Manhoef 6.7%
¦4. Marlon Sandro vs. Masanori Kanehara 2.9%
¦5. Alexander Sarnavskiy vs. Victor Kuku 2.8%
¦6. Mamoru Yamaguchi vs. Fumihiro Kitahara 1.9%
SUBMISSION OF THE YEAR
¦1.
Fabricio Werdum vs. Fedor Emelianenko 69.5%
¦2. Anderson Silva vs. Chael Sonnen 19.0%
¦3. Shinya Aoki vs. Tatsuya Kawajiri 6.5%
¦4. Anthony Pettis vs. Shane Roller 2.0%
¦5. Shuichiro Katsumura vs. Masakatsu Ueda 1.9%
¦6. Artemij Sitenkov vs. James Doolan 1.1%
BEST PROMOTION
¦1.
UFC 62.0%
¦2. WEC 22.1%
¦3. Strikeforce 10.3%
¦4. DREAM 3.2%
¦5. Sengoku 2.0%
¦6. Shooto 0.4%
FIGHT EVENT OF THE YEAR
¦1.
UFC 117: Silva vs. Sonnen 31.0%
¦2. WEC 48: Aldo vs. Faber 24.7%
¦3. K-1: Dynamite!! 2010 22.6%
¦4. Strikeforce: Heavy Artillery 14.4%
¦5. SRC: Soul of Fight 6.4%
¦6. The Way of Shooto 3 0.9%
Source: Fight Opinion
|
Coach
Expects Guillard to Knock Out Dunham
Mike
Winkeljohn is a believer in Melvin Guillard.
The
striking coach at Jackson’s Mixed Martial Arts has watched
his fighter’s progression since joining the camp, and now
he thinks Guillard is on the verge of delivering a key victory
over Evan Dunham on Saturday at UFC “Fight for the Troops
2.”
“I’m
a big Melvin fan,” Winkeljohn said recently during a “Savage
Dog Show” interview on the Sherdog Radio Network. “He’s
matured quite a bit over the last year as far as relaxing at
the right moments, not panicking and using his natural …
God-given abilities. He’s a hell of an athlete. He can knock
out anybody at any time he decides to. I definitely think Melvin’s
going to catch this kid and knock him out.”
Winkeljohn
has been working alongside Greg Jackson since the 1990s. While
Jackson is the better known trainer, he often credits Winkeljohn
for the team’s success, particularly with striking.
In
fact, Winkeljohn helped devise the stick-and-move strategy that
Guillard used against Jeremy Stephens at UFC 119. The game plan
led Guillard to victory, but not everyone enjoyed his shift from
an aggressive, often reckless fighter to one who stuck to a strategy.
“We
had to get that in Melvin,” Winkeljohn explained. “Let
him understand you don’t just throw and you either hit the
guy [and] win or you get caught with something stupid. I wanted
him to understand that he can be smarter than these guys, out-game-plan
them, out-move them with strategy and then at the right time,
go back and use the power that he has to put people out cold.”
Notes
from Winkeljohn’s Interview:
The
Jackson/Winkeljohn way: “There’s a reason why we’re
so successful. Greg gets out there, and he makes contacts with
other fighters. He brings fighters into our gym, which makes
our gym now much stronger. I try to stay in the gym and help
the guys that we have and the guys that are there and the guys
that come in. It seems to work out real well. We make a good
team.”
Competing
against an opponent’s coaches: “I have to look at what
our opponent has been working on in his recent fights, what camp
he’s gone to … because I know he’s been working
on changing his game a little bit. … Usually I can kind
of get an idea what their coach is doing and where they’re
going, so it’s kind of like a chess match. We just want
to try to be one step ahead of everybody.”
The
freak training injury in which his eye was scraped by a toenail
while he was holding pads: “It cut my eyeball in half. My
eyeball kind of shrank up like a grape. My cornea was trashed.
My lens shot out. All the fluid shot out of my eye. I’ve
had four operations. … I wear goggles now when I hold mitts
for people. It’s been very humbling. I have a good eye and
I can’t cry about it. I just have to go forward.”
The
real Clay Guida: “Clay Guida’s probably the nicest
guy. They’re all nice, but I’ll tell you a quick story.
Clay gets out of the cage, and he’s [won] and everybody
wants his autograph and girls are yelling at him. He stops and
looks at me because I’m carrying all of his stuff, all the
corner stuff and some of his clothes. He stops and he runs over
and he goes, ‘Coach, let me grab that for you.’ He’s
just that guy. That’s just Clay.”
Jon
Jones’ work ethic: “I think he’s working harder
than ever before. He’s realizing that to be successful at
the high level, now it’s time to really start working.”
Jones’
study habits: “He’s the kind of guy that’s a student
of the game. He will sit down and watch film on his own. He just
studies. He just studies and sees what people do and then he
goes out and tries it.”
Guillard’s
intelligence: “He’s a lot smarter than people think.
Kind of like Jon [Jones], he’s becoming even more of a student
of the game. He’s starting to understand some basic theory
on what we want done.”
Source: Sherdog
|
Simply
Fedor
by Carlos Eduardo Ozório
Even coming off a loss, Fedor Emelianenko manages to stand out
among beasts like Josh Barnett, Alistair Overeem, Antonio Pezão,
Andrei Arlovski, Sergei Kharitonov, Brett Rogers, and Fabrício
Werdum, the last person to beat him. That is the burly lineup
of the Strikeforce heavyweight grand prix, balm for the longing
of lovers of the now-defunct Pride, and Emelianenko is the big
star of the team.
For
the opening bout, against Pezão on February 12, Fedor
is going through his preparations in his country, Russia. He
will likely have some heavyweight help, though, in the form of
one-time UFC title challenger Shane Carwin.
“Fedor
is cool with me. He’s a great person and a great fighter.
I might fly to Russia for us to train together, if all goes according
to plan,” posted Carwin on the Underground forum.
Source: Gracie Magazine
|
UFC
Fight Night 24: Ortiz vs. Nogueira Fight Card Announced
by Ken
Pishna
Tito Ortiz, once one of the most dominant champions in UFC history,
is now on his last leg with the promotion. He’s 0-4-1 in
his last five fights, but getting a shot at redemption.
The
Ultimate Fighting Championship on Wednesday made official UFC
Fight Night 24, which features Tito Ortiz vs. Antonio Rogerio
Nogueira in the main event. The event will take place on March
26 at the KeyArena in Seattle.
While
Ortiz was sliding down, Nogueira was rising up, to the tune of
seven straight victories. That is up until his last fight, where
he dropped a unanimous decision to Top 10 ranked Ryan Bader at
UFC 119.
Also
made official in Wednesday’s announcement were several supporting
bouts. Former title contender Dan Hardy will face Anthony Johnson
in a welterweight battle, while another 170-pound contest features
Duane “Bang” Ludwig and “Ultimate Fighter”
winner Amir Sadollah.
Nam
Phan and Leonard Garcia will rematch at UFC Fight Night 24, trying
to silence critiques of a hotly disputed split decision victory
for Garcia when the two met at the TUF 12 finale.
Source: MMA Weekly
|
Matt
Lindland on public reaction to Chael Sonnen: “People want
to tear down other successful people”
By Zach Arnold
RON
KRUCK: “Is there anyone that has been with you from day
one?”
MATT
LINDLAND: “I mean, probably the guy who’s been with
me the longest is Chael Sonnen. I started coaching him when he
was in High School and really one day he showed up for wrestling
practice and we just told him, we’re not wrestling any more,
we’re fighting and ever since that day, you know, he’s
been fight training rather than Greco-Roman training.”
RON
KRUCK: “And it’s no secret that one of Team Quest’s
members, Chael Sonnen, is going through some personal issues
right now. Have you spoken to Chael and if so how’s he doing?”
MATT
LINDLAND: “Chael’s doing good. Chael’s doing,
you know, fine, as he can be expected. He is having some troubles.
This is a difficult season for him. He’s had, you know,
the whole California thing going on and then now he’s got
the mortgage deal going on and this is a really good opportunity
for Chael to grow from this and learn a lot of valuable lessons
and come out the other side a stronger, better person, you know,
hopefully a better fighter even. You know, this is going to make
him really tough. This is a tough situation. If a guy can get
through this and come out the other side of it, he should be
able to apply those principles that he learned, you know, for
toughness and coming through adversity to his fight game and,
you know, I think that might be the only element that Chael’s
lacking is that adversity and coming out on the other side a
victor, you know, through the adversity.”
RON
KRUCK: “That’s a great answer. How is Team Quest supporting
their teammate during this difficult time?”
MATT
LINDLAND: “Any way we can. Honestly, Team Quest and me and
whatever Chael needs. If he needs to take a day off and not come
in, then that’s what he needs. If, you know, he’s gone
too long I’m going to go over and grab him and throw him
in my truck and drag him over to practice. But, you know, I mean
last night was just about me going over there and showing up
and saying, hey I’m here for you if you need us and just
kind of opening that and saying, you know, don’t think because
when you just start wrapping your head around things, you know,
you got all these crazy thoughts, everybody’s going to hate
me, nobody’s going to like me, man I can’t go in there,
and I don’t want that to ever be the case with Chael or
any of our guys, you know.
“Everybody
makes mistakes. I mean, nobody’s perfect and we’re
all going to make mistakes. It’s just unfortunate that everybody
gets to see your mistakes. You’re on a big stage. I mean,
you’re a top contender in this sport, you ran for political
office, you’re a name. People want to tear down other successful
people. And when you make mistakes it’s like, ah see, I
knew you weren’t perfect and they want to say those things
about you and Chael’s not perfect. He never claimed to be
but, you know, people put him up on a pedestal a little bit.
Certainly not me, I know what a scum bag he is. And it’s
okay, you know, we’re all growing, we’ll all getting
better, you know, every step of the way it’s about, you
know, growth and maturity and coming through adversity and I
think this is a really good opportunity for him to grow.”
RON
KRUCK: “If he gets through all this, returns to the Octagon,
and gets another shot at Anderson Silva, does he beat him next
time?”
MATT
LINDLAND: “Absolutely. Absolutely. If Chael gets through
this, he gets back on track, we get in the gym, we’re training,
we’re preparing, and he knows how much struggle this was.
Fighting’s going to be easy. Fighting’s going to be
easy compared to what he’s been going through.”
Source: Fight Opinion
|
10
Brazilians to Watch in 2011
by Gleidson
Venga
Anderson Silva, Jose Aldo, Mauricio “Shogun” Rua, Cristiane
“Cyborg” Santos, Ronaldo “Jacare” Souza,
Rafael “Feijao” Cavalcante -- suffice to say, there’s
no shortage of Brazilian champions in MMA right now.
But
the country already has a new crop of athletes on the rise. 2010
saw up-and-comers like Edson Mendes Barboza Jr., Charles “do
Bronx” Oliveira, Maiquel Jose Falcao Goncalves and Renan
“Barao” go from relative obscurity to contendership
under the Zuffa banner. 2011 could be the year for even more
Brazilian fighters to shine in international rings.
Below
is a sample of that emerging talent: a list of 10 Brazilian fighters
to keep an eye on this year, many of whom are certain to star
in some of 2011’s best battles.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Glover
Teixeira (11-2)
Largely
considered the top fighter currently operating in Brazil, Teixeira
boasts an excellent striking game honed by years of training
with the likes of Chuck Liddell at The Pit in California. The
205-pound powerhouse also possesses great submission wrestling
skills: in 2009, he submitted nearly all of his opponents en
route to winning the 2009 Abu Dhabi Combat Club Brazilian Trials,
and a solid showing at the World Championships. Teixeira hasn’t
fought in the United States since 2008 due to visa issues, which
have continued to plague him as he’s tried to fight internationally.
However, Teixeira assures that it will all be resolved in the
first half of 2011. Pegged by training partner Pedro Rizzo as
a potential elite light heavyweight, Teixeira may be able to
prove Rizzo right if he should sign with a major American promotion.
Erick
“Indio” Silva (12-1, 1 NC)
Silva
showed great versatility in 2010 on his way to becoming the first-ever
Jungle Fight welterweight champion. In July, the 26-year-old
scored a technical knockout in a tense match with the dreaded
“Zezao Trator,” Jose Gomes de Ribamar. On Oct. 30,
he won the belt by submitting a pair of dangerous opponents in
one night. First, Silva tapped Gil de Freitas with a guillotine
choke set up by a strong kick to the ribs. In the final, the
Nogueira- and X-Gym-trained fighter needed only 67 seconds to
submit Francisco Ayon with an arm-triangle choke. Silva has been
noted by sparring partner Anderson Silva as a future 170-pound
contender in the UFC, and could follow in the footsteps of fellow
Jungle Fight champion Yuri “Marajo” Alcantara, who
made a successful Zuffa debut in December.
Marcos
Rogerio “Pezao” de Lima (8-0)
Unbeaten
since turning to MMA from the world of kickboxing -- where he
won 70 of his 76 bouts -- Lima gained fame in Brazil last October,
when he became the second man to defeat Paulo Filho. Blessed
with not only an excellent stand-up background, but great athleticism
as well, “Pezao” has focused on evolving his wrestling
and ground game with Marcos Barbosa, one of the most renowned
jiu-jitsu coaches in Brazil. Lima is due to make his international
debut shortly and will impress at 205 pounds.
Bruno
Carvalho (4-1)
The
most feared lightweight striker in Brazil, Carvalho has defeated
MMA standouts Andre “Dida” Amado and Edson Mendes Barboza,
Jr., under muay Thai rules. In fact, the hard-throwing Carvalho
knocked out almost every opponent he faced in muay Thai competition.
A student of Cristiano Marcello under the blossoming CM System
banner, Carvalho suffered his first defeat in either MMA or muay
Thai last June against Felipe Olivieri under controversial circumstances,
but has since rebounded with a pair of wins. As his MMA experience
has increased, however, Carvalho has encountered trouble finding
willing and suitable opponents on the local scene. His ascent
to the international level will be ensured if he can continue
to develop his ground game at the current pace.
Francimar
“Bodao” Barroso (12-2)
The
Nova União light heavyweight is out to prove that sub-155
pounders aren’t the only fighters Andre Pederneiras’
team has to show. Barroso has a strong ground game, moving powerfully
and mixing submissions into his knockout-heavy résumé.
He is an incredibly strong physical specimen. Besides training
with Thales Leites, Jose Aldo and Marlon Sandro at Nova Uniao,
“Bodao” is a sparring partner of Glover Teixeira and
Pedro Rizzo, making him all the more complete and dangerous.
Antonio
“Toninho Furia” Glaristone (10-6, 1 NC)
Born
in Paraiba, the same state which yielded fighters like Antonio
Silva and Jean Silva, Glaristone was involved in one of Brazil’s
best fights of 2010. His Nov. 13 unanimous decision win over
Igor “Chatubinha” Fernandes drew applause from all
who witnessed it, including Anderson Silva, Junior dos Santos
and Antonio Rogerio Nogueira. After dozens of unrecorded fights
in northeastern Brazil, the lightweight Glaristone has moved
to Rio de Janeiro where he has become a pupil of MMA legend Murilo
Bustamante, who believes Glaristone will be one of the new stars
of Brazilian Top Team in 2011.
Vitor
Vianna (10-1-1)
A
training partner of Wanderlei Silva in Las Vegas, Vianna was
the runner-up in the Fury FC grand prix that turned UFC standout
Thiago Silva into a must-have prospect. That loss, due to an
arm injury, is the only one on Vianna’s ledger. Despite
excellent technique on the ground, Vianna is starting to show
the results of training with “The Axe Murderer,” and
has become a serious threat in the stand-up. Already cutting
his teeth stateside, Vianna might be a strong win or two away
from a major contract.
Renato
Moicano (3-0)
Moicano
is a 19-year-old student of Ataide Junior, the same coach that
gave the world Paulo Thiago and Rani Yahya. Moicano has quickly
racked up three wins, all in Brazil’s biggest promotion,
Jungle Fight. With two submissions he has the familiar characteristics
of his teammates, but in his December win over veteran Eduardo
“Kiko” Felipe, he showed great developing striking
and looked to be the next great Brazilian featherweight. After
the win, he decided to dedicate himself to MMA full-time, leaving
law school in the nation’s capital, Brasilia.
Luiz
Alberto “Betao” Nogueira (10-1)
“Betao”
is a student of Márcio “Cromado” Barbosa at
Renovacao Fight Team, the top luta livre team in Brazil. Nogueira
is well-rounded, but as you might expect, has the kind of choke
and leglock attacks that define luta livre’s greats. Nogueira
only has one defeat in his career against Nova Uniao prospect
Eduardo “Dudu” Dantas; he was scheduled to rematch
Dantas in December before injury nixed the bout. The pair expect
to square off in the first half of 2011 for Dantas’ Shooto
132-pound South American title in a contest that would crown
the undisputed top bantamweight prospect in Brazil.
John
Lineker (12-5)
Lineker
is a native of Paranagua, the state of Parana’s port city,
some 75 miles from Curitiba. However, his style is reminiscent
of one of Curitiba’s fighting heroes, Mauricio Rua. With
a hyper-aggressive muay Thai attack, Lineker is making massive
strides on the ground with Emporium Jiu-Jitsu, and stole the
show at Shooto Brazil 18 in September, when he submitted Alvino
Jose Torres with a rear-naked choke. In February, he’ll
take on Alessandro “Lenhador” Cordeiro, Rafael “Morcego”
Silva and Diego Avila in Nitrix Fight’s four-man bantamweight
grand prix, an opportunity that could put him on the national
stage in Brazil.
Source: Sherdog
|
No
TV Again for Mike Brown
By Michael
David Smith
Former featherweight champion Mike Brown will fight for the second
time this month at Saturday night's Fight for the Troops 2. And
for the second time this month, you won't see him unless you're
in the building.
The
UFC has decided to put Brown's fight with Rani Yahya on the non-televised
undercard, and it won't even be one of the fights broadcast on
Facebook before the Spike TV portion of the card begins. At UFC
125, when Brown lost a split decision to Diego Nunes, it was
one of only two fights on the 11-fight card that wasn't televised,
either on the pay-per-view broadcast or the Ion TV preliminary
show.
For
fans who know Brown both as a former No. 1 featherweight in the
world, and as one of the most likable fighters in the sport,
that's disappointing. But it's not surprising.
It's
not surprising because even when Brown was one of the best pound-for-pound
fighters in mixed martial arts, you always got the sense that
he was something of an afterthought: The first two times Brown
defended the WEC featherweight title, it was in an arena where
his opponent would have the home crowd on his side. And even
after all Brown had done as a WEC champion, his final WEC fight
was also relegated to the unaired prelims.
The
UFC knows its business well, and if Brown isn't being put on
television, that probably means the UFC has determined that he's
just not a particularly big draw. And now that he's 35 years
old and has lost three of his last five fights, it's easy to
see why the UFC would determine that he's not going to become
a big draw in the future.
But
it's still a shame that a fighter who should be among the most
well-liked and well-respected in the game is actually known only
to a small number of hard-core fans. And as long as Brown can't
get on TV, that won't change.
Source: MMA Fighting
|
Nogueira:
“I’ve fought the best, but I have much more to show
you”
By Glaucia
Arakaki
Former
UFC and Pride heavyweight champion, Rodrigo “Minotauro”
Nogueira is focused on the recovery process of his injuries and
is already planning a possible return on UFC Rio. On an exclusive
interview given to TATAME, the black belt talked about the importance
of investing in marketing to make MMA popular, demonstrated a
wish of confronting Brock Lesnar, chosen Anderson Silva as the
greatest pound by pound of the world, guaranteed that he still
has many work ahead of him and talked about other subjects that
you can check on the chat here below.
What’s
the importance of these marketing actions that you’ve been
doing to enlarge MMA’s market?
It’s
pretty important, there’re fans and many people who like
MMA, it’s a new group of fans, it’s a sport that can
be watched by people of all ages: a teenager and a 60 year old
guy may be watching MMA nowadays. We have to do these things,
the events, creating new MMA products and for this huge group
of fans that follow MMA, also for athletes, not only the top
athletes, but to all so people like it. If we create a product
that the athletes use, that’s enough approval for us. If
an athlete that fights in a great event uses your product, a
regular person can also use it and it’ll be more than enough.
How
are your expectations, with the guys of X-Fight, for the selling
of your product here in Rio?
I
think that every product that I launched today, if it’s
a MMA product, it’ll have great success. If it’s worked
the proper way, focused on the top athletes who fight in high
level, everybody will see. UFC is greater than ever, this coming
of UFC to Brazil will completely change things, than the Olympic
Games will come… I think that sports are getting to Rio
de Janeiro on a great moment. I believe it’ll become the
capital of the sports on the world. We have great location, we’ve
got here before UFC’s coming and I think it’ll make
a huge propaganda of our product.
For
this card that is coming to Rio, is there any special fight you’d
like to watch?
I’d
like to watch (Junior dos Santos) Cigano with Cain Velasquez.
I believe it’s a good thing for UFC Rio if my brother fights
Ryan Bader, that guy that beat him, I think it’ll be a great
fight for Rogério. I’d like to see BJ Penn fighting
in Brazil because he’s coming from Jiu-Jitsu and people
follow him. I think that BJ Penn could have a rematch with Frankie
Edgar, it’ll also be a good fight.
How
are your injuries?
I’m
doing my third surgery within a month. There were three injuries
that I had: my knee, my right hip and my left hip. I have these
injuries for eight year, but about three years ago it started
blocking me of training hard. I handled it, but I couldn’t
do my last fight and really, if you can’t train 100%, you
won’t do a good fight. I did these surgeries on the right
time and I’m treating myself with the greatest hip doctor
of the world, the guy guarantees I’ll be 100% for the second
semester.
So,
you want to fight again on the second semester of this year ?
I
want to fight on the second semester. If I can fight on UFC Rio
it’ll be perfect, but if not I’m sure that in September
I’ll be prepared to fight.
Would
you like to fight Brock Lesnar? How this confrontation would
be like?
For
sure. Cigano will fight Brock Lesnar now, but he’s a guy
I’ve always wanted to confront and it’d be a great
fight. I enjoy fighting big guys, I think it forces me to use
my speed and my guard... I’ll be better of my injuries,
that were disturbing me from doing my guard, and I’ll be
100%. I’ve always been interested on fighting bigger guys.
In
your opinion, who’s the best weight by weight of the world
currently
I
like Anderson Silva, I believe he’s the most complete one.
I like BJ Penn, I think José Aldo is on a great phase
too. I think these three are the best currently.
You’ve
done almost 40 fights, and was only defeated 6 times… What
do you think about your career?
I
think I did great fight, I’ve fought the best of my division,
I didn’t have an easy opponent. I really am one of the guys
who fought great guys, but I have much more to show you, I am
not done yet (laughs).
What
are your current goals and plans for your career?
My
next goal is UFC Rio and to be among the tops of UFC.
Source: Tatame
|
A
sample of the GP that will shake MMA’s foundations
by Carlos
Eduardo Ozório
GRACIEMAG.com has been reporting on the heavyweight GP Strikeforce
has been promoting. The first two quarterfinals happen on February
12 in New Jersey, with Fedor Emelianenko taking on Antonio “Big
Foot” Silva and former UFC champion Andrei Arlovski going
toe to toe with Sergei Kharitanov.
In
the other quarterfinals, to take place at a yet-to-be-confirmed
time, Fabrício Werdum will have Alistair Overeem as an
opponent for the second time in his career, while Josh Barnett
will do battle with Brett Rogers.
The
event gathering some of the biggest names in world MMA is reminiscent
of the GPs of the now-defunct Pride FC promotion, provoking great
expectations among fans.
Source: Gracie Magazine
|
Paul
Daley to Face Winner of Diaz/Cyborg, But First Headlines BAMMA
Show in England
by Damon
Martin
Strikeforce welterweight contender Paul Daley is getting ready
to head back into action, but this time it will be in his home
country of England.
Daley
has been approved to headline an upcoming show for the British
run MMA organization BAMMA, and is expected to be part of the
the main event of their show in February.
Strikeforce
CEO Scott Coker confirmed the news to MMAWeekly Radio on Wednesday
night.
“Paul
has requested to have a fight in the UK, and our deal with Paul
we have to sign off on it, and we have to have an opponent approval,”
Coker stated.
The
opponent for Daley has not been finalized, although MMAWeekly.com
has confirmed several names are on the list. Coker said much
the same, and believes they could have final word about Daley’s
opponent in the next few days.
“There’s
a couple names and we’re going through that process with
him. He wants to stay busy and he wants to fight the winner of
(Nick) Diaz and Evangelista (Cyborg), and I think that makes
a lot of sense,” said Coker.
Daley’s
one-off fight in the UK will keep him busy to kick off 2011,
but according to the Strikeforce president if he wins he will
be fighting the winner of the upcoming fight between Diaz and
Cyborg set to go down on Jan 29.
Coker
simply said ‘yes’ when asked if he is the de facto
No. 1 contender for the title, and he will be waiting in the
wings when the welterweight title fight is settled next Saturday
night.
Source: MMA Weekly
|
Cesar
Gracie on Nick Diaz-Mayhem Miller, Greg Jackson and Batista
By Mike
Chiappetta
Strikeforce
welterweight champion Nick Diaz is about 10 days from his title
defense against Evangelista "Cyborg" Santos. If most
fans had their way, Diaz would be fighting Jason "Mayhem"
Miller that night.
The
rivalry between Diaz and Miller exploded last April, when the
two were among the participants in a post-fight brawl following
Jake Shields' championship win over Dan Henderson.
On
Wednesday's edition of The MMA Hour, Diaz's manager and trainer
Cesar Gracie explained why the matchup has yet to happen.
According
to Gracie, Strikeforce ultimately decided that Diaz-Cyborg was
the company's direction, although company president Scott Coker
at one time believed that Miller-Diaz would happen.
"Part
of me was disappointed because I wanted Nick to shut him up,"
Gracie said. "That's about it, to beat him up. But the other
part, I kind of realized why that fight can't happen. You can't
give a guy a fight just because he talks a lot. It sets a precedent."
Source: MMA Fighting
|
Fighting
Community Answers Tragedy, Mobilizes in Wake of Brazilian Floods
by Gleidson
Venga
A real tragedy has unfolded in Brazil in recent days, as heavy
rains have punished the mountainous region of Rio de Janeiro,
leaving more than 670 people dead and nearly 14,000 homeless.
The cities affected include Nova Friburgo, Teresopolis, Sumidouro
and Petropolis -- which has hosted three Meca Fighting Championship
events.
The
mother of Abu Dhabi Combat Club Submission Wrestling World Championships
winner Pablo Popovitch was killed in the disaster, and his father,
who lost everything, was admitted to the hospital.
In
response to the floods, the fighting community has mobilized
to help aid the victims. Three Brazilian icons -- jiu-jitsu legend
Rickson Gracie, his brother, Royler Gracie, and Olympic medalist
Flavio Canto -- will hold a seminar together on Wednesday in
hopes of benefitting the homeless.
“The
idea is much bigger than a technical seminar,” Royler said.
“Our goal is to mobilize the practitioners of martial arts,
get together, see friends and help the thousands of people who
are suffering from this tragedy.”
Canto,
a two-time Olympian in judo who won bronze in 2004, placed an
emphasis on the most basic of necessities.
“To
enter the seminar will require at least five kilograms of nonperishable
food per participant,” Canto said, “and our challenge
and expectation is to raise more than a ton of food.”
Rickson
urged all who were capable to aid in the relief effort.
“It’s
extremely important that all practitioners, regardless of the
sport they represent or the academy they attend, come and make
of the sport of fighting a tool of practical support to society,”
he said.
Murilo
Bustamante, leader of Brazilian Top Team, is rallying his staff
to raise money for the victims.
“I
arrived Friday from a trip. I knew what had happened but had
no idea about the seriousness of the situation,” Bustamante
said. “I spoke with friends who live there, like manager
Alex Davis, who works with me in BTT. He is there helping people.
Thank God nothing happened to him or his family, but many need
help. It was a very big tragedy in proportions you would usually
not see. I think everyone has to help. I made my donation, and
I’m doing a campaign with my team.
“It’s
very sad,” he added. “People lost relatives. There
are people missing. There are people who lost their homes and
all their assets; they were left with only the clothes on their
bodies. It’s tragic when someone loses all references to
their life in something like that. We’re collecting food,
clothing and medicine at BTT to help.”
M-1
Challenge and K-1 Hero’s veteran Jair “Sorriso”
Goncalves, who lives in Teresopolis, took off his gloves and
volunteered in the rescue. Meanwhile, teams like Chute Boxe,
Nova União and American Top Team are also mobilizing to
help those in need.
Source: Sherdog
|
Junior
Dos Santos Makes His Choices for TUF 13 Assistant Coaches
by Damon
Martin
With filming set to begin next week for the 13th season of “The
Ultimate Fighter,” Junior Dos Santos has started to select
his coaching staff to go head-to-head with Brock Lesnar on the
reality show.
The
Brazilian heavyweight has a who’s who list of potential
trainers to bring with him. He has already chosen a couple of
top coaches to assist him when the show starts.
“He’s
got quite a few different guys. His main coach is gonna be the
main coach (on the show), Luiz Dorea, who is Anderson’s
boxing coach, Junior’s boxing coach, Rodrigo Nogueira and
Rogerio Nogueira’s boxing coach. He coaches the Brazilian
national team. That’s gonna be one of the boxing coaches,”
Ed Soares, Dos Santos’ manager told MMAWeekly Radio.
In
addition to Dorea, Dos Santos will bring in another stand-up
coach to work with his team.
“We’ve
got Billy Scheibe, who lives down in Oceanside. He trains Junior
in Muay Thai. He trains Brandon Vera. He trains Nogueira. He’s
going to be one of the coaches. And there are some other guys
we’re working on,” Soares revealed.
One
plan that may come into effect later in the season are guest
coaches that could assist Dos Santos along the way. Names like
Anderson Silva, Antonio Rodrigo Nogueira, and many other top
fighters who train at Blackhouse MMA alongside Dos Santos on
a daily basis could find their way onto the show.
“Of
course, you never know,” Soares hinted about Silva or Nogueira
appearing on the show. “That can always happen.”
Dos
Santos will travel to Las Vegas next week to begin his six-week
stint on the show coaching a team of welterweight fighters, before
heading back into training himself for a June showdown against
Lesnar. The two are likely to square off at UFC 131 in Vancouver.
Source: MMA Weekly
|
Kimbo
Slice vs. Wakakirin officially booked
By Zach
Arnold
Oh, what a circus the IGF 8-man title tournament is going to
be in Japan this year. Not only will Josh Barnett participate
as the promotion’s foreign ace, but the promotion’s
new native ace Wakakirin will face Kimbo Slice. The date is February
5th at Fukuoka International Center. Bob Sapp didn’t want
to face Wakakirin on NYE, but Kimbo will.
On
the undercard, Tatsumi Fujinami celebrates his 40th anniversary
as a wrestler by facing Mil Mascaras. Also on the card is Original
Tiger Mask (Sayama), The Predator, and the debut of a new wrestler
called Masked Genome against Hurricane Helms.
Source: Fight Opinion
|
Full
Speed Ahead for Dunham
by Jason
Probst
Never
tell Evan Dunham the odds. And forget about catching him off
guard on short notice, because it is not going to happen.
The
once-beaten UFC lightweight, ranked ninth in the world, has put
together a string of performances that have rocketed him into
contention for the 155-pound belt despite his being a virtual
unknown to casual fans a year ago -- proof positive of the adage
that “the harder you work, the luckier you get.”
Dunham
squares off against the dangerous but erratic Melvin Guillard
-- a late substitute for the injured Kenny Florian -- at UFC
“Fight for the Troops 2” on Jan. 22 at Fort Hood in
Killeen, Texas. It represents a chance for the Oregonian to move
past his disputed decision loss to former champion Sean Sherk
at UFC 119 in September, when most felt Dunham was robbed on
the scorecards.
“I’ve
kinda put that behind me. Obviously, it sucks that it happened,
but you can’t do anything about it,” he says. “There
were a few things I could have done, especially in the first
round, to change the direction of where that fight went. And
now I’m looking to the future and this next fight.”
Dunham-Guillard
will serve as the main event at “Fight for the Troops 2,”
which will air live on Spike TV.
“He’s
a very heavy-handed kid. He hits really hard,” Dunham says.
“I think he’s gonna try and turn it into a stand-up
war. He’s a tough guy, and he’s just as dangerous an
opponent as Florian. I’m not taking him lightly.”
Nobody
in the lightweight division can take anyone lightly nowadays,
with some 60 fighters signed to the UFC vying for the title.
While the Frankie Edgar-Gray Maynard classic on New Year’s
Day ended in a draw at UFC 125, it emerged as the kind of statement
fight that will probably be a requirement for contenders and
prospects alike who want to move up the crowded 155-pound ladder.
“I
thought it was a great fight. I was fortunate enough to be there
and had great seats,” says Dunham, who trains with Maynard
at Xtreme Couture Mixed Martial Arts in Las Vegas. “I really
thought it was awesome. Both those guys are tough as nails. I
think Gray showed everybody he’s a changed fighter. He’s
going in there and really putting it on people. I was super surprised
he didn’t put Edgar away in the first. Frankie showed a
lot of heart. Both those guys are studs, and I can’t wait
for their rematch.”
Evan
Dunham will confront Melvin Guillard (above) on Jan. 22.At 5-foot-10,
Dunham is tall for the weight class and even taller for a guy
who can wrestle effectively. The ancient art does not lend itself
to long frames and lean limbs, the owners of which are usually
outmatched against shorter, stockier types.
Yet
despite those factors, Dunham has used enough wrestling, along
with an outstanding jiu-jitsu game, to give fits to some of the
division’s better fighters, including Sherk and Tyson Griffin,
both of whom are talented takedown artists with compact, muscled
physiques. With a developing stand-up arsenal, he has surfaced
as one of the more talented competitors in the UFC’s deepest
division.
In
his 2009 debut against Per Eklund, his work was cut out for him,
so fighting someone on short notice is an experience to which
he is accustomed.
“I
was fortunate enough to get that fight on relatively short notice.
I really didn’t have too much time to think about it,”
says Dunham, who put away Eklund in 2:13. “I just knew I
had to make weight, fight my ass off and win.”
Dunham
enjoyed a breakout year in 2010, as three fights thrust him into
the public eye amidst the crowded ranks of the division. A submission
victory over “The Ultimate Fighter” Season 8 winner
Efrain Escudero at UFC Fight Night 20 in January was followed
by a decision win against Griffin in June and the controversial
defeat to Sherk in September.
Entering
his showdown with Escudero, Dunham had a couple of UFC wins under
his belt, as he followed up the Eklund knockout with a decision
over Pride Fighting Championships veteran Marcus Aurelio. He
was clearly cast in the underdog role. Escudero had a collegiate
wrestling pedigree, good looks, a perfect record and momentum
from a first-round stoppage of American Top Team’s Cole
Miller at UFC 103.
Dunham
proceeded to unleash a grappling clinic, using an active guard
and excellent jiu-jitsu to sink home a gruesome armbar, forcing
the gritty Escudero to tap after his limb was bent to the max.
It was a fitting win for Dunham, 29, who had wrestled in high
school but spurned the chance to do so in college because he
was burned out on the sport. Ironically, he became hooked on
grappling again while attending the University of Oregon.
“He’s
a tough guy, and he's just as dangerous an opponent as Florian.
I’m not taking him lightly.”
-- Evan Dunham on Melvin Guillard
“I
took it pretty serious and did freestyle and Greco in the offseason,
but I kind of lost the luster for it. I got introduced to Brazilian
jiu-jitsu in college, got choked out and abused by guys half
my size,” he says. “It made me think, ‘What do
they know?’ and that [it] was something I should do.”
Against
Guillard, he faces an opponent with exceptional striking, solid
wrestling and a penchant for delivering powerful shots with eye-popping
athleticism. Guillard has a tendency to fade in fights or lose
his effectiveness at times when he has to make adjustments, though
he has proven resurgent under the tutelage of Greg Jackson in
Albuquerque, N.M.
Dunham
makes training the centerpiece of his existence. Mornings are
spent at Throwdown Training Center, evenings at Extreme Couture.
When Florian dropped out due to injury in early December, Dunham
accepted Guillard as a replacement on approximately seven weeks’
notice.
“Training
is going good. I’m just working [the fight preparations]
into my schedule,” he says. “I’m feeling good
and ready to go.”
Source: Sherdog
|
Rematch
on tap after inconclusive thriller
LAS
VEGAS – Ultimate Fighting Championship president Dana White
failed to attend the post-fight news conference Saturday at the
MGM Grand after a sensational lightweight title bout between
Frankie Edgar and No. 1 contender Gray Maynard ended in a draw.
White
had UFC vice president Craig Borsari stand in for him and announce
that World Extreme Cagefighting lightweight champion Anthony
Pettis would get the next shot at Edgar’s championship.
When Borsari made the announcement, Maynard, sitting a few feet
to his left, visibly sagged.
It
wasn’t a good start to the New Year for Maynard, who may
be haunted for a long time by his failure to stop Edgar in the
first round when he knocked him down three times with punches
and took him to the mat two other times.
White,
though, changed his mind. In a telephone call to Yahoo! Sports
late Saturday, he said Maynard would indeed get the next shot
at Edgar’s belt when both are healthy enough to fight again.
“I
hate to talk about what we’re going to do with future fights
at a press conference when a card has just ended,” said
White, who personally scored the bout a draw. “I had the
whole Pettis thing with the belt on my mind and so I said, ‘Yeah,
Pettis gets the next shot.’ But then when I thought about
it more, how can I in good conscience not give that shot to Gray
Maynard? It’s a no-brainer. He came in there and he fought
his ass off and he deserves that rematch. That was a great fight
and they deserve to do it again.”
All
three judges scored the first round 10-8 for Maynard. But Marcos
Rosales gave the final four rounds to Edgar and had it 48-46
for the champion. Patricia Morse-Jarman scored it 47-47, giving
Rounds 2, 3 and 4 to Edgar and giving the fifth to Maynard. Glenn
Trowbridge scored it 48-46 for Maynard, giving the challenger
the odd rounds and Edgar the even rounds.
The
crowd of 12,688 didn’t like the call and neither did either
fighter.
“It
obviously doesn’t feel good,” Maynard said softly.
“I thought it was my fight. I thought I had the belt. I
worked my ass off for this. I don’t know. I guess it kind
of hurts.”
It
felt no better for Edgar, who came out in the second round remarkably
composed for a guy who was battered so badly in the first that
there were many who felt referee Yves Lavigne should have stopped
it.
Edgar
was bleeding from the nose and mouth and several times staggered
around the cage like a drunken man on his way home from a New
Year’s Eve party in that epic first round. But Edgar hardly
seemed worse for the wear in the second and he fought Maynard
on better-than-even terms the rest of the way.
Edgar
has been battling for respect despite entering the bout with
the title and a 13-1 record, which included back-to-back championship
match wins over the legendary B.J. Penn.
Maynard
knocked Edgar down three times and took him down twice in a stunningly
one-sided first round that was reminiscent of the performance
Cain Velasquez gave in October in lifting the heavyweight title
from Brock Lesnar.
“I
got hit with a big shot,” Edgar said of the Maynard left
hook that sent him tumbling backward. “He came out strong;
did a good job. I bounced back and I felt I won the last four
rounds. “
Maynard
went so hard in the first round trying for the finish that he
didn’t have much energy in the second. Maynard’s coach
Gil Martinez said he was surprised Lavigne let the fight continue,
though, he wasn’t criticizing the referee.
But
he noted that Phil Baroni was given considerably less leeway
when he was stopped in the first round of a middleweight fight
with Brad Tavares earlier in the card.
“I’ve
seen a lot of other fights stopped for a lot less than that,”
Martinez said. “It should have been stopped in the first
round. Frankie had no answers for anything that Gray was hitting
him with. Phil Baroni got stopped and he was only hit, what,
four or five times? Gray landed a good 50, 60 punches in that
round, maybe more.
“After
the first round, it was like running a sprint and then me coming
up and asking him to run a mile. He punched himself out and so
the second round, he kind of took it off. Then again, the third
and the fifth, we thought we had those rounds.”
Edgar’s
boxing was far sharper than Maynard’s after the first, as
he used ring movement and a sharp right hand to fight his way
back into the bout.
White
was incredulous, as were many in attendance, that Edgar was able
to survive the first, let alone continue. And when he seemingly
turned it around 180 degrees in the second, White’s respect
for Edgar only increased.
“Why
people doubt this kid I’ll never understand,” White
said. “I think he’ll get more respect for what he did
tonight, surviving that first round, than he did for two wins
over B.J. The size difference between them is amazing and Gray
couldn’t take him down (after the first). The kid is a tough,
tough kid and he deserves a lot more respect than he gets.”
They
both do, and White showed it to Maynard, as well, by giving him
the rematch. For a fight that fans were complaining about and
few supposedly wanted to see, the third one in the series is
going to be huge.
Source:
Yahoo Sports
|
Latest
from UFC: trilogy schedule and belt up for grabs
According
to MMAFighting.com, the UFC has already set a date for the title
rematch between Frankie Edgar and Gray Maynard. Maynard is responsible
for the only loss on Edgar’s ledger and, in the rematch
at UFC 125, the bout ended in a draw. Now they are set to do
battle again, on May 28 at UFC 130 in Las Vegas.
Check
out the likely card:
Frankie
Edgar vs. Gray Maynard
Quinton
“Rampage” Jackson vs. Thiago Silva
Frank
Mir vs. Roy Nelson
Thiago
Alves vs. Rick Story
Travis
Browne vs. Stefan Struve
Sapo
replaces Falcão
Everything
was in place for Italy’s Alessio Sakara to take on Brazil’s
Maiquel Falcão. However, the Chute Boxe representative
ended up having to pull out due to injury and will be replaced
by his compatriot Rafael Sapo, a Vinícius Draculino student
currently training under Renzo Gracie. The fight will take place
March 3 at UFC on Versus 3. Check out the likely card:
Diego
Sanchez vs. Martin Kampmann
C.B.
Dollaway vs. Mark Muñoz
Alessio
Sakara vs. Rafael Sapo
Brian
Bowles vs. Damacio Page
Thiago
Tavares vs. Shane Roller
Takeya
Mizugaki vs. Francisco Rivera
Igor
Pokrajac vs. Todd Brown
Rousimar
“Toquinho” vs. Alexandre “Cacareco”
Steve
Cantwell vs. Cyrille Diabaté
Matt
Brown vs. Matt Riddle
Erik
Koch vs. Cub Swanson
Rob
Kimmons vs. Dongi Yang
Nate
Diaz gets back in the saddle
After
dropping his UFC 125 fight to Korea’s Dong Hyun Kim, Nate
Diaz needs to win to keep his place in the promotion safe. His
chance at redemption will come April 30 in Canada at UFC 129.
His opponent will be local fighter Rory McDonald. Check out the
card:
St-Pierre
vs. Jake Shields
Randy
Couture vs. Lyoto Machida
Phil
Davis vs. Matt Hamill
Mark
Bocek vs. Ben Henderson
Claude
Patrick vs. Daniel Roberts
Nate
Diaz vs. Rory MacDonald
Brian
Foster vs. Sean Pierson
John
Makdessi vs. Kyle Watson
Pablo
Garza vs. Yves Jabouin
Ivan
Menjivar vs. Charlie Valencia
Jason
MacDonald vs. Ryan Jensen
Source:
Gracie Magazine
|
Spider:
“We’re a lot more than two guys going in there to throw
down”
Anderson
Silva would have faced Vitor Belfort in April 2010 but the “Phenomenon”
ended up having to drop out to treat an injury and the showdown
was postponed. At the time, the “Spider” spared no
scorn for his opponent in his declarations, a stance he maintained
against Vitor’s substitute, Demian Maia. He got the win
at UFC 112, but the until-then unquestionable idol made a bad
impression on fans for his attitude in the ring.
Then
came his showdown with the provocateur Chael Sonnen, and one
could already not the changes in the Spider’s speech, including
after his triumph. For the fight with Belfort, which will finally
take place at UFC 126, on February 5, Anderson seems to have
really changed some things. No, he really doesn’t have much
love in his heart for his opponent, but check out what he had
to say on the UFC website:
“Truth
is, the guys are seeking something that is really vague: the
belt. That’s a tiny thing when compared to what we can represent
as people. I’m not concerned with that. I’m concerned
with being a good example for the athletes coming into the mix,
growing, and watching my fights. That’s what I want to convey,
the message I want to convey as an athlete, and it is what inspires
me.”
“My
personal opinion is that a fight is a fight and he is just another
opponent, dangerous like all the rest. I’m going in there
to fight, as he is.”
“Of
course, it’s cool to end your career as champion, undefeated
or whatever. But in my sport that’s a bit vague, because
we can lose at any moment. That was already proven against Chael
(Sonnen). I’m normal and can get knocked out, submitted…
It’s like I say: I seek to do more than simply fight. I
look to send the message that we are all a lot more than that,
a lot more than two guys who get in there to throw down.”
Source:
Gracie Magazine
|
Cole
Miller: “Fighting Cowboy Would Be a Step Down from Matt
Wiman”
There’s
no doubt that Donald “Cowboy” Cerrone has had only
one name on his mind since moving to the UFC recently. That’s
Cole Miller.
Following
his last win in the WEC, Cerrone called for a fight against Miller
because of a win the American Top Team fighter picked up over
his close friend and training partner Leonard Garcia in the UFC
back in 2007… and maybe a few words that were tossed around
afterwards.
While
both Miller and Cerrone are preparing for bouts against different
opponents in the next few weeks, the pair could be headed for
a showdown at some point in the near future. To hear Miller tell
it, he’s sick of hearing his name come out of Cerrone’s
mouth.
“I’m
just tired of this guy and his same old song,” Miller said
about Cerrone when speaking to MMAWeekly Radio. “Every time
I see this guy he just wants to talk about how he wants to fight
me, and beat my ass because I beat Leonard. Waah, waah, waah.”
Looking
back at the fight he had with Garcia, Miller points out that
he doesn’t even remember Cerrone, but he admits they’ve
had a few words since then.
“I
don’t even remember him being there,” Miller commented.
“I saw him I guess about a year later, and he expressed
to me that he wanted to fight me. So ever since, every time we
see each other, we kind of have a little bit of a verbal battle.”
Miller
isn’t sure why Cerrone picked him over anyone else that
he wanted to fight just because he beat Garcia, but he’s
certainly not backing down from the challenge.
“There
really isn’t a lot of people that beat Leonard, but there’s
several other people besides me, a couple of guys that have beat
him, and I don’t see him trying to call those guys out,
but whatever,” Miller said.
“This
guy, he’s a bully. He probably sees me as being the easiest
target or the easiest kill, so he can bring it on, come on.”
Miller
is currently closing up camp for his Jan. 22 UFC Fight for the
Troops 2 bout against Matt Wiman. If he’s successful, he’s
not really sure Cerrone deserves a shot at him, but if that’s
what the UFC wants, he’ll sign his name on the dotted line.
“I
don’t think he’s horrible or anything like that, I
really like his style as a fighter, but I think as far as the
level, that he would be a step down from Matt Wiman,” said
Miller.
“I’d
be happy to fight Cowboy whenever, at any weight, I don’t
care.”
Source:
MMA Weekly
|
UFC
Fight for the Troops 2: Will Campuzano Calls on Urijah Faber’s
Camp To Re-Tool
If
there’s been one thing that’s eluded UFC featherweight
Will Campuzano over the last couple of years, it’s been
consistency.
Caught
in a pattern of alternating wins and losses, Campuzano knows
what went wrong in the times he hasn’t come out on top.
“I’ve
had some tough opponents,” Campuzano told MMAWeekly.com.
“I fought Eddie Wineland and I think he had a lot of experience
on me. I fought another fight in Texas (against Steve Garcia)
and I won that, and then Nick (Pace) wasn’t really fighting,
he was kind of holding me down and I think I kind of gave him
the fight.
“I
beat him up, but I was too aggressive and trying to get the knockout
so bad that I wasn’t really so worried about jiu-jitsu defense.”
In
an effort to put things on the right path, Campuzano headed to
Sacramento, Calif.’s premier MMA gym in preparation for
his upcoming UFC return.
“For
this fight I came out here to Alpha Male and I think it’s
making me better all around,” he stated. “My striking,
my grappling, I’m improving as a fighter.
“I
think it will show (in my upcoming fights). Sometimes I’ve
gone out there with a lack of confidence, and being here has
definitely helped me gain a lot of confidence to go out there
and be aggressive.”
Aggression
may be the name of the game on Jan. 22 when Campuzano squares
off against Chris Cariaso at UFC Fight for the Troops 2 in Ft.
Hood, Texas.
“He’s
really action-oriented,” said Campuzano of Cariaso. “I
think we should get in there and mix it up and get it on.
“He’s
kind of small, so I think I should be able to pick him apart.
I think he shoots in once in a while, but I don’t think
he’ll be able to get me down.”
With
three losses in four Zuffa-owned properties fights, Campuzano’s
back may be to the wall against Cariaso, his future with the
company may be at stake, but he won’t let it affect how
he handles himself on fight night.
“I
don’t really worry about it,” admitted Campuzano. “I
think I’ll show up to fight, and that’s my main thing
going into a fight, I’m still going to go in there and try
to knock someone out.”
Having
made strides to improve his mental game to match his physical
abilities, Campuzano could begin the road to making his mark
in the UFC in 2011.
“I
want to thank Punishment and HeavyHands,” he concluded.
“The fans should definitely check out the show, UFC Fight
for the Troops 2 has an awesome card and they’ll be entertained.
“Thanks
to everyone that’s supported me and believed in me, I’m
going to get (things) together in 2011. I want to keep learning,
keep working and pick up some wins.”
Source:
MMA Weekly
|
Strikeforce
Challengers 14 Features Lyle Beerbohm vs. Pat Healy and Ryan
Couture
The
Strikeforce Challengers series has been a building block for
many up-and-coming fighters in the promotion. Lately, the headline
bouts on those cards have also served as a proving ground of
sorts for fighters believed to be ready to make the leap to contender
status.
Lyle
Beerbohm will get his chance to prove his worthiness as a lightweight
contender when he faces Pat Healy in the main event of Strikeforce
Challengers 14, which will take place at Cedar Park Center just
outside of Austin, Texas.
Joining
Beerbohm and Healy on the card will be Ryan Couture, who has
yet to receive an opponent.
MMAWeekly.com
sources confirmed the bouts first reported by MMAFighting.com.
Beerbohm
(16-0) counts veterans Duane “Bang” Ludwig and Vitor
“Shaolin” Ribeiro among his wins under the Strikeforce
banner. He won three bouts in 2010, including the Ribeiro bout
and two fights for a smaller promotion.
In
the main event at Strikeforce Challengers 14, Beerbohm gets the
opportunity to prove to promotion officials that he is ready
to step into the title picture in the lightweight division. Gilbert
Melendez currently heads Strikeforce’s 155-pound class,
holding the promotion’s title.
Healy
(23-16) is also a Strikeforce veteran, as well as a UFC veteran.
His last two bouts were for Strikeforce, winning the first with
a unanimous decision over Bryan Travers, but getting submitted
by former champion Josh Thomson last June.
This
is Healy’s chance to prove he should be given a second chance
to work his way up the lightweight ladder.
Couture
(1-0) made his professional debut at Strikeforce Challengers
10 with a win over Lucas Stark. He was scheduled to face Juan
Zapata at Strikeforce Challengers 12 last November, but had to
withdraw due to a staph infection. No opponent had been named
for him as of the time of publication.
Source:
MMA Weekly
|
Belfort:
“I’ll give it 100%, so he’d better be ready”
Currently
the most heavily-anticipated fight among fans, Anderson vs. Belfort
will headline the February 5 UFC 126 event in Las Vegas. And
the “Phenomenon” went back to talking about his upcoming
challenge, this time in an interview on the official UFC website:
“Fighting
for the belt makes no difference. You’re seeking the upper
echelon of the sport. What’s important is to stay focused
on training and on what you need to fulfill, your objective.
I came to Vegas for the structure. There’s greater investment
in the sport here. So many times in Brazil I’ve lacked training
partners. I feel Brazil is still far behind the USA as far as
that goes,” says Vitor, who doesn’t feel his time away
– since his last fight, in September 2009 – will hinder
him.
“Training
is the hardest part of a competition. For as long as I’ve
been away injured, I believe my training will overcome the down
time. I imagine that to be the source of athletes’ riches.”
And
as far as the fight itself goes, as everyone may imagine, the
action seems guaranteed.
I’m
going to give it my best, regardless of Anderson’s expectations.
I’m going to give it 100%, so he’d better be ready.”
Source:
Gracie Magazine
|
|
José
Aldo in a peace mission in Haiti
Tomorrow
(12th), it’ll complete a year of the terrible earthwake
that desolated Haiti and killed, according to the number given
by the Haitian government, over 220 thousand people. Since the
tragedy, not much has changed and the country still needs the
outside support to keep the basic level of survivor. The city
of Manaus, represented by the Sport’s Municipal Secretary
(SEMDEJ), which is headed by Fabrício Lima, in partnership
with ONU, the Brazilian Army and the NGO Viva Rio will make,
on January 23rd, in Port Prince (Haiti), the Haitian Sport’s
Journey to Peace (Jornada Haitiana do Esporte pela Paz).
The
event will bring Haiti great named of the sport like the Stock
Car pilot Antonio Pizzonia, the triathlete Armando Barcellos,
the Judo fighter Flávio Canto, the Taekwondo athlete Natália
Falavigna and the soccer player Fred (Fluminense), who still
will confirm his presence. MMA couldn’t miss a noble cause
like this one and the athlete chosen to represent the modality
was José Aldo, featherweight champion of UFC, who accepted
the invitation immediately and will embark on January 20th for
his peace mission in Haiti.
Source:
Tatame |
|
Matyushenko
celebrates his 40th birthday in Rio and wants to fight Nogueira
again
Fighter
of UFC, the Russian Vladimir Matyushenko, chooses the Wonderful
City to celebrate his 40th birthday. The tough guy, who holds
a respectful professional record of 25 wins in 30 bouts, met
the Brazilian Tatiana Junqueira in Los Angeles and took the chance
to come to Brazil, where he stayed for a while in São
Lourenço, Minas Gerais and then celebrated his birthday
in Rio de Janeiro. Matyushenko spent the New Year’s Eve
in Copacabana, went to see the Christ, the Sugar Loaf, and the
main tourist attractions of the city. But what amazed the foreigner
was the Brazilian cuisine and people. “People treated me
so kindly, I’ve have so much fun. The food here is also
great, I’m heavier than I’ve ever been in my life (laughs).
I like açaí and Brazilian ‘cachaça’,
which is amazing (laughs)”, joked Vladimir, who analyzed
his career.
“I
was young, crazy, but I wouldn’t change a thing. I think
I’ve made the right decisions. MMA demands much of you and
I’d love to be younger now, but I think I still have some
years ahead of me. I’ll keep fighting as long I’m paid
to do it (laughs). For now I’m still healthy, young, 40
years old… I feel like I could run 10 miles per hour now.
So why wouldn’t I keep fighting?”, commented the tough
guy, who analyzed his win over the Brazilian Alexandre Cacareco.
“I
know he’s great in Jiu-Jitsu, but he tried to keep the fight
standing up… I’m stronger, so I grabbed him and he
chose to be on the bottom, a bad position… Even on the half
guard, I know he has a good half guard because he can do submissions
like kimura, omoplata… These are two of his best submissions,
but I knew it and I was prepared for it on our fight”, shoot.
Hosted,
along with his wife, on a friend’s house, in Leblon neighborhood,
Matyushenko turned 40 last Tuesday (4), on the best Russian style:
with good shots of Vodka and then went to an all-you-can-eat
buffet in Ipanema. The athlete launched to Los Angeles, where
he current lives, one day later (5), and promised to return to
Brazil, and also revealed that his next opponent on UFC can be
a guy we already know. “Maybe I’ll confront the winner
between Minotouro and Tito Ortiz. Last time Nogueira’s beaten
me, but I’ve beaten him once, so I want to fight him again.
It’d be a good thing for me to fight him, despite we’ve
become friends. I’ve met him at the airport when I was coming
to Brazil and I see him as a friend. I respect him, but I’d
like to confront him one more time”, concluded Matyushenko.
Source:
Tatame |
|
UFC
Fight For The Troops 2: Pat Barry Willing to Break Hands and
Feet
Pat
Barry is getting ready to fight a zombie. Well, not exactly.
Actually, he’s stepping up to fight Joey Beltran at UFC
Fight for the Troops 2 on Jan. 22.
Barry
spoke recently with MMA Weekly Radio and used the undead analogy
when talking about Beltran, describing his opponent as one that
walks forward like the fictional characters from the classic
horror films.
“He’s
a living zombie,” Barry said. “Everything you throw
is going to land on him, but he’s going to constantly walk
forward and, eventually, you’re going to get too tired of
hitting him in the face. And then, he’s going to catch you.
Just like any movie zombie. Not the 2008, ’09 and ’10
zombies that run really fast, but the traditional Night of the
Living Dead zombies that crawl towards you really slow. Yeah,
he’s like those.”
Barry,
coming off his loss to Croatia’s Mirko “Cro Cop”
Filipovic, talked about his fight with Beltran and joked about
how the match was fun idea before, but after breaking his hand
and foot against the Croatian kickboxer, he sees hitting Beltran
as something that might not be so enjoyable.
Apparently,
breaking body parts was a lesson learned for Pat Barry.
“Before
the Cro Cop fight, I would have thought absolutely, this could
be a very fun fight,” Barry explained. “But then I
realized that I’m capable of breaking my entire body trying
to hit somebody. Then, I started thinking maybe this fight won’t
be so fun.”
Against
Cro Cop, Barry clearly held the advantage in the stand-up department
for a majority of the fight, landing precise shots and knocking
down the former Pride FC star twice. It’s not a far-off
description to say he was trying to destroy Cro Cop’s head
in the process. Unfortunately, the plan backfired.
“I
just tried to make his head explode and it just didn’t work,”
said Barry. “My hand gave out before his face did”
Looking
ahead to his UFC Fight for the Troops bout, Barry has more clarity
on how he is suppose to approach an opponent. He sees Joey Beltran
as one who can take a decent amount of punishment, and utilizing
the same strategy against him that Barry did against his last
opponent may yield similar results from a physical aspect.
Part
of the job, though. You have to do what you have to do.
“If
I’m going to break my hand on Cro Cop’s face, then
both of my hands are going to come off in that match,” Barry
said. “They’ve got to. There is no way I can punch
him in the head and not break both of my hands and feet.”
Expect
another stand-up onslaught from Pat “HD” Barry come
Jan. 22. He and Joey Beltran will duke it out for the U.S. armed
forces in Fort Hood, Texas, on that night. If Beltran truly is
the zombie Barry says he is, it’s safe to say that this
fight will be as entertaining as AMC’s The Walking Dead.
Source:
MMA Weekly |
|
Igor
Gracie vs. John Salgado Added to Strikeforce Feb 12 Undercard
A
member of the Gracie family will fight on the upcoming Strikeforce
card in New Jersey as Igor Gracie has been tapped to face John
Salgado in an undercard bout for the Feb 12 show.
The
bout was confirmed to MMAWeekly.com by Gracie’s manager
Ali Abdel-Aziz from Dominance MMA.
Gracie
(2-2) enters the fight in New Jersey after taking all of 2010
off. Working with the Renzo Gracie Academy in New York City,
Gracie is not ready to come back and put the layoff behind him.
Facing
Gracie in New Jersey will be John Salgado (4-4-1) making his
Strikeforce debut. Salgado last fought local fighter Chris Liguori
in November 2010, losing by decision.
The
bout between Gracie and Salgado will be part of the undercard
for the featured bouts which will showcase all heavyweights,
including the start of the Strikeforce Heavyweight Grand Prix.
Source:
MMA Weekly |
|
John
Cholish vs. Marc Stevens Added to Strikeforce Feb 12 Undercard
Former
“Ultimate Fighter” competitor Marc Stevens will meet
Wall Street stockbroker and Team Renzo Gracie student John Cholish
in an undercard bout at the upcoming Strikeforce show going down
Feb 12 in New Jersey.
The
bout was confirmed to MMAWeekly.com by sources close to the match-up
on Friday. MMAJunkie.com first reported the fight.
Marc
Stevens (12-5) makes his first appearance since his time of the
“Ultimate Fighter” season 12, where he was coached
by Josh Koscheck during his stint on the show. Stevens was the
No. 1 overall pick by Koscheck, but fell short in both chances
during his time in the house.
Stevens
was submitted by Cody McKenzie and then Aaron Wilkinson on the
show, and now hopes to erase the memory of that when he comes
back in February.
John
Cholish (5-1) makes the move to Strikeforce after a successful
run in local shows primarily fighting in New Jersey. Cholish
trains under John Danaher at the Renzo Gracie Academy in New
York City.
Cholish
is a full-time stockbroker during the day, and trains at night
and believes he’s ready for the next step up in competition.
That will happen on Feb 12.
The
bout between Stevens and Cholish will be a part of the undercard
for the all heavyweight main card taking place in New Jersey
as the kick-off to the Strikeforce Heavyweight Grand Prix.
Source:
MMA Weekly |
Rômulo
Barral back to the mat, in Vegas
Following
confirmation Kron Gracie is in, another top-tier black belt has
guaranteed his presence at the Fernando Paradeda-promoted Abu
Dhabi World Pro tryouts to take place January 29 at Las Vegas’s
Sports Center arena.
“I’m
impressed by how well sign-ups have been going, the event’s
going to go off! Now Rômulo Barral is in. His knee has
recovered and he’ll make his return to the mat at the Vegas
tryouts. A guarantee of good Jiu-Jitsu!” says Paradeda in
celebration.
Sign-ups
end January 27. However, anyone who signs up by the 18th will
receive a discouunt.
Paradeda
is also organizing the tryouts in Gramado, Brazil, which begin
March 19, and in San Diego (March 6), for which sign-ups are
open until February 1st. The three events produced by the black
belt boast a number of differences setting them apart from other
World Pro tryouts: they will also feature a No-Gi contest (worth
a trip to Abu Dhabi) and parallel events for kids and master-
and senior-category athletes. In all, from each tryout, thirteen
champions will earn all-expenses-paid trips to the main event,
in Abu Dhabi, not to mention the money prizes. In all, the rewards
from each tryout come to a total of 80 thousand dollars. The
events will also be broadcast live.
Source:
Gracie Magazine
|
Thiago
Silva: “Jon Jones is a jerk”
Thiago
Silva got a perfect win over Brandon Vera, on the first edition
of UFC in 2011, and showed a different side of him: a strategic
guy. Known for his aggressiveness, the Brazilian adopted a smarter
posture and dominated the 15 minutes of fight, and told, on an
interview to TATAME, that he might keep this change for his bout
against Quinton “Rampage” Jackson, scheduled for UFC
130.
“The
fans can always expect much aggressiveness coming from me, this
is something I’ll never change about myself, but it’ll
be aggressiveness and strategy altogether. The level here is
pretty high, we can get everything only with our hearts”,
tells the athlete of ATT, who explained the provocation during
the fight with Vera and commented the controversy “drumming”
on the last round, responding to the critics of the American
Jon Jones. “I see this guy as a jerk. Everybody’s a
professional fighter and all fights include provocations. Brandon
Vera said he’s break my legs, that I wasn’t on his
level. I don’t say things, I do”, said.
How
are things after the win?
Monday
I’ll return to my trainings… Thanks God, UFC gave me
a good opportunity, against Rampage, and I took two weeks off
so I could rest a bit and don’t get injured when I return.
I’m thrilled!
You
said, before Brandon Vera’s fight, that you wanted the knockout,
but you got the win anyway. What did you think of the fight?
I
was looking for the knockout, but he opened some space and practically
conceded me the takedowns. He did a great job defending himself,
it was hard for me to finish the fight. I’m not a good submitter,
but I tried to punch him hard. He’s tough, has a good defense,
but I dominated the fight.
Did
you get that “want some more” taste for not having
knocked him out?
You
always get it, right? But I fought cautiously. It was my first
fight after a year and we didn’t know how my back would
react. I had to be more tactic. The guys are used to see me differently,
but I’m 28 and I got 3 hernias. If I want to keep my career,
I have to adapt, and we’ll evolve little by little.
You
and Brandon Vera teased each other after the first round, and
he returned more aggressive on the following round and you gave
some little slaps on his back on the third round. It was all
provocation or did you tried to make him to make a mistake?
We
never do anything without a reason. What I did in there was to
take his focus away. The only provocation I did was when I slapped
him on his back, the others I did because my hands were aching
when I punched him because I broke my finger. So it would open
me the way to try a submission or something like it. The only
provocation was that one so he would lose his focus, and there’s
no other reason.
Jon
Jones criticized a lot your attitude, claiming that it wasn’t
respectful and that a martial artist shouldn’t do such thing…
What did you think of it?
This
guy is a jerk. Everybody’s a professional fighter and all
fights include provocations. Brandon Vera said he’s break
my legs, that I wasn’t on his level. I don’t say things,
I do. You get recognized when you do things. I’m a professional
fighter, but I can’t always please everybody. There’s
always somebody behind the computed with a plate filled with
French fries, ready to criticize you. I fight for the fans, for
the money and to put my name up there. Talking is too much easy,
nobody knows what goes on in your life, your trainings…
I think I did my job. Who likes it, likes it, but you can dislike
it if you want.
How
do you think Rampage’s game matches yours?
Our
games match because we both like to fight standing. He avoids
the ground game, doesn’t take the guys down, he wants to
exchange. It’ll be a great fight because it’ll have
a bit of everything.
What
kind of Thiago should we expect against Rampage: aggressive or
tactic?
The
fans can always expect much aggressiveness coming from me, this
is something I’ll never change about myself, but it’ll
be aggressiveness and strategy altogether. The level here is
pretty high, we can get everything only with our hearts, but
the aggressiveness will always be there.
Source:
Tatame
|
Thales
Leites trains with Anderson and hopes to fight in March
The
year of 2010 was a good one for Thales Leites. The tough guy
fought four times and all four finished with a submission. The
only unusual fact was that Thales was submitted for the first
time on his career, when he was “caught” on a rear
naked choke by the American Matt Horwich, on a belt dispute on
the event “War on the Mainland”, that happened in California.
Thales doesn’t like to give excuses for what happened, but
the fact was he wasn’t at his best.
“Unfortunately
it happened and we’ll make a good comeback, I wasn’t
at my best physically, I’ve had some difficulties to beat
the weight, but it ain’t an excuse, he made me play his
game, tired me up and when an athlete is not at his best, he
has to know how to control things, but it’s past now, I’ve
won a battle after that one”, said the tough guy, who returned
to the natural course of his career and closed the year with
a submission on the Sweden event Superior Challenge.
Returning
to the trainings slowly, the black belt had the great presence
of Delfim gym, where he trains: Anderson Silva, who’s training
with Pedro Rizzo and ended training with Thales, who even after
being defeated by “The Spider”, doesn’t care about
any rivalry with his co-worker.
“I
don’t see any problem training with Anderson because I have
a good relationship with all fighters, I don’t have any
problem with nobody and when Pedro asked me if there was a problem
on him bringing Anderson to train I said that there wasn’t
any. It was pretty nice, it’s always good to train with
new people, you can learn more. I’m negotiating with some
events and I think I might fight in March, I’d like it to
be earlier, but let’s see, soon we’ll know more about
my next fight”, commented Thales, who’s in the mood
for fighting in 2011.
“I
hope this year will be better than the year then has gone, I
hoped I won all fights I did last year, but I had that bad result.
But I’ve won four of the fights I did and I closed the year
with a win. In 2011 I want to do four or five fights and win
all of them, if I can do five, six, as many fights as possible,
I’ll do. I know it’s hard, but at least four fights
I’ll do this year”, concluded the black belt.
Source:
Tatame
|
Matt
Riddle Steps in to Face Matt Brown at UFC on Versus 3 in Kentucky
An
injury has forced Mark Scanlon off the upcoming UFC on Versus
3 card, and Matt Riddle has agreed to step in and face Matt Brown
in a welterweight bout on the Louisville, KY card.
The
fight was confirmed to MMAWeekly.com by sources close to the
match-up on Friday. MMA Scraps Radio first reported the replacement.
Matt
Riddle steps into the fight on March 3 coming off a “Fight
of the Night” performance against Sean Pierson at UFC 124
in December 2010.
Riddle
is a former cast member for the “Ultimate Fighter”
and since his time on the reality show, has gone 5-2 in the Octagon.
The
bout between Brown and Riddle will remain on the night’s
undercard set to go down at the KFC Yum Arena in Louisville,
KY.
Source:
MMA Weekly
|
UFC
129 Gets Nate Diaz vs. Rory MacDonald On The Fight Card
Despite
stumbling his last time out, Nate Diaz isn’t ready to call
it quits as a UFC welterweight. Diaz will face Canadian Rory
MacDonald at UFC 129 on April 30 in Toronto. Diaz’s manager,
Cesar Gracie, confirmed the fight to MMAWeekly.com on Friday.
It was first reported by MMAFighting.com.
Diaz
(13-6) won Season 5 of “The Ultimate Fighter” as a
lightweight and made a solid run up the division, winning six
out of nine bouts.
After
losing to Clay Guida, Joe Stevenson, and Gray Maynard in three
of his last four bouts at 155 pounds, Diaz decided to take a
trip up to the welterweight class to put his skills to the test
there.
He
was immediately successful, defeating Rory Markham in a catchweight
fight after Markham failed to the 170-pound limit, and then submitted
Marcus Davis, one of the toughest fighters in the class.
His
lone stumble since moving up was to Dong Hyun Kim at UFC 125.
He lost a unanimous decision to the Korean fighter.
MacDonald
(10-1), still fairly new to the UFC, tore up the ranks in Canada.
He won his first 10 fights, finishing all 10 opponents, including
Mike Guymon in his Octagon debut at UFC Fight Night 20.
MacDonald
had a strong showing against Carlos Condit at UFC 115 last year
in Vancouver. The two won Fight of the Night honors, but Condit
got the victory. MacDonald performed well, getting the better
of Condit for the majority of the fight, but Condit turned the
tables to earn a TKO stoppage just seven seconds shy of the closing
bell.
UFC
welterweight champion Georges St-Pierre and challenger Jake Shields
headline UFC 129. Diaz vs. MacDonald will likely serve as part
of the preliminary portion of the fight card.
Source:
MMA Weekly
|
Rafael
“Sapo” Natal Replaces Injured Maiquel Falcao at UFC
on Versus 3
Another
change has been made to the upcoming UFC on Versus 3 fight card.
Maiquel Falcao has been forced off the card with an injury. Stepping
in to replace him against Alessio Sakara will be Renzo Gracie
student Rafael “Sapo” Natal.
The
change was confirmed to MMAWeekly.com by sources close to the
fight on Friday, with bout agreements issued for the new match-up.
Rafael
Natal makes his third appearance in the UFC, and hopes to notch
the first win under his belt as well.
Natal
fell short in his debut fight against Rich Attonito, and then
fell prey to a very rare draw in his next bout against Jesse
Bongfeldt at UFC 124 in December 2010.
Stepping
in as a replacement, Natal will look to get his first victory
when facing American Top Team fighter Alessio Sakara.
According
to sources, the bout will remain on the televised portion of
the UFC on Versus 3 broadcast.
Source:
MMA Weekly
|
Demian
Maia wants a spot on UFC Rio, in August
The year of 2010 ended with a good score for the Brazilian Demian
Maia. The Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu black belt won three of his four
fights and suffered only one loss, which happened on a title
fight against the middleweight champion Anderson Silva. Demian
still doesn’t have any bout scheduled and the only certain
thing is that he’d really like to fight on UFC Rio, which
happens on August 27th at HSBC Arena, in Rio de Janeiro.
“I’m
waiting… I’d like to fight in Brazil in August, it’s
what I want the most, but there’s nothing confirmed. My
manager is talking to the guys there”, said Demian, excited
with the possibility of fighting again in Brazil after over four
years. “I can’t say much, I’ve fought MMA few
times in Brazil and for me it’d be, like the Americans say,
priceless”.
Despite
wanting to define his return to the cage, the Brazilian will
have to wait. “Everybody wants me to fight, but the division
is a little bit messed up, the matchmaking, but I can’t
complain. I’ve fought four times last year and the most
important thing is not to lose the rhythm. I won’t lack
fights. UFC has 260 athletes after its fusion with WEC, so it’ll
be crazy to match these fights to fill all cards”, concluded
Demian, on a chat with TATAME.
Source:
Tatame
|
What
do you love and hate about Jiu-Jitsu?
Ten
things you love about Jiu-Jitsu
10)
Finishing that guy ten years younger than you and that other
one forty-five pounds heavier at the academy.
9)
The inner peace from knowing Jiu-Jitsu is always with you, should
you need it as a last resort when some unexpected problem arises
in the streets.
8)
The fact your body had never been in such great shape before.
7)
Watching the UFC is a lot more fun now you really understand
the ground game.
6)
The fact your brain has never worked so well before – at
training, work, study…
5)
Discovering, with every training sessions, the most evident defects
of your own personality. Fighting to correct what you can and
better live with what you can’t change.
4)
The bosom friends made at the academy.
3)
Taking your old friends to train with you and seeing them as
stoked as you.
2)
Improving your diet, to feel well nourished and train well.
1)
Learning at least one valuable lesson per day on GRACIEMAG.com.
Seven
things you hate about Jiu-Jitsu
7)
Getting submitted time and again by that little pipsqueak at
the gym.
6)
Sweating to get the stink out of your gi when washing it.
5)
That little ache that never goes away.
4)
UFC fans who don’t understand Jiu-Jitsu and boo the good
fights.
3)
Missing training for a silly reason.
2)
That swollen ear.
1)
The need to exercise patience with your friends who don’t
agree that GRACIEMAG is the best magazine in the world, insisting
on Esquire, Time, The New Yorker, Surfer’s, etc., etc…
Source:
Gracie Magazine
|
Kron
Gracie and Jonathan Torres to face off in Arizona
GD
Jiu-Jitsu Events in association with the Arizona State Brazilian
Jiu-Jitsu Federation (AZSBJJF) is already busy getting ready
for the 6th Arizona Open. As has now become a tradition for the
event, the February 26 and 27 tournament will feature super matches
featuring big names from the gentle art, one match of which has
already been determined and promises excitement.
“We
have the return of Kron Gracie, who defeated Phillipe De La Monica
last year, at the 5th AZ Open, to compete against JT Torres,
the winner of the 2nd Southwest Classic Light absolute division
and the ticket to compete at the 2011 European JJ Championship
in Lisbon,” say Gustavo Dantas.
Last
year’s event reached max capacity, so don’t miss the
chance to compete alongside world class competitors. Click here
for more info http://strongvon.com/azopen6.
Source:
Gracie Magazine
|
After
Exiting Bellator, Ulysses Gomez Has His Eyes Set on Conquering
the Flyweight Division
Las
Vegas based fighter Ulysses Gomez figured out after only one
fight at 135 pounds that he wants to stick around the flyweight
division.
Gomez
was a participant in last year’s bantamweight tournament
with Bellator Fighting Championships, but after a win over Travis
Reddinger in September, he was unable to continue on after contracting
a staph infection.
Since
that time, Gomez has actually moved on from Bellator Fighting
Championships because as he learned from his one fight at bantamweight,
he wants to be at 125 pounds.
“The
thing with Bellator, they offered me to fight at 135, and that’s
not my natural weight class. I prefer to fight at 125, but I
was like it’s on TV, it’s a great show Bellator, and
it’s a lot of exposure. I fought, and I didn’t really
like the way I performed in the fight, I felt like I could have
done a lot better. Nothing against Travis, but I felt like I
should have beaten him more convincingly that I did,” Gomez
told MMAWeekly.com.
“I
felt more comfortable at 125, and we asked Bellator if they were
going to do a 125-pound division, and they were like ‘no’
and they gave me the option to get out of my contract.”
While
Gomez remains on good terms with Bellator and enjoyed his time
there, he knew that to continue his career on a successful path,
he needed to be at a weight class that suited him.
“I
don’t want to go out on national TV and put on another bad
fight,” Gomez intimated. “I think 125?s a better weight
class for me, so that’s kind of what they did for me.”
As
of now, Bellator has not made any kind of announcement of an
intention to do a 125-pound weight class, so Gomez will move
onto other opportunities.
The
first of those opportunities will come on Feb. 18 when he returns
to Tachi Palace Fights to defend the flyweight title he won there,
and now defends against Darrell Montague.
“It
was a cool experience fighting for Bellator, and I really appreciated
the chance they gave me. I like Tachi, they’ve always taken
care of me. I know everybody there, it just feels like I’m
coming back home,” Gomez explained.
As
the champion at Tachi Palace Fights, Gomez ranks near the top
for anyone discussing the flyweight division. As the 125-pound
fighters gain more recognition, he hopes to have more chances
to prove himself against the best in the world.
Of
course it can’t be ignored that the UFC also plans on housing
a flyweight division at some point in 2011, and if that happens,
Gomez might be on a short list of fighters to get the chance
to introduce the world to the 125-pound division.
“As
far as the future goes, my whole thing is take it one fight at
a time. There’s a fight in front of me right now, I’ve
got to get past him,” Gomez said. “If Bellator ever
does a 125-pound division, I’m all for it. If the UFC opens
it up, I’m down for the opportunity, but right now it’s
just about the fight that’s in front of me.”
Gomez
returns to action on Feb. 18 to face Montague in the co-main
event of the Tachi Palace Fights show in Lemoore, Calif.
Source:
MMA Weekly
|
Eyeing
UFC Return, John Gunderson Doesn’t Fight To Have A Cool
Facebook Page
“I
don’t think I’ve been angry for a fight in a few years.
I’m angry now, so we’ll see what happens.”
These
are the words of lightweight John “Quick Guns” Gunderson
after reading the comments made in a press release by his upcoming
Tachi Palace Fights opponent Dominique Robinson.
In
preview for their match-up on Feb. 18 in Lemoore, Calif., Robinson
had expressed superiority over his opponent, which Gunderson
is quick to retort.
“I
learned a long time ago to respect opponents, and having said
that, he’s said some things that are his opinion, but come
that night we’ll find what the truth is,” Gunderson
told MMAWeekly.com.
“I
laugh when he says he’s better than me in all aspects of
the game. I don’t think he’s better than me at anything,
and the only way to find out is on fight night.”
Gunderson
further refuted Robinson’s claims by saying, “He hasn’t
beaten anybody or really done anything with his career to make
his claims. I was a little upset when I saw that, but all it’s
going to do is make me train harder and my goal is to finish
him.”
While
he closed out last year with a win, Gunderson starts off a new
year where he hopes to rebound from a 2010 that saw him reach
his highest of highs only to have it quickly dissipate around
him.
“Even
with as many fights as I have, I learned so much last year,”
commented Gunderson. “I fought in the UFC, which was good
and a dream come true, but I went 1-2 and was released.
“I
trained with so many UFC guys like Evan Dunham, Gray Maynard,
Tyson Griffin, and Sam Stout, just to name a few, and I see what
it takes when you get to that level. It’s hard dedication
and you’ve got to perform, and that’s the kind of stuff
that can dictate the rest of your career.”
Gunderson
doesn’t look at his current situation with starry eyes.
He realizes the truth of where he’s at and what he needs
to do to get back to the top.
“(Defeating
Robinson) would be two wins in a row, but I don’t think
it’d be a big enough win, because he hasn’t beaten
anybody worth mentioning, so I think it will take a couple more
fights,” admitted Gunderson.
“I’ve
got a couple more fights kind of lined up in the year, so I think
with four wins – which is my goal – and I can make
an argument to be back.”
While
he’s not allowing himself to get derailed by unrealistic
expectations, Gunderson does know he has something working on
his behalf.
“Even
though I lost two fights in the UFC, no one finished me,”
he stated. “I wasn’t one of those guys who went in
there and got beat down.
“I’m
in no hurry, because being in the UFC is one thing and winning
is another. I want to make sure when I’m back in the UFC
I’m 100-percent ready. I want to make sure if I get a chance
to be back there that I’m winning there and not just fighting
there.”
Having
made mistakes in the past and taking the necessary steps to get
back on track, a truly fired up Gunderson looks to start of 2011
with a win to put him one step closer to a UFC return.
“I
want to thank Tapout, Shawn Tompkins and all my training partners
at Xtreme Couture, he said in closing.
“Come
watch the Tachi Palace Fights on Feb 18. There’s a lot of
great fights on the card, but our fight should be the most exciting.
I don’t fight to have a cool Facebook; I fight because this
is a sport that I love.”
Source:
MMA Weekly
|
After
Leaving UFC, Antonio McKee Defends Belt Against Drew Fickett
at MFC 28
Sometimes
the road through life takes unforeseen twists and turns. It did
in a big way this week.
Antonio McKee and Jacob Volkmann at UFC 125
Antonio
McKee and Jacob Volkmann at UFC 125
Antonio
McKee won the Maximum Fighting Championship lightweight title
by defeating Derrick Noble at MFC 20 in early 2009. He fought
two more times for the promotion before making the jump to prove
himself in the UFC.
Drew
Fickett was heading for the MFC in 2008, but a public falling
out between him and MFC president Mark Pavelich ended badly.
Fickett and Pavelich parted ways.
Now,
the turns of fate have both headed back to Canada to fight each
other, for Pavelich, at MFC 28.
Time
really must heal all wounds.
McKee
(25-4-2) got one shot in the Octagon. He lost a split decision
to Jacob Volkmann at UFC 125 and was sent packing.
McKee
will put his lightweight title on the line for the second time
on Feb. 25 when he returns to the MFC.
Fickett
(40-13) went on a 2-8 yearlong skid after his falling out with
Pavelich in 2008. He has since turned his career around, winning
four straight fights, including three fights in one night last
September, winning the Shine Fights Lightweight Grand Prix.
McKee
vs. Fickett will serve as the co-main event at MFC 28: Supremacy
at the River Cree Resort and Casino, just outside Edmonton, Alberta,
Canada. It will air live on HDNet Fights.
Source:
MMA Weekly
|
UFC
126 Official with 11 Bouts
by Mike
Whitman
A
lightweight scrap between former WEC talent Donald Cerrone and
Brit Paul Kelly has been greenlit for UFC 126.
The
promotion made the matchup official on Thursday. The event, which
goes down Feb. 5 at the Mandalay Bay Events Center in Las Vegas,
is now once again complete with 11 signed bouts.
Kelly
was supposed to square off with Canadian striker Sam Stout at
the event, but Stout was forced to withdraw due to injury. Though
Cerrone had initially called out Cole Miller for his UFC debut,
“Cowboy” accepted the bout with Kelly when Stout went
down.
Cerrone
has won three of his last four bouts and comes fresh off a second-round
submission victory over former International Fight League talent
Chris Horodecki at WEC 53. Though the pair exchanged evenly while
standing in the first round, the second frame belong to “Cowboy.”
The
27-year-old locked up a triangle choke once the fight hit the
floor, and although Horodecki fought it off for quite some time,
eventually Cerrone found the correct squeeze. Prior to that triumph,
the Jackson’s Mixed Martial Arts product avenged a 2009
loss to Jamie Varner at WEC 51, using newfound wrestling skills
to dominate the former champion and earn a clear-cut unanimous
decision.
An
eight-time UFC veteran, Kelly holds a 5-3 record in the promotion
and has bested the likes of Matt Veach and countryman Paul Taylor
since he joined the big leagues. After fighting three times at
welterweight and earning a record of 2-1 inside the Octagon,
Kelly made the cut to lightweight in 2009. Since dropping to
155 pounds, the 26-year-old has defeated Veach and Rolando Delgado
while falling to Dennis Siver and Jacob Volkmann. Most recently,
Kelly earned a TKO victory over T.J. O'Brien at UFC 123 in November.
UFC
126 will be headlined by a middleweight title clash, as longtime
champion Anderson Silva defends his belt against a resurgent
Vitor Belfort. Also scheduled for Feb. 5 are two interesting
light heavyweight tilts as Forrest Griffin squares off with Rich
Franklin and Jon Jones meets Ryan Bader.
Source:
Sherdog
|
Strikeforce
Shifts Gears: Overeem’s Belt Safe, Tourney Fights Three
Rounds
by Ken
Pishna
Strikeforce, on a media conference call on Thursday, formalized
plans for its eight-man Heavyweight Grand Prix tournament.
Company
CEO Scott Coker, in an initial interview with MMAWeekly.com last
week, had hoped to make all bouts in the tournament five five-minute
rounds with heavyweight champion Alistair Overeem’s belt
at risk throughout the tournament.
“The
goal is to have Alistair put up his belt against Fabricio Werdum.
If Werdum wins, then he will have to put up the belt, but at
the end, you will have one champion,” Coker said.
That
was the goal, but Coker also said that they had to make sure
that their plans worked in conjunction with the state athletic
commissions that will oversee the multi-event tournament. The
various rounds of the tournament will be split amongst separate
events in various locations.
Of
chief concern to Strikeforce was the number of rounds for each
of the bouts if the title were at risk through the tournament.
“We’re
working with the athletic commissions because of the round issue,”
Coker told MMAWeekly.com. Most commissions deem title fights
five-round bouts; non-title fights are typically three rounds.
That
proved to be the point where Strikeforce shifted gears and decided
not to put Overeem’s title on the line in the Grand Prix.
“We
just didn’t feel like it would be fair for one fight to
be three rounds, one fight to be five rounds,” Coker said
on Thursday.
He
pointed out that, over the course of the tournament, Strikeforce
could end up working with as many as six different commissions.
“We
would have to have all those commissions on the same page and
we just couldn’t do it,” he added.
So
the tournament is set to be three five-minute rounds per fight
up until the final bout, which will be a five-round championship
fight.
If
any fight is ruled a draw, there will be a fourth judge that
will determine which fighter should continue on in the tournament.
As well, if a fighter cannot continue on in the tournament due
to injury or other circumstances, a five-person Strikeforce committee,
headed up by Strikeforce rules director Cory Schafer, will determine
a replacement from reserve bout winners and eliminated tournament
fighters.
The
winner of the Strikeforce Heavyweight Grand Prix will be the
tournament champion and challenge Overeem for the Strikeforce
heavyweight title. If Overeem makes it through the tournament,
then his belt will be on the line in final with the winner declared
both the Strikeforce heavyweight champion and Grand Prix tournament
champion.
Source:
MMA Weekly
|
Dave
Meltzer: Scott Coker should kick out Josh Barnett of Strikeforce
tournament
By Zach
Arnold
There’s a lot of new layers being added to the Josh Barnett
situation with Strikeforce. He’s booked in their upcoming
Heavyweight tournament on the ‘easier’ side of the
bracket and should he perform as expected, he’ll make it
to the finals and have a legitimate shot of winning the promotion’s
Heavyweight tournament and becoming champion. In other words,
he is someone who Scott Coker views as a guy who he can build
his company around as the face of the promotion.
During
an in-person interview with Eddie Goldman in New York on Monday,
Mr. Coker strongly defended Josh Barnett’s tournament participation
and said that Strikeforce would handle the drug testing regarding
Josh’s fights. Eddie compared the commission-shopping situation
with that of one Antonio Margarito.
SCOTT
COKER: “Yeah, here’s my position and the company’s
position on this and, uh, this is something that we thought long
and hard about with Josh and, you know, him going through the
California State commission hearings and he’s got unfinished
business with them, right? But that’s between Josh and the
commission. My job is we are a fight company that just picked
up his contract and, uh, we sent him to California to get tested
six weeks ago. Tested clean, right? So, he’s tested clean.
I feel good about that and he’s been out of the fight business
for maybe… 18 months here in (North America).
“So
what I’m saying is he’s, how much has this guy already
suffered and lost out? He’s lost out on hundreds of thousands
of dollars because of, you know, situations in his past. So,
you know, to me we as a company are going to judge him from what
he does for us. Now, in saying that, we’re going to test
him before and after every fight and, you know, I believe that
he’s already moved on from that part of his past.”
EDDIE
GOLDMAN: “Meaning that the commissions or Strikeforce?”
SCOTT
COKER: “Strikeforce. So, if Josh tests positive again and
then, you know, then there’s going to be an issue, right?
But I want to judge him on his future and his present with the
company and not so much his past because, you know what? To tell
you the truth, like the situation in Vegas, I really don’t
even know what happened with that. I mean, you probably know
more than me. But, that was when he wasn’t working with
Strikeforce, wasn’t fighting for Strikeforce, and I’ve
reached out to about six commission states that will allow him
to fight in their state pending a clean test and we’re going
to move forward. he’s moved forward. I think everybody else
should move forward, too, and let the guy make a living.”
After
these comments were made, I noted that Josh Barnett’s participation
in a second tournament this year was made official. He will be
one of eight men involved in the upcoming year-long IGF title
tournament in Japan. Also involved in the tournament — Wakakirin.
Probability of someone getting hurt while facing that guy in
the ring? Decent. IGF tournament dates – 2/5 Fukuoka Int’l
Center, 4/28 JCB Hall, 7/10 JCB Hall (Tokyo), and 9/3 at Aichi
Prefectural Gym in Nagoya.
Then
came the big news that surprised everyone except me (apparently)
— Josh Barnett isn’t going to show up for the final
hearing in California regarding his future for getting licensed
in the state. Anyone who’s ever listened to interviews he’s
done on this site in the past (and they’re still available
for download) knows that he has never believed in athletic commissions
regulating Mixed Martial Arts. He’s been pretty consistent
in his stance on the matter. So, I’m not surprised that
he decided to no-show the final hearing because he’s long
had a fatalistic view about these kinds of issues. And, as you
saw up above with Scott Coker, he has a promoter who is more
than happy to promote him in friendly States or countries (ahem,
Japan, as I told Josh Gross last week).
All
of this leads us to Dave Meltzer’s comments yesterday on
the matter. Dave is someone who has known Scott Coker for many
years and knows the people at American Kickboxing Academy, the
lynch pins for the company’s matchmaking for a long time.
So, when Dave unloaded on Barnett and Strikeforce yesterday,
we took notice and transcribed what he said.
DAVE
MELTZER: “That really, I mean… I don’t know that
says about him, but um… I was shocked. I was absolutely
shocked because it’s basically throwing in the towel and
you’re almost making yourself… I don’t know. I
think that it really, you know if there was any doubts or any
way for him to clear his name, that ain’t the way to do
it.”
BRYAN
ALVAREZ: “No. It is a baffling situation, I won’t lie.”
DAVE
MELTZER: “You know the whole thing’s that happened
from start-to-finish makes you question everything because it’s
like every time, you know it’s been a year-plus, I mean
there has been hearing after hearing where something didn’t
happen, right, where once he doesn’t show up, you know last
time he doesn’t bring his lawyer and now he’s just
not going to be there at all when… You know, at this point,
if he doesn’t come I think it’s pretty clear they’re
not going to give him a license.”
BRYAN
ALVAREZ: “No.”
DAVE
MELTZER: “And if California doesn’t give him a license,
yeah, sure, you can go commission shop, but that makes Coker
and Strikeforce look bad for putting a guy in a tournament that,
um, no-showed a hearing, you know, to get reinstated after a
steroid test violation and also there’s going to be states
like, you know, Nevada and New Jersey, you know powerful states
where he’s not going to be able to fight. So, I almost you
know, honest to God if he doesn’t go, if I was the promoter,
no question, if I was the promoter in this situation, if I’m
Coker, I’m telling him, dude, you change your mind and you
get to that commission and you ask, I’m sorry I applied
late, get me on the docket. Because if you’re not on that
docket and they don’t approve you, I got to kick you out
of the tournament. You got to. Because you can’t go in there
and go, well, you know, what if Josh wins? We can’t have
the final in San Jose. We can’t have the finals in Jersey,
we can’t have the finals in Vegas.”
BRYAN
ALVAREZ: “Not only that, but what if Josh wins? You’ve
got to promoter-shop. If he wins, you have to promoter-shop for
three different shows and…”
DAVE
MELTZER: “I guess you could keep going to Texas, but then
it also looks, it looks bad. Don’t get me wrong, boxing
did the same thing with (Antonio) Margarito and they did, you
know, 1 million plus buys with Margarito and Pacquaio, so it’s
not like it’s something that hasn’t been done by boxing
and it’s not something unprecedented or anything like that.
But, I mean, I think it’s bad for the promotion and I think
it’s bad for all concerned and I don’t understand.
For himself, I think it looks bad because now it’s going
to be, you know, you ran away from a hearing. I mean, it’s
one thing, you know, he already has three positives. But running
away from the hearing, I mean people are going to go OK, you
know what evidence do they have on him? What is he hiding? You
know he’s not even going to show up and fight?
“I
don’t know, to me, I couldn’t put the guy in the tournament.
You know, and he’s not instrumental in the tournament. I
mean, if it was Werdum or it was Overeem or Fedor, one of those
big three, you know maybe you go and give leeway because they’re
so important to the tournament. Barnett is not, you know, yeah,
it’s nice and he was a star in PRIDE and some people remember
that, but he hasn’t don’t anything of major significance
in MMA in years anyway. I mean, he may very well be, you know,
he may very well be still a very good fighter, you know, you
don’t know until you see him against top competition. I
mean, what I’ve seen of him in his recent fights, I can
say, you know, he hasn’t looked great or anything like that.
The (Gilbert) Yvel fight he fight he dominated but didn’t
finish and then the Geronimo dos Santos, that was a guy who was
not top caliber by any means, you know he won the fight, but
that’s immaterial anyway.
“I
mean the thing is… Yeah, I was stunned when that I read.
I just that, you know, from that last hearing, you bring your
lawyer, you go in there, you act contrite.”
Source:
Fight Opinion
|
Dana
White: Wanderlei Silva Likely to Face Brian Stann in Comeback
Fight
By Mike
Chiappetta
In the months since Wanderlei Silva went on the shelf recovering
from a knee injury and subsequent surgery, it seems like practically
every middleweight in the division has asked to face him in his
comeback fight.
Chael
Sonnen, Nate Marquardt, Alan Belcher and Chris Leben are all
among the names that have publically lobbied to face the MMA
legend. But it seems the most recent man to request Silva may
be the one to get the much-desired bout.
Brian
Stann is the most likely opponent for Silva upon his return,
UFC president Dana White told MMA Fighting.
Though
White couldn't offer a specific date for the bout, Silva is expected
to be ready to see octagon action in the spring.
Stann
(10-3) opened eyes in the middleweight division after a crushing
knockout win over Leben in the first round of their UFC 125 bout.
The victory made the former WEC light-heavyweight 2-0 as a 185-pounder.
Afterward, when asked who he wanted to face next, Stann prefaced
his answer by saying he had a deep respect for the man he hoped
to step in the cage with.
"I
think I'd like to fight Wanderlei [Silva] next," he said
then. "He's a guy that I've watched for years. Before I
ever put a glove on. He's amazing. He's as tough as they come,
as good as they come, and a multiple weight champion. I think
I'd like to fight him next, but I'll be prepared for anybody."
Silva's
return will come after a layoff of over one year as he recovered
from three broken ribs as well as a torn ACL. The 34-year-old
Silva (33-10-1, 1 no contest) last fought in February 2010, defeating
Michael Bisping by unanimous decision. Months later, he underwent
knee surgery.
Source:
MMA Fighting
|
Karate
Champ Joins Belfort in Final Preparations for Silva
by Marcelo
Alonso
South American karate champion Jayme Sandall arrived in Las Vegas
this week to assist Vitor Belfort in the final stages of training
for Belfort’s UFC middleweight title bout with champion
Anderson Silva on Feb. 5 at UFC 126.
As
a member of the Brazilian national karate team, Sandall has formed
a close relationship with the family of fellow Shotokan practitioner
and Silva training partner Lyoto Machida, particularly Lyoto’s
father, Yoshizo.
“Yoshizo
is our official head coach,” Sandall told Sherdog.com on
Monday. “Also, I’m very good good friends with all
of his sons. Actually, I’ve already faced all of them in
karate competitions, but that’s normal in karate and we’re
very good friends.”
Considered
one of the finest and most technical Brazilian karatekas, Sandall
previously imparted his skills to “The Phenom” prior
to Belfort’s return to the UFC against Rich Franklin in
September 2009. The game plan which Sandall helped draw up lead
to a first-round TKO victory for Belfort. Now, they seek to repeat
the feat against dominant champion Silva.
“We’re
going to create a technical and tactical work. Actually, we’ve
developed a series of karate movements to create a specific strategy
for this fight,” Sandall said. “Karate, once again,
will come to sharpen Vitor. He’s already in great shape,
and his striking and ground games are sharp. Now, we add the
timing and distance, both for offense and defense.”
Sandall
was eager to return to Vegas after a positive experience before
the Franklin bout, when he lived in Sin City with Belfort for
almost two months.
“Vitor
is such a humble person, very easy to work with. Furthermore,
he really is a phenom. Everything you show him, he learns and
adapts to his game so quickly. Working with him 24 hours a day
for such a long period of time in Vegas was a great professional
experience,” said Sandall, who went on to predict a war
between his sparring partner and Silva.
“Anderson
is one of the most talented and skilled fighters in MMA, and
he deserves all the respect, but Vitor is also such a special
and talented fighter. He’s so focused on getting the belt
right now. The fans can expect a historic battle.”
Source:
Sherdog
|
UFC
125 Draws Comparable Gate and Attendance To Last New Year’s
Event
The
Nevada State Athletic Commission on Thursday released the official
tally for the gate revenue and ticket sales for UFC 125, the
promotion’s New Year’s Day event.
Featuring
UFC lightweight champion Frankie Edgar drawing with challenger
Gray Maynard in the main event at the Grand Garden Arena in Las
Vegas, UFC 125 pulled in a total gate of $2,174,780.
UFC
125 total attendance officially sits at 12,874, according to
the NSAC numbers. That number is based on ticket sales of 6,978
with 5,896 comps. That is 1,077 tickets shy of a sellout.
UFC
108, the promotion’s first event of 2010 on Jan. 2, pulled
in comparable numbers. The gate was$1,969,670 with a total attendance
of 13,529. UFC 108 saw 5,314 tickets issued complimentary and
599 unsold.
Source:
MMA Weekly
|
Can
Strikeforce offer Dan Henderson enough fights to keep him around?
By Zach
Arnold
For reference, he will be fighting Feijao in the March-April
time frame for the promotion’s Light Heavyweight title.
RON
KRUCK: “Well, Dan, a spectacular way to end 2010 with your
knockout of Renato “Babalu” Sobral. How satisfying
was it to end the year with that type of win?”
DAN
HENDERSON: “Uh, well, I guess it’s pretty satisfying
and gratifying. It was something that obviously that I try to
do every fight but you never know until it’s done and I
knew I was capable of knocking him out. I knew he’d been
knocked out before and you know I guess also for him to really
call me out to want to fight me it made it even sweeter, I guess.”
RON
KRUCK: “Nice. Let’s talk about 2011. When do you expect
to fight again for Strikeforce and do you have an opponent?”
DAN
HENDERSON: “This next six months I should be pretty active.
I should probably have two fights before June, so my guess would
be early March so we’ll see. I plan on fighting early March
and training camp starting right at the first of the year and
I’m not going to be too far out of shape, which is good.
I’d rather have, you know, 2-3 fights back-to-back like
that and stay in good shape rather than my last two fights, I’ve
had 10 months in between, 9 months in between and you know it’s
just a little tougher to get back in shape if you’ve not
done anything for 4-5 months and I typically train when I’m
at home no matter what if I’ve got something coming up,
but it’s not the same. I’m usually in here (Team Quest)
trying to get my guys ready, roll with them a little bit, but
I’m not as intense as I am when I’m training for my
fight.”
RON
KRUCK: “If you do fight two more times, would that end your
Strikeforce commitment and if so, would you like to re-sign with
the promotion?”
DAN
HENDERSON: “Uh, yeah, I have two more fights on my Strikeforce
deal and yeah, I’d possibly would definitely re-sign with
Strikeforce. I’ve really been happy there and uh, you know,
but you never know how things work out. My goal is to make sure
I win these next two fights, you know, and possibly re-sign a
deal before the end of my deal, who knows? I’m not worried
about it. I know that I want to fight for 2-to-3 more years,
6-7 fights, maybe more even. 10 years ago I said I was only going
to fight for maybe one more year, so this is the truth and when
I had that press conference in PRIDE after I was done wrestling
I wanted to maybe only fight for one more year, that’s how
my body felt back then. I was really worn out from wrestling
and now I’ve really got a lot smarter way of training, I’m
getting older but I’m smarter about it with MMA and I’m
not competing really as much as I did when I wrestled.”
RON
KRUCK: “Dan, you are the only guy in major Mixed Martial
Arts promotions to hold titles simultaneously in two different
weight classes. You’ve gone back and forth here in the past
few years in fighting in two different weight classes. What should
we expect in 2011, do you have a preference on where you want
to fight?”
DAN
HENDERSON: “Uh, not too much you know. I had a little trouble
when I fought Jake Shields with my weight and injuries going
into that, so I got that all straightened out and, you know,
typically I don’t have too tough of a time making 185. Typically
I don’t mind that weight at all, but it is nicer to eat
all the way through training camp and not have to worry about
it and even if I’m the smaller guy, I never feel small.
Not mentally I don’t feel small. I feel my style’s
always been where I’m not lifting the guy’s weight
so much, I’m not picking him up with double-legs and slamming
him. I’m more hanging on. I’m making them carry my
weight a little more and a little more technical with things
control-wise, so really I don’t notice being smaller as
much. Some of these guys have the style of picking guys up or
carrying their weight a lot more, it’s definitely a feeling
your weight difference but I’ve never felt small in any
fight against heavyweights. I don’t think about it. I’m
out there to win. I got to do what it takes to win and if I don’t
want to be underneath a guy because he’s bigger I won’t
stay underneath him but it doesn’t mean I feel small. You
got to be smart with things and still with that being said, I’ll
probably stay at 205 for a little bit. My next fight will definitely
be at 205.”
RON
KRUCK: “Do you expect that next fight to be for the title
and you challenge Feijao?”
DAN
HENDERSON: “Uh, it’s a good possibility to have that
fight there. I mean that’s what was talked about before
my Babalu fight, the winner gets a title fight but nothing’s
confirmed and you know it’s just a matter of me waiting
and seeing. There’s some top guys, really tough guys at
205 now in Strikeforce so no matter what or who I’m fighting,
it’s going to be definitely be one of the top guys. And
that’s all I want, you know. Obviously I’d rather fight
for the title and be the top guy but, you know, I think there’s
some other interesting match-ups for me there as well if that’s
what it is and fights that I can get excited about.”
Source:
Fight Opinion
|
Coker
Clarifies Rules, Structure of Strikeforce Heavyweight GP
by Chris
Nelson
Contrary to initial reports, Alistair Overeem’s Strikeforce
heavyweight title will not be on the line at any point during
the promotion’s upcoming heavyweight grand prix.
Since
the eight-man, single-elimination tournament was formally announced
in early January, word has circulated that Overeem’s title
would be up for grabs in each of the champion’s bouts. During
a Thursday media conference call, Strikeforce CEO Scott Coker
clarified both the rules and structure of the tournament.
“The
winner of the final match will be crowned Strikeforce World Grand
Prix champion, and he’ll receive an opportunity to fight
for the Strikeforce heavyweight belt at that time,” Coker
explained. If Overeem were to come out on top, Coker said that
Strikeforce would look at having the reigning champ fight an
opponent whom he did not meet in the tournament.
Along
with Overeem, the bracket includes such notable heavyweights
as Fedor Emelianenko, Fabricio Werdum, Antonio Silva, Josh Barnett
and Andrei Arlovski. The tournament is set to begin on Feb. 12
at Strikeforce “Fedor vs. Silva,” which takes place
at the Izod Center in East Rutherford, N.J. The promotion is
still shopping for a location and date for the tournament’s
second round. Coker stated that “pending injuries, the semifinals
would be late June, July.”
While
it was initially thought that each tournament bout would consist
of five, five-minute rounds, all quarterfinal and semifinal matches
will be scheduled for the standard three five-minute periods.
Only the tournament final remains a five-round affair.
“We
just didn’t feel that it was fair for one person to fight
five rounds, one person to fight three rounds,” said Coker.
“There was debate about, well, should the final fight --
which is five rounds -- be a title fight? But then, what if Alistair
wasn’t there? It just became very confusing.”
In
the case that any of the tournament’s matches are ruled
a draw, Coker revealed that a fourth judge will be on hand to
score the bout independently and select a winner “based
on overall performance.” The rule is similar to that of
longtime official Nelson “Doc” Hamilton’s proposed
Martial Arts Specific Scoring system.
Of
course, with any tournament comes the possibility of a participant
being sidelined by injury. While a trio of reserve bouts has
been booked for the Feb. 12 event, Coker said that the selection
process for a replacement fighter, if needed, would be more involved
than a simple swap.
“If
a fighter qualifies to advance in the tournament but, for any
reason, cannot advance, we’re forming a five-person tournament
review committee who will select a fighter to advance in his
place,” said Coker. “This fighter will be chosen from
a pool of fighters that includes the previous opponent and the
winners of the reserve matches.”
Heading
the tournament review committee will be Strikeforce rules director
Cory Schafer. Names of the other tournament committee members
and further tournament rules are expected to be released shortly.
Source:
Sherdog
|
Jimmy
Smith: I’m 90% sure that I won’t be back with Bellator
By Zach
Arnold
Consider
this a head scratching moment for MMA fans. Jimmy Smith and Sean
Wheelock were really one of the better MMA commentating duos
out there. Always a honest and professional job. I enjoyed their
work immensely on the Bellator broadcasts. So, naturally, Jimmy
is now on the sidelines and rumored to be replaced by Neil Grove,
of all people.
During
a Monday night interview on Tapout radio, you can sense the confusion
and bewilderment from Jimmy in regards to why he hasn’t
heard from the Bellator office regarding his employment with
the company in 2011.
INTERVIEWER:
“What’s going on with Bellator? I mean instead of us
just asking questions in particular, why don’t you just
tell us what you got to say about Bellator basically?”
JIMMY
SMITH: “Well, it’s… it’s kind of strange,
I haven’t heard anything since early December. I want to
say like December 1st, maybe even the end of November. Pretty
much we had a, you know, we still have a contract through 2011
but they, the deal was they wanted me to sign an extension and,
you know, for various reasons I didn’t like the extension
and so I haven’t heard anything in, God, coming up on two
months now and, uh… so it’s, I find it highly unlikely
I’ll be coming back to Bellator. They’re getting ready
to start up I think next month, so looks like they’re going
in another direction so far in terms of commentary but I’m
still under contract, you never know how it’s going to go.
They could come back and start negotiation again but like I said
I haven’t heard anything in about two months so looks like
they’re going in another direction commentary-wise, so…
that’s the deal as far as I know it.”
INTERVIEWER:
“It looks like it or it is? Like, I mean have you received
confirmation from Bjorn or anybody?”
JIMMY
SMITH: “Nobody. Nothing. But they don’t have to, you
know, I haven’t received confirmation from anybody. But
I haven’t, you know, it’s just like negotiations about
the, um… extension were really short. Really short, and
it was, you know, I thought the deal we already had through 2011
was better and so I said, hey, why don’t we stick with the
contract we already have and that was it. That was it. I haven’t
heard anything in, like I said, almost two months now. So everybody
keeps telling me the same things. The reason I’m talking
about it at all is because, you know, a lot of people are now
calling me for interviews about Bellator and you know what’s
going and you know Mauro Ranallo called me last week and goes
kind of like, hey, what’s going on with Bellator, we want
to do an interview with you and I said, uh… can’t help
you, man. You know it’s like people assume that I’m
coming back next year and I would say right now I’m 90%
I’m not. So, it’s funny because you get these calls
about interviews and about Bellator coming up and I’m out
of it, I don’t, you know, so it’s… you know, it’s
an interesting, it’s a difficult situation but I’d
say 90% I’m not coming back. You know I still could back
and do something but 90% I’m not, which is weird.”
INTERVIEWER:
“Now does the pre-existing contract go through the season
of 2011? So are you still set to be paid even though if things
do fall through?”
JIMMY
SMITH: “No, what happens is they have the option to basically
decide whether or not I come back. It’s entirely up to them.
We have an agreement but it’s entirely up to Bellator at
this point as to whether or not I’ll be coming back, so…
um… you know it’s up to them…”
The
radio conversation took some interesting turns from there.
His
thoughts on why his partnership with Sean Wheelock worked so
well:
“Well,
the thing is that MMA, in the MMA community as a whole, um, can
be very critical. it can be a rough crowd, it really can be.
The fans in MMA really care about the sport and they are really
particular about what they see and hear and we got nothing but
positive feedback in 2010. I mean as tough as it can be to please
the crowd every week in MMA, I thought we got a lot of positive
feedback, a lot of the media, a lot of the fans really seemed
to like us and what we were doing and that’s a hard thing
to do. You know I mean there was an article on Sherdog about
really how bad MMA announcing can be. It was really, really critical
and really harsh and, you know, it’s hard to find a team
that can do well every week and the people respond to, especially
in MMA where the fans are really, really opinionated and I thought
we worked really well and the fans seemed to enjoy us. You know,
it’s not an easy thing to get.”
“The
space and the timing and allowing the other person talking and
you come back in is not easy to get, it’s a really difficult
thing to do because it’s me and Sean (Wheelock) in there
and we’ve been working together I think for three years
now and it’s that timing, it’s that idea of when to
talk and when he’s not going to talk, I don’t talk
over him, we don’t yell at the same time and stuff like
that, that’s not an easy thing to get. I mean, broadcasting
is a skill, it’s not easy to teach somebody how to do that.
You know what I mean? You kind of have to figure that and it’s
not easy to do and it’s not an easy thing to throw somebody
into. You know, you see a lot of promotions like they’ll
get a fighter and just throw them in there because they were
a great fighter and they got a lot of fan appeal that they’ll
be a good broadcaster and they’re not. It’s not easy
to do.”
As
for why Bellator isn’t showing interest in bringing him
back, he’s perplexed given his self-assessment on how he
did on television:
“With
the way 2010 ended with Bellator and everything, it didn’t
occur to me that there would be any problems. You know what I
mean? Everybody keeps asking that, oh what do you plan to do
and I was like, I didn’t plan to not be at Bellator in 2011.
That really didn’t occur to me until, you know, until the
negotiations bogged down. So it was, you know, when you say we’ll
what do you lined up? Well I have a lot of things in the offing
but, you know, this is a kind of shock to me as well, so it’s
about reorganizing everything. But I do have my gym, Sweet Science,
and that’s going really well so I asked them to keep me
busy in the mean time, for sure.”
“All
we heard in 2010 was how great we were. And I’m not tooting
my horn, I’m not saying I’m great, I’m not an
egomaniac person and it was from the production people, from
the people in the booth. The people in the truck that you never
see, looking at screens who have to work with people all the
time in TV, when they’re telling you ‘you made our
job a lot easier,’ ‘you’re the one part we didn’t
have to worry about.’ You’re the one thing, you know,
with all the stuff going on (with) promotion and you know a live
event and the screens and the music and the, you know, lights,
everything, when they go, ‘Jimmy, we don’t worry about
you, you’re the one thing we don’t worry about, we
go Jimmy do your thing and you’re going to do it and we
don’t have to worry about it.’ No, I never did it,
question myself, because not only did the fans appreciate what
we did but the people who actually make the show work and they’re
awesome at Bellator, the people who actually make the show work
really appreciated what we did and never hesitated to let me
know that and that, that I’ll take me with me if I never
work in TV again. You know what I mean?”
“As
far as the production value of Bellator, they have great people
working for them. They have great people doing the show themselves
— great editor, great video people, and they work really,
really hard. And as far as production value goes, I thought 2010
they were outstanding. They made up some changes in 2011, I’m
not speaking as to the future, I’m saying in 2010 their
production value, what you saw on your TV, was really, really
extraordinary and they deserve a lot of credit for putting that
together. The production people are outstanding at Bellator and
it’s not an easy thing to do week-after-week. I was gone
doing Bellator Tuesday through Friday every single week. I get
on a plane Tuesday morning, I fly out Friday morning and, you
know, doing that every week and getting on that grind and, you
know, I mean multiply the mistakes you can make in a show times
once a week times 22 weeks and the fat that they were spot on
production-wise every week is a real credit to those people.
It’s not an easy thing to do.”
During
the interview, he was asked to give his thoughts on Bellator’s
tournament format and on Cole Konrad winning last season’s
Heavyweight tournament:
“Well,
the thing is that the tournament format of Bellator, the tournament
format of these two guys fight, this guy moves on really ties
the hands of the show promotionally. Meaning, if somebody wins
they move on. The whole concept Bellator is that it’s impartial
and that it’s fair and that the winner moves on, the loser
doesn’t and that’s it. We’re not playing favorites
in terms of giving guys easy fights. It’s a tournament,
so the guys that moves on is the guy who wins and that’s
it. But because of that, it’s not like, this person had
a boring fight, let’s give them a few undercards and build
them up. It’s, hey, if you win, you move on, so how you
win, you know promotionally, really isn’t that important.
It doesn’t, you don’t have to have exciting fights
or we’ll relegate you to the undercard. Hey, if you win,
you win and you move on, so you kind of tie your hands when it
comes to stuff like that promotionally where people say, oh,
that’s a boring fight, but he won and he moves on. You know
what I mean? It’s the double-edged sword of having a tournament
format where the winner moves on and the loser doesn’t,
you know, is somebody might win in an ugly win, but hey a win’s
a win and they move on.
“So
in the case of the Heavyweight tournament, you know heavyweight
fights can be boring anyway. You know they tend to be the ones
where if two guys are out of shape, nothing’s worse than
a bad heavyweight fight, let me put it that way. You know what
I mean, like a bad heavyweight fight is really, really bad. We
saw that with, you know, Mirko Cro Cop vs. Frank Mir, we’ve
seen some really bad ones and when they’re bad, they’re
God-awful bad, but somebody wins and somebody moves on and that
fighter keeps going. So, yeah, it’s hard to deal with when
you have a weight class that isn’t, I think, doesn’t
inherently have, you know… it has potential to be boring
to lead to obviously a bad tournament and that’s what some
people thought.”
Source:
Fight Opinion
|
Cut
Loose By UFC, Phil Baroni Signs Multi-Fight Deal With Titan Fighting
by Ken
Pishna
Try
as he might, Phil Baroni hasn’t been able to cut it in the
Ultimate Fighting Championship. In two stints with the promotion,
he has amassed a record of 3-7 in his 10 trips to the Octagon.
Following
losses in his last two attempts in the UFC, losing by unanimous
decision to Amir Sadollah and TKO to Brad Tavares, Baroni was
handed his walking papers.
Baroni
has been fighting for more than a decade with a mediocre record
of 13-13.
Thirty-four
years old and looking to put his career on the right track, Baroni
has already signed with a new fight promotion, less than two
weeks following his UFC dismissal.
The
Titan Fighting Championship on Wednesday announced that it reached
a multi-fight agreement with Baroni.
“Since
Phil’s departure from the UFC, many fight fans have been
wondering what Phil’s next move would be. I am proud to
announce that Phil has signed a multi-fight deal with Titan and
will be featured during our March event,” Titan Fighting
CEO Joe Kelly stated.
“Phil
has a star quality to him that so few fighters have and win or
lose he has always fought with a true warrior’s mentality.”
Baroni
is scheduled to debut for Titan on its March 25 show in Kansas
City against an opponent yet to be determined.
“I’m
very happy and excited to re-start my career with Titan Fighting
in Kansas City,” said Baroni. “I have another chapter
to write and it starts March 25.”
The
timing didn’t quite work out to get Baroni onto Titan’s
next fight card, which takes place Jan. 28 in Kansas City, Kan.,
and is slated to air live on HDNet. The Jan. 28 fight card features
former UFC heavyweight champion Tim Sylvia in the evening’s
main event.
Source:
MMA Weekly
|
7
Questions for Royce Gracie
by Marcelo
Alonso
The UFC on Dec. 15 made official its plans to return to Brazil
for the first time in more than a decade. UFC President Dana
White highlighted hall of famer Royce Gracie, as the promotion
began its push for UFC “Rio” on Aug. 27 at the HSBC
Arena in Rio de Janeiro, Brazil.
In
this exclusive interview with Sherdog.com, given after the press
conference announcing the event, Gracie discusses a potential
return to the UFC, the evolution of the sport and the modern-day
fighters he respects most.
Sherdog.com:
What does the UFC’s return to Brazil mean for you, your
family and especially your father, who is not here to see it?
Gracie: Here was where it all began. Seventy-five years ago,
my father had created this kind of event find out the best fighter
and the best fighting style. For years, my family has proven
that Gracie jiu-jitsu is the best style of self-defense to defend
in the streets. We came out here for some time, went to America
and came back. We realize that the birthplace of the business
is here, the heart of where it all began. That’s why guys
are so damn excited to bring the event back here.
Sherdog.com:
Do you think the world today gives the Gracie family and your
father the recognition they deserve for the important role they
have played in MMA history?
Gracie: The staff of the UFC does completely, no doubt about
that, so they want to bring the event here. Without Gracie jiu-jitsu
and the Gracie family, there wouldn’t be the UFC. They know
of this connection, so they want to bring the event back here.
We talked yesterday, and they said my family was the reason they
are bringing it here: ‘What your father created and what
you did in the ring is the reason we’re bringing the event
back to Brazil.’ They are with a sport that is growing worldwide,
so they want to give back what they earned with our family.
Sherdog.com:
I know you’re touring the world giving seminars, but are
you still training?
Gracie: Always. I live of it. I’m at the same weight I was
at UFC 1, and this is 18 years later. I’m never overweight
or needing to lose weight. I’m always at 80 kilograms (176
pounds). It’s my normal weight, and I always fight at 78
kilograms (171.6 pounds) or 80 kilograms.
Sherdog.com:
How do you see MMA today compared with your time?
Gracie: Everyone else has to prepare. The athletes have to learn
to fight standing, ground fighting and jiu-jitsu. They have to
know how to deliver a strategy and form a strategy for fighting.
Being brave is not only about entering the ring to exchange punches.
Sherdog.com:
Within this new philosophy, who is your favorite fighter?
Gracie: The guys who are the best are the guys that can deliver
a strategy. It’s [Georges] St. Pierre, Anderson Silva, [Mauricio]
“Shogun” [Rua], Lyoto Machida, Cain Velasquez. These
are the guys who are always delivering a good strategy. B.J.
Penn is also another who knows how to use strategy.
Sherdog.com:
Can we expect Royce Gracie to fight in Brazil?
Gracie: We are negotiating (laughs).
Sherdog.com:
How old are you?
Gracie: I am 44 years old. My father fought his last fight at
53, so that wouldn’t be a problem.
Source:
Sherdog
|
Source: Ermin Fergerstrom
|
M-1
Global Expanding Relationship with Strikeforce in 2011, Working
on Showtime Deal
by Damon
Martin
As
Fedor Emelianenko prepares for his return to the Strikeforce
cage in February, his management company at M-1 Global are in
the planning stages for expansion into the United States as well,
via a potential new TV deal and further co-promotion.
M-1
Global has co-promoted shows with Strikeforce each time Fedor
has fought, but now it appears with the Russian’s new four-fight
deal, M-1 Global will also be expanding its work with the San
Jose, Calif.-based promotion.
According
to M-1 Global’s Vadim Finkestein, the company is planning
to co-promote shows with Strikeforce in the future even when
Fedor isn’t involved. They are also in the process of working
on new M-1 Global shows on their own for 2011.
“We’re
currently busy with a lot of our own shows for this year alone
in 2011. We’re planning on eight M-1 Challenge shows, plus
a lot of M-1 Selection shows in a lot of different countries,”
Finkelstein told MMAWeekly.com.
“Beyond
that, we do plan on doing some co-promotion as well, not just
when Fedor fights, but even probably not on the next show, but
the show after that, we’ll have some M-1 fighters on the
co-promoted show with Strikeforce as well.”
The
expansion is a first between M-1 Global and Strikeforce.
This
also leads to the current talks between M-1 Global and Showtime,
which Finkelstein says has been ongoing for sometime now. They
hope to seal a TV deal with the network at some point this year.
“It’s
something that’s separate, but something that we’ve
been discussing for a long time with Showtime, separate from
the M-1 Global participation on the Fedor shows,” Finkelstein
disclosed. “We have our product M-1 Challenge, which we’ve
been harvesting and developing for a couple years now, and Ken
Hershman himself flew to Russia and saw one of our shows, saw
some of the fighters that we have under our banner.
“It’s
something that’s been on parallel tracks, we’ve been
discussing for quite a while and, in fact, something that’s
not completely done in terms of having these M-1 Challenge shows
on Showtime, but it’s certainly something we’ve come
much closer to. Hopefully, we’ll be able to conclude that
separate business with Showtime.”
As
far as timelines when a deal could be finalized, Finkelstein
wouldn’t speculate, but he did allude to something happening
sooner rather than later.
“We’re
almost there,” he said.
The
next co-promoted show between M-1 Global and Strikeforce will
be the card headlined by Fedor Emelianenko on Feb. 12 in New
Jersey, which will be broadcast on Showtime.
Source:
MMA Weekly
|
UFC
Heavyweight Champion Undergoes Shoulder Surgery
by Mike
Whitman
UFC heavyweight champion Cain Velasquez is currently undergoing
surgery on his right shoulder to repair a partially-torn rotator
cuff.
The
news was first reported by TMZ.com, and Sherdog.com has confirmed
the report with sources close to the fighter.
Velasquez
was last seen in the Octagon in October, dethroning the much
larger Brock Lesnar in the main event of UFC 121. After an early
bull rush from Lesnar, it became apparent that the American Kickboxing
Academy product was the much faster man. Velasquez landed hard
punches with great accuracy, bloodying the muscular champion
and earning the TKO victory late in the first period.
The
newly-crowned champion's celebration was short-lived, however.
According to a report from USA Today, Velasquez felt something
wrong with his shoulder later that night. After having the sore
spot examined, it was determined that the fighter had suffered
a torn rotator cuff.
It
is unknown exactly how long the 28-year-old will be on the shelf,
but the timetable for recovery has been estimated as six to eight
months.
Meanwhile,
the UFC has already made plans for the king's return, as previous
No. 1 contender Junior dos Santos will now coach opposite Lesnar
on the 13th season of “The Ultimate Fighter.” The coaches
will then square off at the end of the season to determine a
new No. 1 contender for Velasquez's title. Originally, the promotion
had planned for “Cigano” to face the champion at UFC
129 on April 30 in Toronto, but that fell through when the severity
of Velasquez's injury became apparent.
Source: Sherdog
|
UFC
126 fight card (2/5 in Las Vegas at Mandalay Bay Events Center)
By Zach
Arnold
Dark
matches/preliminaries
Welterweights:
Mike Pierce vs. Kenny Robertson
Light Heavyweights: Kyle Kingsbury vs. Ricardo Romero
Bantamweights: Kid Yamamoto vs. Demetrious Johnson
Lightweights: Paul Taylor vs. Gabe Ruediger
Featherweights: Chad Mendes vs. Michihiro Omigawa
Lightweights: Donald Cerrone vs. Paul Kelly
Main card
Bantamweights:
Miguel Torres vs. Antonio Banuelos
Light Heavyweights: Jon “Bones” Jones vs. Ryan Bader
Welterweights: Jake Ellenberger vs. Carlos Eduardo Rocha
Light Heavyweights: Forrest Griffin vs. Rich Franklin
UFC Middleweight title match: Anderson Silva vs. Vitor Belfort
Source: Fight Opinion
|
Dana
White Confirms Frankie Edgar vs. Gray Maynard III at UFC 130
By Mike
Chiappetta
The growing rivalry between UFC lightweight stars Frankie Edgar
and Gray Maynard will see its next chapter at UFC 130 in May,
when the two square off for the third time.
UFC
president Dana White confirmed to MMA Fighting that the lightweight
championship bout would take place on May 28 in Las Vegas.
Less
than two weeks ago, the two fought to a split draw at the MGM
Grand Garden Arena, the same venue that is likely to house them
in May. During that bout, the champion Edgar overcame a nightmare
10-8 first round before gamely battling his way back to a stalemate
on the judges' scorecards.
Both
fighters left the cage thinking they'd won, but one judge scored
it for Edgar 48-46, one scored it for Maynard 48-46, and the
third scored a 47-47 draw. The split draw allowed Edgar to retain
the belt, but left him with a feeling of dissatisfaction, and
on Thursday he told MMA Fighting he preferred a rematch with
Maynard over a possible match with WEC champion Anthony Pettis.
"I'm
looking forward to the rematch," he said. "I don't
want to walk away with anything that's undecisive. A draw is
up in the air. It's unfinished business."
Edgar
sustained a minor ankle injury and a broken nose in the fight,
but said he'd be ready to go whenever the UFC wants him.
"I
busted my nose some, but I bust my nose all the time so I'm not
too worried," he said.
Maynard
walked away from the fight without any serious injuries.
In
their first fight in April 2008, Maynard earned a unanimous decision
over Edgar, but Edgar eventually leapfrogged him in the rankings
and captured the belt from the legendary BJ Penn at UFC 112 in
April 2010.
Source:
MMA Fighting
|
Enter
the Hand Shop
by Cameron
Conaway
CATSKILL,
N.Y. -- The gym’s walls breathe history. The yellowed and
wrinkled newspaper clippings taped to every square inch tell
a story of pride, triumph and setback.
On
the surface, this gym looks no different than any other boxing
gym. The heavybags are lopsided and duct-taped. Boxers of various
skill levels and training intensities coalesce. This gym sounds
no different than any other boxing gym. An old beat-up radio
bangs out old beats. There are the three-minute buzzers and the
grunts and the background pitter-patter music of speedbags. The
gym smells no different than any other boxing gym -- the musty,
rustic smell of wet handwraps, worn-out leather and hardwood
floors that contain within them generations of sweat.
But
get to know the trainers and you will learn the idiosyncrasies
of the sweet science of boxing in a way few, if any gyms across
the nation can teach. Step closer to the walls and you will learn
these weathered clippings are not just stories; they are stories
about some of the best boxers the world has ever known, boxers
who called Cus D’Amato’s Boxing Gym home.
What’s
in a name? Nothing. Shakespeare’s Juliet would agree. What’s
behind a name? Everything.
We
MMA fans are used to watching our sport on pay-per-view. We order
UFC events from home, oftentimes splitting the cost with a group
of friends. We head out to Hooters or Applebee’s when they
carry a card. In fact, for UFC 121 “Lesnar vs. Velasquez”
on Oct. 23, an estimated 1,050,000 of us shelled out the $44.95
necessary to purchase the event. It’s almost 2011, and MMA
continues to boom. It seems on top of the world. Yet, nearly
20 years ago, a single man named Mike Tyson generated 200,000
more pay-per-view buys than UFC 121 for his fight against Donovan
“Razor” Ruddock.
When
young MMA fighters are asked how they became involved in the
sport, it has almost become a cliché that they bring up
the legendary heroics of Royce Gracie during his UFC reign from
1993-94. Many MMA fans see this as the beginning of the cultural
popularization of fighting. However, it was in 1985 that a 19-year-old
Tyson helped take fighting from being a niche spectator sport
to a mainstream media obsession. MMA fans cheer when a Randy
Couture or Frankie Edgar highlight makes it on ESPN SportsCenter’s
“Plays of the Week.” But Tyson highlights were shown
years before and on a regular basis. And they are still shown.
He was considered by most to be “the baddest man on the
planet.”
The
intention here is not to counter MMA’s recent success but
to set the framework and paint a larger picture of the fight
game than is usually discussed. As a little boy, some of my earliest
memories of fighting are of the crowds of adults that would gather
in the garage of my best friend’s father’s house to
watch Tyson fights. These adults would not show up until very
late at night, usually 30 minutes before Tyson’s bout was
to air. The undercard did not matter, as it involved regular
boxers boxing. Tyson was a phenomenon. People even wanted to
show up early to the fights just to catch the pre-fight-hype
training montage of Tyson bobbing and weaving and tenaciously
working the heavybags with blurring speed.
Those
training videos were shot in Cus D’Amato’s Boxing Gym.
In November, I was granted access to tour the gym, interview
the trainers and even get some one-on-one training.
For
many fight fans, their first introduction to combat sports came
not through Royce Gracie but through the sport of boxing -- be
it the days of Muhammad Ali or George Foreman or Tyson. So when
I found myself needing to pass through Catskill, N.Y., for a
business trip, my subconscious registered something long before
my conscious mind. “Catskill,” I thought to myself.
“I feel I know Catskill, even though I’ve never been
there.” A bit of research led me to the reason: Catskill
is the home to the world-renowned Cus D’Amato Boxing Gym.
It is where, at just 14 years old, Floyd Patterson trained to
then, at age 17, win the gold medal at the 1952 Olympic Games.
Then, at the age of 21 and in the wake of Rocky Marciano’s
retirement, Patterson beat Archie Moore to become the youngest
man to win the world heavyweight championship; he later became
the first to regain it. He was the first Olympic gold medalist
to win a professional heavyweight title. Patterson was trained
by Cus D’Amato, a man who quickly became known as much for
his technical boxing knowledge as for his passion and generosity
and his willingness to become a father figure and positive role
model to the Catskill community youth who entered his gym.
“Floyd
Patterson was the first fighter in history to net a million-dollar
purse,” said Kevin Rooney, who won the 147-pound sub-novice
New York Golden Gloves championship at Madison Square Garden
in 1975 and then packed up his life to train under D’Amato.
He later became Tyson’s chief trainer (1985-88).
In
the initial thirty minutes of my interview with Rooney, I learned
that many firsts happened in this gym. I was astonished, especially
considering the conversation had yet to include Tyson’s
name. Mike Tyson entered the Cus D’Amato Boxing Gym in 1979.
He was a 13-year-old boy with very little, if any, familial support,
destined for the type of imprisoned or buried future so typical
for youth without any guidance in life.
“When
he came in here, he was already close to 200 pounds of pure muscle,”
said Rooney, “and this was before he had ever lifted a weight
in his life. What we did was take the genetics and add to it
what we believed was the best boxing techniques in the world.
On top of that, Cus served as Mike’s constant mentor. He
was Mike’s life coach. It was the perfect recipe for success.
“During
Mike’s first week here, Cus had him do some light sparring
with a veteran boxer just so Cus could see how Mike moved,”
Rooney added. “He knew the veteran boxer was good enough
to spar safely, to test anybody who entered the ring with him.
However, the vet put a good whooping on Mike for two rounds,
so much so that Cus immediately brought the sparring to an end.
The veteran had to put that kind of whooping on Mike because
Mike was relentless, coming forward, trapping, pressuring. The
guy felt Mike’s power early and knew this 13-year-old could
hurt him if he wasn’t careful.”
Rooney
stood up from the bench and reenacted the scene between D’Amato
and Tyson.
“That’s
enough, Mike,” Rooney said while waving his arms. “Good
work.”
Rooney
moved to a new position and raised the pitch of his voice.
“C’mon,”
he said, channeling Tyson, “give me one more round.”
“No,
Mike. You’re done for now. I’ve seen enough. Out.”
“Then,”
Rooney said dramatically, “as Mike got out of the ring,
Cus turned to everyone in the gym and, in a way so unlike his
usual self, pointed to Mike and announced to everybody: ‘There’s
the next heavyweight champion of the world!’”
What
Tyson loved was his ability to close the distance and explode
with devastation. His hands were held in front of his face at
nose level, rather than to the side as boxers were and still
are taught. He simultaneously slipped punches by moving from
side-to-side like a shark cutting through ocean waters, but he
also used the momentum of this side-to-side motion to generate
power for his punches. This style was efficiency at its finest,
a constant synergy of defense and offense. A short heavyweight
-- many reports say he was all of 5-foot-8 -- Tyson is the best
example in boxing history of how a shorter boxer can take out
a taller foe. The style he used is known as the “peek-a-boo”
style. It was developed by D’Amato and is still taught in
this gym.
D’Amato
was the Greg Jackson of his time.
“I’m
old school,” said Rooney, as we began what would become
a two-hour backroom interview. “I don’t have a cell
phone and I don’t have a computer. You don’t need that
stuff. When the answering machine first came out, I was OK with
that. I could listen to who called and choose to answer or not
answer, to call them back or not. Everything changes. You just
have to hope it’s changing for the better. I’m not
so sure all this new technology stuff is for the better.”
When
I asked Rooney about recent advances in strength and conditioning
methods, he responded with trademark bluntness.
“Yeah,
well, with boxing it comes down to a simple question: Do you
want to be a fighter?” he said. “It doesn’t matter
what routines somebody is following. It doesn’t matter if
they’re doing all the latest stuff. If, in the deepest core
of their heart, they do not want to be a fighter, they will not
be a fighter.
“I’m
old school for these reasons but also because every day I walk
into this gym, I think of one of my most powerful memories with
Cus,” Rooney added. “When he was dying in 1985, he
said to me, ‘You know, most people when they die, they’re
just forgotten.’ I said, ‘Cus, I’ll keep this
place alive. I’ll keep you alive.’ Every day I walk
into this gym I want to keep his spirit alive in here. I believe
in the peek-a-boo style. I look for fighters who I think can
best use this style. Look, Cus always made you feel safe in here.
I just want to continue what he started. My only regret is that
I didn’t record everything he ever said. The man was absolutely
brilliant.”
Rooney
went deep into the past, discussing details I had never heard
about Tyson’s rape trial, the events that occurred before
several of Tyson’s fights and even his thoughts about boxing
promoter Don King. He believes the rise of MMA might be a fad
and that boxing is and will always be here to stay.
“Boxing
just needs a dominant, exciting heavyweight that can move like
Mike. Once that happens, it’ll go mainstream again,”
Rooney said. “Right now, boxing has Manny Pacquiao. He’s
great, no doubt about it, but a great lightweight fighter simply
cannot capture and enthrall the media’s attention like a
great heavyweight fighter. We’re hoping in the next few
years that our gym will find and develop the next heavyweight
champion.”
Ernest
Westbrooke, the gym’s current assistant trainer, hopes to
give rise to such a fighter.
“I’m
new school,” Westbrooke said.
In
his early 50s, Wesbrooke has an infectious personality that seems
perfectly suited for television. His eyes light up when he talks.
He articulates each thought with his whole body. The guy could
have sold me a Shake Weight. The sweet science of boxing consumes
his every waking moment. He views his young fighter, Victor Kokonis,
the way I imagine D’Amato viewed Tyson.
Westbrooke
is new school in that he is a huge fan of mixed martial arts
and he is constantly trying to learn how technology can improve
a fighter’s motion and promotion. He has a cell phone and
a laptop and knows how to use all the social media sites. He
realizes times have changed and that there are now better, smarter
ways to train fighters than there once were. So how does he try
to blend modernity with legendary tradition?
“Look,
a loved one of mine was with us last week and is no more,”
Westbrooke said. “This gym will never change its name, nor
will it forget its roots, but our goal here is twofold. We want
to provide the youth of this city with a safe place so they can
stay out of trouble and learn strong life lessons, but we also
want to find and mold our next world champion.
“Change
isn’t something you have absolute control over,” he
added. “It happens, and if you aren’t up with the times,
you’ll be left behind the times. I see change not as something
that creates adversity but as something that builds diversity.
I’m a strong believer in the benefits of education. You
know, in boxing, people say, ‘Speed kills.’ But so
does knowledge. In the real world, knowledge kills.”
Fighters
travel to Gracie academies to touch up their guard position.
They travel to muay Thai schools to learn the subtleties of leg
kicks. Westbrooke is the best “hands coach” with whom
I have ever worked, and I highly recommend that MMA fighters
who are looking to improve their boxing skills pay him a visit.
He is incredibly knowledgeable about how to create, as he put
it, “thoroughly integrated fighters who can fight inside
and find angles but also maximize their reach when on the outside.”
His grasp of MMA allows him to tweak boxing techniques to accommodate
the demands of a fighter who needs to worry about stuffing takedowns
and defending knees.
Despite
the minor clashes Rooney and Westbrooke have because of their
polar views on certain subjects, they care deeply about each
other and know they need each other. Regardless of their differences,
one similarity will forever bind them -- they love Cus D’Amato
and this gym’s legacy, and they know what this gym can offer
the community. That said, they could be doing much better financially
and occasionally have fears that the gym may close down. Neither
trainer is paid for the work they do here, not the 30 hours per
week they spend training fighters, not the many trips they take
to get the fighters to tournaments.
Rooney
and Westbrooke want the gym, free to anyone under the age of
18, to stay alive and want what’s behind the name to always
remain. Cus D’Amato is alive and happy here and not just
by name.
Cameron
Conaway, NSCA-CPT, CMMACC, was the 2007-2009 Poet-in-Residence
at the University of Arizona’s MFA Creative Writing Program.
He is the author of “Caged: Memoir of a Cage-Fighting Poet,”
(forthcoming Fall 2011 from Tuttle Publishing) which has received
endorsements from UFC Hall of Famer Ken Shamrock, BJJ legend
Saulo Ribeiro and writers Glen Cordoza and Dinty W. Moore. He’s
2-1 as a mixed martial artist. Visit www.CameronConaway.com for
more information.
Source:
Sherdog
|
Alistair
Overeem Will Only Fight in Strikeforce Until Grand Prix is Finished
by Damon
Martin
Strikeforce heavyweight champion Alistair Overeem will not only
be a participant in the upcoming Strikeforce Grand Prix, but
that will be his only commitment until the tournament is over.
According
to Strikeforce CEO Scott Coker after the promotion allowed Overeem
to step away from MMA for the majority of 2010 to pursue his
dream to win the K-1 Grand Prix, in 2011 the Dutch destroyer
is focused only on one thing.
Winning
the Strikeforce Heavyweight Grand Prix.
“He
will be committed to this tournament,” Coker said on Thursday.
“In fact, last year he filmed that documentary “The
Reem”, basically it was the life and times of Alistair Overeem
leading to his K-1 Grand Prix final victory, and they’re
going to start shooting the road to the Strikeforce Grand Prix
Heavyweight title. They’re committed to this fight.”
Overeem
has only defended the Strikeforce title he won in 2007 one time,
a drubbing of Brett Rogers in May 2010. For the remainder of
the year, Overeem was focused on his kickboxing career, which
paid off as he closed out 2010 by winning the K-1 Grand Prix
tournament.
Now
that time has passed, and Coker says they’re on the same
page with Overeem to make sure Strikeforce is his commitment
this year.
“Last
year, just to be very clear, we have a contract with Alistair,
and he came to us and his manager is a very close friend and
he said ‘look we want to fight in the K-1, it’s important
to Alistair’ and so it happened and we were supporting of
it, but this year it’s very clear that they need to support
Strikeforce, and the participation in the tournament is going
to require up to three fights and they committed,” Coker
stated.
In
the past few years, Overeem has split time between MMA and kickboxing,
but at least for the duration of this tournament, which will
likely last at least through ¾ of 2011, the champion will
only be fighting in Strikeforce.
“There’s
no way that’s going to happen,” Coker said responding
to Overeem potentially fighting elsewhere during the tournament
timeframe. “This tournament’s going to be taxing on
these guys and there’s a lot on the line.”
Coker
also pointed to the significance of bringing Overeem along with
Fedor Emelianenko and others together for this history 8-man
tournament. Not since the days of Pride has a heavyweight tournament
been assembled, and they are proud to be the first ones to do
it.
“To
put these 8 guys together it’s a very special moment in
time,” Coker said. “These guys are still in their prime
and they all have their own history getting to this tournament,
but this tournament will clearly state who the best heavyweight
fighter in the world is.”
The
tournament kicks off on Feb 12 with two first round match-ups,
and Overeem is expected to face Fabricio Werdum in his first
bout for the Grand Prix in early April.
Source:
MMA Weekly
|
Lorenzo
Fertitta quotes on UFC’s international expansion plans in
2011
By Zach
Arnold
I
would encourage you to watch the video and give your support
to everyone in the MMA Fighting family. Given the rough business
circumstances with AOL Fanhouse, I think showing appreciation
for the hard work of those over at the site is a well-deserved
gesture.
That,
along with the fact that Ariel’s interview with Mr. Fertitta
is really, really good. (They spend the majority of it talking
about plans to get MMA legalized in New York in 2011.)
ARIEL
HELWANI: “Because you do deal with the worldwide expansion
on the UFC, Dana (White) mentioned in the press conference that
you’re opening offices in China and some other countries
overseas. He mentioned Japan. We haven’t heard that before.
What are your plans in Japan?”
LORENZO
FERTITTA; “You know, we’ve actually been on television
in Japan since we bought the company. We were distributed in
literally two countries in 2001, in the United States on DirecTV
and Dish and in Japan at the same time. Sense we took over the
company, we’ve developed a relationship with WOWOW, which
is a subscription TV network in Japan. It’s been a very
successful relationship. One of the things we always wanted to
do is figure out a way to go back to Japan and hold a live event.
Now that we’ve hired Mark Fischer who ran the NBA in China
and all over Asia for the last 10 years, very successful, he’s
made a lot of progress over just the last couple of months. Now,
we certainly don’t have anything in place, but the goal
would be to potentially have a live event in Asia by the end
of this year, so we’re working on that.”
ARIEL
HELWANI: “Are there any other new markets overseas? Dana
has hinted at Scotland. We have heard maybe you are going back
to Abu Dhabi, that’s not official yet. Any other new markets?
We get asked these questions, Ireland, all the time, that you
can talk about that the UFC will be holding an event in 2011?”
LORENZO
FERTITTA: “You know, really right now it’s just a matter
of prioritizing things and figure out, you know, the right timing
that makes sense to do these things. Scotland is a priority.
You know, we have a huge fan base. We’ve wanted to go there
for a number of years. The problem we’ve had so far is they
don’t really have the facilities that we would like to have
to go there. You know, typically we like to go in an arena like
The O2 where you can get 20,000 people there. My understanding
is that Scotland has a venue that is anywhere from 6-8,000 people.
Certainly we could do that but it’s not necessarily maximizing
the size of the event that it could potentially be. With that
said, we will make Scotland a priority and we will be there.
Beyond that, you know obviously we have a lot of focus right
now on brazil. We announced the fight in Rio. We’d like
to do something in Mexico in the near term. In addition to that,
you know, obviously Asia is really the big focus. You know whether
it be in China, whether it be in Macau, Hong Kong, Singapore,
we’re obviously we’ve talked about Japan, potentially
somewhere in Malaysia potentially so, you know, it’s a matter
of just trying of prioritize things and coming to work every
day trying to figure out what makes the most sense, so it’s
a big puzzle, to put it that way.”
Source:
Fight Opinion
|
Sherdog
2010 Awards: The Complete List
Sherdog’s
Fighter of the Year
By Greg Savage
“It’s
just a job. Grass grows, birds fly, waves pound the sand. I beat
people up.”
Those
are the words of a man many consider the greatest fighter of
all time, Muhammad Ali. They also provide an apt description
of UFC heavyweight champion Cain Velasquez, Sherdog’s “Fighter
of the Year” for 2010.
“I
am honored to be recognized for all the hard work I have put
in, but I still have a lot to learn,” Velasquez said. “I
want to get back to work as soon as possible. I’ve got a
job to do. I want to defend the belt for years to come.”
The
humble, hard-working technician was immediately tagged as a can’t-miss
prospect, destined to rule over the heavyweight division, when
he made the transition to mixed martial arts after wrapping up
an impressive collegiate wrestling career in 2006. He realized
those expectations in a thoroughly dominating performance over
Brock Lesnar at UFC 121 in October. The massacre took just 4:12
to unfold, but it left an ineffaceable image seared into the
collective psyche of the MMA world.
Here
was a man who had put together all the aspects of the complex,
violent ballet that is mixed martial arts. He had done so upon
a base of amateur wrestling -- the sturdiest of foundations --
and had married those skills to a blue-collar work ethic. He
had found an environment wholly suited to nurturing and mentoring
him into a championship caliber fighter. And now he had reached
the pinnacle of his profession in the most spectacular of fashions,
laying waste to the latest “Baddest Man on the Planet.”
Velasquez,
at 28 years of age, had officially arrived.
His
rise to “Fighter of the Year” was cemented after he
dethroned Lesnar, but it began with a highlight-reel knockout
of former UFC and Pride Fighting Championships heavyweight titleholder
Antonio Rodrigo Nogueira in February.
The
UFC 110 fight was supposed to represent the first real test for
the blue-chip prospect, but it became apparent early in the opening
round that this was more akin to mob hit, with the new boss doing
the shooting. He pelted Nogueira early and often with hard, stinging
leg kicks and followed up with slick combinations that left the
Brazilian legend guessing. Then, a little more than two minutes
into the fight, Velasquez delivered a surgically placed right
hand that detonated any hopes for a Nogueira renaissance.
The
popular former champion melted to the floor, only to be rocked
back-and-forth from consciousness by five straight punches, all
before the referee could close the short distance and rescue
him. The heavyweight division was officially on notice.
Just
nine starts into his professional campaign, Velasquez has established
himself as the top heavyweight in the world. However, he remains
a relative MMA neophyte, loaded with untapped potential.
“Cain
is the best heavyweight in the world right now,” said Velasquez’s
head trainer, Javier Mendez, a former kickboxing champion and
proprietor of the American Kickboxing Academy in San Jose, Calif.
“He
still has to prove it in the cage, but he keeps getting better
every day. I know he is the best, but he has more work to do
before everyone realizes what I already know: he is the best
pound-for-pound fighter in the world.”
Even
though Velasquez has already reached the top of the UFC heavyweight
division, his coach can envision an even more lethal version
of the determined pugilist.
“I
would say he is at about 75 percent in his kickboxing, 50 percent
in his boxing, 75 percent in jiu-jitsu, and we all know he has
the wrestling down,” said Mendez. “There is plenty
of room for him to keep getting better, and he will get better.”
Another
Velasquez coach, Bob Cook, echoed Mendez’s sentiments. Always
known as an honest assessor of his own fighters’ talents,
Cook, a bit more cautiously, finds it easy to heap praise upon
his prize pupil.
“Cain
makes things very easy for us,” said Cook, a UFC veteran.
“If we don’t have him out doing [public relations]
work, he keeps a pretty regular schedule, from home to the gym
to his favorite taqueria and then does it all over again the
next day. He really is a simple guy who wants to be the best.
It is family, then fighting, and not a whole lot else.”
The
ability to cordon off all of the distractions and remain focused
on being the best in the world is a central characteristic of
most great athletes, and Velasquez seems to have it. With all
the commotion surrounding his bout with Lesnar, he remained clear
in his resolve and authored one of the more memorable moments
in MMA history. That performance capped a brilliant calendar
year for the UFC champion and gave fans and critics alike a glimpse
of what appears to be a storied career in the making.
There
are still a few challenges his coaches feel he will have to overcome
before he can be considered among the greats. Although Velasquez
had his chin and resolve tested in a 2009 bout against Cheick
Kongo, he has faced relatively little adversity in his fights
-- a fact his handlers know will change. Despite the fact that
they believe he will pass with flying colors, it remains to be
seen how he will react.
“If
you truly want to be considered to be great,” said Cook,
“you need to find a way to win when you have an off night.
Everyone experiences it sometime in their career, and to be able
to do what it takes to get past tough guys when things aren’t
going your way, that is one of the things the great fighters
can do.”
Sherdog’s
Story of the Year
By Mike Whitman
After
careful consideration, the staff of Sherdog.com has decided that
the outcry regarding the judging of mixed martial arts contests
in the past year was too great to ignore. As such, the contributing
editors have agreed that the cluster of questionable decisions,
and the ensuing public backlash, was 2010’s “Story
of the Year.”
The
first blip on the radar came at UFC 112 in April, when lightweight
kingpin B.J. Penn put his belt on the line in what was supposed
to be a routine title defense against Frankie Edgar. Instead,
the heavily-favored “Prodigy” found himself in a competitive
match where the speedy Edgar used superior movement to outlast
the longtime champion and earn a hard-fought unanimous decision
victory.
Most
fight fans and pundits agreed that the fight was a close one.
Ringside judge Douglas Crosby, however, was not a part of that
group: he scored the contest 50-45, a clean sweep for Edgar.
Two
weeks later, at WEC 48, promotional staple Leonard Garcia and
WEC newcomer Chan Sung Jung threw down in a wild, “Fight
of the Year”-candidate brawl. Though both men sustained
heavy damage, it was Jung who generally got the better of the
bout’s many exchanges. Statistic providers FightMetric and
CompuStrike both observed that the “Korean Zombie”
had landed more strikes with better accuracy than his opponent.
Somehow, two of the three officials cageside scored the bout
for Garcia.
The
month of September brought with it another pair of baffling verdicts.
At Bellator Fighting Championships 31, Zoila Frausto defeated
Jessica Aguilar in their semifinal of the promotion’s 115-pound
tournament. Though Aguilar continually pressed the action and
seemed to have won the fight handily, two of the Louisiana judges
scored the fight for Frausto.
At
UFC 119, former lightweight champion Sean Sherk outpointed rising
prospect Evan Dunham. Sherk looked to be in total control in
the early going, grounding his younger opponent and lacerating
him with patented “Muscle Shark” ground-and-pound.
In the final two frames, however, it was Dunham who battled back
and took control. The then-undefeated prospect used excellent
takedown defense to keep the fight standing and capitalized by
using his considerable reach advantage to punish Sherk, particularly
in the third period. Nonetheless, Sherk was declared the winner
by split decision.
UFC
123 in November continued the trend of controversial decisions,
as suffocating wrestler Nik Lentz defeated longtime UFC competitor
Tyson Griffin, while Quinton “Rampage” Jackson got
his hand raised against Lyoto Machida. While it was generally
agreed that the Machida-Jackson bout was a close one, “The
Dragon” scored a big takedown and landed the most meaningful
blows of the bout in the third period after two lackluster rounds
from both men. In the case of Griffin-Lentz, most viewed the
fight as a clear-cut victory for Griffin. Sherdog.com and MMAJunkie.com
each scored the fight 30-27, while MMAWeekly.com scored it 29-28,
all for Griffin.
One
of the final decisions of 2010 was also, arguably, the most controversial.
In a bout named Sherdog.com’s 2010 “Robbery of the
Year,” Leonard Garcia defeated Nam Phan by split decision
at “The Ultimate Fighter 12” finale. Both men fought
hard, but it was Phan who was more accurate with his strikes,
cutting through the windmill offense of Garcia with straight
punches and crisp kicks. According to CompuStrike, Phan out-landed
Garcia 122 to 66 in total strikes, and connected with 61 power
strikes to Garcia’s 39. Still, two of the three judges awarded
the fight to Garcia.
Following
that contest, UFC commentator Joe Rogan spoke live on air about
the state of judging in mixed martial arts, asserting that there
were a few good judges surrounded by “a bunch of incompetent
morons who know nothing about the sport.” Rogan pinpointed
Nevada State Athletic Commission Executive Director Keith Kizer
as the man turning a blind eye to a problem in dire need of fixing.
Kizer,
however, does not see it that way. According to the NSAC head,
at such a high level of competition, there are bound to be close
fights, and with those close fights come dissenting opinions.
Even Garcia-Phan -- which Kizer himself scored 30-27 in favor
of Phan -- may fall under this philosophy.
“It’s
not a problem that fans are so passionate in arguing for or against
a decision. In fact, I think that’s a good thing. But just
because some people get on a message board, that doesn’t
mean there’s an actual epidemic, either,” said Kizer.
“Several [members of the media] gave either the first or
third rounds to Leonard Garcia. I still don’t see that,
but I don't want to discount those [points of view].”
The
NSAC head isn’t the only one with an explanation for the
outcry over the decisions in 2010. Longtime judge and referee
Nelson “Doc” Hamilton -- who scored the Griffin-Lentz
and Garcia-Phan bouts in favor of Griffin and Garcia, respectively
-- believes much of the issue stems from the exposure that the
sport now receives.
“The
sport has grown so big, and we have so much more widespread coverage
than we used to have. [This includes] Yahoo, Sports Illustrated,
ESPN and the L.A. Times,” said Hamilton. “I think there
was always controversy in regard to judging certain fights. Even
10 years ago, [there were disagreements], it's just that there
was no light shined on it.”
Garcia (above) won two close bouts.
One
point on which both men agree is that much fan criticism comes
in the form of personal attacks, which only weakens the disgruntled
party’s argument. Also noted is the frequency with which
complaints are made, creating a “fan who cried wolf”
effect, according to Nick Lembo, chairman of the MMA Committee
for the Association of Boxing Commissioners and legal counsel
to the New Jersey State Athletic Control Board.
“I
think that there is an issue with judging in the sport to a recognizable
degree,” Lembo told Sherdog.com. “However, I do not
agree that every so-called disputed decision is a blatant robbery.
I think that rampant complaints about every razor-close, arguable
fight weaken the argument for bouts where there is serious, legitimate
questioning and concern over the scoring.”
The
last and least-credible line of defense for the questionable
performance of judges is one mostly purported by fans: unreliable
decisions create more exciting fights, since fighters no longer
want to risk their bouts going to the scorecards.
Phan
has personally heard this reasoning dozens of times, particularly
in relation to his bout with Garcia, and he’s developed
a routine to deal with it.
“People
come up to me and say, ‘Nam, you shouldn’t have left
it in the hands of the judges, man,’” Phan told Sherdog.com
“You know what I do? I give them the most sarcastic look
and I say, ‘Wow, that’s such a great idea! In all my
10 years of fighting, why didn’t I think of that? Knock
him out or submit him... that’s genius!’”
While
it is clear that the system needs fixing -- if for no other reason
than so that fighters like Phan do not have to crack jokes after
losing fights they should have won -- the solution is somewhat
murkier. Should state athletic commissions “clean house”
and start anew, as Rogan suggested at the “TUF 12”
finale?
This
would prove difficult, at least in California, according to CSAC
Executive Officer George Dodd, who noted that he feels his state
employs some of the best judges in the sport. Dodd explained
the process for removing a license not as a slight toward judges
in California, but in hypothetical terms for educational purposes.
“When
you have a license, in order for the state to take your license
away, you’ve got to have cause. And it’s really hard
to prove cause for removing a license. Does one bad match make
you a bad judge? Where is that line?” Dodd asked. “I
don't think anyone has been able to establish [a standard where]
if a judge falls below a certain mark, then the commission is
going to remove [his or her] license and provide extra training
before the judge is put back in the system.”
But
in Nevada, said Kizer, the rules are a bit different.
“Everybody’s
license is a privilege [in Nevada]. It expires Dec. 31 every
year, and if you’re not worthy of a renewal, then you don’t
get renewed. There is no continuing investment in that license,”
said Kizer. “At the end of the year, sometimes we have to
say, ‘Thank you for your years of service. It’s nothing
personal, but we’re not renewing your license because you
don’t meet the standard anymore.’”
Perhaps
judges simply need more tools in order perform their duties at
the highest level. Technology is often a helpful means to that
end, and small video monitors that judges may use at their discretion
have been proposed so that officials can always have a good vantage
point on a fight. Concerns over the use of monitors are numerous,
however, as some feel that they may cause judges to ignore the
live action right before their eyes.
“Monitors
are a useful tool, but keep in mind that they will not always
be available at local, smaller MMA events,” said Lembo.
“There are times where your angle is not as good as the
monitor, but there are also times where watching something live
in front of you provides a better vantage point and feel for
the action.”
Another
point of view is that the system is at least partially to blame,
as the “10-point must” method of scoring was taken
directly from boxing and is therefore not the most effective
way to judge an MMA bout. Among the subscribers of this theory
is Hamilton, who has created an alternate system that he feels
is a more exact tool for scoring MMA.
“Mixed
Martial Arts Specific” scoring, or MMAS, has been erroneously
labeled by many as the “half-point system.” Though
it’s true that the method utilizes half-points for scoring
(10-9.5 for a marginal victory in a round, 10-9 for a clear-cut
round, etc.), the system is far more comprehensive than most
realize.
The
system seeks to redefine the judging criteria by valuing damage
first, followed by effective striking and grappling, which are
weighted equally. Cage or ring control is still a part of the
criteria, but would take a back seat to the aforementioned qualities.
The
referee’s role would also change under the MMAS system,
as the in-cage official would notify the judges of near-submissions
by raising his hand. There would also be a fourth judge sitting
ringside to independently tally technical scores based on knockdowns,
takedowns and dominant positions. In the case of a tie, these
objective scores would be used to decide a winner.
“I
didn’t just pull this out of my ear,” said Hamilton
“Everything that I’ve got in the MMAS system has been
used at some point by some other form of martial arts. All I
did was adapt it to MMA. The referee calling submissions? That's
not new. They did that in Shooto and Pancrase. I was a K-1 referee,
and that’s where I got the half-point system.”
“Aside
from boxing, can you name me another sport in which we have draws?
Particularly in martial arts, but even the major sports have
figured out ways to resolve ties. People don't want draws, period.”
MMAS
scoring will be tested in California amateur bouts in 2011, and
all judges training to preside over amateur contests will be
trained in MMAS. Fights will be scored under Hamilton’s
system as well as the 10-point must, and data will be gathered
to see just how MMAS scoring differs from the status quo when
verdicts are rendered.
While
Hamilton has many supporters for his system, including Rogan
and veteran referees John McCarthy and Herb Dean, the system
also has its detractors. Kizer believes that the addition of
half-points, referee “catches” and fourth judges may
create a new list of problems with which to deal. Lembo is more
optimistic regarding MMAS scoring, but says that the tool can
only be as effective as the individual who is using it.
“I
am very familiar with Doc’s system, and I think it’s
great to test it in an amateur program. We need to be open to
new ideas and ways to improve aspects of this very new sport,”
said Lembo. “I think that the focus right now needs to be
on utilizing judges who understand jiu-jitsu, muay Thai and wrestling,
as well as just boxing. Any scoring system is only as good as
the people we select to use as judges. In other words, you still
need the best trained people to properly apply whatever system
you choose to use.”
So,
how can the mixed martial arts community ensure that all judges
are properly trained in the complex, multifaceted sport of MMA?
One solution might be to require all judges to pass a training
course similar to McCarthy’s Certification of Officials
for Mixed Martial Arts National Development (C.O.M.M.A.N.D.)
program in California. For Lembo, however, nothing beats the
real thing.
“Training
programs are a tool, but they are not a cure-all. There is no
substitute for actual experience,” said Lembo. “In
any area, training course proficiency does not always equate
to proficiency under live situations. There is no substitute
for experience gained in commission regulated amateur MMA events.”
Perhaps,
then, a combination of testing and live experience, coupled with
thoughtful evaluation, might be the key to building a better
judging system. A big question surrounding the issue of testing
well-established judges is the respect, or lack thereof, that
comes with such an evaluation. Some veteran MMA judges who have
had their performances brought into question have scored over
100 bouts, and requiring them to take a test on rules and techniques
of a sport which they have watched since its regulation could
be construed as a slap in the face. Hamilton, for one, asserts
that he would take no offense at such a requirement.
“It
wouldn’t offend me at all. I don’t know everything,”
he said. “I think I know a lot, and I think I do pretty
well at what I do, but there is always something else to learn.
And I’m willing to learn it.”
A
comprehensive knowledge exam featuring both conventional written
questions and hands-on demonstrations inside a mat room could
serve as a compromise to satisfy fans subscribing to the “clean
house” philosophy, while simultaneously aiding state athletic
commission. Both Dodd and Kizer were open to the idea of a test,
if one could be created and administered, though they each reiterated
Lembo’s point regarding in-ring experience.
One
thing is certain: however and whenever judging reform comes about,
it is time for the MMA fanbase, media and commission to take
the issue seriously. There will always be professional disagreements
between these groups, but as the sport evolves, so too must those
who govern, cover and follow it. In allowing for new ideas and
compromise, perhaps a nationwide method might be determined to
produce a better-equipped and more prepared network of judges.
“The
most competent people in the world, as far as I’m concerned,
are the military. Those people have got it down. They train you,
they test you, they hold your feet to the fire. They know that
if somebody screws up, it could be somebody’s life,”
said Hamilton. “Here, it’s the same thing, but you’re
messing with somebody’s pocketbook if you’re a judge,
or, if you’re a referee, it’s somebody’s life.”
Sherdog’s
Knockout of the Year
By Brian Knapp
Robbie
Lawler could barely stand, but he had one good right hand left
in him.
Lawler,
the inside of his lead leg mangled by a series of vicious kicks,
unleashed an overhand right on the unsuspecting Melvin Manhoef
in a featured middleweight duel at Strikeforce “Miami”
on Jan. 30 at the BankAtlantic Center in Sunrise, Fla. Home to
the National Hockey League’s Florida Panthers, the venue
had witnessed its share of memorable mixed martial arts violence
-- Seth Petruzelli on Kimbo Slice and Benji Radach on Murilo
“Ninja” Rua at EliteXC “Heat” in 2008 spring
to mind -- but nothing there had approached the Lawler-Manhoef
outcome in terms of intensity, drama and utter brutality.
A
shade more than three and a half minutes after the fight began,
Manhoef lay on his back, that unsettling fifth-dimension stare
etched across his face. He was the victim in Sherdog’s “Knockout
of the Year” for 2010.
“I
was thinking, ‘I have to finish him,’” Lawler
said. “I wasn’t sure how long I’d be able to continue
fighting the way I was, so I just kept pushing and pushing and
was able to land a big shot.”
A
dozen leg kicks from the Dutchman had slammed into the inside
of Lawler’s right knee and thigh by the time it ended. At
times, it appeared as if the limb might fly right out of the
cage, so brutal were the impacts. Manhoef’s measured attack
caught the Lawler camp by surprise.
“We
actually expected a more aggressive Manhoef, but he chose to
keep great space and throw leg kicks,” said Matt Pena, Lawler’s
longtime boxing coach. “It was pretty amazing to see the
speed at which he was delivering such powerful shots.
“There
was a moment in the fight where Rob winced from twisting his
ankle, and I thought in my head for a split second, ‘How
is Rob gonna be able to plant and push off that leg?’”
Pena added. “We didn’t think Manhoef would take so
long to begin to open up with his hands. The first few times
that he did, I was pleading for Rob to punch off of the blocked
shots, but he didn’t have him quite timed yet and he didn’t
want to get careless.”
Lawler
knew an opportunity would present itself, if he could withstand
the punishment. He had studied Manhoef’s tendencies on film.
“I
always look at video for fights, and Rob did, too, for this particular
match,” Pena said. “The things that we noticed is how
vulnerable Melvin is when he thinks someone is about to go, or
when he thinks he’s at a superior striking advantage. He
gets overaggressive, overcommits and keeps his chin in the air.
When he got KO’d in the past, these were his habits, so
we knew if Rob caught him there that he could knock him out.”
Manhoef
followed just such a pattern against the former EliteXC middleweight
champion. After cracking Lawler with another inside leg kick,
he drew his guns and attacked. Figuring his foe was on his way
out, Manhoef pawed with a left jab and backed Lawler against
the cage. However, in his haste, the K-1 veteran let his guard
down as he prepped himself to throw what he undoubtedly believed
would be the finishing blows. Lawler capitalized, as he launched
a perfectly timed and placed overhand right that wobbled Manhoef
and dropped him where he stood.
“I
had one of the best seats in the house that night,” Pena
said. “When Robbie landed that punch, Manhoef’s neck
snapped around to where I saw his eyes as he was falling. I was
telling [UFC hall of famer and Lawler cornerman Matt] Hughes
that it was over as Melvin hit the ground.”
Manhoef
collapsed to his side, foggy as he fell, and Lawler uncorked
a devastating standing-to-ground left that rendered him unconscious.
Another blow dropped for good measure, as the referee dove into
save the defenseless Dutchman from further abuse. Quickly surrounded
by cage-side medical personnel, Manhoef did not emerge from his
slumber for several tense moments. The triumphant Lawler limped
around the cage gingerly, his handiwork at his feet.
“Rob
landing that punch definitely sent out a reminder that he, too,
is one of the premier power punching fighters in the sport,”
Pena said, “but I think it said more about his conditioning
and heart.”
Though
the outcome was to their liking, Pena admits not all went according
to plan.
“In
a perfect world, Rob would have gone out there, secured a takedown,
grinded Manhoef down to tire him and then knocked him out standing
or with some ground-and-pound,” he said. “There’s
a moment where you do see Rob look for a shot, but Manhoef kept
good space and made Rob feel vulnerable with trying to close
the distance. So, Rob made the adjustments and went to Plan B.”
According
to Pena, Manhoef himself added fuel to Lawler’s pre-fight
fire.
“Even
as all the fighters were meeting in the lobby to be shuttled
to the event, Manhoef spent 10 minutes mean mugging every member
in our camp, trying to intimidate us,” he said. “It’s
one thing to try to intimidate your opponent, but to have someone
try to intimidate our camp was something new to me. As tight
as we all are, I knew that when Robbie saw this going on, it
was gonna be a special night.”
Sherdog’s
Submission of the Year
By Jason Probst
A
definitive win compressed into a mere 69 seconds, Fabricio Werdum’s
triangle of Fedor Emelianenko on June 26 at the HP Pavilion in
San Jose, Calif., was a reminder that every fighter is beatable
when caught up, long enough, in the other guy’s world.
With
Emelianenko carrying into the bout the gold standard of career
consistency and the mantle of the world’s best heavyweight,
Werdum’s finisher resonated across the mixed martial arts
world, making it Sherdog’s “Submission of the Year”
for 2010.
Werdum’s
triangle did more than just snap Emelianenko’s 10-year unbeaten
streak. The submission made the most intimidating and overwhelming
fighter in the history of the game look thoroughly human.
“I’ve
been training that position since I was a white belt,” said
Werdum. “It’s a position I’m very comfortable
with.”
Werdum
added that switching back and forth from the triangle to the
arm bar, while a basic technique taught in early jiu-jitsu training,
is not something that is acquired overnight.
As
a former Brazilian jiu-jitsu world champion and two-time Abu
Dhabi Combat Club Submission Wrestling World Championships winner
in the heavyweight bracket, Werdum’s grappling credentials
are top-notch. And going into the bout, his preparation and revamped
diet had him weighing a trim 238 pounds, with his confidence
soaring.
“The
mental and physical preparation came together perfectly,”
said Richard Wilmer, Werdum’s manager. “Fabricio was
already convinced he won the fight as camp started.”
It
could not have played out any better for Werdum.
“I
put Fedor in trouble with my best weapon -- my triangle. I took
away his balance,” he said. “And when he went in my
guard, I knew I was going to win the fight.”
Werdum,
like most other top heavyweights, could practice for 10 years
and never generate the concussive power Emelianenko generates
when unleashing his fists. Outside of a select few heavyweights,
few will ever possess the combination of spatial awareness and
body control the Russian demonstrates in seemingly wild exchanges,
whether it is trading blows or hitting the mat to seize dominant
position.
Werdum
has basically trained his whole life for people to play the jiu-jitsu
game with him, which is why MMA remains the ultimate equalizer
and proving ground for combat athletes. He knew he could deliver
the upset if only the fight went into his pre-selected groove,
on his back, hunting for an opening, a limb, anything available.
It happened in the opening moments of the bout, off a sequence
that seemed like disaster was unfolding for the seemingly outmatched
Brazilian.
As
the two began the bout, Emelianenko crept forward, then unleashed
six punches, so fast that even on replay it was hard to tell
what landed clean and what missed. Werdum fell to his back, but
that was part of the plan, he explains. Get it down to the mat,
and lure Emelianenko into his world. Play his aggression against
him.
“I
used it as a setup to pull the fight to the ground,” Werdum
said. “With Fedor, you can’t start the fight with a
shoot. I felt the right hand come, and then I sat down. His right
punch didn’t hit me. Then I dropped and pulled him into
my game.”
Emelianenko
obliged, diving into Werdum’s guard and making the kind
of tiny error that differentiates between great submission artists
and everyone else. His left arm was deep in Werdum’s guard,
and the Brazilian pounced. Seizing the limb as Fedor attempted
to counter an obviously developing triangle-armbar setup, Werdum
held tight, rolling underneath the circling Russian to re-establish
the critical angle he needed.
“When
I feel Fedor was going to try and escape, when he posted up,
I could switch the submission to the arm. If he went to down,
I could work the triangle,” Werdum said. “I train,
so it works out that it puts him in trouble either way.”
After
dropping down to the canvas following Emelianenko’s opening-moments
salvo, Werdum, who insisted he was not hurt, felt a surge of
excitement as the former Pride Fighting Championships titleholder
powered ahead into his guard.
“I
just dropped down and pulled him into my game,” he said.
“A lot of guys fight with Fedor, and they try and exchange.
I wanted to put this into [a] jiu-jitsu [contest].”
At
that point, even casual fans knew Emelianenko was in serious
trouble. Finally, after the triangle was cinched deep, with Werdum
yanking down on his head and extending his arm to increase the
futility of the position, the great Russian tapped once in a
gesture that was understated and humble.
With
his penchant for rallying out of bad spots -- whether it was
being slammed on his head by Kevin Randleman, drilled into doing
the stanky-leg dance against Kazuyuki Fujita or bloodied and
thumped up by Brett Rogers -- Emelianenko’s prescription
in dealing with such rough spots was always the same, and it
was as inevitable as death and taxes.
He
simply stormed back and overwhelmed opponents. All the more reason
why the Werdum fight was equal parts sobering and stunning, as
Emelianenko, for once, never got a chance. Werdum found his opening
and pounced, sticking the knife in deep for the kill before Emelianenko
could formulate a response.
While
other Submission of the Year winners -- 2009 winner Toby Imada’s
reverse triangle over Jorge Masdival comes to mind -- have won
due to their exotic appeal, this was not one of those. It was
a reminder of what an unbeaten streak like Emelianenko’s
means in terms of consistency and execution on a fight-by-fight
basis. With a record of 32-1 entering the bout, Emelianenko’s
high-wire act stood on its own in terms of dodging the inevitable.
The fight was a prime example of how many ways there are to lose
in a sport where nobody can be the best at the multiple disciplines
involved.
Finally,
after years of steamrolling opponents and rallying through the
occasional dramatic rough spot with his trademark fury, the great
Emelianenko was beaten.
Sherdog’s
Fight of the Year
By Tony Loiseleur
Jorge
Santiago-Kazuo Misaki 2 -- Sherdog’s “Fight of the
Year” for 2010 -- was the kind of mixed martial arts contest
fans and pundits point to as an example of why they believe their
sport is the best in the world. Played out at Sengoku Raiden
Championship 14 on Aug. 22 at the Ryogoku Kokugikan in Tokyo,
it represents the kind of fight to which MMA supporters direct
their friends on YouTube.
Interestingly
enough, it was not the first time these two had engaged in such
a larger-than-life, marathon struggle. At Sengoku “No Ran
2009” in January 2009, Santiago and Misaki met to determine
who would become the fledgling promotion’s inaugural middleweight
champion. It was a tense five-rounder Misaki was winning on points
until a miraculous comeback in the final stanza saw the Brazilian
put him to sleep with a fight-ending choke to capture Sengoku’s
middleweight title.
A
little more than a year and a half later, they were at it again.
Few expected them to live up to their first encounter, and no
one thought they could surpass it. Santiago and Misaki not only
traded rounds but almost finished each other in every frame.
It was the kind of give-and-take struggle MMA fans so rarely
witness.
It
came as no surprise that the fight took a toll on its participants.
Misaki has no memory of the bout, outside of what he has seen
on video.
“I
was surprised at how the fight went. I thought, ‘Oh, wow,
I did that?’ and ‘Hey, I could have finished him there,’
even if I didn’t remember those moments myself,” he
said of his first review of the film. “On the one hand,
I think [this fight] was only possible because we’re both
very technically skilled fighters, but on the other, it was also
only possible because of our spirit and emotions behind this
fight. Both our first and second fights had great spirit in them.”
The
champion, however, saw their second encounter as an opportunity
to best what he felt was a poor performance in their first fight.
“I
definitely consider Misaki the toughest opponent I could have
faced in Japan,” Santiago said. “He proved that in
Pride when he was the [grand prix] champion. After our first
fight, when I fought him with a broken hand, I really wanted
to face him again and make an even more exciting fight. That’s
what happened.”
What
happened was what every promoter wants in his or her event. Though
World Victory Road President Toru Mukai was just as thrilled
as the fans to witness the bout unfold, he was not without reservations.
“It
was certainly a fantastic fight, one where both fighters could
be considered winners and showed true warrior spirit, but to
tell the truth, I wanted to stop it right in the middle,”
said Mukai, with a paternal chuckle. “I was afraid because
I thought that either one of these men could die in the ring
that night.”
Misaki’s
own cornermen shared those same concerns as the fight drew on.
“In
the history of combat sports -- no wait, in the history of all
sports -- this contest stands out. It was something you could
accurately call ‘mortal combat,’” said Pride veteran
Daiju Takase, who served as Misaki’s grappling coach during
the match. “Every time Kazuo was on the attack, I thought,
‘He can do this!’ But because I knew what his physical
condition was whenever he was under attack, I started praying.”
After
a competitive first round, Misaki stole the second period, nearly
choking out Santiago with a tight guillotine.
“In
that guillotine, I was really in trouble,” said the self-effacing
champion. “I think at other moments, too, he was on my back
and then trying to get the [arm triangle], and I was thinking,
‘S--t!’ In my mind, I felt I was behind. [During a
fight], some people will tell me ‘You’re even,’
or they’ll say, ‘You’re winning,’ but I always
think I’m behind.”
Santiago
rebounded in the third round with a high kick-right straight
combination, nearly stopping Misaki with punches on the ground
before being foiled by the ring ropes. The roller-coaster fight
then swung back in the challenger’s favor in the same frame,
as Misaki shocked Santiago with a left hook and followed up with
punches and knees to the head. Santiago, whether willfully or
instinctively, fell out of the ring, earning a severe rebuke
and red card from referee Yoshinori Umeki.
“If
it was in the cage,” said Takase, ever the outspoken critic,
“the fight would definitely have ended there.”
Fortunately
for the fans, it did not. With judges Masato Fukuda, Tenshin
Matsumoto and Ryogaku Wada carrying Misaki cards of 39-36, 38-36
and 38-36 into the fifth and final round, Santiago’s back
was to the wall. If he could not produce a 10-8 round for the
46-46 draw on judges Matsumoto and Wada’s scorecards and
hold out hope for the must-decision after the final bell, he
would likely lose the title.
“My
worst moment was when he knocked me down in the fourth round,”
Santiago said, “but my best moment was in the last minute
of the fifth, when I finished him.”
In
the fifth period, Santiago dug deep and produced more than a
10-8 round for the necessary draw. He rained brutal punches on
the challenger from top position for four and a half minutes,
until Misaki’s corner threw in the towel. Official time
was 4:31.
Whether
the bout would have resulted in a draw or not if Misaki had survived
to the final bell, his chances to pick up his first title since
being crowned the Pride 2006 welterweight grand prix winner were
high. To some onlookers, the corner stoppage was a source of
debate, but it was a decision none of the participants seem to
begrudge.
“Whether
I would have won if the towel wasn’t thrown in is not something
I think about, so I don’t feel any regrets over it,”
Misaki said. “Besides, cornermen have a responsibility to
protect their fighter. That’s why I’m able to be here
now, talking to you. For that, I’m very grateful to them.”
“From
the midway point, Kazuo couldn’t remember anything because
he was so exhausted. He was fighting completely on spirit alone,”
said Takase. “His striking coach threw in the towel. Misaki
would never tap, so it’s a bit unfortunate. I’m confident
he could have won, but protecting your fighter’s health
is of the utmost and proper consideration.”
With
two titanic and taxing encounters with the Brazilian in the books,
it would seem understandable if Misaki resigned himself to never
facing Santiago again. However, as is often seen in MMA, fighting
so fiercely and thoroughly with an opponent rarely breeds contempt
or resignation. Misaki appears convinced that he and Santiago
are bound by destiny and key to each other’s personal growth.
“As
a professional fighter, I think it was a great experience to
fight him, but aside from that, he’s also helped me grow
and change a lot, just in life. It doesn’t matter who won.
I’m very grateful for him and having had the chance to fight
him,” Misaki said solemnly. “I think we will probably
meet again because I don’t think that this fight was the
end of our story. Even though the towel was thrown in at the
end, I think there’s still one more drama to be played out
by the both of us. I think it’s our destiny to meet again.”
The
champion also thinks highly of Misaki and does not seem to mind
the prospect of a third encounter, if fans want it.
“He’s
a tiger, you know? He has that fire in his eyes and in his heart.
I do, too. We’re the same. We both feel like we’re
not going to just give a fight to anybody,” Santiago said.
“Like he was saying [at the press conference], the champion
of this bout is going to be the one who wants it more, who has
more will. I think if we always fight with that mindset, we’ll
always put on great shows.”
Until
the day of their third meeting comes, however, their second fight
will remain prominent in the hearts and minds of those who experienced
it firsthand.
“One
thing I’ll never forget is how gassed Kazuo was in the last
round, but he was still trying desperately to get out of mount,”
Takase said. “He couldn’t even breathe properly, yet
he was still in the fight. Even if he could have died in there,
he wouldn’t give up. It’s an example that I think,
more than just fighters, everyone should follow. Even recalling
it now, I’m moved by it.”
“It
was a magnificent fight, and I think it made the audience come
together as one,” Mukai said. “As far as MMA goes,
I think it’s one of the best fights ever.”
For
Misaki, it was a life-altering experience.
“I
don’t know if I’ll still be alive in 10 or 20 years.
If I am still alive, I think it would be because of fights like
these with Santiago,” he said. “That’s also why
I think it’s our destiny to face each other. Again, I’m
grateful for the chance to fight against someone like him, and
in 10 or 20 years, I’ll still think the same.”
Marcelo
Alonso contributed to this report.
Sherdog’s
Event of the Year
By Jeff Sherwood
WEC
53 “Henderson vs. Pettis” -- Sherdog’s “Event
of the Year for 2010” -- provided an amazing final chapter
for World Extreme Cagefighting on Dec. 16 in Glendale, Ariz.
The
city and site -- the Jobing.com Arena -- were determined by a
fan voting contest, Amp Energy’s “Hometown Throwdown,”
which was fitting for a product that, in recent years, had quickly
become the hardcore fan’s obsession. Personally, I was especially
excited, not only because it was another great WEC show but because
I was there for the first-ever WEC event nine and a half years
earlier.
On
paper, it was a great card that introduced a bevy of questions.
Will Brazilian prospects Renan “Barao” do Nascimento
Mota Pegado and Yuri Alcantara continue to live up to the hype?
Could Eddie Wineland and Brad Pickett continue their run of thrilling
fights? How would Ivan Menjivar look at 135 pounds? Was Jamie
Varner going to get back on the winning track and start another
run to the top? Was Tie Quan Zhang going to continue to be the
force behind Chinese MMA? Would a Donald Cerrone-Chris Horodecki
matchup provide fireworks? How was Dominick Cruz going to handle
Scott Jorgensen’s wrestling? How was 23-year-old Anthony
Pettis going to fare in a main event that most felt he was going
to lose?
Few
fight cards offer that many intriguing storylines. Virtually
none answer them with such thrilling competition.
It
was hard not to feel initially dismayed, seeing pockets of empty
seats inside the Jobing.com Arena. That is behavior more typical
of Las Vegas events, where high rollers and celebrities wander
in late. It was not fitting for a top-to-bottom fan-friendly
card like WEC 53. Those ticketholders who did not show up for
the opening bell received their just desserts: three knockouts,
two submissions and two exciting decisions marked one of the
most sensational undercards in recent memory.
It
is impossible to understand how truly top-to-bottom great WEC
53 was without seeing the preliminary bouts. Wineland’s
slam knockout of Ken Stone was as brutal as they come. To see
the impact and consequence live was jarring and, frankly, terrifying,
as Stone was motionless for 10 minutes. Danny Castillo and Alcantara
both turned in highlight-reel stoppages. Against Chris Cariaso,
“Barao” was so calm, methodical and technical in locking
up his rear-naked choke. However, Shane Roller outdid him with
his rugged choke-out of Varner in surprisingly quick fashion.
The
two fights that went the distance on the undercard were fantastic.
Daniel Downes’ comeback upset against Zhang showed you what
kind of heart the kid had, and Menjivar-Pickett was 15 minutes
of wild back-and-forth action. It was the kind of stuff that
people came to expect from WEC.
However,
the two title fights interested most people in WEC 53, and they
delivered, albeit in different ways.
Many
thought Jorgensen’s wrestling would give Cruz issues, but
the champion moved and struck his way to a dominating performance
over Jorgensen. Cruz won every single round behind his boxing
and his wrestling.
Fans,
writers and fighters all continue to discredit Cruz’s wrestling
-- he did not wrestle past high school -- even though “The
Dominator” puts better-credentialed wrestlers on the mat.
Cruz did whatever he wanted against Jorgensen and continued to
raise his stock and cement himself as the bantamweight division’s
star champion.
More
importantly, Cruz’s win set up a potential rematch with
Urijah Faber in 2011 -- a fight that could prove the biggest
in bantamweight history. Part of what made his domination of
Jorgensen special was wondering how he could stack up with “The
California Kid” four years after their first encounter.
Then,
in the final WEC fight ever, Pettis and Benson Henderson put
on something truly special.
Henderson,
an Arizona-based fighter, came out to one of the loudest ovations
in recent memory. The air was thick with pressure and excitement,
as fans were standing before the main event even began. The action
that followed ensured they would not return to their seats.
After
20 minutes of back-and-forth action -- including one of the year’s
best rounds, the seesaw fourth -- most onlookers had the bout
two rounds apiece, 38-38, giving the first and fourth to Henderson
and the second and third to Pettis. More importantly, two of
the judges -- Derek Zazueta and Tom Gabauer -- had the fight
scored that way, meaning it was up for grabs going into the last
round of WEC action ever.
With
90 seconds to go, the fight was there for the taking, waiting
for one fighter to seize the moment. That is exactly what Pettis
did, snatching victory in once-in-a-lifetime fashion, leaping
off of the fence like a scene out of “The Matrix” and
smashing Henderson with a flying kick to the head. The mind-blowing
last-minute offense sealed the fight for Pettis, who took a unanimous
decision and the WEC lightweight title.
No
matter what happened in the final frame, or the four rounds before
it, it is hard to remember anything other than what has become
known as “The Kick.”
Pettis
already enjoyed some celebrity before the fight due to his appearance
on MTV’s “World of Jenks,” which profiled him
prior to his March bout with Danny Castillo. However, “The
Kick” took it to another level. The highlight was plastered
all over ESPN and other sports outlets and drew massive praise
from the sports world, including the likes of Jim Rome. The moment
came in at No. 8 on ESPN Sportscenter’s “Plays of the
Year.”
Prior
to WEC 53, I watched a journalist interview both Henderson and
Pettis. They asked Henderson about how he felt he would match
up with the UFC’s lightweights after the UFC-WEC merger
but declined to ask Pettis the same question. It was a slight
that was widespread before the bout, as not many gave Pettis
a chance against Henderson, and virtually no one thought he had
any serious place among the UFC’s top 155-pounders.
Then,
in one instant, Pettis delivered one of the most exciting moments
in MMA history and broke out as an incomparably dynamic, emerging
star. In 2011, he will fight for the UFC lightweight title, but
it is hard to imagine, regardless of what greatness may await
him, that any moment will overshadow what he created in the last
minute of the last fight of the last WEC show ever.
On
entertainment value alone, top to bottom, WEC 53 ranks among
the best events of the year. It had high-level action and highlight-reel
stoppages, in addition to a “Fight of the Year” candidate
in the main event with a where-were-you-when moment in its conclusion.
However, it was not just exciting; it was symbolic and sentimental.
WEC 53 was not just excitement for excitement’s sake. It
was the final thrilling chapter to a book that could not have
ended any more fittingly.
Sherdog’s
Comeback Fighter of the Year
By Todd Martin
With
a minute left in his UFC 116 bout against Yoshihiro Akiyama,
Chris Leben fired desperate punches from his back. Knowing that
he faced a possible decision loss if the round expired, Leben
needed to do something to leave the fight with his hand raised.
In
a sudden movement, Leben wrapped his right leg around the Japanese
star’s head and secured a triangle choke. With less than
30 seconds left, Akiyama was forced to tap out and the live crowd
at the MGM Grand erupted. On one of the best night of fights
in UFC history, Leben stole the show. It completed a remarkable
turnaround for Sherdog’s 2010 Comeback Fighter of the Year.
“[I
feel] overwhelmed,” Leben commented after the fight. “It’s
been a long road and a somewhat bumpy one for me. This is just
huge. My career and my life are in better places than they have
ever been.”
Leben’s
long and bumpy road to that point played out dramatically in
front of the public eye.
Forrest
Griffin and Stephan Bonnar have consistently received effusive
praise for the role they played popularizing MMA on the first
season of “The Ultimate Fighter.” But while Griffin
and Bonnar turned heads with their exciting battle at the TUF
finale, it was the feud between Chris Leben and Josh Koscheck
that dominated the first TUF season and sent ratings on an upward
trajectory.
The
Ultimate Fighter presented Leben as a complex and flawed human
being. He was depicted as a hothead who liked to drink and infamously
urinated on the bed of another fighter. But in the show’s
most dramatic moments he was reduced to tears as Bobby Southworth
and Koscheck maliciously exploited his emotional vulnerabilities.
Leben didn’t win the Ultimate Fighter, but he emerged as
one of the show’s biggest stars.
Following
his tenure on the show, Leben won five fights in a row and established
himself as a contender for the UFC middleweight title. A 49-second
destruction at the hands of Anderson Silva quickly changed that.
Subsequent losses to Kalib Starnes and Jason MacDonald pushed
him to the middle of the back.
Things
would only get worse for Leben when in April of 2008 he was arrested
for allegedly violating his probation on a previous DUI. Leben
was sentenced to 35 days in jail. He lost his next bout to Michael
Bisping and allegedly tested positive for Stanozolol, an anabolic
steroid, following the fight. After serving a nine-month suspension,
Leben lost his return fight via submission to Jake Rosholt. Going
into 2010, Leben appeared to be one loss away from being cut
by the UFC.
A
losing streak in MMA can be devastating to the career of a fighter.
Many fans perceive fighters to be only as good as their last
performance. Legends are quickly dismissed and great fighters
written off. Leben had to deal not only with the criticism and
scrutiny that comes from losing, but also past problems with
alcohol and the stigma of cheating. His career appeared to be
in a downward spiral.
There
was no shortage of obstacles for Leben to overcome, but 2010
would be a year of redemption.
The
year started inconspicuously with a decision win over the lightly
regarded Jay Silva. For the first time in his UFC career, Leben’s
bout wasn’t broadcast on television. That win set up a more
high profile bout with the undefeated Aaron Simpson. Leben was
a heavy underdog against the wrestling standout with big punching
power.
Simpson
demonstrated his wrestling skill by taking Leben down multiple
times in the first round of their bout. But by the second round
Simpson appeared to be fading. Leben started landing his punches.
As a dazed Simpson staggered across the ring to avoid additional
punishment, the referee stopped the bout. Leben won knockout
of the night honors and returned home for what he figured would
be a period of rest and relaxation.
Leben’s
plans were quickly foiled. Joe Silva called him up the next day.
Wanderlei Silva had to pull out of a semi-main event bout against
Yoshihiro Akiyama. A short notice replacement was needed. Leben
agreed to take the fight. It would be his second fight in just
two weeks and he was again a solid underdog.
Taking
two fights so close together might be viewed as a disadvantage
by some. However, prior to the fight with Akiyama, Leben pointed
to that as a positive.
“It’s
really quite a blessing because the hardest part about fighting
is getting throughout training camp without injury,” Leben
said. “I made it out of my last fight luckily with a couple
bumps and bruises but no injuries. For me to look at that fight
as a hard sparring day and my real fight is in two weeks, I truly
feel better than I ever have in my entire life.”
The
year 2010 was filled with classic fights. But few packed the
excitement of the spectacular contest between Leben and Akiyama.
They traded heavy strikes on their feet and scrambled for submissions
on the ground. At the beginning of the third round Leben stood
to his feet and raised his hands in the air to encourage the
already boisterous audience.
All
three judges had the fight scored 19-19 at that point. The third
round would decide the fight. Akiyama took Leben down and maintained
top position. Leben was active from his back but judges often
give the benefit of the doubt to the man on top. There was only
one way for Leben to guarantee himself victory and he pulled
it off by stopping the fight with the late triangle.
When
the year started, Chris Leben was a forgotten fighter. At the
year’s conclusion, he found himself once again a contender
in the middleweight division. He earned himself a semi-main event
position in 2011’s first card and was mentioned as a potential
coach for the Ultimate Fighter. It was a remarkable turnaround
for a fighter who has had a particularly tempestuous career.
“I’m
working hard in and out of the cage,” Leben said prior to
his UFC 125 bout with Brian Stann. “Anyone that’s around
me knows I’m a far different person than I was five years
ago.”
Success
in MMA, as in life, can often be fleeting. An arrest on suspicion
of DUI in October demonstrated that Leben’s past demons
have not entirely disappeared. Leben’s high profile bout
with Stann went on as planned but the episode reopened questions
about Leben’s behavior outside the Octagon.
Inside
the cage, Leben’s 2011 started off as the polar opposite
of his 2010. He demonstrated typical heart and determination
trying to fight through an onslaught of offense from the underdog,
but succumbed to punches late in the first round. The attention
shifted to Stann as a new potential contender at 185 pounds while
Leben found himself again looking to recover and rebound.
Past
triumphs can quickly fade from the memory following a first-round
knockout loss. But for a fighter who had fallen so far, 2010
represented a remarkable comeback for Chris Leben.
Sherdog’s
Beatdown of the Year
By Chris Nelson
Webster’s
Dictionary defines the word “beatdown” as ... well,
it’s not in the dictionary, but a beatdown in mixed martial
arts is not tough to spot.
Rare
is the sort of prolonged pummeling that makes spectators fear
deeply for one -- and only one -- of the participants’ well-being.
It is the kind of drubbing that leaves even the most desensitized
fight fan wincing and wondering, “Why was that allowed to
happen?”
While
qualifying a beatdown is fairly simple, quantifying one in proportion
to another can get tricky. Does one favor the brutish, first-round
lumping that Cain Velasquez dealt Brock Lesnar in their meeting
at UFC 121, or Jose Aldo’s 25-minute dissection of Urijah
Faber at WEC 48?
Sherdog’s
“Beatdown of the Year” for 2010 falls somewhere between
those two extremes, somehow making it more extreme than either.
Cristiane “Cyborg” Santos’ fight with Jan Finney
ended quickly enough to fit on a single YouTube video and yet
seemed to stretch out endlessly as it took place. In short, it
was exactly the kind of event one might expect to see when a
fighter nicknamed “Cyborg” runs up against one dubbed
“Cuddles.”
To
fully elucidate the brutality, a bit of background:
In
August 2009, after showing promising bursts of violence in her
first three bouts stateside, the 24-year-old Santos took on poster
girl Gina Carano for the first-ever Strikeforce women’s
145-pound championship. Cyborg confirmed her spot as one of the
world’s best female fighters by decimating the superstar
with a beating so sound that, 16 months later, the previously
undefeated Carano has yet to return to MMA.
In
January, the newly-minted champion made her first title defense
against veteran Marloes Coenen. The Dutchwoman held an experience
edge of five years and 10 fights over the Brazilian, but it made
little difference. Santos bullied her challenger for 13 minutes
before finishing Coenen with punches in the third frame. The
defeat prompted Coenen to drop to 135 pounds, where she captured
a Strikeforce title of her own nine months later.
As
Santos laid waste to opponents in Strikeforce, Finney was experiencing
something of a mid-career resurgence on the Midwest circuit.
A
personal trainer and self-described MMA hobbyist, the Ohioan
entered 2009 with a record of 4-7, having won just one of her
previous six outings. Following a pair of technical knockout
wins over neophyte opponents, Finney joined Oklahoma-based Freestyle
Cage Fighting’s 135-pound grand prix, the winner of which
was promised a Strikeforce contract.
After
earning decisions over Lizbeth Carreiro and Adrienna Jenkins
to reach the tournament final, Finney withdrew from her rematch
with fellow finalist Shayna Baszler. She had received the call-up
from Strikeforce and would fill in for former opponent Erin Toughill
against Santos.
When
the June 26 title fight was announced, some bookmakers placed
Cyborg as high as a -2500 favorite to beat Finney, an almost
unprecedented line for an MMA fight. In comparison, lines for
that evening’s main event put Fedor Emelianenko around -600
to defeat Fabricio Werdum.
In
retrospect, -2500 might have been a bit conservative. As the
match began inside the HP Pavilion in San Jose, Calif., Finney
met Santos in the center of the cage, began tentatively flicking
out her left jab and then laid a right cross on the cheek of
the champion. The punch connected exactly five seconds into the
first round; it was to be Finney’s cleanest offense of the
fight.
Rather
than stand toe-to-toe throwing haymakers, the Chute Boxe-trained
Cyborg clinched with Finney, muscling her challenger into the
fence and going to work with knees to the body. When the fighters
disengaged, Santos clipped Finney with a left hand that sent
the underdog to her knees, where she wobbled forward and looked
for a takedown. It did not come, and, as Finney got back to her
feet, Santos cracked her with a knee to the face that looked
as though it would have knocked out most other fighters, male
or female.
One
minute into the fight, Finney already looked to be in serious
trouble, her face flushed red, a cut beneath her left eye from
the knee strike.
Cyborg
went back to the clinch, tenderizing her opponent’s midsection
with more knees. She stepped back and launched a volley of vicious
punches that put Finney on her rear. Clinging desperately to
Santos’ right leg, Finney ate more punches and hammerfists;
referee Kim Winslow warned Santos for punching the back of Finney’s
head. The challenger found momentary respite as she rolled into
guard, trying to create breathing room with upkicks, but Winslow
soon motioned her back to her feet.
Finney
was upright for approximately four seconds before another half-dozen
punches from Santos sent her back to her knees. When Finney rolled
to guard this time, Santos gave her no quarter, shucking the
challenger’s legs and wailing away. Finney turtled, and
an overzealous Cyborg again let her punches stray to the illegal
zone. Winslow appropriately deducted a point, though anyone watching
knew that it was moot.
Action
resumed, as did the clinching and Santos’ phone booth abuse.
More gut-wrenching knees and close-quarter punches prompted Finney
to step back and wing some shots of her own, but Santos marched
forward, unfazed. A left jab snapped Finney’s head back,
her blonde bob shaking. Another sent her to the canvas once again
with 60 seconds still to go in the opening round. Lying at the
base of the cage, Finney pushed away Santos with an upkick.
“Do
you want her up?” Winslow asked the champion.
Rather
than responding verbally, Santos lurched forward three steps
and sought to finish her challenger where she lay. Cyborg threw
a single punch that grazed the back of Finney’s head, though
only because she was diving for cover. As Finney covered up in
the fetal position, Santos glanced up at Winslow, seemingly asking
the official to halt the action. But no stoppage came, and Finney
rode out the final 30 seconds of the round on the mat, eating
more unanswered punches.
After
some examination from the cage-side physician, Finney was cleared
to enter the second round, which she started same as the first,
with her landing a single right hand to the champion’s face.
This time, however, she took several punches in return from Santos,
who now seemed to move with a justified sense of invincibility.
A stiff Santos jab sent Finney shooting on her knees, where she
stayed as Cyborg teed off with more punches. Winslow stood nearby,
closely watching the punishment and repeatedly instructing Finney
to fight back.
Cyborg
passed to Finney’s left and rained thunderous blows from
the knee-on-belly position. As Santos stood to stack her challenger,
Finney grabbed at a desperation heel hook. Santos easily stepped
out of the submission, prompting Winslow to issue her final stand-up
order of the night.
Somehow
still able to stand, Finney lobbed punches at Cyborg, who answered
with corking right hooks to her already-swollen left eye. The
fighters clinched and stalled; as they were restarted, Finney
continued to press forward, before being socked by a pair of
crisp left jabs.
Santos
smelled blood, fired off more punches and then laced her hands
around the back of Finney’s neck. Cyborg drove her right
knee sharply into Finney’s stomach, and the challenger collapsed
to the mat, prompting Winslow to wave off the match at 2:56 of
the second round. After all the battering she had taken above
the neck, it was a single, vicious knee that finally ended Finney’s
nightmare.
The
numbers from CompuStrike detail the dominance of Cyborg’s
performance: Santos scored six clean knockdowns to Finney’s
zero, landing more than six times as many total strikes (141
to 23). Still, statistics cannot explain everything. On June
26, it took Santos’ unrelenting brutality and killer instinct,
combined with Finney’s granite chin and oversized heart,
to produce the most sensational beatdown of the year.
Sherdog’s
Upset of the Year
By Jason Probst
It
did not look like the hotel room of a guy preparing to face the
“Baddest Man on the Planet,” one who had ruled the
heavyweight division for seven years.
But
in the days and hours leading into his showdown with Fedor Emelianenko
in Strikeforce on June 26 in San Jose, Calif., Fabricio Werdum
hardly played the part of a nerves-frayed underdog as he killed
off the final hours. Playing a soccer game on his beloved Xbox
-- a pastime at which Werdum is quite good, according to his
manager, Richard Wilner -- the Brazilian took on all comers.
“Fabricio
had a huge entourage of lifetime friends who came in on their
own dime, from Spain and Brazil, and his sister came in from
London,” said Wilner. “He doesn’t go into isolation
before a fight. I almost go into isolation as a manager. In Fabricio’s
room, three mattresses were on the floor to give more seating.
He’d be playing soccer games and beating everyone. He loves
having family and friends around. It’s just who he is as
a person.”
It
was not supposed to happen this way -- the most impressive win
streak in MMA history being snuffed out in 69 seconds. That is
precisely why Werdum’s submission of Emelianenko -- Sherdog’s
“Upset of the Year” for 2010 -- sent shockwaves across
the world, as the longtime heavyweight king, at last, looked
human.
“Mentally,
I was in a great place for the fight,” said Werdum, who
went off as a 10-1 underdog at fight time. “I trained a
lot. I did a good job getting ready in the gym. In the future,
if we have a rematch, I think I’ll do the same thing to
him that I did the first time.”
Going
into his showdown with the Russian, Werdum was perceived as cannon
fodder being served up amidst much larger battles taking place.
With
ongoing wrangling between Strikeforce, Fedor’s M-1 handlers
and the occasional media feeding frenzy hinting at a possible
UFC signing of the game’s biggest prize, it was almost an
afterthought that Werdum would politely and dutifully play his
role in serving up another highlight-reel win for “The Last
Emperor.”
Somebody
forgot to tell Werdum.
On
the heels of a businesslike submission of Mike Kyle, the two-time
Brazilian jiu-jitsu world champion felt better than he had in
years, thanks to coming in at an exceptionally light 228 pounds.
Often weighing in the 240 range or higher, Werdum’s quickness
was noticeably improved coming into the Kyle bout, and he scaled
238 for the Fedor bout.
“We
were 120 percent convinced we were going to win the fight, because
the mental and physical preparation came [together] perfectly,”
Wilner said. “Fabricio was already convinced he won the
fight as camp started. The victory in and of itself was not a
surprise, but, to be perfectly honest, I think everyone but Fabricio
was surprised it was so fast. Nutrition was a big part of it.
Unlike years past where he weighed in [heavier], he’s more
fluid, faster and more flexible when he’s lighter. It’s
a better weight for him.”
In
the opening moments of the bout, the script seemingly played
out as almost everyone expected. Style-wise, Werdum seemed a
perfectly reasonable facsimile of Emelianenko rival Antonio Rodrigo
Nogueira, the former Pride Fighting Championships titleholder
whose submission prowess and toughness only subjected him to
extended beatings as the Russian simply overpowered him.
Emelianenko
opened with his trademark stalking style, inching forward, with
Werdum yielding slightly, wary of the inevitable storm of blows.
At 25 seconds in, Emelianenko exploded, unleashing a six-punch
combination as Werdum missed his own return combination and fell
to the ground.
Emelianenko
pounced, and, then, as suddenly as it began, the momentum shifted
wildly in Werdum’s direction as he gripped Russian’s
right arm, signaling the beginning of the end. In the game of
MMA, even the great ones like Emelianenko will find themselves
outmatched in the endless minutia of positions, angles and tactics;
it is up to the other guy to exploit it, and Werdum did just
that.
“The
triangle is a position I’ve trained for a long time. I have
long legs, and it’s a technique I can use,” Werdum
said. “People always try to exchange with Fedor, so for
this fight, I used it as a setup to pull the fight to the ground.
I felt his right hand come and then sat. It didn’t hit me.
Then I could drop and pull him into my game.”
Moments
later, after sinking the triangle, Werdum coaxed what will go
down as the most memorable tapout in the sport’s history,
signaling an end to a phenomenal streak. What ensued signified
much more than the first definitive defeat of Emelianenko’s
career -- a controversial cut stoppage in 2000 was his first,
since avenged over Tsuyoshi Kosaka. Werdum’s triangle submission
resonated on multiple levels, its aftereffects touching virtually
everyone involved.
Werdum’s
career, seemingly lost in the roster of Strikeforce contenders,
suddenly catapulted. Emelianenko’s tortuous dance with Strikeforce
and, occasionally, the UFC, took a wildly different turn, as
his M-1 representatives suddenly found themselves with a significantly
diminished negotiating hand, no
longer in possession of the game’s biggest free-agent prize.
Strikeforce,
freed from the endless process of trying to secure Emelianenko’s
services in long-term fashion, switched away from that headache-inducing
pursuit to focus on other weight classes and developing talent.
Whatever the UFC offered Fedor during the last round of failed
negotiations is something only the parties intimately involved
know, but whatever it was, any future number will be nowhere
close to it.
Perhaps
most importantly, Werdum’s win signaled a passing of the
torch, of sorts, at least in the psychic sense -- long limited
to the hardcore fans on account of his mercurial promotional
affiliations and preference for overseas bookings, Emelianenko
nonetheless remained the unquestioned best in the heavyweight
division. His defeat signified, at least, some room for other
names in the conversation.
Contacted
through representatives, Fedor offered a simple take on the bout.
“I
made a mistake. I rushed to try and end the fight early, and
Fabricio took advantage,” he said. “I am human like
everyone else. I hope to fight Fabricio again, and, if it is
God’s will, I will win the next fight.”
While
other upset wins in 2010 were noteworthy feats, namely 8-1 long
shot Frankie Edgar’s decision over B.J. Penn in their April
bout -- Edgar repeated the trick as a mere 3-1 underdog in the
August rematch -- Werdum’s victory surpasses that one clearly
for several reasons.
First,
it was a definitive triumph, unlike the decision some felt should
have gone to Penn in the United Arab Emirates. Second, while
Penn is clearly the greatest lightweight in the history of the
sport, his consistency and commitment have been much-chronicled
question marks. Emelianenko’s remain the gold standard.
That is why Werdum’s win was “Upset of the Year”
for 2010 and, perhaps, the decade.
Sherdog’s
Breakthrough Fighter of the Year
By Chris Nelson
It
is hard to imagine any fighter having a better year, both inside
and outside of the cage, than Anthony Pettis had in 2010.
As
the calendar turned, Pettis was coming off the first loss of
his career, still a relative unknown in the 155-pound ranks of
World Extreme Cagefighting. Twelve months later, the man they
call “Showtime” -- Sherdog’s “Breakthrough
Fighter of the Year” for 2010 -- is a burgeoning superstar
on his way into the UFC with a guaranteed shot at MMA’s
most prestigious lightweight title.
But
first things first: “The Kick.” Everyone wants to talk
about the kick.
On
Dec. 16 in Glendale, Ariz., in the final fight of the final WEC
show before the promotion was folded into the UFC, Pettis challenged
lightweight champion Benson Henderson. That fact alone was hard
for the 23-year-old Milwaukeean to wrap his head around.
“Even
just fighting Ben Henderson, for me, was an honor,” Pettis
tells Sherdog.com. “I’ve seen him fight so many times,
and I know his walk-out. When I was in the cage and I heard his
music coming out, I was, like, ‘Man, I’m really about
to fight Ben Henderson.’”
And
fight Ben Henderson he did. For 24 minutes, the pair battled
tooth-and-nail, each man coming close to finishing the other
at multiple points during the thrilling, seesaw title bout. But
with 60 seconds left on the clock, the outcome still hung very
much in the balance.
That
is when it happened.
Stalking
his enemy, Pettis fired off a right high kick. Henderson absorbed
the shot with his arm and leaned wearily against the cage before
circling off to his right. Pettis leaned in, shuffled forward
and then launched himself off the cage into the air with his
right foot, before swinging the same appendage around to smack
Henderson square across the face. The champion fell over like
a sawed tree and spent the final minute of the fight clinging
to consciousness as Pettis bombarded him with punches.
“We
did it in tae kwon do demos. Obviously, I’d never did it
to a moving object before, but we would jump off of someone’s
back and break a board,” says Pettis, who adapted the move
for the cage in practice with trainer Duke Roufus. “I don’t
even think [Duke] thought I would throw that kick in a title
fight, in the last minute. I guess it was just a clutch kick,
man.”
Far
beyond clutch, the “Showtime” kick cemented Pettis’
place as the final WEC lightweight champion. In the blink of
an eye, the off-the-wall maneuver had changed Pettis’ life
and, perhaps, even MMA itself.
“Everyone
in the world who saw that fight witnessed the evolution of fight
sport right there,” says UFC heavyweight Patrick Barry,
Pettis’ training partner and close friend. “Now that
it happened, there are guys out there -- and women who fight,
also, -- who’ve always had these ideas in mind, and it really
happened. And now they’re like, ‘Oh, s--t! It really
worked.’”
Footage
of Pettis’ spectacular kick landed everywhere from ESPN’s
Sportscenter to CNN. The UFC posted a 24-second snippet to its
official YouTube channel; in less than two weeks, it was viewed
nearly two million times. That does not count the hundreds of
thousands of views a myriad of unofficial uploads garnered, a
few of which have come from the kicker himself.
“I
watch it every day,” Pettis says. “Someone made a YouTube
video of it, like in slow-mo, and I wake up and watch it. It
just puts a smile on my face every time.”
Before
he could sit back and enjoy the fruits of his labor, however,
Pettis had to put in some serious work.
His
year began with a March bout against fellow up-and-comer Danny
Castillo at WEC 47. Three months earlier, Pettis had dropped
a razor-thin split decision to Bart Palaszewski, and although
it was his first defeat after a 9-0 career start, Pettis was
realistic about what back-to-back losses can mean for a fighter
in a Zuffa LLC-run organization. Determined to stay right where
he was, Pettis crushed Castillo with a head kick in the first
round, earning himself “Knockout of the Night” honors
and a tape-delayed spot on the live Versus broadcast.
Seven
weeks later, Pettis was back inside the blue cage, having stepped
up on short notice to face Alex Karalexis at WEC 48, in place
of an injured Zachary Micklewright. In a prelim that aired live
on Spike TV, Pettis assaulted Karalexis with kicks before submitting
the UFC veteran with a triangle choke in the second frame.
Pettis’
first main-card slot came in August, when he met Shane Roller
in the co-main event of WEC 50. In one of the year’s most
exciting WEC scraps, Pettis showed skills on both the feet and
the floor, out-striking Roller, as well as scoring multiple takedowns
on the three-time NCAA Division I All-American wrestler from
Oklahoma State. After winning the opening two periods, Pettis
found himself snared in a dramatic, late guillotine attempt;
he managed to reverse and slap a triangle choke on Roller, submitting
his opponent with less than 10 seconds on the clock.
While
Pettis would not fight again until his meeting with Henderson,
one of the most significant events of his year was about to take
place.
On
Sept. 27, MTV broadcast an episode of its documentary series
“World of Jenks,” in which documentarian Andrew Jenks
lived with and filmed Pettis in the lead-up to his fight against
Castillo. The result was a stirring half-hour of television that
told Pettis’ story -- his dedication to martial arts and
his struggle to make good following the tragic murder of his
father in 2003 -- to a theretofore unaware audience.
“I
honestly didn’t think my life was that inspiring,”
confides Pettis, who saw a groundswell of support from new fans
on social media outlets such as Facebook and Twitter when the
episode aired. “Honestly, after the ‘World of Jenks’
show ... I thought that was the highlight. I thought that, pretty
much, that was the most feedback I’d get. But, I mean, after
this kick, this tops that, for sure.”
Now,
according to Barry, he can hardly leave the house without being
recognized.
“I
walk around Milwaukee every day, all day, at night, and no one
knows who I am,” Barry says. “But Anthony? Can’t
go anywhere. People know him, not all over just Milwaukee, all
over America, man. All over the world, people know this guy.”
When
Showtime took some well-earned downtime following his title win,
Pettis began to fully grasp how widespread his celebrity was
becoming.
“I
just went on vacation in the Bahamas, and the locals there were
recognizing me,” says Pettis. “I was on a cruise and
we got off the ship, and the first guy I walked past, he recognizes
me. He’s like, ‘You’re the guy that did the kick
off the wall!’”
Right
now, countless people know Pettis as “the guy that did the
kick of the wall,” but the way Barry tells it, the world
has only seen the tip of the Showtime iceberg, just a shred of
what this ever-evolving young man can do.
“Let’s
say the kick never happened. That entire fight, beginning to
end, was art,” says Barry. “I’m not saying this
because he’s my teammate. This guy gives me the chills.
He’s the kind of guy that makes me think, ‘I need to
get out of this sport as quick as possible, because they got
people growing up doing this s--t now? I need to get out while
I still can before something like this happens to me.’ This
is an entire different species of fighter.”
Sherdog’s
Round of the Year
By Jordan Breen
Sherdog.com’s
“Round of the Year” for 2010 did not take place where
one would expect.
The
most scintillating back-and-forth did not inhabit a plush Las
Vegas venue on The Strip or an attractive, newly minted multi-sport
arena in a major U.S. city. It did not play out before tens of
thousands of eyes at the beloved Saitama Super Arena or before
mere thousands of eyes in the cozy, hallowed halls of iconic
Korakuen Hall.
Instead,
it somehow seems bizarrely fitting that over 2,300 miles away
from Canada’s fight capital of Montreal, on June 20, two
Canadians -- Mark Hominick and Yves Jabouin -- would pace and
palpitate the hearts of a crowd in the Great White North’s
most mocked major city.
WEC
49 taking place in Edmonton was a slight surprise from jump street.
In spite of Edmonton’s strong grassroots MMA promotions,
such as the Maximum Fighting Championship and The Fight Club,
as well as Zuffa’s explicit love for Canada and its MMA
fans, it hardly seemed like a desired location. The city, oft-labeled
“Deadmonton” by Canadians, is typically viewed as the
ugly little sister of nearby Calgary. Its history is a harrowing
one. An emerging oil city in the 1960s and 1970s, construction
boomed as it built high-rises, condos and sports arenas. Then,
the oil boom of 1982 struck. Workers left, population growth
screeched to a halt, and fancy, new office buildings were left
vacant, like a ghost metropolis.
The
city was left with just one thing: sports. However, 1982 was
the last of five straight Grey Cups for the Canadian Football
League’s Edmonton Eskimos; they would win just twice more
in the next two decades. In 1988 came the Coup de Grâce,
as beloved hockey icon Wayne Gretzky was traded from the Edmonton
Oilers to the Los Angeles Kings. Though the Oilers would go on
to another Stanley Cup win in 1990, in the minds of most Canadians
outside the city, this single act marks a turning point in which
Edmonton completely morphed into a depressing tale of a city
crushed in chrysalis, with millions of jilted lovers wondering
when Wayne would come back and make everything OK again.
Though
these imaginations are obviously hyperbolic, few would expect
Edmonton’s Rexall Place, a nearly 40-year-old arena -- a
fossil by the current standards of sports venues -- to play host
to MMA greatness. Yet, the second round served up by Hominick
and Jabouin was a thrill-a-second, 201 of them to be exact, regardless
of Rexall’s rep as Deadmonton’s dump.
The
opening round of Hominick-Jabouin was impressive in its own right,
as Jabouin landed a bevy of hard low kicks, while Hominick slowly
got his clean right crosses and lefts to the body stewing. However,
the second stanza simply took the action to another level.
The
dynamic was similar, as Hominick pumped his jab and landed right
crosses, while Jabouin landed sharp low kicks. However, the pace
was extraordinary, as both men threw with a volume and tempo
that made it seem like they were in a video game. When Hominick
dug into Jabouin with his left hook to the liver, Jabouin cracked
him with a spinning back fist. When Hominick landed two left
hooks to the body, Jabouin returned to kicks to the guts. It
was a vivid illustration of tit-for-tat, blow-for-blow. However,
the visual was not the only sensory impression; the audio of
the hard cracks and smacks of bone and flesh were audible throughout
the arena, renowned for its loudness.
Hominick
then showed off the kind of handiwork imparted on him by longtime
trainer Shawn Tompkins, as he smacked Jabouin with a right cross
and faked a left hook up top. The speed of Hominick’s feint
caused Jabouin to shell up, and Hominick dipped his shoulder
and smashed his hook into the tip of Jabouin’s liver. Jabouin
crumpled into the fence, and Hominick pounced, pelting him with
punches while referee Vern Gorman looked in closely.
The
left to the body is prizefighting’s unique poison, leaving
the victim sentient but usually paralyzed. And yet, under fire,
a wounded “Tiger” somehow got back to his feet against
the cage. He tried to fight back, abating Hominick’s attack
with a hard spinning elbow. However, the maneuver simply allowed
Hominick to momentarily take his back and deliver more punishment.
Jabouin
fought back to his feet. Wobbly and desperate, he launched a
sweeping left uppercut. Hominick easily avoided the uppercut
but did not see the follow-up right hook coming.
Jabouin’s
right collided with Hominick’s face with shocking impact,
dropping the Ontarian to the canvas and turning up the decibel
level of the Rexall Place even louder, as it seemed he might
be moments away from a tremendous comeback.
Jabouin
dove into Hominick’s guard with sweeping punches, looking
to close the show, but Hominick gained wrist control and threatened
with an armbar to stem Jabouin’s offense. Suddenly, when
it looked like the frenetic pace might lull momentarily, Hominick
dug under Jabouin’s thigh and pulled off a textbook pendulum
sweep, just as smoothly as you would see in an instructional.
“The
Machine” took full mount and did not look back. Hominick
smashed Jabouin to the head, all while maintaining his stand-up
sensibilities, landing crushing rights and lefts into the sternum
of Jabouin while perched on top of him. The body blows from mount
seems to take the last bit of starch out of Jabouin, who could
simply no longer keep up with the torrid pace and offense of
Hominick. Hominick punched and punched and punched until Gorman
had seen enough, halting the bout at 3:21 of the frame.
Typically,
great rounds are built solely on rollercoaster violence and the
sheer awe that so much action could be packed into a five-minute
period. Yet, Hominick and Jabouin needed just over half a round
to stage this year’s finest. To be sure, it had the sudden,
shocking swings in action, the near-stoppages that typically
mark great rounds. However, what really set it apart from its
contemporaries was the tempo and technique of the action delivered.
In
just 201 seconds, Hominick and Jabouin threw 124 strikes. That’s
37 strikes per minute; April’s wild slugfest between Leonard
Garcia and Chan Sung Jung averaged about 26.8 strikes per minute.
And yet, Hominick-Jabouin was, technically speaking, the exact
opposite of Garcia-Jung. There was no rapacious headhunting or
blind windmilling of punches. Every Jabouin low kick and spinning
back fist, every Hominick right cross and left hook to the body,
was thrown true and proper but with a staggering rapidity.
Hominick
and Jabouin might have been two Canadian fighters in front of
a Canadian audience, but that night in Edmonton, they seemed
more like Italian conductors, and their tempo was nothing less
than prestissimo, prestissimo con fuoco.
As
for Edmonton, five days later, its Oilers selected Taylor Hall
first overall in the 2010 NHL Entry Draft. Hall has joined a
cast of fellow scintillating youngsters in Edmonton. Despite
still being on a bottom-five team, they are starting to amaze
on the ice and giving Edmontonians hope for a future where thrills
at Rexall Place -- thrills like the kind Hominick and Jabouin
produced -- are more commonplace, especially in the month of
June, when Lord Stanley’s Cup is awarded.
Sherdog’s
Robbery of the Year
By Tristen Critchfield
“This
man just fought his heart out, and he’s not a judge”
-- UFC color analyst Joe Rogan
Leonard
Garcia fights with an unparalleled sense of urgency each time
he steps into the cage, but his trademark style (read: throwing
big looping punches at every opportunity, cardio and accuracy
be damned) seems to confound mixed martial arts judges.
In
2010 alone, all three of his fights featured scorecards that
raised eyebrows in the MMA community. His split decision triumph
over Chan Sung Jung at WEC 48 drew boos when it was announced.
While few would dispute the fact that Mark Hominick got the best
of Garcia at WEC 51, one judge curiously saw the fight 29-28
in favor of the Lubbock, Texas, native, making their bout a closer-than-expected
split verdict.
The
most egregious scoring error, however, might have come at “The
Ultimate Fighter 12” Finale in December, when, to the surprise
of Garcia, his corner and virtually everyone else in attendance
at the Palms Casino Resort in Las Vegas, the “Bad Boy”
was awarded an early Christmas gift against Nam Phan.
The
unsatisfying resolution was par for the course in 2010. Fights
like B.J. Penn-Frankie Edgar 1, Sean Sherk-Evan Dunham and Quinton
Jackson-Lyoto Machida have transformed the adage “don’t
leave it in the hands of the judges” into gospel.
In
the minds of many, Garcia-Phan was simply the icing on the cake.
The backlash following Garcia’s controversial split decision
win included a cascade of bulls--t chants from the fans in the
immediate aftermath, a flood of hate mail directed at the Nevada
State Athletic Commission and some vitriol from Rogan on the
MMA Underground forum.
Such
an overwhelming negative reaction helps make the first-ever televised
featherweight bout in UFC history Sherdog.com’s “Robbery
of the Year” for 2010.
“After
every card, there’s usually someone complaining about someone
getting robbed -- the Machida-Jackson fight that happened a few
weeks before this fight. It happened with [Randy] Couture and
[Brandon] Vera [at UFC 105]. It happened with a lot of fights,”
said NSAC Executive Director Keith Kizer. “To me, it just
shows really good, competitive matches being made. Not that the
judges don’t make mistakes; of course they do. It’s
amazing how every other fight’s a robbery, according to
some fan or another.”
The
judges who oversaw the action for Garcia-Phan were Adelaide Byrd,
Tony Weeks and Junichiro Kamijo. Two of the three would see a
very different fight than the majority of viewers.
The
first round began with Garcia firing away in typical fashion,
looking for a finish with powerful hooks and overhands. In what
would be a recurring theme, most of the Texan’s efforts
whiffed or glanced off Phan’s gloves and arms.
“That’s
like a style for rock throwing. It’s not like a punching
style. It’s so strange,” Rogan quipped.
The
Vietnamese-American was more efficient in the opening frame,
landing effective body shots and combinations while pressing
forward. Garcia fatigued quickly and moved backward instead of
circling in the round’s later stages, something trainer
Greg Jackson pointed out in the corner once the bell sounded.
What looked like a 10-9 round for Phan was given to Garcia by
Byrd and Weeks.
According
to Garcia, the weeks leading up to the fight provided enough
uncertainty to affect the Jackson’s Mixed Martial Arts product’s
training. As the airing of Season 12 of “The Ultimate Fighter”
was coming to a close, Garcia agreed to face Tyler Toner at the
finale. Toner, who trains at Denver’s Grudge Training Center,
was moved to a bout against Ian Loveland on just a week-and-a-half’s
notice. Garcia, meanwhile, looked to be without an opponent.
“We
weren’t getting ready for anything. We thought we weren’t
going to fight until February,” he said. “They called
me six days before Thanksgiving and told me, ‘No, you’re
definitely fighting. We just can’t tell you who it’s
against.’ It was kind of a crazy situation. Going into a
big card like the UFC not knowing who you’re gonna fight
is something you’re not used to. It definitely weighed on
me a little bit.”
The
lack of conditioning, as Garcia himself would admit, continued
affect him, as well.
Early
in second round, Garcia pressed forward, landing punches, leg
kicks and even scoring a rare double-leg takedown. Once Phan
returned to his feet, “The Ultimate Fighter” Season
12 semi-finalist took over, connecting with an uppercut that
had Garcia reeling against the fence. Phan continued to batter
his opponent with punches before flooring Garcia with a spectacular
side kick to the ribcage. From there, the karate black belt attempted
to lock in a rear-naked choke, but Garcia survived as the round
expired.
Coming
in, Garcia had only been finished once in 21 professional appearances,
and Phan’s inability to do so in his most dominant round
eventually proved to be his undoing.
“You
can’t get careless,” Phan said. “I shouldn’t
have left it in the hands of the judges. It’s a lot harder
to finish someone than you think. I hit him with some good shots.”
The
bout’s final round was also its closest. An exhausted Garcia
continued to swing away. A cut opened up on Phan’s head
early, but the Sengoku veteran said Garcia rarely landed anything
significant.
“That
was from him hitting me, hitting my glove and my knuckles hitting
my head. That caused a cut,” he said.
Garcia
also attempted another takedown, something he would later credit
for swaying the scorecards in his favor. Phan, though slightly
less aggressive than in earlier rounds, continued to mount a
solid offense using jabs and body shots. As time expired, the
reactions of the fighters were a study in contrasts: Garcia,
looking weary, headed to his corner with eyes downcast, while
Phan, looking fresh, raised his arms in what he assumed was inevitable
triumph.
Those
who watched that night already know Phan’s cruel reality.
Byrd and Weeks scored the bout 29-28 for Garcia, while Kamijo
scored it 30-27 for Phan. After the head-scratching scores were
announced, Phan turned toward his coaches with arms spread and
palms up in an expression of utter disbelief.
“I
don’t see how Leonard beat me any of the rounds,” Phan
said. “I watched it again, and it was like he threw a lot,
but [even] cosmetically [when] you throw a lot of punches, you’ve
still got to hit the guy.”
On
the opposite side of referee Herb Dean, Garcia let out a yell,
recognizing that fortune had smiled upon him.
“I
wasn’t happy with my performance. Nobody likes to win a
fight like that. It was a bittersweet thing, and it felt like
I had a lot of questions to answer,” he said.
A
few feet to Garcia’s left, Jackson momentarily looked as
shocked as Phan.
“Some
people thought that Leonard was more aggressive the first and
third rounds, but I wanted Leonard to do more to win the fight,”
Jackson said.
Ultimately,
swinging for the fences proved to be the right strategy, and
one Garcia plans on continuing to utilize.
“I’ve
worked my style into a judge-favoring position. It makes sense
to me not to ever sit back, not to ever wait on the guy to do
something. I always try to push forward, and I always try to
finish the fight with punches,” Garcia said.
For
most everyone else, the logic of those sitting cage-side does
not seem so clear.
Source:
Sherdog
|
Many
UFC wheels in motion for Lesnar & dos Santos on The Ultimate
Fighter
By Zach
Arnold
There’s a lot to look at when it comes to the concept of
Brock Lesnar and Junior dos Santos as coaches on the next season
of The Ultimate Fighter.
The
immediate reaction to this is that Lesnar will somehow be a terrible
coach. The problem with that theory is that when you look at
the coaching staff Brock will likely bring with him on the show,
it’s going to be a great staff. Marty Morgan, Erik Paulson,
and Rodrigo “Comprido” Medeiros. These are trainers
who command respect and deserve it. I have no doubt that the
fighters on the show, whatever level they will be coming in at
(the show is all Welterweights this season), will learn plenty
and get better. The same for the team of coaches Junior will
bring into the mix.
I
think UFC being able to deliver Brock Lesnar for The Ultimate
Fighter will certainly put the pressure on Spike TV to pony up
big bucks for a new deal with the UFC. After all, Lesnar and
dos Santos are going to draw very high ratings. Will they match
the ratings that Rampage and Rashad did with Kimbo? I don’t
know, but it will be close.
What
makes this situation interesting is that the fight they are building
up towards will happen in June in Vancouver. Brock’s history
in the UFC is that he draws enormous PPV buys but is not necessarily
a strong live house attraction. Given that UFC does well in Canada,
the live house portion won’t be such an issue. The more
intriguing issue is how hated Lesnar will be in Canada given
his very public comments about how much he hates their health
care system. Believe me, this will be echoed ad nauseum leading
up to the fight.
There
may be some irony here as well with this fight taking place in
Vancouver. Vancouver is where Chuck Liddell has his last fight
and got sent into retirement by Rich Franklin. Could dos Santos
do the same thing to Brock?
Dave
Meltzer sees all upside and no downside to Brock & dos Santos
as coaches on the next season of The Ultimate Fighter:
“He’s
going and it wasn’t easy negotiations but, um, at the end
of the day like we said Brock’s a businessman and I think
they were able to convince that doing this…
“There’s
a lot of upsides for everyone, I mean this is like a no-lose
situation for all concerned. I’m amazed at any negativity
towards this because it’s, you know, obviously it was the
optimum decision which is the question is they could actually
could pull off getting Brock to do the show, that was always
the problem. But with 13 weeks of television or 12 weeks or whatever
it turns out to be with Brock and Dos Santos, Dos Santos is going
to end up being a very well-liked guy and a much bigger star
for a fight with Brock than if they had just done the fight cold
and, you know, Brock gets TV. It’s going to be airing the
same time his book comes out, which we had pointed out was a
perfect thing for him doing this season of Ultimate Fighter.
You know, the June 11th date is a tough one and again because
of the traveling as far as like the book promotion, I don’t
know what the details are on that because the people involved
like really just found out, so… we’ll probably more
on that in a day or two.
“But,
you know, as far as um, you know, he’s going to be on TV
every week. The show’s going to get good ratings. It builds
up a fight. The fight with Junior, with that 13 week build-up,
may do a hell of a number. I could see, you know it’s hard
to throw out a number right now. It ain’t going to do, I
can’t imagine it doing less than 750,000 and you know I
mean if there’s the right conflict and things like that
because we’re talking about a season of Ultimate Fighter
that’s going to be doing I would think bigger ratings than
this last season and, you know, you got Brock who’s a draw
going you know in a match where the winner gets the title and
the other thing is that you know originally Brock was told that
he would need two wins, which is another key thing, he would
need two wins to get the championship match and now he only needs
one and that basically was not thrown in there as a way to get
him to take the fight, that is just how things, you know, people
will talk about favoritism and it has nothing to do with that.
It has to do with the fact that Cain Velasquez got hurt and Junior
dos Santos could have sat and said, I’ll wait for my title
shot. Junior did not want to do that and the only logical fight
would be, I guess you could say Carwin would have been a logical
fight but Brock’s more logical than Carwin since Brock beat
Carwin and um… and again with Carwin coming back from the
back injury, although you I don’t know how much he would
have been able to coach because again the coaching starts in
a couple of weeks, so Carwin couldn’t have done the show.
But the point is is that like it’s, as far as the match
goes, it’s the you know it’s the logical match to make
for a number one contendership and whoever wins is the rightful
number one contender. dos Santos is going to be either a huge,
I would think that a combination of doing this show and beating
Brock will lead to dos Santos and Cain being a much, much bigger
fight than it would have been elsewise. If Lesnar wins, Lesnar
and Cain you know coming off of this show, I can’t see it
doing less than 1.2 million buys and that’s probably a low
estimate.
“So,
I just see the whole thing as a positive unless somebody gets
hurt or something silly happens that screws it all up, but on
paper it’s awesome.”
Source:
Fight Opinion
|
UFC
Stands By Jacob Volkmann After Controversial Comments
by Damon
Martin
The
comments that UFC lightweight Jacob Volkmann made recently about
President Barack Obama have now landed the Minnesota fighter
on administrative leave from his job as an assistant head coach
of the wrestling program at White Bear Lake High School.
Volkmann,
who was also visited by Secret Service agents for his comments,
was informed of the school’s decision to place him on leave
while they research further into the issue, and decide what his
fate will ultimately be.
“They
put me on administrative leave they called it,” Volkmann
told MMAWeekly.com on Wednesday. “They said I was representing
the school in a bad way, and during the interview I mentioned
the President is an idiot. They were a little upset about that.
“They’re
actually reviewing it and they’ve got a case on it. They’re
doing a report on it. No timeframe, she said she was going to
give me a call, she had to talk to the superintedent first and
she had to talk to the school board.”
When
Volkmann made the comment, he admits he never imagined it would
put him in the national spotlight the way that it has. He appeared
on the Fox Business Network earlier this week, and will have
a crew from Inside Edition coming out to film with him on Thursday.
Whether
anyone agrees with his statements or not, Volkmann like all Americans
falls under the First Amendment which protects the right to Free
Speech, and he believes that everyone is overreacting to what
he said.
“There’s
too many people that are too sensitive out there, that’s
what the deal is. You can’t joke around about politics.
I guess you’re definitely not supposed to have an opinion
about certain policies that effect you,” Volkmann said.
“Last
I checked we’re not in the Soviet Union.”
While
one set of employers were angry enough with Volkmann to suspend
him, another employer namely the UFC has no problem with anything
he’s done to this point.
“I talked to Monte (Cox) and Monte talked to the UFC and
Joe Silva, and he said they’re not upset about it. They’re
with me on this one,” Volkmann commented.
Volkmann
doesn’t plan on walking away from the situation with the
school or backing down from his comments about the President’s
policies. If anything this has fueled him to speak out more.
“I’m
a little irritated with the school thing, but I’m not going
to let it go,” Volkmann said. “I’m going to keep
on the issue. It’s not even really the issue with getting
my job back, I think there’s certain members of the school
board that’s upset that I’m against the policies of
the President.”
Volkmann
will film with Inside Edition on Thursday and then wait to hear
from the White Bear Lake school board about his administrative
leave.
Source:
MMA Weekly
|
Fedor
Compares Strikeforce Grand Prix to Pride: “It’s Just
as Good, If Not Better”
by Damon
Martin
It started on April 25, 2004.
The
Pride Heavyweight Grand Prix. At the time, it was widely considered
one of the best gatherings of heavyweight talent in the MMA world,
if not the greatest. The eventual winner was former No. 1 heavyweight
Fedor Emelianenko, who will also be a participant in the upcoming
Strikeforce Heavyweight Grand Prix kicking off Feb. 12 in New
Jersey.
Emelianenko
is the only participant in the upcoming Strikeforce tournament
who was also a part of the Pride Heavyweight Grand Prix over
six years ago.
Despite
the legendary field of 16 heavyweights in that tournament, Emelianenko
believes Strikeforce may have surpassed it with the crop of eight
fighters they have kicking off their own Heavyweight Grand Prix
in 2011.
“I
believe that this tournament has assembled enough quality fighters
and some of the strongest and most interesting heavyweight fighters
in the world. So I think that in no way is this tournament any
less than the ones I competed for with Pride,” said Emelianenko.
“I
believe it’s just as good, if not better.”
Strong
words from the fighter who would gain his fame and prestige from
his time in the once great Japanese organization, but he feels
like the talent amassed by Strikeforce rivals or surpasses that
of the Pride days.
There
is no denying the tournament is filled with Top 10 fighters or
Top 10 level talent from top to bottom. Beyond Emelianenko, the
man who defeated him last year, Fabricio Werdum, as well as Strikeforce
heavyweight champion Alistair Overeem, make up three-fourths
of one side of the bracket.
On
the other side, perennial Top 10 fighter Josh Barnett sits in
the tournament as well as several fighters that have been ranked
among the best in the last few years, including former UFC heavyweight
champion Andrei Arlovski.
The
Strikeforce Heavyweight Grand Prix will kick off in February
with the first round match-ups between Emelianenko and Antonio
“Bigfoot” Silva as well as Andrei Arlovski against
Sergei Kharitonov.
While
his Pride days are long behind him, the mental preparation and
toughness that Fedor endured to get through the past Grand Prix
tournament can’t be ignored, but while he feels experience
is always important, it’s not going to get him through to
the finals.
“I
don’t think that the years I spent in Pride can give me
any type of advantage or dictate how I will perform in this tournament,”
said Emelianenko. “Certainly experience in this tournament
is something that is valuable. Nevertheless, I have to train
very hard for this fight and we’ll see what happens.”
The
tournament’s opening round fights will take place on Feb.
12 and then another event sometime in early April. Strikeforce
CEO Scott Coker said that the semifinal rounds will likely then
take place in June or July, with the finals happening after that,
although no timelines have been set.
Source:
MMA Weekly
|
The
Iceman: A Retrospective
Jeff Sherwood/Sherdog.com
The mohawk. The mustache. The backpedaling, screaming celebrations.
The
head kick. The wall walk. The overhand right.
Randy
Couture. Tito Ortiz. Wanderlei Silva.
A
fighter’s fighter. A UFC champion. An MMA icon.
There
are near endless ways for someone to remember Chuck Liddell.
His 12-year career is among MMA’s finest, as Liddell fought
and beat a veritable who’s who of the sport’s star-studded
light heavyweight division. Along the way, he turned in some
of the game’s most indelible memories, whether they were
triumphant wins, crushing defeats or classic battles. He became
MMA’s first true superstar in North America, his rise inextricable
and intimately intertwined with the rapid rise of the UFC and
MMA on the whole.
On
Dec. 29, “The Iceman” finally called it a career, hanging
up his four-ouncers and preparing to settle into a role as Zuffa
LLC’s executive vice president of business development.
As the 205-pound legend turns over a new leaf to the corporate
world, Sherdog.com staff members and contributors weigh in on
their most vivid memories, reflections and appraisals of Liddell’s
trials, triumphs and importance to MMA.
Jordan
Breen: UFC 43, just days after my 16th birthday, was my first
live UFC experience. The event was bizarre enough, between the
Frank Mir-Wes Sims debacle and Matt Lindland knocking himself
out. That was before the epically awful video intro Chuck got
courtesy of the late Charles “Mask” Lewis. The video
and subsequent Vanilla Ice metal remix left me in shock, a sense
that continued as I watched an afterthought underdog Randy Couture
dominate “The Iceman.” That night, I wondered if Liddell
might settle into a bridesmaid role, a Top 10 fighter who just
couldn’t get over the hump. If someone had showed me a vision
of the future -- ESPN The Magazine, “Entourage,” “Good
Morning Texas” and all the rest -- I’m not sure I would’ve
believed it. For me, the adversity Liddell faced en route to
becoming MMA’s first crossover superstar made it much sweeter
to watch.
Wojek
Rysiewski: Chuck had a remarkable role in elevating UFC’s
popularity in the U.S and will be undoubtedly remembered as one
of the legends of the sport. However, as a European, I always
viewed his accomplishments from a Pride-UFC rivalry perspective,
with Wanderlei Silva being his ultimate foe. Each of their wins
increased my hunger for this dream light heavyweight matchup.
Even though the fight finally happened when they were both past
their primes, I will never forget the moment they entered the
Octagon and Chuck gave the last highlight performance of his
career.
Jeff
Sherwood: Chuck was a people’s champion for his willingness
to fight and be there for the fans. Just look at his early fights.
Between fighting in the UFC, a 30-minute bareknuckle brawl with
Jose "Pele" Landi-Jons and taking bouts in small promotions
like Neutral Grounds, he proved that he just wanted to fight.
Money was not the goal then, or ever, for Chuck. I think that’s
why the fans fell in love with him. For me, part of it was influenced
by what I saw in Friant, Calif., in 2000, before he fought Steve
Heath. Watching Liddell run up and down the mountains in the
110-degree heat at the Table Mountain Casino to make weight was
impressive enough. The next night, he turned in one of the most
brutal head kick knockouts I’ve ever seen; to this day,
it’s still one of the worst I’ve witnessed. It was
a crazy scene, as Heath's wife tried to get into the cage to
make sure her man was alright. Chuck deserves to be called a
legend of the sport and deserves all the kickbacks he gets in
retirement.
Chris
Nelson: I never had a Mohawk, painted my nails or wheeled around
backward with my shirt off, arms splayed. Liddell’s image
in his prime was diametrically opposed to my own tastes as a
young man. Nonetheless, I can vividly recall watching his second
fight against Randy Couture with my younger brother and a bunch
of his friends. Their visceral, ecstatic reaction to The Iceman’s
win gave me my first true notion of what was to come for MMA
and just how crucial Liddell would be to the sport’s explosion.
My respect for Liddell grew to such an extent that I found myself
saddened when, in recent years, he would make headlines with
a speech-slurring talk show appearance or find himself on the
receiving end of a brutal knockout. Thank you, Chuck, and enjoy
your time behind the desk; you earned it.
Mike
Whitman: For me, UFC 52 marked the ultimate performance for The
Iceman. In 2005, Liddell’s Mohawked followers made me want
to smash things. Though I was in the minority, I was confident
that Randy Couture would once again put a fist in Liddell’s
face before hoisting him above his head and slamming Liddell
through the mat.
As
Chuck sidestepped a charging “Captain America,” the
action started to slow down in my mind. I could see the inevitable
coming. It was perfect -- a laser beam of a right hand that smashed
into Couture’s jawline, buckling his knees and causing my
own jaw to nearly unhinge. After that fight, I damn sure appreciated
his greatness every time he stepped in the cage. What a fighter,
and what a career.
Guilherme
Pinheiro: Looking back at Chuck’s career inevitably takes
me back to my college years, when I was just another law student
at University of Sao Paulo. I was just a fan, with no intention
of being involved in any way with MMA back then. I still remember
awaiting UFC 47 and can still recall the exact moment when one
of my buddies called me to go to a party that day. I said yes
but quickly remembered that Chuck was fighting that night. Because
I was afraid my friends would mock me if I told them the real
reason of why I would skip the party, I came up with an excuse
so I could stay home and watch the fight. That’s what Chuck
Liddell is to me, the kind of fighter that would keep you home
on a Saturday night just to watch him fight.
Traci
Ratzloff: I remember the awkward feeling when Liddell KO’d
Couture, not once but twice: bittersweet because The Natural
was taken down, especially with the questionable pinky, but exciting
that Liddell was the one to actually KO the All-American hero.
Also, I can’t help but recall the first Ortiz fight. The
bout was so long in the making that it almost felt like good
versus evil. Sorry, Tito. Remember all of Tito’s trash talking
that led up to the fight? Both of these athletes will forever
be remembered as two of the best characters ever pitted against
each other in this sport. Chuck, we will miss the excitement
and athleticism you brought to the cage. Few create the sense
of anticipation you did.
Tracey
Lesetar: Everyone remembers the first MMA fight they watched.
More likely, the true MMA fan remembers that feeling in their
fingertips when they saw their first really, really good finish
-- a spectacular blitzkrieg of fists and descending body weight
-- and realized they had an appetite for more. For me, Chuck
Liddell takes the honors on this one. Shortly after graduating
college, I found myself in some nameless Maryland bar with some
cronies I now rarely keep in touch with, watching UFC 40. When
I saw The Iceman land that staggering left kick on Renato Sobral’s
head that night in 2002 to finish him in the first round, my
light bulb went off. It was like seeing Santa Claus for the first
time. Liddell did two things for me. Once I had enough money
together and had my own apartment one month after UFC 40, I signed
up for my first martial arts class and have not stopped since.
And Chuck Liddell made me a loving and respectful fan of MMA.
There are few longstanding icons in this young sport, but Chuck
was one I always idolized. Thanks for the awakening.
Joseph
Myers: The record will state that Chuck Liddell lost five of
the final six fights of his career, including his last three
by knockout. That isn’t the Chuck Liddell I’ll remember.
I’ll remember the fighter who ran roughshod over the UFC’s
205-pound division, produced highlight-reel knockout after highlight-reel
knockout and helped usher in the modern era of mixed martial
arts. All good things must come to an end, but for me, The Iceman
will always remain frozen at the top of his game.
Tristen
Critchfield: By the time I interviewed Rashad Evans prior to
his date with Chuck Liddell at UFC 88, even the sports media
blowhard-types stuck in boxing’s golden era had to acknowledge
the exploits of The Iceman, thanks in large part to his stint
as a coach on “The Ultimate Fighter” and an ESPN The
Magazine cover. The soft-spoken Jackson’s MMA product spoke
of beating Liddell in his dreams, and striking coach Mike Winkeljohn
pointed out Liddell’s flaws as a counterpuncher, but it
still seemed unlikely that the UFC icon would falter against
Evans, who, at that point, might have been best known for drawing
the ire of Matt Hughes with his hot dogging on the second season
of TUF. I watched the fight at your typical UFC household gathering:
a mix of casual and serious fans who had all pitched in for the
cause of watching some violence in a social setting. The fact
that Evans’ shocking knockout of an MMA legend drew a collective
gasp from that particular audience was as much a testament to
Liddell’s status as an icon in the sport as it was to his
opponent’s display of skill.
J.R.
Riddell: Liddell became one of the first truly recognizable faces
of MMA and was readily identified by fans, casual observers and
even many would-be followers who had not yet experienced the
joy of MMA. Perhaps one of his biggest contributions to the sport
was to demonstrate that an MMA athlete can become iconic and
recognizable even to those not indoctrinated in MMA. In many
ways, Liddell served as an ambassador of the sport and surely
ushered in a host of new fans each time he appeared on a pay-per-view.
Of course his signature Mohawk and goatee went a long way to
establishing himself as a standout. And who can think of a Liddell
knockout without picturing his iconic and primal pose celebrating
his triumph over yet another opponent? That pose will forever
be immortalized as a piece of MMA iconography.
Matt
Pitt: I had never heard of Chuck Liddell before being dragged
to the Saitama Super Arena for a friend’s bachelor party
in 2003. I wasn’t an MMA fan and had no interest in becoming
one, but every fight that night was incredible. For the first
three minutes of their fight, Alistair Overeem beat Liddell around
the ring with punches and kicks. Suddenly, Chuck just exploded
in a flurry of punches, dropping the bigger fighter. I’ll
never forget Liddell’s bloody triumphant snarl as he stood
over Overeem. It will always be the face of MMA for me.
Ryan
O’Leary: On my first day of college, I stood alongside Chuck
Liddell as the Cal Poly wrestling coach welcomed new recruits.
To see Chuck’s rise from those pre-Mohawk days as a gritty
wrestler to becoming the face of “ultimate fighting”
has been unimaginable. The emerging sport was fortunate to have
a guy like Chuck to carry the MMA torch forward, because he was
a real fighter; not a technician or gifted athlete but a fighter.
It’s ironic that his persona carries with it fame, girls
and money, because he would just as well have fought in a Taco
Bell parking lot for free with nobody watching. He kept his roots
in San Luis Obispo, with many of the same college and wrestling
buddies at his side to this day. Chuck’s uniqueness goes
well beyond devastating right hands and head kicks. Cheers to
Chuck.
Greg
Savage: Chuck Liddell is one of the few fighters whose career
has spanned the entire 12-plus years I’ve covered MMA. I
remember sitting backstage with the future UFC champ back in
the late 1990s at a small show in California and was surprised
to find him as personable and intelligent as he was. Chuck was
a fixture in California, and being able to talk to him was a
great learning experience for a fairly green journalist just
getting into the sport. Despite becoming the first true MMA crossover
star from MMA, that affable disposition never changed. Then there
was the in-ring killer. The first time I saw him fight live was
July 18, 2000, and it is still one of the most brutal knockouts
I have ever seen. The Iceman crushed Steve Heath with a right
hand that froze him and then launched across the cage with a
huge head kick that left Heath unconscious for minutes. Years
later, Jeff Sherwood and I presented him with the 2006 Sherdog.com
“Fighter of the Year” award. He joked with us that
he would be the light heavyweight version of “Tank”
Abbott -- the old slugger who has a huge puncher’s chance,
even though everyone expects him to lose -- and that he would
have to be dragged out of the cage kicking and screaming. I know
this was probably the hardest decision Chuck has ever had to
make, but, in the end, he made the right choice.
Brian
Knapp: It might come off as a bit cliché, but Liddell’s
fight with Wanderlei Silva at UFC 79 will remain my enduring
memory of The Iceman. There was such a buildup for that particular
bout, and, somehow, they lived up to and exceeded those expectations,
even though both of them had clearly seen their better days,
diminished by their years in the cage and ring. It told you everything
you needed to know about them and why they were so revered by
fans, promoters and fellow martial artists. In a career filled
with great moments, Liddell’s victory over “The Axe
Murderer” is the one that sticks out for me. What I wouldn’t
give for rounds four and five.
Todd
Martin: The first time I attended a live UFC show was UFC 39
at the Mohegan Sun in Connecticut. I was still a college student,
and I arrived early to see if I could meet any fighters before
the show started. I saw Chuck Liddell standing by himself at
a relatively busy bar having a drink, and I went over and chatted
with him briefly. I always remember that encounter when I think
of Chuck Liddell, because to me, Liddell’s story is identical
to the story of the rise of the UFC. Here was the No. 1 contender
to the UFC’s most prestigious title, and, at the venue of
a UFC event, he was able to have a drink by himself. A few short
years later, he couldn’t go out in public without being
mobbed. Liddell and the UFC have come a long way.
Rodolfo
Ramon: Chuck Liddell is an ambassador to the sport. Although
quite amusing and comical, his sense of humor was evident when
he competed in the reality competition show “Dancing with
the Stars.” Despite coming up short, the knockout artist’s
presence on the show helped introduce the sport to those who
were not aware of MMA or had misconceptions about it. His moves
on the dance floor helped promote MMA on primetime national television,
and it let others know that the sport is not as violent as many
assume it is. I am sure Liddell’s new role will be a great
benefit for the sport and him.
Jack
Encarnacao: The night Chuck Liddell re-matched Tito Ortiz, I
remember how much more full the parking lot was outside of the
Boston-area bar-and-arcade where I watched many UFC pay-per-views.
It was the only time I had trouble finding a parking space at
one of these things. UFC 66 had brought out much more than the
standard motley crew of Tapout wearers. Despite the main event’s
limited relevance -- Ortiz, don’t forget, had earned the
title shot by beating Ken Shamrock twice -- it felt of a higher
magnitude. I knew Liddell was catching on culturally but not
to this degree. As Liddell stalked a wounded Ortiz around the
mat, punching him like a mother trying to catch and spank a rambunctious
child, the crowd’s full-throated roars told me exactly what
it was they came to see. UFC 66 was the first UFC event to break
the one million buy mark on pay-per-view. You could feel why
in the air, even on the other end of the country in a screening
area next to the laser tag room -- that guy with the Mohawk.
l's fight were must-see TV.
Luca
Fury: I’ll remember Chuck Liddell as MMA’s first big
mainstream superstar. I remember first realizing this when I
noticed my friends -- who weren’t even so much as casual
MMA fans -- bringing up his name. I would try to make them fans
of MMA, and when I had asked them if they’d like to come
over to watch an upcoming UFC event, they would always ask if
The Iceman was fighting. If Chuck was slated for the event, they
wouldn’t miss it; if Chuck was not on the card, however,
they couldn’t care less. They didn’t want to see a
sporting event. They didn’t care about the spectacle of
violence that comes with MMA. All they cared about was whether
they were going to see Chuck “The Iceman” Liddell.
Rodney
Dean: The first time I ever laid eyes on Chuck was while watching
some reality TV show set in a casino. They were taking one of
the “whales” to a UFC event, and he really wanted to
see Chuck. I thought, “What’s so special about this
goofy-looking guy?” Well, he knocked out Vernon “Tiger”
White that night, and many others followed suit.
Funny
thing is, after he beat Tito for the second time, I remember
actually being bored with how good he was. Seven wins in a row,
and it never seemed like it would end. Hard to believe that was
only a few years ago.
Cameron
Conaway: I’ll always remember the time when I walked in
the classroom to begin teaching a lesson on poetry and saw three
of my students now had Mohawks. I asked why, and they said because
of Chuck Liddell. I knew then that he had completely pushed MMA
into the mainstream.
Mike
Sloan: One time, Slayer came here to the Orleans Arena in Las
Vegas, with Lamb of God and Children of Bodom. Chuck was borderline
devastated because his camp, in particular John Lewis, didn’t
want him getting into any shenanigans during preparation for
his rematch with “Babalu” and forbade him from going
to the show. Naturally, before Slayer came on, the big screen
was looping awesome race crashes, explosions and Liddell highlight
footage. But nothing tops the time when Slayer played at the
House of Blues, not long after Liddell’s loss to Randy Couture
in 2003. A fan ran up to Chuck, shook his hand and shouted, “Dude!
Randy! I’m a huge fan! I’m so glad you kicked Chuck
Lie-Dell’s ass! I won so much money off you! Thank you!”
All Chuck could do was stand there with a stunned, bemused look
on his face and say, “Hey, no problem, man. Thanks.”
Absolutely classic.
Marcelo
Alonso: As a Brazilian, I’ve got interesting memories of
“Homem de Gelo.” Liddell faced six Brazilians -- some
of the country’s greatest ever -- and beat four of them:
Jose Landi-Jons, Murilo Bustamante, Renato Sobral and Wanderlei
Silva. His only loss was to Mauricio Rua at UFC 97. I’ve
always been fascinated by Liddell, one of most aggressive and
exciting fighters I’ve ever seen. My fascination started
in August 1998, when he came to Brazil to face “Pele”
under vale tudo rules. Pele was already considered the biggest
local star in Brazil. In that 30-minute bloody fight, Chuck showed
his cold nerves and clearly beat Pele in front of all his fans.
I knew that a special fighter was being born in front of my eyes.
Scott
Holmes: You never forget your first. Mine was UFC 22. Paul Jones
was about to run through some wiry Mohawked dope who got predictably
tapped out by Jeremy Horn in his debut. My hero’s wife,
Susan, gave me a team T-shirt and a credential. “Want to
be in Paul’s corner?” she asked. I felt like a Gracie
walking with my hands on the shoulders of the champ. I saw my
hero stumble back, angry at the eyebrow-sized cut on his forehead.
What just happened? I hated Chuck, but, in the end, it didn’t
matter. I couldn’t deny him. Hate turned to adoration, and,
the fact is, he made my hero bigger -- Mighty Paul Jones, the
man who fought the great Chuck Liddell.
Rob
King: In 2004, I met Jeff Sherwood for the first time, and we
went to supper at the local pizza parlor with Jeff’s son,
Preston. The whole time, Preston would not stop talking about
how his favorite fighter was Chuck Liddell and how he was so
proud to have a Mohawk just like Chuck. This was coming from
a 4-year-old. As MMA was just starting to hit its growth spurt,
I think this was the moment when I realized that The Iceman was
going to be the first true mainstream MMA fighter in the United
States.
TJ
De Santis: I remember interviewing Chuck for the first time.
I didn’t know a ton about him on a personal level, but I
figured it would be an easy interview based on the facts of his
fight career. To my surprise, I struggled making the interview
entertaining because he was dry. He had no emotion and no signs
he was really interested in talking to me. At one points, I asked,
“Is everything OK? Do you need me to call you back and do
this later?” He responded with “Why?” Chuck will
be remembered for his knockouts, post-fight victory roars and
his Mohawked and tattooed head, but I’ll always remember
him for just being incredibly mellow outside of the cage. In
a time of “Pitbulls,” “Hurricanes” and other
wannabe-intimidating nicknames, few names will ever be as appropriate
as The Iceman.
Lutfi
Sariahmed: I was in college sitting on my couch with my roommate
and his girlfriend when a replay of the first Liddell-Ortiz bout
came on FSN. I watched, spending the next five minutes just shaking
my head and saying nothing more than “Wow” over and
over, recalling their feud leading into the fight. The girlfriend
scolded me for what she perceived to be my gawking at the ring
girls when in fact I had been floored by the performance of The
Iceman. Liddell embodied “cool” throughout his career,
and when mainstream media jumped on board the MMA train, it focused
its bright lights on the main event at UFC 71 between Quinton
“Rampage” Jackson and Liddell. Rampage won, but the
coverage of the bout that followed proved what people already
knew deep down inside. Liddell was the reason that people were
now watching.
Keith
Mills: Chuck Liddell earned my reverence on Sept. 20, 2002, the
night of the Ring of Fury weigh-ins in Boston. Liddell and UFC
President Dana White were guests at the show, so they made a
press party at a local bar to push UFC 40 two months later. Dana
spoke to the press about advising Chuck to sit out until a title
fight with Tito Ortiz could be arranged, but Chuck refused, saying
he wanted to risk it all to stay active and didn’t want
to “sit on the shelf.” Chuck defeated Renato Sobral
at UFC 40, but when an interim title was created in 2003 to try
to force Tito’s hand, Chuck lost to Randy Couture and had
to wait almost two more years for his title shot. The fact that
Chuck risked his contender status to stay active forever more
makes me equate Liddell with “solid brass balls.”
Source:
Sherdog
|
Scott
Coker: Showtime has been great for the sport
By Zach
Arnold
From
The Fight Show on The Score yesterday:
INTERVIEWER:
“Let’s first talk about the Heavyweight tournament.
It’s been announced. Some great match-ups. Can you talk
to us about the process to put this together?”
SCOTT
COKER: “Boy, I tell you, it was pretty challenging as you
could expect. I mean, you’re dealing with eight different
personalities, eight different managers, eight different wants
& needs. But, BUT, the most important piece I feel was the
extension to Fedor because we couldn’t have Fedor come into
the tournament unless we had more fights with him. To have him
through the tournament and, you know, that took a long time,
was quite a process. Frustrating for them, I’m sure frustrating
for us, frustrating for the fans because he hasn’t been
fighting. But now that we’re through that, you know, to
have Fedor actually fight in the tournament along with Alistair
(Overeem) and (Fabricio) Werdum and Josh, I mean it’s just
going to be an unbelievable tournament and I’m so happy
this all worked out and it’s unfolding nicely and, you know,
we’re in the New York region for the first time, in New
Jersey at the Izod Center. It’s going to be fun to watch.
That’s all I got to say.”
INTERVIEWER:
“And, of course, Alistair Overeem is going to be in this
tournament. He will be defending his title throughout the tournament,
kind of like the Super Six World Boxing Classic but, uh, I mean
there’s a lot of debate about this, should he have been
defending his title, should he not have been. To me, it seems
academic, I mean if he didn’t we’d be waiting for a
very long time before he did defend this title. Is that your
thought process as well?”
SCOTT
COKER: “Well, here’s the thing, as you know in Japan
there’s always, you know, the tournament champion and then
there’s like the champion, the Heavyweight champion in K-1.
So, to me, you know, if Alistair chose not to do it, I would
have been disappointed but, you know, he wanted to fight in this
tournament and that’s the beauty of it is that everybody
wanted to fight in the tournament. Fedor wanted in. It wasn’t
like we had to go ask them twice. It was like, hey, we’re
having this tournament, we would like you to compete. It’s
going to be all these guys that are just killers, and not one
of them said no. Everybody said I want in, even Alistair said.
Alistair went to me when I was in DREAM in Japan over the weekend,
on New Year’s Eve. He said to me, ‘Scott, I want in.
But I want to fight Fabricio Werdum. I want to avenge that loss
and I want to knock him out.’ And I said, all right, let’s
put it together. … So, there we go.”
INTERVIEWER:
“And that’s exactly what’s happening. And do you
think that this tournament will possibly lead to Strikeforce
hosting a PPV in 2011?”
SCOTT
COKER: “You know, I tell you, that’s a good question
and you know my response is this — look, we’re on Showtime.
They’ve been a great media partner for us, a great television
partner, they’ve been, you know, they’re just great
for the sport and for our brand and you know they allow us to
put all these great fights together and you know the first two
rounds, which are the quarter-finals are going to be on Showtime
and we’ll take it from there.”
Source:
Fight Opinion
|
Brian
Stann on tap for Wanderlei Silva
By Sergio
Non
The
Crippler proved to be a stepping stone to The Ax Murderer in
the Ultimate Fighting Championship.
Brian
"All-American" Stann's next opponent probably will
be Wanderlei "The Ax Murderer" Silva, UFC President
Dana White told MMA Fighting. Stann is coming off a win over
fellow middleweight Chris "The Crippler" Leben on Jan.
1 at UFC 125.
A
number of fighters have been calling out Silva over the past
year, including Leben, Yoshihiro "Sexyama" Akiyama
and Chael Sonnen. Although he has just a 2-5 record in his last
seven bouts, Silva remains a huge name in mixed martial arts
because of his nearly six-year reign as Pride Fighting Championships'
205-pound titleholder.
He
dropped to the 185-pound division in 2009 after dropping four
of his last five bouts at 205, including three knockout losses.
He is 1-1 as a UFC middleweight, with his last fight being a
decision win over Michael Bisping last February.
Silva
withdrew from a July fight with Akiyama after suffering broken
ribs and an injured knee in training.
Judges'
scorecards might be superfluous for a Silva-Stann fight. Both
fighters want nothing but knockouts, though Stann lately has
developed a more complex kickboxing style that calls for more
footwork and use of angles to avoid being a stationary target.
That could present problems for Silva, who has spent most of
his career as a wild Muay Thai attacker who will swarm ahead
with winging hooks the moment he senses an opening.
Source:
USA Today
|
Strikeforce
Considered Herschel Walker vs. Don Frye or Mark Coleman
By Ariel
Helwani
We're 15 days away from Herschel Walker's second pro MMA fight,
and it's safe to say that there is a considerable less amount
of buzz heading into the sequel.
Part
of that has to do with the mammoth shadow cast over the Jan.
29 Strikeforce event by the upcoming heavyweight grand prix,
and the other part is most of us feel like we've seen this movie
before: Herschel Walker vs. unknown fighter X. Been there done
that. As you may recall, Walker defeated the unknown Greg Nagy
last January, and many are expecting him to do the same against
Scott Carson when they meet in San Jose, Calif.
And
while pundits and fans criticized Strikeforce for the matchmaking
when this fight was first announced, which was originally supposed
to take place in December before Walker suffered a cut under
his eye in training, Strikeforce CEO Scott Coker said on Monday's
episode of The MMA Hour, that the organization originally had
some big plans for the former Heisman Trophy winner.
"We
were talking about [Walker] actually fighting Don Frye at one
point or Mark Coleman. And I talked to the AKA guys, and they
were like, 'You know what? We're almost there but we're not there.'
"It
would be fun, but I talked to Javier [Mendez] and Bob [Cook],
and they said, 'Look, we're close, and in another eight months
or year, we could do that. But right now, this is where he's
at, this is what we want to do and this is the type of opponent
that we would like to fight.'"
Regardless
of his opponent, Coker refused to agree that there is less interest
in seeing Walker fight again.
"When
you think about Herschel Walker, and you know, some of the MMA
fans like it, some of them have their own opinions, but at the
end of the day, this guy is a national hero to this country and
probably one of the greatest athletes of the century, as far
as I'm concerned. When you have Herschel fighting on the card,
every major sports media wants to cover him."
When
asked on the same episode about his future in MMA following this
upcoming bout, Walker hinted at the possibility of hanging his
gloves up after the Carson fight to help grow the sport.
"I
really wanted to get into my training real heavily and I was
doing well and I said I'd like to be more of a force and patriot
in a sense that I'd like to speak out for the fighters and I
want to put a good fight this fight here and then maybe become
an ambassador for the sport," said Walker.
So
if you tune in to see Walker vs. Carson, you might be able to
say you saw Walker's final MMA fight. Or it could just be another
tune up before he faces the Fryes and Colemans of the MMA world.
Source:
MMA Fighting
|
UFC
Working To Include Canada in Fight For The Troops Efforts
by Ken
Pishna
It
took until April 2008 for the Ultimate Fighting Championship
to finally make its way north of the border. But once the UFC
made its splash in Canada, the ripple effect has only intensified.
The
promotion broke the North American mixed martial arts attendance
record in Canada, opened a central office there in Toronto, and
has had discussions about doing an all-Canadian version of its
popular reality show, “The Ultimate Fighter.”
Aside
from the business aspect of moving into Canada, the UFC also
wants to stretch its charitable efforts there.
Since
2006, the UFC has been promoting events on military bases, in
part as a thank you to the men and women that serve their country,
but also to help raise money for the Intrepid Fallen Heroes Fund.
The
Intrepid Fallen Heroes Fund is a non-profit organization that
supports the men and women of the armed forces and their families.
With
the UFC’s growing presence in Canada, company president
Dana White was asked during a media call promotion UFC Fight
for the Troops 2 if there were any plans to take its efforts
to support troops to the Great White North.
Canada
has long been an ally to the United States in its military efforts.
The UFC also has a number of Canadian fighters on its roster
and tremendous Canadian fan support.
“We’re
working on it right now. What we’re trying to do is we’re
going to try to air (UFC Fight for the Troops 2) up in Canada,
too, and make it more of a tribute to the troops up there,”
White answered, but added that it’s not as easy as just
putting on an event.
Logistics,
including military security efforts, have to be taken into consideration,
as do the concerns of any charitable efforts.
“You
know, trying to coordinate things like this and any type of charity
stuff like this, it’s a lot of work. And it’s very
tricky. But we are working to try to air this in Canada and to
make it a tribute to the Canadian troops (as well).”
White
fell short of any guarantees for future UFC Fight for the Troops
events on Canadian military bases, but seeing as the promotion
has already amped up its Canadian schedule to at least three
pay-per-view events per year, it wouldn’t be a stretch to
see such efforts in the future.
Source:
MMA Weekly
|
Fistic
Medicine: Roxy’s Case
by Matt
It
was the chills that let Roxanne Modafferi know she had a problem.
Most fighters have abdominal cramping and loose, irregular stools
in the first few hours after their post weigh-in meal, but the
chills were something new for her.
Two
hours later, she was on her knees, racked by chilling convulsions,
crawling from her bed to the bathroom for the third time in 40
minutes. The abdominal cramping was getting worse. She felt nauseous,
and there was a woman with a penchant for punishing submissions
waiting to hurt her.
Athletes
who re-feed following weight cutting commonly experience something
known as “dumping syndrome.” The abrupt introduction
of carbohydrate-rich food into the intestinal lumen creates an
osmotic gradient that draws water across the mucosal membrane,
leading to loose, irregular stools. Fighters experience loose
stool, bloating and abdominal cramping. Usually these symptoms
are short-lived: a fighter who carefully re-hydrates with electrolytes
and is cautious in transitioning from a low carbohydrate/low
sodium/ low fat diet to a more normal diet should be asymptomatic
within 12 hours of weigh-ins.
But
for Modafferi, her GI symptoms were steadily getting worse, not
better. This was not a re-feeding issue; this was illness.
For
unknown reasons, elite athletes are at somewhat higher risk for
infection. The relationship between athletic exertion and infectious
risk is “J” shaped: while moderate exercise reduces
the risk of infection, very heavy exertion paradoxically pushes
athletes’ immune systems past the point of optimization.
To combat the risk of infection, many top athletes practice a
form of reverse quarantine prior to competition. Closed training
camps reduce a competitor’s pool of first- and second-degree
“communicable contacts” from theoretical thousands
to just a handful. The reason many Olympic athletes skip the
opening ceremonies is that the health risk posed by being in
close contact with thousands of new potential viral exposures
a few days before competition is simply too great. When forced
out of protective isolation by the demands of sponsors and promoters,
athletes often wear surgical masks, tap elbows in lieu of shaking
hands and do whatever they can to avoid being sabotaged by a
last-minute illness.
Modafferi
stated that for the entire week prior to her Sengoku “Soul
of Fight” bout against Hitomi “Girlfight Monster”
Akano on Dec. 30 she had been irritated by nagging viral upper
respiratory infection symptoms -- nasal congestion, scratchy
throat, etc. She made sure to get plenty of sleep, lightened
her training load and was careful not to endanger herself further
with aggressive weight cutting techniques. Quite rightly, she
was not overly concerned. A beautiful 1997 study by Wesiner et
al looked at the effect of a common rhinovirus infection on athletic
performance. Surprisingly, the study showed that in athletes
who had been deliberately infected with the common cold there
was no decrease in performance. Even though infected subjects
felt worse than uninfected controls, objective measures of performance
showed no decrease in performance at two-, five- and eight-minute
intervals.
What
has been shown to impair athletes, and what Modafferi suddenly
found herself in steadily growing peril of developing, is dehydration.
As loose stools progressed to frank diarrhea, her total body
volume of water dropped.
Even
low levels of dehydration have profound physiologic consequences.
A fluid deficit of as little as two percent Total Body Weight
(TBW) -- approximately one liter for Modafferi -- results in
increased perceived effort and has been shown to reduce performance
by as much as 20 percent. Cardiovascular performance, strength,
reaction time, judgment, concentration and decision making are
all affected. For fighters, dehydration increases the risk of
brain injury.
Severe
diarrhea, in Modafferi’s case probably caused by some form
of food bacterial poisoning, can rob the body of as much as eight
milliliters/kilogram/hour of fluid. A night of severe diarrhea
can leave a fighter seriously depleted; perhaps a four- to five-percent
TBW fluid deficit. The most direct treatment for this degree
of severe dehydration is oral re-hydration with electrolyte solutions.
The most notorious killer in the world -- infectious diarrhea
-- can be effectively combatted with a treatment as simple as
a few grams of Sodium, Potassium and glucose in clean water.
Unfortunately for Modafferi, oral rehydration was made impossible
by vomiting, and, even after the vomiting eased, nausea that
impeded her ability to take in fluids.
When
the miserable night ended, Modafferi saw her doctor and was immediately
sent to the hospital. Doctors diagnosed her with severe dehydration
and started anti-diarrheals and IV therapy with normal saline
-- fluid with the same salt composition as blood plasma. Because
of time restraints, she received 800 milliliters before being
rushed to the arena. That’s too little fluid.
The
diarrhea persisted. She developed fevers. As her immune system
fought the infection, cytokines and prostaglandins poured into
her system, releasing debilitating waves of whole body trembling
and bone chilling cold.
Promoters
and Modafferi’s coach encouraged her -- and she is not a
fighter prone to bowing to adversity -- but the mind cannot drive
the body beyond its physical limits. In pre-fight warm-ups, she
was lightheaded and unstable on her feet. Dizziness, weakness,
persistent vomiting and constant shaking left her huddled in
the locker room. Any competent ringside physician would have
recognized a compromised fighter unable to properly defend herself.
It would have been a violation of the most basic ethics of medicine
to let her fight.
In
her blog, Modafferi described the misery of walking to the ring
knowing she would not be able to perform for the fans cheering
her name. A moment after her entrance into the ring, the physician
on duty followed her, arms waving over his head, and the fight
was over before it began. There were tears in the fighter’s
eyes. There probably still are.
“I
really, really hope I get the chance to fight Hitomi Akano someday,”
she wrote, “and I am super, super disappointed my body failed
me this time.”
Source:
Sherdog
|
Scott
Coker: It’s time for everybody to move on from focusing
on Josh Barnett’s past
By Zach
Arnold
Last
Wednesday, Scott Coker had a very interesting radio interview
with Jack Encarnacao and TJ De Santis that I wanted to focus
on here briefly. Rather than rush through the interview, I wanted
to listen to it and see if there were any items of note to discuss.
During
the interview, Mr. Coker claimed that Strikeforce has the best
heavyweights in the world and that the upcoming tournament will
prove it. When it came time to talk about Brett Rogers vs. Josh
Barnett, he said that ‘one punch changes everything in MMA.’
It was similar in tone to what his tone was before the Fabricio
Werdum/Fedor fight, eerily enough. When asked about whether or
not Alistair Overeem will put the Strikeforce heavyweight title
on the line for each tournament bout he’s involved in, Mr.
Coker said that there are issues right now regarding uniformity
in round and rules structure for the tournament fights. In other
words, title fights are five rounds under the Unified rules and
most non-title fights are three rounds. Jordan Breen, a proponent
of five-round non-title bouts, has noted in the past that a promoter
at any time can petition a commission (such as Nevada’s)
to get a five round non-title fight sanctioned. Mr. Coker said
that when he presented the idea of all the tournament fights
being five rounds, he received push back from various athletic
commissions on the matter. The big question now is how to have
Alistair Overeem in the tournament if his fights are for the
title and are five rounds long while everyone else is fighting
in three round fights. Mr. Coker stated that his goal is for
the tournament winner to be the Strikeforce Heavyweight champion.
He also noted that he would like the Josh Barnett/Brett Rogers
fight on the same card alongside the Overeem/Werdum fight.
During
the Sherdog radio interview on Wednesday, Mr. Coker made his
case in the court of public opinion about Josh Barnett’s
participation in the upcoming Heavyweight tournament:
JACK
ENCARNACAO: “Scott, without venues locked down or even all
the licensing in place for the Barnett and Overeem fights, why
announce the tournament already if you’re not 100%? You
might be 90% sure that you can get Barnett and Overeem in the
cage in March or as part of this tournament, especially Barnett.”
SCOTT
COKER: “Well, no, we never said that he’s fighting
in March. I’m not sure where you got that, but… you
know, Barnett has his issues in California, guys, we all know
it. We’ve all been through that dance and he’s got
to go back and deal with it some more. But, you know, to me,
here’s a guy that has been, uh, out of the cage or, you
know, out of the ring for, in North America, for a year and a
half and, you know, I feel like he’s paid his time, he’s
paid his dues, let the guy make a living. You know and his history
before Strikeforce is his past and, you know, we’re going
to judge him on what he does now and six weeks ago he went to
(the) California (state athletic commission) in Sacramento in
the offices and, you know, he tested clean for all, you know,
all their battery of tests that they ran on him and he’s
not on suspension, so why can’t he fight? And, you know,
some commissions still feel like, you know, we want to wait until
he gets through the process in California but, you know, there
are commissions out there saying, ‘Look, you know, have
him come in, let him take the test, and if he’s clean then
we’ll let him fight.’ So, you know, we’re going
to work with those commissions that are welcoming him and us
but Josh, guys, Josh is going to be part of this tournament and
we’re going to move on and I think Josh has moved on and
I think everybody should move on as well.”
Mr.
Barnett will have his hearing next month in California, just
after Strikeforce’s January 29th event in San Jose at the
HP Pavilion.
When
asked about how long Fedor will be under the Strikeforce banner,
Mr. Coker noted that he felt confident that Fedor would be fighting
for them for at least the next two years. He said that TV ratings
and box office numbers prove that any time Fedor fights, ‘it’s
a special occasion.’
Mr.
Coker addressed criticism from fans and writers who feel that
the Heavyweight tournament could fall apart. “There’s
a lot of fickle fans out there. But, you know, to me, hey, sit
back and enjoy it. The fans don’t have to do anything. Just
order Showtime, sit back, and watch some great fights.”
He went on to talk about ‘the keyboard warriors’ online.
He finished his statement by saying that the tournament is going
to be great for the sport.
Source:
Fight Opinion
|
UFC
Touts $23 Million Stimulus in MMA Legalization Effort in New
York
by Ken
Pishna
The
Ultimate Fighting Championship and others have knocked down the
walls in 44 of the 50 United States. Of the remaining six, New
York stands high above the others, casting its shadow over the
sports legalization.
The
UFC on Thursday held a press conference in New York, combining
its efforts with those of the historical Madison Square Garden
to prompt legislators in the state to relent, and make mixed
martial arts legal in the state.
“It’s
time to bring the fastest growing sport in the world to New York
and Madison Square Garden,” UFC president Dana White said.
“We already know that New York is filled with UFC fans who
want to see live UFC events in their home state. With the economic
benefits that UFC would bring to New York, it’s time for
UFC to do Madison Square Garden.”
“UFC
and its passionate fans have a home here at Madison Square Garden,
and we look forward to welcoming them as soon as the sport is
regulated in New York. We have no doubt that UFC would be enormously
popular at The Garden and a great addition to our lineup of world
class sports and entertainment events,” added Scott O’Neil,
president of Madison Square Garden Sports.
With
most political issues, especially in these times of a depressed
economy, money is a focal point. The UFC is not ignorant of that
fact, and based much of its presentation on Thursday on pointing
out the economic impact that it, along with other mixed martial
arts promotions, would have once allowed to operate in New York.
“We’ve
done similar economic studies in major cities such as Boston,
Las Vegas, and Philadelphia, and each showed the substantial
positive impact hosting a UFC event has on the local economy,”
company CEO Lorenzo Fertitta said. “This study shows that
by regulating MMA, New York can reap the economic benefits statewide.”
The
study, compiled by HR&A Advisors, purports the UFC alone
would stimulate roughly $16 million in economic activity in the
state. That is based on the UFC’s announced intentions to
operate one event at Madison Square Garden in New York City and
another in Buffalo.
The
study also found that other MMA operators would likely add another
$6.7 million in economic stimulus to the state.
The
study indicates that the UFC alone would generate gross ticket
sales of $5.2 million at Madison Square Garden based on an attendance
of 17,000, as well as $1.5 million in ticket sales at the HSBC
Arena in Buffalo based on 16,000 in attendance.
Those
are big numbers for any state, even one the size of New York,
with economic woes continuing across the country and throughout
the world.
“By
bringing UFC events to New York, the state will see a positive
financial impact,” White said. “The arenas will get
to host major UFC events and local hotels, restaurants, and other
businesses will attract new customers. They’ll look forward
to the times we bring UFC to New York.”
Source:
MMA Weekly
|
Assemblyman
Dean Murray Speaks Out In Support of UFC’s Efforts for MMA
Sanctioning in New York
by Damon
Martin
The
UFC’s push to get the sport regulated in New York State
has a supporter in freshman Republican Assemblyman Dean Murray
from the state’s 3rd district.
Murray
appeared at Madison Square Garden alongside UFC president Dana
White and owner Lorenzo Fertitta to speak to the media about
the sport getting regulated there, and the tremendous financial
addition to the state.
Representing
areas such as Bellport, Farmingville, and Medford, Murray is
working to get mixed martial arts approved in the state. He chalks
it up to taking away a choice from New Yorkers to not be able
to see the sport in their home area.
“The
fact of the matter is this is another example of New York being
a ‘nanny’ state,” Assemblyman Murray stated. “We
have to stop doing that. We have to give the choice. How many
cable TV stations do you have? How many radio stations do you
have? You have choices. By us not legalizing this it’s removing
that option of all these literally millions of fans in New York
State having the option to see their hometown heroes fight.”
The
financial boom for the state could also be a huge help. Estimates
have over $23 million being added to the state a year with MMA
events being held there, and more could be added as the number
of events increases.
“In
this economic climate, we don’t need more tax increases,
we need a chance to raise revenue. This is a wonderful chance,”
he added.
Murray
has already taken the first steps to gain sanctioning for MMA
in New York. He included mixed martial arts in the budget sent
to Governor Andrew Cuomo for approval.
Cuomo
just went into office on Jan. 1, and will review the budget and
then submit it to the Assembly for approval. While it’s
not a lock one way or the other, even if it is approved in the
budget, Murray says it will be a lot easier if the Governor has
added MMA to his budget.
“I’ve
actually contacted the Governor’s office and asked him to
include this in the Governor’s budget this year. So we’re
going to wait and see if it is included in the budget. If it’s
not, I’m hoping that we’ll bring it to the floor for
a vote,” Murray commented.
“If
it’s in the budget, it has a much better shot of staying
in the budget.”
Cuomo
was one of several politicians Zuffa contributed to during last
year’s election season. The Las Vegas based promotion pumped
upwards of $75,000 towards his campaign, but the new Governor
has never publicly stated his support or disapproval of mixed
martial arts.
The
real hurdle that Murray may face is in the form of Assemblyman
Bob Reilly, who has been a very strong opponent against MMA in
the state of New York. Reilly was re-elected in November, and
will serve alongside Murray in the new Assembly this year.
“I
do know him, we’ve just met. I got in last year in a special
election, so I’ve been in there just coming up on about
a year now. We’ve met in passing, haven’t spoken about
this particular issue, but I have a funny feeling we will be
speaking,” Murray intimated.
Reilly
has never mixed his words when talking about MMA. In a past interview
with MMAWeekly.com, Reilly put his foot down that he had no desire
to see the sport be sanctioned in New York.
“I
think that (MMA) basically is a glorification of violence, but
it certainly promotes violence,” Reilly told MMAWeekly.com
in a 2009 interview. “In itself, I think it’s a very
brutal sport that creates, obviously, physical harm to the participants,
and I don’t think there’s any other sport who’s
purpose is to harm your opponent. But we know that in mixed martial
arts, that, in fact, is one of the purposes.”
It
remains to be seen if Reilly will be able to push his campaign
further when the issue comes up again in the Assembly, or if
Murray and his supporters will sway the vote. The message is
clear, however, that the UFC isn’t backing down from coming
to New York, and they are committed to making it happen in 2011.
Source:
MMA Weekly
|
Report:
Couture-Machida ‘Done Deal’ for UFC 129
by Mike
Whitman
A
rumored light heavyweight showdown between former champions Randy
Couture and Lyoto Machida is reportedly all but official.
UFC
President Dana White today told MMAFighting.com that the proposed
scrap was a “done deal” for UFC 129, which takes place
April 30 at the Rogers Centre in Toronto. Headlining the show
is a welterweight title bout between longtime champion Georges
St. Pierre and challenger Jake Shields.
A
five-time UFC champion, Couture has competed at both heavyweight
and 205 pounds in his professional career. The man known as “Captain
America” is currently riding a three-fight win streak, having
earned victories over Brandon Vera, Mark Coleman and James Toney.
Couture
sparked talk of his retirement in December by writing on Twitter
that it was “time to move on,” but rumors of the Machida
matchup surfaced shortly thereafter. Couture retired after losing
for a second time to Chuck Liddell in 2006, but was lured back
one year later by a shot at then-heavyweight champion Tim Sylvia.
After taking the belt with a unanimous decision over Sylvia,
Couture defended the title successfully against Gabriel Gonzaga
at UFC 74 before being dethroned by Brock Lesnar at UFC 91.
Machida
won his first 16 professional contests, including an 8-0 stint
inside the Octagon. “The Dragon” then knocked out Rashad
Evans in the second round of their light heavyweight title fight
at UFC 98 to capture the belt.
Six
months later, Machida would successfully defend his title for
the first time by edging out Mauricio “Shogun” Rua
in a controversial unanimous decision. It would be “Shogun”
who got the better of the rematch, however, as the former Chute
Boxe standout delivered a devastating first-round knockout to
the previously unbeaten Machida and ripped the title away. Machida’s
comeback fight was a disappointing one, as he was outpointed
by Quinton “Rampage” Jackson in the main event of UFC
123.
Source:
Sherdog
|
WEC
Lightweight Champ, UFC Contender Anthony Pettis To Receive Proclamation
in Milwaukee
Anthony
Pettis made 2010 his year.
Pettis
won four out of four fights last year, earning Knockout of the
Night honors against Danny Castillo, Submission of the Night
honors against Shane Roller, and Fight of the Night honors and
the final WEC lightweight championship against Ben Henderson.
The
win over Henderson also came with a shot at the winner of the
UFC 125 showdown between UFC lightweight champion Frankie Edgar
and challenger Gray Maynard. Only… nobody won.
Maynard
had Edgar on the brink in the opening round, but the champ dug
deep and fought his way back to a Fight of the Night draw. The
result scored Edgar and Maynard $60,000 bonuses and a return
engagement, likely at UFC 130 in May, but it also sidelined Pettis’
shot at the title.
Instead
of waiting in the wings, UFC president Dana White confirmed that
Pettis is in talks to possibly face Clay Guida sometime this
spring.
Pettis
has taken it all in stride, not wasting time wallowing over the
delay in a title shot.
The
UFC on Wednesday announced an addition to the 23-year-old’s
accolades. Pettis will receive an official proclamation from
his hometown of Milwaukee on Thursday. The city’s mayor,
Tom Barrett, will present Pettis with the proclamation.
“This
is an amazing feeling,” Pettis said. “It’s been
a crazy year. I’ve won a world title, been featured on MTV
and SportsCenter and threw out the first pitch at the Milwaukee
Brewers game. I never imagined myself being in this position.
I’m really thankful that Mayor Tom Barrett and the city
of Milwaukee have chosen to honor me. Milwaukee means so much
to me and I’m proud to represent it every time I compete.”
Source:
MMA Weekly
|
Five
fights to help you beat the winter blues
It's
that time of year. The time when the holidays are over, the credit
card bills are filling your mailbox and the snow has turned from
a pretty white blanket to gray slush. What will help you through
the long winter? People pummeling each other, of course! Here
are five to savor before the vernal equinox on March 20.
Jan.
29, Strikeforce: Diaz vs. Cyborg -- Ronaldo "Jacare"
Souza vs. Robbie Lawler: Brawler vs. grappler. Striking vs. submissions.
Gritty vs. smooth. This match-up for the Strikeforce middleweight
belt matches up different styles of MMA: the heavy hands of Lawler
agains the submission genius of Souza. Though Jacare has showed
improved stand-up in his last two fights
Feb.
5, UFC 126 -- Miguel Torres vs. Antonio Banuelos: After constantly
bringing exciting fights to the WEC, Torres and Banuelos will
bring the bantamweight brand to the UFC. There is about 0.0005%
chance that this fight will not be exciting. Not to mention,
does an epic mustache win out over an epic mullet? We'll find
out.
Feb.
12, Strikeforce and M-1 Global -- Fedor Emelianenko vs. Antonio
Silva: So many questions will be answered in this bout in New
Jersey. How will Fedor rebound from his loss to Fabricio Werdum?
Will the long layoff affect him? What will be Fedor's answer
to Silva's size? Will the Russian guy who got away from Chrissie
Moltisanti and Paulie "Walnuts" be there to cheer on
Fedor?
Mar.
5, Strikeforce -- Alistair Overeem vs. Fabricio Werdum: He's
made history fighting everywhere but Strikeforce, but will he
Overeem able to get past the Fedor-slayer to get through the
first round of the Strikeforce heavyweight tournament, defending
his belt along the way?
Mar.
19, UFC 128 -- Edson Barboza vs. Anthony Njokuani: My legs hurt
just thinking about this bout. Barboza won his UFC debut by piling
up leg kicks on Mike Lullo. Njokuani has elbows and head kicks
that can end fights. Don't expect this bout to last long or to
be boring.
Source: Yahoo Sports
|
Quinton
“Rampage” Jackson vs. Thiago Silva Agreed To For UFC
130
Contrary
to an escalating war of words, and the wishful thinking of James
Toney, Quinton “Rampage” Jackson’s next fight
isn’t likely to be against the aging heavyweight boxing
champion.
MMAWeekly.com
sources have confirmed that Jackson and fellow Top 10 light heavyweight
Thiago Silva have verbally agreed to fight at UFC 130 on May
28 in Las Vegas. MMAJunkie.com first reported the bout’s
likelihood.
The
banter between Jackson and Toney has hit a fever pitch. But after
Toney was summarily dispatched by UFC Hall of Famer Randy Couture
in the boxer’s first MMA fight, UFC president Dana White
said Toney was one and done in the UFC. He has stuck by his word.
Rampage
(31-8) will instead try to make his way back into the title picture.
“Thanks
to all my fans for the support on my next fight,” the former
UFC light heavyweight champion Tweeted on Saturday night. “You
have my word that I will train my ass off. I’m still on
the road to get my belt back.”
Rampage
lost the belt to Forrest Griffin at UFC 86 in July of 2008. After
putting back-to-back wins together following that fight, he dropped
a unanimous decision loss to Rashad Evans at UFC 114 midyear
2010. That victory propelled Evans into a title fight against
champion Mauricio “Shogun” Rua.
Rampage
is coming off of a split decision victory over another former
champion, Lyoto Machida, at UFC 123 late last year. Adding a
win over a fighter the caliber of Silva to that inches him that
much closer to the belt that he covets.
Silva
(15-2) has alternated wins and losses in his last four bouts
after racking up 13 straight victories to start his career. The
American Top Team fighter rearranged Brand Vera’s face and
sent him out of the UFC with a dominant unanimous decision win
on Jan. 1 at UFC 125.
Slipping
only against Machida and Evans, Silva is looking to Jackson to
get his momentum back and make his own run at the UFC light heavyweight
title.
For
all the latest MMA news, go to MMAWeekly.com
Source: Yahoo Sports
|
Sherdog’s
2010 All-Violence Team
Violence
gets a bum rap.
Treated
as a hideous, aberrant beast run amok, it is the scourge of humanity.
Assuredly, on any piece of ground on this entire globe, you could
never ask someone “Do you like violence?” and get a
sincere, affirmative “Yes” without suspicion of that
person being a sociopath. There are desk calendars and motivational
posters littered with quotes by everyone from Gandhi to Chomsky,
characterizing violence as the inhumane refuge of the thoughtless
brute, championing a world where the politic of contemplation
always triumphs in some cosmic sense over the politic of confrontation.
These
people know nothing about true, beautiful violence, because they
are not mixed martial arts fans.
MMA
offers the best kind of violence possible. Principally, it’s
mutually agreed upon; there are typically no innocent bystanders
hurt in its fury. However, just as crucially, the sheer depth
of techniques available in MMA -- a standard cross or a leaping
roundhouse kick off the cage, a snappy guillotine or a flying
scissor heel hook -- offers us a true sense of spellbound wonder.
It gives us a glimpse of what is athletically possible for one
to achieve in combat against another, as well as a stark look
into what one’s body can withstand.
Unfortunately,
MMA fans, for all their bluster, are a timid bunch. The controversial,
politically charged history of MMA created a climate in which
the sport’s violence needed to be deemphasized in discourse.
In the face of political opposition, the MMA public likes to
simply boast of how “skilled” its athletes are and
of the sport’s respect and discipline. However, those skills
are violent skills. Discipline and respect are necessary functions
of its brutal core. People have convinced themselves that, because
MMA is not the gladiatorial fight-to-the-death its decriers imagined,
it is not violent at all. It is violent, passionately and brilliantly
so.
I
have watched MMA for going on 12 years, and I am still consistently
blown away by the brilliant ways in which high-level fighters
can ideate and actualize physical harm against one another. I
know I am not unique in my feeling, only in my outspokenness.
I know others feel this way, because it is the same fire that
was stoked so extravagantly by Anthony Pettis’ mind-blowing
kick on Benson Henderson a few weeks ago. That kick caused the
MMA world to collectively embrace and celebrate the fundamental
difference between this sport and any other.
Thus,
I am inspired to reclaim violence for the better. We are entirely
too timid and bashful as fans. We applaud a vicious knockout
or submission, but act as though the sheer physical risk and
toll involved play no part in our thrill. It is all the more
absurd in this current era of MMA, an era in which the level
of offense has come so far from the sport’s earliest days.
And
so, this is the first All-Violence Team, and this is its simple
mandate.
What
MMA fighters offer the kind of scintillating, highlight reel
offense that we so crave? Who produces knockouts and submissions
that catch our breath and captivate us, though we never dare
say, “How [expletive] awesome was that?” too lustily,
for fear of being labeled barbarians.
The
All-Violence Team behaves in a similar way to other sports all-star
teams. Every weight class, from flyweight to heavyweight, is
represented, with each weight class having a first, second and
third team. The fighter who demonstrated the most shining examples
of violence in competition during the calendar year is considered
All-Violence First Team.
Does
this list glamorize the most lamentable part of the sport, by
championing those who can hurt other athletes in shocking ways?
Perhaps, but I would argue that it shows a reverence and appreciation
for the scope of MMA’s techniques. Furthermore, recognizing
their potentially harmful consequences only reaffirms how truly
valiant MMA’s athletes can be.
One
might also think this concept would disproportionately reward
strikers, discredit the ground game and help cement the notion
that people only want to see toe-to-toe action in the cage. However,
the greatness in MMA violence comes from the fact that it happens
everywhere. A fighter in hot pursuit of a flying submission or
viciously elbowing his opponent into submission from full mount
is just as valid of an exemplar of MMA’s extraordinary violence
as the one-hitter quitter on the feet.
The
All-Violence team does not necessarily reward great fighters,
though there is crossover. Some of MMA’s pound-for-pound
elite are brutal in their execution. Others simply are not potent
offensive fighters. Structurally, it is most similar to the NBA’s
All-Defensive Team or John Madden’s long-running All-Madden
Team, which honored players who exhibited the kinds of idiosyncratic
skill and toughness Madden beloved. This list rewards a specific
kind of skillset that, regardless of a fighter’s overall
accomplishment, signals his successful appeal to a specific truth
about MMA that we all love, whether we admit it or not.
Poet
Ezra Pound once famously wrote, “The modern artist must
live by craft and violence. His gods are violent gods. Those
artists, so called, whose work does not show this strife, are
uninteresting.” Where others miss the point, Pound understood.
It should come as no surprise that he was, in fact, a real fight
fan.
2010 All-Violence First Team
•
Heavyweight: Cain Velasquez
• Light Heavyweight: Jon Jones
• Middleweight: Hector Lombard
• Welterweight: Chris Lytle
• Lightweight: Anthony Pettis
• Featherweight: Marlon Sandro
• Bantamweight: Eddie Wineland
• Flyweight: Mamoru Yamaguchi
Heavyweight:
Velasquez succinctly smashed two elite heavyweights to win the
UFC title. He fought just 6:32 total and scored three knockdowns.
Crushing on the feet and on the ground, it seems almost unfathomable
-- after looking at how he treated Antonio Rodrigo Nogueira and
Brock Lesnar -- that many thought Velasquez was a weak offensive
fighter after his June 2009 bout with Cheick Kongo.
Light
Heavyweight: Jones is the runaway winner at 205 pounds. Among
UFC fighters who won at least two fights during 2010, he did
it the fastest, with an average of 2:36 in the cage per fight.
His spectacular array of offense alone was enough to get him
on the list, but his elbows, both for their speed (against Vladimir
Matyushenko at UFC Live 2) and power (against Brandon Vera at
UFC Live 1), cement his First Team status, heads and shoulders
above his contemporaries in a division that did not feature a
ton of high-level violence in 2010.
Middleweight:
Lombard stopped three of his five 2010 foes and battered the
other two who went the distance. His six-second knockout of Jay
Silva and 38-second KO of Herbert Goodman were among the year’s
most brutal. Even when he fails to secure a first-round stoppage,
Lombard throws with ill intent until the final bell, on the feet
or on the ground. Lombard is a fighter whose sensibilities are
almost entirely in line with the spirit of the All-Violence list.
Welterweight:
Lytle is MMA’s blood-and-guts warrior for a reason and poster
boy for this list. Incredibly, he did it in 2010 without a knockout.
His slick-and-nasty submission wins over Brian Foster and Matt
Brown -- especially the kneebar on Foster at UFC 110 -- were
tailor-made for this team. He finished the year by clubbing former
welterweight champion Matt Serra in a fight that, according to
FightMetric, saw Lytle land 153 significant strikes (think power
punches in boxing) -- an all-time UFC record.
Lightweight:
Pettis is the refutation of violence as thoughtless and brutish.
A thoughtful, slick tactician in the cage, he finished three
of his four foes in 2010, including a brutal head kick stoppage
of Danny Castillo at WEC 47 in March. Still, it was his nick-of-time,
off-the-wall head kick on Benson Henderson to earn the WEC lightweight
title that crystalized him as a true purveyor of MMA-style highlight
reel violence.
Featherweight:
Sandro is not as well-known as his teammate and pound-for-pound
star, Jose Aldo, but, at times, he is even more violent. In 2010,
Sandro put both Tomonari Kanomata and Masanori Kanehara -- two
quality featherweights -- on stretchers. It took him only a combined
47 seconds. His right uppercut is one of the most ferocious punches
in MMA and single-handedly -- no pun intended -- landed him in
this spot.
Bantamweight:
With the division’s two most sensational stoppages of the
year, Wineland is an easy choice as 135-pound representative.
In June, he put away Will Campuzano with a crushing punch to
the guts in a thrillingly violent affair at WEC 49. He followed
up in December by slamming Ken Stone through the floor in one
of the year’s most arresting moments. No bantamweight was
even close to Wineland’s violent streak in 2010.
Flyweight:
The flyweight division is developing faster than ever, and one
can only hope future flyweights are cut from the same cloth as
Yamaguchi. He delivered three stoppages in 2010, and all of them
were suitably violent. He essentially KO’d Frank Baca with
a wicked standing elbow before choking him out, mashed Greg Guzman
with a torrent of elbows and kicked off Fumihiro Kitahara’s
block. The unexpected throws, the head kicks, the elbows -- Yamaguchi’s
offense is true V.
2010 All-Violence Second Team
•
Heavyweight: Alistair Overeem
• Light Heavyweight: Rafael “Feijao” Cavalcante
• Middleweight: Robbie Lawler
• Welterweight: Brian Foster
• Lightweight: Maximo Blanco
• Featherweight: Jose Aldo
• Bantamweight: Joseph Benavidez
• Flyweight: Darrell Montague
Heavyweight:
Overeem’s greatest achievement in 2010 was his K-1 World
Grand Prix win, but his two MMA bouts showed some serious violence,
too. He was in MMA action for just 239 seconds in 2010, but according
to FightMetric, he landed 44 significant strikes anyway and absorbed
only three. That means he landed more than 11 significant strikes
per minute and absorbed just 0.753 per minute. His plus-minus
(10.297) was the highest FightMetric tracked all year, ahead
of Cung Le (7.246), Cain Velasquez (6.433), Shane Carwin (5.580)
and Junior dos Santos (5.334). Basically, “The Reem”
kills an opponent while remaining unscathed.
Light
Heavyweight: It was a light year for violence at 205 pounds,
Jon Jones aside, but Cavalcante reaffirmed why people were excited
about him as a prospect. Against Antwain Britt, he was stunned
and swung for the fences, scoring a comeback in thrilling fashion.
In his August title capture against Muhammed “King Mo”
Lawal, he showed more precision and technique in his violent
game to earn the win.
Middleweight:
Lawler, one of MMA’s most fearsome punchers, may do one
specific thing better than anyone else in MMA: no one can drop
a fighter with a punch and follow it immediately after with a
laser-guided, diving bomb to the chin that seals the deal. Both
of Lawler’s victims in 2010, Melvin Manhoef and Matt Lindland,
can attest to it. Little flairs like that, in addition to his
power, certify Lawler in the violence department.
Welterweight:
Foster may never be a serious title contender in the UFC, but
in every facet of MMA, he is cutthroat in his pursuit of violence.
All three of Foster’s 2010 bouts, even his February loss
to Chris Lytle, are a testament to the kind of violence this
list espouses. Whether it is on the feet or on the ground, by
knockout or submission, someone is getting hurt. Among UFC fighters
who won at least two fights during 2010, Foster holds the third-fastest
average fight time (3:20) behind only Jon Jones (2:36) and Cain
Velasquez (3:16).
Lightweight:
Those of you who have not seen Blanco before need to get to YouTube
as fast as you can. A heaven-sent combination of a Tasmanian
devil and TNT, he is an absolute storm in the ring, from the
first punch until the last brutal kick. Blanco has emerged as
perhaps the foremost rejection of the idea that high-level wrestlers
make for boring MMA fighters. When he is in kill mode, his ferocity
and bloodlust simply have no parallel in MMA. The last 10 seconds
of his October bout with Kiuma Kunoku are what violence is all
about.
Featherweight:
With Anderson Silva’s turn for the taciturn, Aldo is MMA’s
principal pound-for-pounder in terms of violence. No super-elite
fighter mixes beating great opposition with the gruesome style
points of Aldo. Sometimes, it is like the grind of sandpaper,
as his 25-minute near-amputation of Urijah Faber’s leg in
April. Sometimes, it is a shotgun blast to the face, like his
September win over Manny Gamburyan. It is hard to imagine Aldo
not racking up All-Violence status for years to come.
Bantamweight:
Benavidez may not seem as ferocious as some of his contemporaries
on this list, but in a division lacking in violence in 2010,
his campaign stands out. The second round of his March win over
Miguel Torres was as grotesque as any scene of the year, from
the elbow that unzipped Torres’ forehead to the crushing
guillotine that ended it. In November, on short notice no less,
he guillotined another Brazilian jiu-jitsu black belt in Wagnney
Fabiano. Between Torres’ cavernous cut and high-level neck
wringing, Benavidez belongs here.
Flyweight:
When Montague won his June 2008 debut against Dillion Croushorn
with a brutal spinning back fist, it was a sign of what was to
come. One of the 125-pound division’s most exciting up-and-comers,
Montague’s striking skills are both flashy and fearsome.
He showed a bit of both in 2010, as he stopped veteran Jeremy
Bolt with a nasty roundhouse kick to the guts in May and then
smashed Luis Gonzalez with his hands in September.
2010 All-Violence Third Team
•
Heavyweight: Junior dos Santos
• Light Heavyweight: Mauricio “Shogun” Rua
• Middleweight: Alexander Shlemenko
• Welterweight: Paul Daley
• Lightweight: Edson Mendes Barboza Jr.
• Featherweight: Cristiane “Cyborg” Santos
• Bantamweight: Michael McDonald
• Flyweight: Mitsuhisa Sunabe
Heavyweight:
In 2010, dos Santos solidified himself as the UFC’s top
heavyweight contender on the back of his violence. He polished
off Gilbert Yvel and Gabriel Gonzaga in the first round, but
his most crushing performance was in his lone decision win against
Roy Nelson in August. By FightMetric’s effectiveness score,
dos Santos posted a 610 against Nelson. For context, Georges
St. Pierre dominated Dan Hardy for 25 minutes at UFC 111 and
only scored a 553.
Light
Heavyweight: Owing to his dreadfully injury-prone knees, “Shogun”
only fought once in 2010. Fortunately, there may not have been
a more sterling performance at 205 pounds all year. Rua took
a fighter renowned for his evasive, unhittable style in Lyoto
Machida and left him as a corpse on the mat. His brutal finish
from full mount to wrest the UFC light heavyweight title tickled
all of our violence-loving organs like few other incidents in
2010.
Middleweight:
Shlemenko is another fighter whose outings highlight our love
for violence. In 2010, he was 5-1 with four stoppages. Among
them were a nasty spinning back fist on Jean Francois Lenogue
and an eviscerating knee to the body of Sean Salmon. Violence
just seems to encircle Shlemenko, who was the other man in the
Bellator cage when Jared Hess blew out his knee in freakish,
stomach-turning fashion.
Welterweight:
Daley’s 2010 campaign will likely be remembered for the
not-so-lovely kind of violence, due to his May sucker punch against
Josh Koscheck at UFC 113. However, Daley still blew away three
opponents with wow-level stoppages, collapsing Dustin Hazelett,
elbowing Daniel Acacio so hard that he literally thought his
skull had been crushed and knocking out the sturdy Scott Smith
in jaw-dropping fashion. After all, he is nicknamed “Semtex.”
Lightweight:
Barboza’s competition in 2010 was mediocre, including his
UFC debut against late replacement Mike Lullo. However, MMA’s
deepest weight class did not have a great deal of elite-level
violence during the last 12 months, and Barboza’s exploits
had serious style points. He stopped two opponents -- Lullo and
Marcelo Giudici -- with low kicks, which is perhaps the All-Violence
equivalent of a four-touchdown performance from a quarterback.
However, his one-punch knockout of Jose Figueroa in March was
easily among the year’s most picturesque finishes. Barboza’s
violence has swag for days, as the kids say.
Featherweight:
A woman? Yes, a woman. So overwhelming is Santos’ violence,
she can treat elite fighters like they are average fighters.
Yes, her throttling of an overmatched Jan Finney was gruesome
to watch, given the size and skill disparity, but “Cyborg”
also crushed skilled veteran Marloes Coenen in January. Coenen
then promptly showed her elite skills, cutting to 135 pounds
and taking the Strikeforce crown off of then-unbeaten Sarah Kaufman.
In the post-Gina Carano climate, Santos’ violence is the
biggest reason fans are being magnetized to women’s MMA.
Bantamweight:
McDonald, who turned 20 on New Year’s Day, has never seen
the scorecards in his MMA career -- and with good reason. In
2010, he punched out WEC veterans Manny Tapia and Cole Escovedo
and, in the latter’s case, rather badly. In his big-show
debut, he smoothly took home tough Clint Godfrey’s arm in
less than three minutes at WEC 52. It may not seem necessarily
eye-popping, but McDonald’s violence is both exciting and
efficient.
Flyweight:
One of the flyweight division’s most exciting sluggers,
Sunabe diversified his portfolio last year. Though his two fantastic
matchups with rival Kiyotaka Shimizu were most memorable, the
greatest single moment of any Sunabe bout in 2010 was when he
slammed super-skilled Shooto regular Noboru Tahara through the
floor for the knockout win in September.
Source: Sherdog
|
UFC
130 Memorial Weekend Show Targeted for Edgar vs. Maynard 3
The
trilogy of fights between Frankie Edgar and Gray Maynard may
come to a conclusion during UFC 130 set for May 28 in Las Vegas.
Sources
close to the negotiations explained to MMAWeekly.com that the
end of May appears to be the target day for the bout, but nothing
is set in stone at this point, as a few factors are still in
play.
The
biggest of those issues is the health of both fighters. They
both expect to be healthy and ready for the May 28 timeline,
but it still has to be determined before bout agreements would
be issued.
Edgar
suffered a broken nose in the bout, but he mentioned May as a
possible landing date for the fight when speaking with MMAWeekly
Radio last week.
“I’m
trying to do it right where my body gets sufficient enough rest,
and mentally I’m all there, but I’m good,” Edgar
said. “We’ll see what the UFC wants, make sure my nose
is all healed up, maybe May, something like that.”
Maynard
came out of the fight without any serious injuries, which points
to the May 28 date as the leading candidate to land the UFC lightweight
title fight.
The
Memorial Day weekend card has had several rumored additions over
the last week, and a fight between Edgar and Maynard would be
the main event for the show. UFC 130 has yet to be officially
announced, but the Ultimate Fighting Championship traditionally
promotes on Memorial weekend at the MGM Grand Garden Arena in
Las Vegas.
Edgar
and Maynard battled to a five round draw just over a week ago
at UFC 125 in Las Vegas. The lightweights went back and forth
in a classic that will surely be nominated for “Fight of
the Year” when 2011 closes, but the draw left the door open
for a third and final match between the two.
Source: MMA Weekly
|
Pat
Barry Talks Transition Between K-1 and MMA, Feels Alistair Overeem
Is Unstoppable
In
combat sports, there is always an argument of which style is
better. Bruce Lee made his case for Jeet Kun Do back in the late
60s and early to mid 70s. The Gracie family continues to make
their point with their system of jiu-jitsu.
Today,
mixed martial arts gives us the opportunity to watch many styles
compete with each other in one cage or ring (depending on the
league). What has become clear is that, no matter the style,
an overall mix of disciplines is what tends to be the most efficient
arsenal in the sport.
Alistair Overeem and Mark Hunt at Dream 5
Those
who focus too much on one thing end up on the losing side of
a given match-up.
This
argument seems to present itself when K-1 fighters transition
over to mixed martial arts. Essentially, the issue stems from
fighters coming from K-1, a league known for it’s standing
form of combat, having trouble adjusting to the addition of ground
combat and the dangers it presents in mixed martial arts.
One
fighter who has seen this firsthand is UFC heavyweight Pat Barry.
Barry, or “HD” as he is commonly known, has participated
in both sports, experiencing the difference between each and
the transition from one to the other.
There
is no doubt, K-1 has some of the best stand-up fighters in the
world. The assumption is that having the kind of experience K-1
gives will put a fighter a level up on his competition when on
the feet in MMA. Barry, however, believes his training in MMA
raised his level of striking and made him a better kickboxer
as a result.
“I
think that my striking ability is what helped me to get better,
to do well in MMA,” Barry said on MMAWeekly Radio. “My
striking ability is what helped me grow and helped me do the
things I was capable of doing in MMA. At the same time, training
in MMA has made my striking 10 times better. By doing two-and-a-half
years of wrestling, jiu-jitsu and just MMA striking, I’m
confident that I’m a much better kickboxer now than I was
when I was just kickboxing.”
For
every critic that says K-1 fighters can’t transition into
MMA, there is another making the case for opposing that argument.
Barry is one of those opposing it. He seems to believe that anyone
can transition into MMA, even if they come from one specific
discipline.
Tae
Kwon Do, Muay Thai, karate, jiu-jitsu, and wrestling experts
can enter the sport of mixed martial arts and find moderate to
great success, according to “HD.”
“It’s
happening,” he said about fighters from other disciplines
being successful in MMA. “For anyone to think that a kickboxer
cannot make the transition over to MMA is ridiculous.”
And
what about the other way around?
“For
anyone to think that an MMA guy cannot make the transition over
into kickboxing is ridiculous,” he exclaimed. “Anybody
can do anything nowadays, especially guys like Anthony Pettis.
That’s like saying, ‘Anthony Pettis could not have
a kickboxing match and do well.’ That’s ridicuouls.
Dude is phenomenal.
“Guys
are so good nowadays, the sport is so evolved that I think anybody
can do any of it. It just depends on what you’re training
for.”
One
mixed martial artist that has had the utmost success in K-1 is
Strikeforce heavyweight champion Alistair Overeem. Recently,
Overeem competed in the K-1 World Grand Prix 2010 in Japan. In
that tournament, he did what no other mixed martial artist has
done, and won the heavyweight bracket. Not only did he win, but
he did it in record time.
This
is the best example of applying MMA striking to a K-1 rules tournament
and finding great success in doing so.
When
reflecting on Overeem and his success in both sports, Barry talked
about the Dutch fighter and how he is an unstoppable force.
“The
dude is a monster. That’s what I think,” he said. “Not
only is he humongous, (but) he’s extremely experienced.
That’s what makes him the most dangerous. Not just the size,
but he has so much experience in MMA and in kickboxing, and he’s
a Dutch trained kickboxer. I was in Amsterdam for five years.
I know what the Dutch train like out there. The dude is a monster.
I don’t know how anyone is going to stop him any time soon.
“He
doesn’t seem to get tired. All he needs to do is hit you
one time. He’s fast, he’s athletic, and he’s strong
as hell. He’s everything you need all in one body.”
In
the K-1 tournament, Overeem fought a kickboxer that showed some
definite ferocity in Gohkan Saki. Barry says he never misses
a K-1 fight on TV, and he witnessed Saki’s performance in
the tournament. He believes the Saki-Ghita tournament fight was
one of the best kickboxing matches he has seen in the last decade.
Unfortunately for Saki, he lost to Overeem in the second round
of the bracket, breaking his arm in the process.
Since
the loss, Saki has gone on Twitter and talked about his plan
to transition to MMA. Specifically, the Turkish kickboxer made
note that he plans on talking to Strikeforce sometime this year
in an effort to fight for the San Jose, Calif.-based promotion
in the summer.
Barry,
who is clearly adamant about fighters finding success in a transition
between sports, talked about Saki and feels he’ll do well,
but he had some reservation in saying so. He believes Saki will
have to get out of his kickboxing frame of mind.
“As
long as he doesn’t rely solely on his kickboxing ability,”
Barry commented on Saki’s potential in MMA. “The reason
I say that is because I was out there in Amsterdam. I know what
the Dutch are like and they believe that their kickboxing is
the greatest in the world. And it is. It’s up there in the
top best of all time, but I see them also transition into MMA
and they get in there and still strike the way they would in
a kickboxing match.”
Source: MMA Weekly
|
Jon
Jones Watches Randy Couture In Contemplating UFC Heavyweight
Fights
Jon
Jones is a rising star in the world of MMA, but at only 23 years
of age, he still has room to grow, both literally and figuratively,
into the part.
A
few months back, the New York native teased a that his future
may lie in the heavyweight division, but now with a new diet
in place Jones believes that any move to a bigger weight class
will be only for the right fight and not a permanent move.
Jones
spoke with MMAWeekly Radio about his new diet that has him feeling
better than ever as he prepares for his Feb. 5 showdown against
Ryan Bader at UFC 126.
“Right
now I’m weighing 218 (pounds). I have a great diet and I’m
realizing the weight cut really isn’t that bad,” said
Jones. “This fight is the first fight where I really, really
stuck to my diet and I haven’t been cheating. So I feel
great, I feel really agile, I feel really excited to be honest
with you right now.”
Growing
up with two brothers who are just as big if not bigger than Jones,
even at six-feet-four-inches tall, he’s felt the brunt of
being the smaller guy before.
“When
I’m off and out of training I do get up to almost 230, and
I’ve been a smaller heavyweight my whole life growing up
and wrestling my brother who was ranked No. 1 in the nation as
a heavyweight wrestler, and I’ve always been pushing around
the bigger guys, so fighting heavyweight definitely doesn’t
threaten me,” he admitted.
During
his downtime, Jones mentioned that it’s McDonald’s
that usually gets the best of him, but right now his diet is
working wonders and he’s ready for any challenge that lies
ahead at 205 pounds, not heavyweight.
If
Jones does decide to take a fight at heavyweight, it will be
because the right situation presents itself. He looks towards
a UFC Hall of Famer for how he wants to guide his own career.
“I
kind of like how Randy (Couture) has done it all throughout his
MMA career,” Jones said. “With the right fight, I would
definitely take a fight at heavyweight, but my dreams and my
goals are all at the light heavyweight division, and I don’t
want anything to get twisted saying I want to fight Cain (Velasquez)
or any of the top heavyweights. If there was a cool fight stylistically
for me at heavyweight, I’d give something to the fans and
fight at a bigger weight.”
UFC
middleweight champion Anderson Silva has taken the road to a
higher weight class for challenges like facing former titleholder
Forrest Griffin, but is a natural middleweight. Jones believes
he’s in the same boat.
“Exactly,
that’s what I’m aiming for,” Jones mentioned when
Anderson Silva’s brief move to light heavyweight happened.
Jones’
future plans remain at light heavyweight where, with a win over
Ryan Bader at UFC 126, he’ll inch closer to the top of the
division and, by the end of 2011, could be the top contender
at 205 pounds.
Source: MMA Weekly
|
Strikeforce
Confident Josh Barnett Will Fight in Grand Prix, Just Not In
California
Strikeforce has taken a risk, adding Josh Barnett to its upcoming
Heavyweight Grand Prix. But it is a calculated risk.
Barnett
hasn’t fought in the United States in two years, when he
defeated Gilbert Yvel at Affliction: Day of Reckoning. He was
slated to fight Fedor Emelianenko in a heavyweight superfight
later that year, but failed a drug test while trying to gain
his license in the state.
After
numerous delays and false starts, Barnett is still winding his
way through the licensing process in California, trying to gain
licensure. He was though to finally be at the end of the process,
turning in a clean drug test in California last month, but stalled
out again when the questioning at an athletic commission hearing
took a more legal turn than he was prepared for.
Despite
all that, Strikeforce announced him as a participant in its eight-man,
multi-event heavyweight tournament that also includes heavyweight
champion Alistair Overeem, Fabricio Werdum, Fedor Emelianenko,
Brett Rogers, Andrei Arlovski, Sergei Kharitonov, and Antonio
Silva.
While
California is still up in the air, Strikeforce CEO Scott Coker
is confident that Barnett will be able to fight in other states.
This may limit the locals for events Barnett takes part in, but
it will allow Strikeforce to field what it feels is its eight
best heavyweights in a tournament format.
“The
thing with Josh is, this guy has an issue with California. I
totally understand, he’s gotta go through it. But the guy
hasn’t fought in North America for (two years), and he’s
not even on suspension,” said Coker. “Is he gonna get
licensed in California? I think that’s between Josh, his
attorney, and California State.
“But
with saying that, we’ve reach out to several athletic commissions,
four now, (and believe he’ll be allowed to fight).”
Coker,
in explaining recent events, sounded almost as frustrated by
the situation as Barnett… almost.
“Six
weeks ago, he went to the California State Athletic Commission
offices in Sacramento. He took the test and he came out clean,”
he explained. “So, to me, let the guy make a living.”
Despite
its home base being in San Jose, Calif., Strikeforce isn’t
worried if Barnett can’t fight there. Coker is confident
that Barnett will be able to play out the tournament elsewhere.
“He
will definitely not be fighting in California,” he stated.
“But other commissions are welcoming him to come, providing
another clean test, which he will provide. He’s gonna fight.”
Source: MMA Weekly
|
Alistair
Overeem Risks Belt In Strikeforce Heavyweight Grand Prix
Many fans were surprised when Strikeforce officially announced
its first Heavyweight Grand Prix.
They
might be more surprised to find out that this tournament won’t
narrow down the contenders to Alistair Overeem’s heavyweight
belt. Overeem, in fact, will participate in the tournament, his
belt on the line.
“It’ll
be four nights over a period of eight months, then we’ll
have one champion,” Strikeforce CEO Scott Coker told MMAWeekly.com.
“The
goal is to have Alistair put up his belt against Fabricio Werdum.
If Werdum wins, then he will have to put up the belt, but at
the end, you will have one champion.”
That
is the goal, but it’s not yet a done deal. Strikeforce still
has to work out the details with the athletic commissions in
the states where it plans to hold Grand Prix bouts.
“We’re
working with the athletic commissions because of the round issue,”
said Coker. Most commissions deem title fights five-round bouts;
non-title fights are typically three rounds.
When
Overeem puts his belt up, it would be a five-round bout. To make
the tournament format fair to all eight fighters, plus the alternates,
Strikeforce would like to make all tournament bouts five rounds.
That is going to take some cooperation from athletic commissions,
something that doesn’t always happen between fight promotions
and state agencies.
So
why even put Overeem in the tournament in the first place? He’s
already your champion. It’s already proven difficult to
schedule him for fights. And now you complicate the format of
your tournament by having to work out issues like the number
of rounds with the athletic commissions.
The
answer is simple.
“Alistair
wanted to be in the tournament,” said Coker. “He asked
me in Japan when I was there for Dream, after he knocked out
(Todd) Duffee. He said, ‘Scott, I want to fight Fabricio
Werdum. I’m gonna avenge all the people that beat me early
in my career and he’s at the top of my list.’”
That’s
it, end of story. Overeem simply wants to fight Werdum.
Overeem
obviously ups the ante on the tournament. His belt will be on
the line when he faces Werdum, and continue on through the tournament
with or without him. Whoever wins any bout the belt is involved
in will be the champion and progress through the brackets, one
champion emerging when the finals are said and done.
It
promises to be a solid slate of fights if Strikeforce can keep
all its competitors intact. The first two quarterfinals are slated
for Feb. 12 in New Jersey, where Fedor Emelianenko will face
Antonio “Bigfoot” Silva and Andrei Arlovski squares
off with Sergei Kharitonov. The other quarterfinalists –
Overeem and Werdum and Josh Barnett vs. Brett Rogers – will
meet at an undetermined event in April.
The
semifinal bouts will take place at a later event, and then the
final on yet one more event in about eight months, wrapping up
the Grand Prix.
“I’ve
been saying for the last six months, Strikeforce has the best
heavyweight division in the world now, why not let these guys
go fight each other,” Coker mused.
“It’s
gonna be a great time not only for fight fans, but for mixed
martial arts as an industry.”
Source: MMA Weekly
|
Bráulio
goes under a surgery, but will dispute ADCC and World Jiu-Jitsu
Bráulio
Estima lived one of the best moments of his career on the last
couple of years. In 2009, Bráulio won the weight and absolute
disputes of ADCC, conquered for the second time in a row the
European weight and absolute championship and won two world titles
of Jiu-Jitsu on the heavy weight division. This year, Bráulio
had set some goals, like trying to reach the fifth triumph on
World of Jiu-Jitsu and win a super fight against Ronaldo Jacaré
on ADCC. But before that, Bráulio will go under a surgery,
which will leave him off the European.
“I’ll
have to do a fusion on my neck. It’s a simple surgery, it’s
only to strengthen and prevent any other accident coming due
to a stronger impact, but I have two months only for training.
But because of that the European is off my schedule. The third
title will have to wait until 2012”, jokes Estima, who hopes
to be back for World Pro of Abu Dhabi. “It’ll all depend
on my recovery. If I’m ok, I’ll fight World Pro”.
But
is mistaken the one who thinks that the surgery will make Bráulio
stop. “The expectations for this year are to work a lot,
take this time of recovering from the surgery to take care of
my gym. I’m opening a new gym with two floors downtown in
Birmingham (England), with a fitness zone and a circuit of MMA,
Thai Boxing and, of course, the below floor will be dedicated
exclusively to Jiu-Jitsu (laughs). But I intend to fight the
greatest championships of the world this year”, told Estima,
who is excited about fighting Ronaldo Jacaré o ADCC. “I’m
on a super fight with Jacaré and that motivates me a lot,
because he’s an icon of the sport and I’ve gained much
experience since 2005, when we fought for the last time. It’ll
be awesome”.
The
only frustration of Bráulio in 2010 was the cancelation
of Shine, where the black belt would do his MMA debut. Even though,
Bráulio doesn’t allow things like this to let him
down and hopes to make his debut in 2011. “You can bet I
think about fighting MMA this year, that’s one of the reasons
why I’m doing this surgery. I’m thinking about MMA.
I’ve trained yesterday with Georges St. Pierre and he complimented
me a lot, so that inspires me”, concluded the tough guy.
Source: Gracie Magazine
|
Minotouro
analyzes what he got wrong and right and gets ready for Tito
Rogério
Minotouro is getting ready to face Tito Ortiz in a bout that
may decide the fighters’ futures in the Ultimate Fighting
Championship. For that reason and much more, the likely main
event at UFC Fight Night 24 on March 26 in Seattle promises plenty
of excitement.
Check
out what Minotouro had to say to GRACIEMAG.com, addressing his
training and the flaws that showed through in his last appearance,
among other things:
What
do you need to watch out for most with Tito?
He
has really good ground and pound and always looks to get to that
position. He’s good at hitting from there, knows how to
use his elbows, so it’s something I have to be careful about.
I’m training to avoid that and defend myself by playing
guard, should I end up on bottom. So I’m doing a lot of
takedown defenses, playing from the bottom, not to mention working
on my boxing.
Is
it true that in your last outing (loss to Ryan Bader) you didn’t
train quite the way you would have liked to?
Truth
is, the crew wasn’t here to help me prepare for my last
fight. A lot of them were traveling, for example, and I had a
hurt rib. So I really wasn’t able to train the way I’d
have liked to. Now I’m better and I managed to get the crew
together.
Who
is helping you train?
Cigano
gets here today, I’m also training with Feijão, with
Anderson, and the whole gang at the training center. And for
my ground game I’ve also been working with Ronaldo Jacaré,
who knows a great deal about it. It’s all about training
hard, that way things will be easier come fight time. I try to
put myself in the discomfort zone a lot to be able to withstand
any pressure during the fight and still look for the finish.
You
and Tito are coming off losses. Does that add any extra weight
to the bout?
It’s
a really important fight. The situation is all the more delicate
because I’m coming off a loss. I don’t want to lose
and I’m confident. I’m working and I feel the result
will depend on everything I do up until then. There’s no
secret to it and I’m conscious of the responsibility. I’m
going to put in an effort and I’m more focused than ever
before.
Anderson’s
quick, strong, and very focused” Minotouro
You
said you were training with Anderson. How is he doing in the
lead-up to his fight with Belfort?
Anderson’s
doing well. He’s quick, strong, and very concentrated. He’ll
be in good shape for this fight.
Source: Tatame
|
Nate
Quarry’s World Domination Starts With American Cage Fighter
UFC
middleweight Nate Quarry is ready to take over the world.
Well,
maybe not literally, but he’s expanding his reach beyond
the cage to explore new avenues in the television world, as well
as clothing lines, comic books and even a film screenplay.
The
multi-talented cast member of the inaugural season of “The
Ultimate Fighter” is ready to debut his new-found talent
as an on-air personality starting this Sunday night at 10 p.m.
PT on Comcast Sports Net for “American Cage Fighter.”
“I’m
just trying to take over the world one step at a time,”
Quarry joked when speaking with MMAWeekly Radio. “I’m
in studio now, we’re filming our first few episodes of American
Cage Fighter. We’re really going behind the scenes to see
what’s in a fighter’s heart and their mind, and really
back beyond the cage. Beyond what you normally see with the bright
lights, we want to know what motivates these fighters, what’s
going on behind them.”
The
show will reach 15 million potential viewers and goes behind
the scenes more than any MMA news show before, with Quarry at
the helm, playing interviewer instead of interviewee.
“I’m
sitting down and interviewing guys one on one, just so we can
get a feel for what their motivation is in the fight game,”
he said.
Quarry
hopes the show reaches a new audience with MMA fans and casual
sports fans alike, as they delve deeper into the fighter’s
lives out of the cage. During the first few episodes of the show,
Quarry and co-host Tamara “Miss RaRa” Suguitan will
speak to fighters like Urijah Faber, Joseph Benavidez, Jake Shields,
Tito Ortiz, and others from around the sport.
The
former Team Quest fighter is also busy at work on his new clothing
line called Zombie Cage Fighter. Quarry says since he’s
the kind of unstoppable fighter that just always moves forward
and never dies, the zombie persona fit him perfectly.
“It’s
something I first announced on G4 on ‘Attack of the Show’
and everybody seemed to love it,” Quarry explained. “Since
then I’ve expanded it, I’m really close to having a
screenplay done now, we’re working on the comic book, launched
the t-shirts.”
Quarry,
who is an admitted comic book junkie, has his hand in all facets
of the new business. He also believes that fans in the MMA world
are looking for something different, and not the same old, same
old when it comes to the branding around the fight game.
“I
think we’ve reached a point in the fight culture where people
are getting a little tired of trying to look like a bad ass 24/7
with the skull t-shirts,” said Quarry. “They want to
go back to having a little bit of fun, cause really we’re
out living our dreams.”
He
points to his own first season of “The Ultimate Fighter”
when it was just a group of guys looking for their shot, when
nothing was guaranteed. It’s that spirit he wants to instill
with his clothing brand and comic books.
Quarry
has stated he’s unsure what the future holds for him in
regards to his fight career, but it’s likely that “Rock”
won’t be stepping away from the MMA world any time soon.
Source: MMA Weekly
|
Tiequan
Zhang vs. Jason Reinhardt Late Addition to UFC 127 Card in Australia
A late addition to the upcoming UFC 127 card in Australia has
been confirmed as Tiequan Zhang will make his Octagon debut against
Jason Reinhardt.
The
fight was confirmed to MMAWeekly.com by sources close to the
negotiations on Saturday, with bout agreements issued to both
competitors for the February contest.
Zhang
(12-1) was the first ever Chinese born fighter to sign in the
WEC, and he will now transition to be the first ever in the UFC.
Going 1-1 during his brief stint with the WEC, Zhang will look
to bounce back from his first career loss when he was defeated
by Danny Downes in December at WEC 53.
Jason
Reinhardt (20-1) makes his first appearance in the UFC Octagon
since a 2007 loss to Joe Lauzon at UFC 78.
Reinhardt
has been largely out of active competition for the past 3 years,
and will have a tough test awaiting him upon his return.
The
bout between Zhang and Reinhardt will be an untelevised undercard
bout for the UFC 127 card in Australia.
Source: MMA Weekly
|
Royler
receives Helio Gracie trophy
Four-time
world champion Royler Gracie is still sticking his neck out in
competition. GRACIEMAG.com has done a number of articles commenting
on the unlikely but strong relationship between Jiu-Jitsu and
surfing practitioners. The same goes for the “Fight Surf”
television series, to air on Brazil’s Combate channel and
tell some of the story.
The
last episode of the program takes place at one of Rio de Janeiro’s
surf temples, Prainha beach. That’s where Black belt Surf
Challenge took place, and Royler was one of the highlights.
“I
received the Helio Gracie trophy, for having surfed the best
wave of the competition,” the black belts tells GRACIEMAG.com.
“I
took third in the competition. Léo Leite (not the one
from Alliance) took first, followed by Marcos Brasa. Rogério
from Infight took fourth,” he adds.
The
event also featured the participation of other surfer black belts,
like Roberto Gordo, Rafael Gordinho, Paulo Zulu, Renan Pitangui,
and Malibu, among others.
Source: Gracie Magazine
|
Showtime
Officials Instrumental in Getting Fedor Emelianenko Inked to
New Strikeforce Deal
It
was a long process, but as of last week Fedor Emelianenko and
his management team at M-1 Global finally inked a new deal to
keep the Russian in Strikeforce for the foreseeable future.
Since
Emelianenko’s loss to Fabricio Werdum in 2010, the former
Pride champion has been on the sidelines waiting for a new deal
to get done. Following the Werdum fight, Fedor had only one fight
remaining on his Strikeforce contract and the two sides had been
working ever since to negotiate a new contract.
When
all was said and done, Emelianenko was locked up with Strikeforce
for a total of four more fights, and according to his manager
Vadim Finkelstein, it was Showtime officials who stepped in to
help broker the final deal.
“It
just all came together where everyone was satisfied with what
needed to happen, and what needed to be worked out to get the
deal done,” Finkelstein told MMAWeekly.com. “A lot
of the credit goes to Ken Hershman from Showtime for stepping
in and working with all the parties, and making sure all the
parties needs from our side and from Strikeforce’s side
were met.
“We
all kind of came to a point where we reached an understanding,
and Hershman was able to bring everybody together.”
Hershman,
who is an executive vice president at Showtime, has worked closely
with Strikeforce since bringing the promotion to the network.
His input was apparently invaluable in the deal to bring Fedor
back to Strikeforce.
The
new deal will stretch over four total fights, which would cover
Emelianenko’s full term in the upcoming Strikeforce Heavyweight
Grand Prix, assuming he makes it to the finals. Beyond that,
Finkelstein sounded confident that a relationship between Emelianenko
and Strikeforce could continue to grow in the future.
For
now the former top heavyweight is secluded in the mountains of
Russia preparing for his Feb. 12 showdown in the first round
of the Grand Prix against Antonio “Bigfoot” Silva.
Source: MMA Weekly
|
Fabrício
Werdum: "I have the weapons to win this GP”
This
week Strikeforce has officially announced a heavyweight GP which
promises to mix things on MMA’s market. Chosen to participate
of the GP, Fabrício Werdum is training hard and motivated
to conquest this tournament. Recovered from the injury that put
him off the rings for six months, the world champion of Jiu-Jitsu
and champion of ADCC is sharpen his conditioning to get 100%
o February 12th, when he’ll face Alistair Overeem on the
first phase of the GP. “I’ll finish him again, you
can bet on it”, promises Werdum, who might confront, on
the second step of the tournament, the Russian Fedor Emelianenko,
a guy he has submitted last year. Despite cheering for Big Foot,
the Brazilian who currently lives on the United States wants
to give the Russian a rematch. “To Fedor I’ll concede
this rematch happily, because I like him and he deserves this
rematch”, said Werdum, on the exclusive interview that you
check below.
How
are the trainings going? Are you 100% recovered from your injury?
From
the injury I’m totally recovered, but I still ain’t
on my best physically. I’m training enough to get it back.
Everyday I go to Huntington Beach to train with Rafael (Cordeiro).
I train with him from 11am to 1pm every Monday, Wednesday and
Friday, I have a special training with Jason Miller and Mark
Muñoz. We do a sparring and train Wrestling with Muñoz.
You’ll
face Alistair Overeem, a guy you’ve submitted in Pride,
in 2006, on the fisrt round of the tournament. What are your
expectations for this fight?
The
expectations are as high as they can get. Being trained I can
fight anyone. I’ve changed my mind. Before I entered there
thinking about my opponent, now I get there thinking of me, how
I’ll get to him and what I can do. We both evolved a lot.
Overeem evolved a lot on the floor and he’s stronger and
more experienced. When we fought in 2006, I pretend to do it
for a while, fooled him a bit (laughs). Now I’m training
a lot my bang but it still isn’t good for me to bang with
him. The guy has just won K-1, so I’ll try to go for the
ground, even because he was training his bang a lot and he didn’t
have enough time to improve his ground game for this fight with
me.
Will
this be your game plan?
The
fight will be very tactic, it’ll be like the one of 2006
and I’ll catch him again, you can bet on it. I’ll beat
him with my game plan and smartness. The longer it gets, the
better it is for be because he has a background that proves he’s
not resistant. I’ll tire him up, bring him to the ground
and finish the fight.
On
the same side of the key Strikeforce matched Fedor Emelianenko
and Antônio Big Foot, two guys you’ve beaten. What
is your bet for this fight?
Fedor
is hungry for a win, because he has just lost to me and he wants
to win again. But I’ve talked to Big Foot and he also wants
to win pretty bad. Between two heavyweights, anything can happen,
there’s o favorite. Big Foot is very tough, can handle much
and has heavy hands.
Technically,
your side of the key is stronger, is where the favorites are.
Why do you think that Strikeforce matched the fights this way?
I
believe they did it that way so that they can sell many pay-per-view
subscriptions on the semifinals and on the finale. They’re
betting I’ll beat Overeem and that Fedor beats Big Foot,
because they know everybody wants that rematch. So, they want
to guarantee a good semifinal so that they sell it out and they’re
betting on it. Who doesn’t want to watch a rematch like
this one?
On
the other side of the key there’s Sergei Kharitonov against
Andrei Arlovski and Josh Barnett facing Brett Rogers. How do
you think these fights with end like?
Kharitonov
wins, because he’ll go for it the entire time. Arlovski
is good when he’s attacking, but when he’s attacked
he backs up and I bet the Russian will beat him. On the bout
between Barnett and Rogers I’m 100% Barnett because once
he put Rogers on the ground, he’ll turn him into a turtle
(laughs).
Both
Kharitoov and Arlovski has beaten you. Do you think about fighting
them again?
What
I think about is a rematch with Fedor. I wouldn’t like to
give Overeem this rematch, I’m just fighting because the
event matched this fight. To Fedor I’ll give this rematch
happily, because I like him and he deserves this rematch. But
first I have to think about how I’ll beat Overeem so that
rematch can happen.
You’ve
fought on the greatest MMA events of the world, but you’ve
never conquered a belt. How are you facing this opportunity?
It’d
be a dream come true wining this GP. I’ve fought only one
GP, which was Pride’s, in 2006, when I beat Overeem on the
first phase and then lost to Minotauro on the second one. Back
than I lacked experience, but today, being trained and more experienced,
I have the weapons to win this GP.
Source: Tatame
|
Daniel
Roberts Announces He’ll Face Claude Patrick at UFC 129 in
Toronto
It
appears Daniel Roberts will get the chance to fight alongside
his teammate Jake Shields at UFC 129, as he is set to face Claude
Patrick in a welterweight bout on the Toronto card.
Roberts
made the announcement via his personal Twitter page late Friday
night.
“I
fight Claude Patrick at UFC 129,” Roberts wrote.
Roberts
(12-1) didn’t waste any time getting a new fight after submitting
Greg Soto at UFC 125 just last weekend. It was Roberts second
submission victory in a row, and third win overall in the UFC.
Training
in California alongside Shields and Strikeforce lightweight champion
Gilbert Melendez, as well as Nick and Nate Diaz, Roberts has
continued to show improvement in each fight. He’ll look
to show that again when he returns in late April.
Fighting
in his hometown of Toronto will be Claude Patrick (13-1), returning
to action after a dominant performance over former “Ultimate
Fighter” winner James Wilks at UFC 120 in England.
It
was Patrick’s second fight and second win in the UFC. Now
he gets the chance to fight in his hometown for UFC 129.
While
the event has been announced by the UFC, no bouts have been confirmed
as televised or otherwise except for the main event between champion
Georges St-Pierre and top contender Jake Shields.
(UPDATED
at 9:15 a.m. on Jan. 9, 2001 to note this is a welterweight contest.)
Source: MMA Weekly
|
Tyron
Woodley Grinds Out Win at Strikeforce Challengers 13; Eyes Diaz
and Cyborg
As
often happens when two top fighters hit the cage, Strikeforce
Challengers 13 main eventers Tyron Woodley and Tarec Saffiedine
went the distance in Nashville, Tenn., on Friday night.
The
two started off the fight clinching, trading some dirty boxing
punches, and a flurry of knees, setting the modus operandi for
the rest of the fight, although not at the same pace as the explosive
opening moments.
Saffiedine,
one of the better strikers in Strikeforce’s welterweight
class, couldn’t get off with the combination he needed.
He did a good job stuffing many of Woodley’s takedown attempts,
but Woodley was relentless, continually pressing Saffiedine to
the fence, trading knees.
It
was Woodley, however, for the majority of the fight that was
able to impose his pace, forcing Saffiedine to react, while he
remained on the offensive. It was the most exciting strategy,
but it earned Woodley the nod of all three judges.
“Tarec’s
a very tough guy. I endured; I pressed him. I think I kept the
pressure on him, stopped him from doing a lot of striking,”
Woodley assessed, adding, “I did a good job tonight.”
Improving
his record to a spotless 8-0, should graduate Woodley from the
Challengers Series to a full time player on the Strikeforce’s
main cards on Showtime.
He’s
definitely moved into the coveted space reserved for title contenders.
Woodley
wouldn’t pick the winner of the upcoming Nick Diaz and Evangelista
“Cyborg” Santos welterweight title fight at Strikeforce’s
Jan. 29 fight card, but he knows it’s a fight that could
have some bearing on his near future.
“I’ll
definitely be watching it.”
Seven
weeks, three fights, nine rounds, three victories.
It’s
been a whirlwind holiday season for Ovince St. Preux, but he
has turned it all into his fortunes, winning his third straight
unanimous decision with a victory over Ron “Abongo”
Humphrey on Friday night.
Try
as he might, Humphrey couldn’t get his game going against
St. Preux, who took Humphrey down for the better part of their
15-minute battle, grinding out a decision.
Humphrey
showed flashes, nearly securing a kneebar in the opening round
before St. Preux turned the tide, locking on an arm triangle
choke. Humphrey also started strong in round two, unleashing
some solid punches and following with knees to the head, but
St. Preux fired right back and continued his takedown and ground
and pound assault, maintaining control for the waning minutes.
St.
Preux went into 2010 with a 3-3 record. Now, as 2011 gets underway,
he has won seven straight fights, upping his record to 10-3,
moving into the upper echelon of the Strikeforce light heavyweight
division.
Rising
Strikeforce heavyweight Daniel Cormier continued his evolution
at Strikeforce Challengers 13, locking up a unanimous decision
win over International Fight League veteran Devin Cole.
Cormier
utilized his Olympic wrestling skills to stymie just about anything
Cole tried to get going. When Cole tried to strike, Cormier would
duck under and tie him up, using short uppercuts and body shots
to wear on him. Other times he would clinch and trip or throw
Cole to the mat.
He
did this all three rounds, easily controlling the pace of the
fight, dominating the former IFLer.
“He
fought well, fought hard. I’m a little disappointed. I don’t
think we expect a performance like that at AKA. I feel like I
let them down,” said Cormier after the fight, despite upping
his undefeated record to 7-0 as a professional.
With
the Strikeforce women’s 145-pound division being rather
thin at the moment, any solid performance comes with an immediate
elevation in contender status. Brazilian Amanda Nunes certainly
managed to elevate her status, using little time on the clock
to do so.
Nunes
came out firing, landing a couple solid right hands before dropping
Julia Budd with a straight left hand in the opening moments of
their fight. Nunes immediately followed Budd to the mat, finishing
her off at the 14-second mark with a flurry of hammerfists.
“She
wants to make many more fights in America to get more known in
America,” said her translator in Nunes’ post-fight
interview. “Cyborg is her final goal, the time will come.”
Now
5-1 in her professional MMA career, Nunes isn’t quite ready
for Cyborg, but with five-straight victories, it might not be
long before she’s contending.
An
Olympic Judoka, Dr. Rhadi Ferguson has made a solid transition
to the cage with his training at American Top Team. He added
to his unblemished record on Friday night, overcoming a strong
start by John Richard, submitting the late substitution 2:00
into the second round with a kneebar.
Source: MMA Weekly
|
Brian
Foster vs. Sean Pierson Face Off in Toronto at UFC 129
Brian
Foster will be stepping into Sean Pierson’s hometown when
the two welterweights meet at UFC 129 in Toronto on April 30.
The pair have agreed to meet on the upcoming card.
Sources
close to the negotiations confirmed the fight to MMAWeekly.com
on Friday. MMAJunkie.com initially reported the bout.
Foster
(15-5) has had his ups and downs in the UFC, but seemingly hit
his stride with his recent fights. Foster has finished his last
two opponents, getting by Forrest Petz by TKO and then submitting
Matt Brown at UFC 123 in November 2010.
The
HIT Squad product has consistently been one of the most exciting
fighters in the UFC, and has never gone to a decision in his
career.
Former
Toronto police officer Sean Pierson (11-4) will bring his hometown
with him when he fights at UFC 129. The Canadian made his Octagon
debut at UFC 124 in Montreal, where he picked up a unanimous
decision win over Matt Riddle.
Foster
and Pierson are expected to be part of the undercard for the
show set to go down on April 30 at the Rogers Centre in Toronto.
Source: MMA Weekly
|
|